B003/B004/B006/B007 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies
Uploaded by
Jose Cristobal MartinezB003/B004/B006/B007 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies
Uploaded by
Jose Cristobal MartinezB003/B004/B006/B007
SERVICE MANUAL
001124MIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
B
0
0
3
/
B
0
0
4
/
B
0
0
6
/
B
0
0
7
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
B003/B004/B006/B007
SERVICE MANUAL
001124MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
WARNING
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER RICOH SAVIN
B003 3502 Aficio 1035 2535
B004 4502 Aficio 1045 2545
B006 3502p Aficio 1035P 2535p
B007 4502p Aficio 1045P 2545p
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 4/2001 Original Printing
SM i B003/B004/B006/B007
B003/B004/B006/B007
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE................................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT...............................................................................1-2
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL.............................................................................1-2
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-3
1.1.5 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE....................................................... 1.4
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ................................................................1-5
1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION..............................................................1-6
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-6
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-7
Development Unit and PCU..................................................................1-8
Toner Bottle ........................................................................................1-11
Paper Trays ........................................................................................1-12
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer ....................................................1-14
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays ..........................................................1-15
Electrical Total Counter.......................................................................1-16
HDD Caution Decal (for only NA models) ...........................................1-16
1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION......................................................1-17
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-17
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-18
1.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION.........................................................1-22
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-22
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-23
1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION...............................................................1-29
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-29
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-30
1.7 1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION...............................................1-32
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-32
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-33
1.8 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION.................................................1-36
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-36
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-37
1.9 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION................................................................1-40
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-40
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-41
1.10 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION...................1-44
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-44
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-45
1.11 LCT INSTALLATION.............................................................................1-47
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-47
Rev. 04/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 ii SM
1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-48
1.12 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ........................................................1-50
1.13 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION..........................................................1-51
1.14 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.........................................................1-53
1.15 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................1-55
1.16 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................1-56
1.17 OPTIONAL USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT......................... 1.57
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............................. 2-1
2.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................2-1
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS..............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 USED TONER..................................................................................3-1
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS......................................................3-2
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................................3-2
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS...................................................................................3-2
3.2.3 SYMBOLS USED IN TEXT...............................................................3-2
3.3 FRONT DOOR ..........................................................................................3-3
3.4 DUPLEX UNIT...........................................................................................3-3
3.5 UPPER RIGHT COVER............................................................................3-4
3.6 BY-PASS TRAY ........................................................................................3-5
3.7 REAR COVERS ........................................................................................3-6
3.7.1 REAR UPPER COVER.....................................................................3-6
3.7.2 REAR LOWER COVER....................................................................3-6
3.8 LEFT COVERS..........................................................................................3-7
3.8.1 LEFT UPPER COVER......................................................................3-7
3.9 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................3-8
3.9.1 ARDF................................................................................................3-8
3.9.2 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................3-9
3.9.3 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS/OPERATION PANEL.................3-10
3.9.4 LENS BLOCK/SBU ASSEMBLY ....................................................3-11
3.9.5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS...........................................................3-12
3.9.6 EXPOSURE LAMP.........................................................................3-13
3.9.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR ...................3-14
3.9.8 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-15
3.9.9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD .....3-16
3.9.10 SCANNER WIRE..........................................................................3-17
3.10 LASER UNIT .........................................................................................3-21
3.10.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS...................................................3-21
3.10.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................3-22
3.10.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR......................................................3-23
3.10.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR..................................3-24
Rev. 04/2002
SM iii B003/B004/B006/B007
3.10.5 LD UNIT........................................................................................3-24
Laser beam pitch adjustment..............................................................3-25
3.11 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ......................................................3-26
3.11.1 PCU..............................................................................................3-26
3.11.2 DRUM...........................................................................................3-27
3.11.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS .......................................................................3-28
3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING PAD & ROLLER BRUSH............3-29
3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE...........................................................3-31
3.11.6 ID SENSOR..................................................................................3-31
3.12 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................3-32
3.12.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................3-32
3.12.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER.............................................................3-33
3.12.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER...........................................................3-33
3.12.4 DEVELOPER................................................................................3-34
3.12.5 TD SENSOR.................................................................................3-36
3.13 TRANSFER UNIT..................................................................................3-37
3.13.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT...............................................................3-37
3.13.2 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-38
3.13.3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE AND TONER OVERFLOW
SENSOR.......................................................................................3-39
3.14 PAPER FEED........................................................................................3-40
3.14.1 PICK-UP, SEPARATION, AND FEED ROLLERS ........................3-40
3.14.2 LOWER RIGHT COVER...............................................................3-41
3.14.3 RELAY/UPPER PAPER FEED AND LOWER PAPER FEED
CLUTCHES...................................................................................3-42
3.14.4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1 ..................................3-43
3.14.5 LOWER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2 .................................3-44
3.14.6 PAPER END/PAPER HEIGHT/RELAY SENSORS......................3-45
3.14.7 REGISTRATION SENSOR...........................................................3-46
3.14.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................3-48
3.14.9 FEED/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR..................................................3-49
3.15 FUSING.................................................................................................3-50
3.15.1 FUSING UNIT...............................................................................3-50
3.15.2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE .........................................................3-51
3.15.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS .........................................................3-51
3.15.4 FUSING LAMPS...........................................................................3-52
3.15.5 THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS.......................................3-54
3.15.6 FUSING ROLLER/PRESSURE ROLLER.....................................3-55
3.16 BY-PASS TRAY ....................................................................................3-57
3.16.1 COVER REPLACEMENT.............................................................3-57
3.16.2 BY-PASS PAPER FEED AND PICK-UP ROLLER
REPLACEMENT...........................................................................3-58
3.16.3 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT...................3-59
3.16.4 PAPER END SENSOR AND PICK-UP SOLENOID
REPLACEMENT...........................................................................3-60
3.16.5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT.......................3-61
3.16.6 BY-PASS TABLE REMOVAL .......................................................3-62
3.16.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT....................................3-63
Rev. 02/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 iv SM
3.17 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................3-64
3.17.1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL.......................................................3-64
3.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................3-65
3.17.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ..................................3-66
3.18 DRIVE AREA.........................................................................................3-67
3.18.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH AND TRANSFER BELT
CONTACT CLUTCH.....................................................................3-67
3.18.2 MAIN MOTOR ..............................................................................3-68
3.18.3 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR............................................................3-69
3.19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS...............................................................3-70
3.19.1 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY.............................................3-70
3.19.2 I/O BOARD...................................................................................3-71
3.19.3 BICU BOARD...............................................................................3-72
3.19.4 PSU..............................................................................................3-72
3.20 HARD DISK/CONTROLLER BOARD....................................................3-73
3.21 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING..................................3-74
3.21.1 PRINTING ....................................................................................3-74
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................3-74
Blank Margin.......................................................................................3-75
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................3-75
Parallelogram Image Adjustment ........................................................3-76
3.21.2 SCANNING...................................................................................3-77
Registration: Platen Mode...................................................................3-77
Magnification.......................................................................................3-77
Sub Scan Magnification ......................................................................3-77
3.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT.........................................................3-78
Registration.........................................................................................3-78
3.21.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION................................................3-79
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................ 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-2
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-16
4.2.1 SENSORS......................................................................................4-16
4.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................4-17
4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-18
4.4 LEDS.......................................................................................................4-18
4.5 TEST POINTS.........................................................................................4-18
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
SM v B003/B004/B006/B007
Entering and Exiting SP mode..............................................................5-1
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-2
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-3
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-3
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES............................................5-4
SP1-xxx: Feed ......................................................................................5-4
SP2-xxx: Drum......................................................................................5-7
SP3-xxx: Process................................................................................5-15
SP4-xxx: Scanner ...............................................................................5-16
SP5-xxx: Mode ...................................................................................5-29
SP6-xxx: Peripherals ..........................................................................5-36
SP7-xxx: Data Log..............................................................................5-38
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING: SP2-902...........................................5-47
Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-2: IPU Test Print)..................................5-47
Test Pattern Table: SP2-902-3 Printing Test Patterns........................5-48
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK ...............................................................................5-49
Main Machine Input Check: SP5-803 .................................................5-49
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007..............................................................5-53
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK ...........................................................................5-54
Main Machine Output Check: SP5-804...............................................5-54
ARDF Output Check: SP6-008) ..........................................................5-56
5.1.6 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS: SP5-990.................................................5-56
5.1.7 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT: SP1-109.................................5-60
5.1.8 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5-801 ...................................................5-61
5.1.9 SOFTWARE RESET ......................................................................5-62
5.1.10 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET...................5-62
System Setting Reset .........................................................................5-62
Copier Setting Reset...........................................................................5-63
5.2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD......................................................................5-64
5.3 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA.......................................5-65
5.3.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824).........................................5-65
5.3.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825) ..................................5-66
5.4 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ....................................................................5-67
5.4.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON.................................5-67
5.4.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE.........................................5-68
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis......................................................5-68
5.5 USER PROGRAM MODE .......................................................................5-70
5.5.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE...............................................................5-70
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display..........................5-70
System Settings..................................................................................5-70
Copier/Document Server Features .....................................................5-71
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings...................................................5-71
Counter ...............................................................................................5-72
5.6 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................5-73
B003/B004/B006/B007 vi SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH...................................................................................6-3
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-4
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE...............................................................................6-5
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................6-5
6.2.2 CONTROLLER.................................................................................6-7
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW .................................................................6-9
Exposure...............................................................................................6-9
Drum charge.........................................................................................6-9
Laser exposure.....................................................................................6-9
Development.........................................................................................6-9
Image transfer.....................................................................................6-10
Separation ..........................................................................................6-10
ID sensor ............................................................................................6-10
Cleaning..............................................................................................6-10
Quenching ..........................................................................................6-10
6.4.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-11
SCANNER DRIVE ..............................................................................6-12
Book Mode..........................................................................................6-12
ADF mode...........................................................................................6-12
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE.........................6-13
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING............................................................................6-15
6.5.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-15
6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT).......................................................6-16
6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS) ......................................................6-17
6.5.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................6-18
Overview.............................................................................................6-18
6.5.5 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES.....................................................6-19
6.5.6 SUMMARY OF IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS....................6-21
6.5.7 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS AND RELATED SP MODES.........6-22
Text Mode...........................................................................................6-22
Text/Photo Mode ................................................................................6-23
Photo Mode ........................................................................................6-24
Pale (Low-Density Mode)....................................................................6-25
Generation Copy Mode.......................................................................6-26
Auto shading (shading correction) ......................................................6-27
Background erase...............................................................................6-27
Independent dot erase........................................................................6-28
Filtering...............................................................................................6-29
Pre-Filter .............................................................................................6-29
Text Mode...........................................................................................6-30
Photo Mode ........................................................................................6-31
Text/Photo Mode ................................................................................6-32
Low Density Mode ..............................................................................6-33
SM vii B003/B004/B006/B007
Generation Mode................................................................................6-33
Main scan magnification and reduction...............................................6-34
correction..........................................................................................6-34
Gradation processing..........................................................................6-34
Line width correction...........................................................................6-35
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-36
6.6.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-36
6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC) ..................................................6-37
6.6.3 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-38
6.6.4 LASER BEAM PITCH CHANGE MECHANISM..............................6-39
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES................................................................6-40
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-41
6.7.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-41
6.7.2 DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................................6-42
6.7.3 DRUM PAWLS ...............................................................................6-42
6.7.4 DRUM TONER SEALS...................................................................6-42
6.8 DRUM CHARGE .....................................................................................6-43
6.8.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-43
6.8.2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION..............................6-44
Correction for Environmental Conditions ............................................6-44
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only) .............6-45
6.8.3 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING............................6-46
6.8.4 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING..........................................6-46
6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-47
6.9.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-47
6.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................................6-48
6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING....................................................................6-48
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-49
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-49
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only) .............6-49
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY............................................................................6-50
Toner bottle replenishment mechanism..............................................6-50
Toner supply mechanism....................................................................6-51
Sensor Control Mode..........................................................................6-52
Image Pixel Count Mode.....................................................................6-53
6.9.6 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION .........................................6-53
6.9.7 TONER END RECOVERY .............................................................6-54
6.9.8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS ..........................6-54
DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING..................................6-55
6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING........................................................................6-55
6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING...................................................................6-55
6.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-56
6.11.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................6-56
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE...................................................................6-57
6.11.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM6-57
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT.................................................................................6-58
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION...........................................................6-59
6.11.6 PAPER REGISTRATION..............................................................6-59
6.11.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-60
B003/B004/B006/B007 viii SM
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY................................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION................................................................. 6-62
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION...................................................... 6-63
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT................................................................................................... 6-64
6.13.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................... 6-65
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION................................................................. 6-66
LARGER THAN A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................. 6-66
UP TO A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................................ 6-66
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM.................................. 6-67
FEED-IN......................................................................................................... 6-67
INVERSION AND EXIT.................................................................................. 6-67
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................................. 6-68
6.14.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-68
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM..................................................................... 6-69
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM................................. 6-69
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM............ 6-70
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ................................................................... 6-71
MECHANISM................................................................................................. 6-71
CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS.............................. 6-72
CURRENTS APPLIED TO LEADING EDGE AND IMAGE AREAS, AND FOR
BY-PASS FEED......................................................................................... 6-73
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM ......................................... 6-74
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT.................................................................. 6-75
6.15.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-75
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE........................................................................................ 6-76
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM............................................... 6-76
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM................................ 6-77
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS................................ 6-77
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER.............................................................................. 6-78
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM........................................................................ 6-78
6.15.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..................................................... 6-79
TEMPERATURE CONTROL ......................................................................... 6-79
FUSING IDLING TEMPERATURE................................................................ 6-80
6.15.9 OVERHEAT PROTECTION..................................................................... 6-80
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES................................................................................ 6-81
6.16.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-81
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE......................................................................... 6-82
ENTERING THE ENERGY SAVER MODE................................................... 6-82
WHAT HAPPENS IN ENERGY SAVER MODE ............................................ 6-82
RETURN TO STAND-BY MODE................................................................... 6-82
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE ................................................................................... 6-83
ENTERING OFF STAND-BY AND OFF MODES.......................................... 6-83
OFF STAND-BY MODE................................................................................. 6-83
OFF MODE.................................................................................................... 6-83
RETURNING TO STAND-BY MODE............................................................. 6-83
SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................ 7-1
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................7-1
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION...................................................................7-3
Rev. 09/2002
SM ix B003/B004/B006/B007
7.3 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT..........................................................................7-5
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B351
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 8-1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................8-1
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT .............................................................................8-2
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER...................................................................8-2
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT.............................................................................8-3
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH
SENSORS........................................................................................................8-4
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ...............................................................8-5
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER............................................................................8-5
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS...................................................8-6
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HP
SENSOR...................................................................................................8-6
1.10 SCANNER MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR.......................................8-7
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH ...................8-8
1.12 EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................................8-9
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID.................................................................................8-9
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD ..........................................................................8-9
2 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 8-10
2.1 TIMING CHARTS....................................................................................8-10
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDE ORIGINAL MODE...............................8-10
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE...........................8-11
2.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................8-12
3 SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 8-13
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................8-13
3.2 TEST POINTS.........................................................................................8-13
3.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................8-13
4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION ......................................................... 8-14
4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS.............................................................................8-14
DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................8-15
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................8-16
4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM......................................................................8-16
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE .....................................................8-18
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM.........................................................8-19
4.4.1 PICK AND SEPARATION...............................................................8-19
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION..................................................8-20
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES..........................8-20
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................8-21
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS..........................................................8-21
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................8-22
4.6 STAMP....................................................................................................8-23
4.7 DF70 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY8-24
Rev. 09/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 x SM
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION......................................... 9-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................9-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................9-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.....................................................9-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION...........................................9-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................9-5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS........................................................ 9-6
2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM.....................................................................9-6
2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM................9-7
Tray lifting conditions ............................................................................9-7
Tray lowering conditions .......................................................................9-7
2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM .............................................................9-8
3. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 9-9
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.........................................................................................9-9
3.2 TEST POINTS...........................................................................................9-9
3.3 SWITCHES................................................................................................9-9
3.4 FUSES ......................................................................................................9-9
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...................................... 9-10
4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT........................................................................9-10
Tray Cover ..........................................................................................9-10
Front Cover.........................................................................................9-10
Rear Cover .........................................................................................9-10
Right Lower Cover ..............................................................................9-10
Upper Cover .......................................................................................9-10
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ......................................................................9-11
4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS.............9-11
Pick-up Roller .....................................................................................9-11
Paper Feed Roller...............................................................................9-11
Separation Roller ................................................................................9-11
4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT.....................9-12
Tray Lift Sensor ..................................................................................9-12
Paper End Sensor ..............................................................................9-12
4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.........................................................9-13
4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE.........................................................9-14
Rev. 09/2002
SM xi B003/B004/B006/B007
PAPER TRAY UNIT A682
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................... 10-1
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT........................................................................10-1
Right Cover.........................................................................................10-1
Rear Cover .........................................................................................10-1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ......................................................................10-2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS.............10-2
Pick-up Roller .....................................................................................10-2
Paper Feed Roller...............................................................................10-2
Separation Roller ................................................................................10-2
1.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT.............................................................10-3
1.4 PAPER FEED AND RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .........................10-4
1.5 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.....................................................10-5
Upper Paper Feed Unit .......................................................................10-6
Lower Paper Feed Unit .......................................................................10-6
1.6 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, AND RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT......10-7
Paper End Sensor ..............................................................................10-7
Tray Lift Sensor ..................................................................................10-7
Relay Sensor ......................................................................................10-7
2. SERVICE TABLES.................................................................... 10-8
2.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................10-8
2.2 TEST POINTS.........................................................................................10-8
2.3 SWITCHES..............................................................................................10-8
2.4 FUSES ....................................................................................................10-8
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..................................................... 10-9
3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................10-9
3.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.................................................10-10
3.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................10-11
3.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................................10-12
3.5 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM........10-13
3.6 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM...................................................................10-14
3.7 PAPER END DETECTION....................................................................10-16
3.8 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION..............................................................10-17
4. SPECIFICATIONS................................................................... 10-18
BRIDGE UNIT A688
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION...................................... 11-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................11-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................11-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................11-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.........................................11-3
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................11-4
B003/B004/B006/B007 xii SM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION ....................................................... 11-5
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.............................................................11-5
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................... 11-6
3.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT.............................................................11-6
1 BIN TRAY B376
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION...................................... 12-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................12-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT.............................12-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................12-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.........................................12-3
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..................................................... 12-4
2.1 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................12-4
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................... 12-5
3.1 COVER REMOVAL .................................................................................12-5
Front Cover.........................................................................................12-5
Upper Cover .......................................................................................12-5
Rear Cover .........................................................................................12-5
3.2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT ........................................................12-6
3.3 ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................12-7
Paper Limit Sensor .............................................................................12-7
Entrance Sensor .................................................................................12-7
1,000 SHEET FINISHER A681
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION...................................... 13-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................13-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................13-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................13-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ......................................13-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................13-6
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..................................................... 13-7
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.............................................................13-7
Staple mode........................................................................................13-7
No staple mode...................................................................................13-7
2.2 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................13-8
2.3 EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE MECHANISM.................................13-9
2.4 STAPLER..............................................................................................13-10
2.5 FEED OUT MECHANISM .....................................................................13-11
2.6 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISM ................................................13-12
2.7 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MECHANISM..........................................13-13
2.8 JAM CONDITIONS................................................................................13-14
SM xiii B003/B004/B006/B007
2.9 TIMING CHARTS..................................................................................13-15
2.9.1 NO STAPLE MODE (A4 SIDEWAYS, 3 SHEETS/2SETS)...........13-15
2.9.2 STAPLE MODE (A4 SIDEWAYS, 2 SHEETS/2 SETS) ................13-16
3. SERVICE TABLE.................................................................... 13-17
3.1 DIP SWITCH TABLE.............................................................................13-17
3.2 TEST POINTS.......................................................................................13-17
3.3 FUSES ..................................................................................................13-17
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.................................... 13-18
4.1 COVER REMOVAL ...............................................................................13-18
Front Door.........................................................................................13-18
Front Cover.......................................................................................13-18
Rear Cover .......................................................................................13-18
Upper Cover .....................................................................................13-18
Lower Left Cover ..............................................................................13-19
Front Shift Tray Cover.......................................................................13-19
Rear Shift Tray Cover .......................................................................13-19
Shift Tray ..........................................................................................13-19
4.2 ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT...............................................13-20
4.3 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT...........................................................13-21
4.4 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT........................................13-22
4.5 POSITIONING ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................13-23
4.6 STAPLER REPLACEMENT ..................................................................13-24
TWO TRAY FINISHER B352
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................... 14-1
1.1 COVERS .................................................................................................14-1
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.....................................................................14-1
1.1.2 INNER COVER...............................................................................14-1
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER..........................................................................14-2
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR...........................................................................14-2
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR............14-3
1.5 STAPLER TRAY......................................................................................14-3
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH..14-4
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR..................................................................14-5
1.8 LIFT MOTORS ........................................................................................14-5
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR..........................................................................14-7
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS ...................................................14-8
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR ..................................................14-8
1.12 STAPLER UNIT.....................................................................................14-9
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR.....................................................14-9
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR..............................................................................14-10
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS.......................................................................14-10
tray Shift Sensors and tray release sensor .......................................14-11
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR .............................................................14-11
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH ..................................................14-11
B003/B004/B006/B007 xiv SM
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD....................................................................14-12
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT..........................................14-12
2. TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................ 14-13
2.1 TIMING CHARTS..................................................................................14-13
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 1 ...................14-13
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 2 ...................14-14
2.1.3 A4(S)/LT(S) STAPLE MODE WITH PUNCH................................14-15
2.2 JAM DETECTION..................................................................................14-16
3. SERVICE TABLES.................................................................. 14-17
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ......................................................................14-17
3.2 TEST POINTS.......................................................................................14-17
3.3 FUSES ..................................................................................................14-17
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS................................................... 14-18
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT..............................................................................14-18
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................................14-19
4.3 JUNCTION GATES...............................................................................14-20
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING...................................................................................14-21
4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS .......................................................14-21
Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ..........................................................................14-21
Tray 2 (Lower Tray) ..........................................................................14-22
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS .........................................................14-23
4.5.1 TRAY 1.........................................................................................14-23
Introduction.......................................................................................14-23
Normal and sort/stack modes ...........................................................14-23
Staple mode......................................................................................14-24
Tray 1 release mechanism................................................................14-25
4.5.2 TRAY 2.........................................................................................14-27
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM..........................................................14-28
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM..........................14-29
Vertical Paper Alignment ..................................................................14-29
Horizontal Paper Alignment ..............................................................14-29
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM.......................................................................14-30
4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT................................................................14-30
Stapler Rotation................................................................................14-30
Side-to-Side Movement ....................................................................14-30
4.7.2 STAPLER.....................................................................................14-31
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT....................................................14-32
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ...................................................................14-33
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................14-33
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION...................................................14-34
SM xv B003/B004/B006/B007
NINE-TRAY MAILBOX AND BRIDGE UNIT G909/G912
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION...................................... 15-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................15-1
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT..........................................................................15-2
1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.........................................15-2
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .............................................................................15-3
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ......................................15-4
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..................................................... 15-6
2.1 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................15-6
Proof Tray...........................................................................................15-6
Bridge Unit ..........................................................................................15-6
Trays...................................................................................................15-6
2.2 PROOF TRAY SENSORS.......................................................................15-7
2.2.1 PAPER SENSOR ...........................................................................15-7
2.2.2 PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR......................................................15-7
2.3 TRAY SENSORS ....................................................................................15-8
2.3.1 PAPER SENSOR ...........................................................................15-8
2.3.2 PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR......................................................15-8
2.3.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR.....................................................................15-8
2.4 TIMING CHART AND MISFEED DETECTION........................................15-9
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................... 15-11
3.1 MAILBOX (G909) ..................................................................................15-11
3.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................15-11
3.1.2 REQUIREMENT OPTIONS FOR MAIN MACHINE......................15-11
3.1.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................15-12
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)..................................................15-15
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................15-15
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................15-16
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.................................... 15-21
4.1 PROOF TRAY UNIT..............................................................................15-21
4.1.1 PROOF TRAY SENSOR AND PAPER
OVERFLOW SENSORS ...............................................................15-21
4.1.2 PROOF TRANSPORT UNIT ........................................................15-21
4.2 TRAY UNIT............................................................................................15-22
4.2.1 TRAYS..........................................................................................15-22
4.2.2 PAPER SENSOR, PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR,
AND TRAY EXIT SENSOR ..........................................................15-23
Paper Overflow Sensor.....................................................................15-23
Paper Sensor....................................................................................15-23
Tray Exit Sensor (above the 1st tray, and in the 3rd, 6th,
and 9th trays)....................................................................................15-23
4.2.3 MAIN CONTROL BOARD ............................................................15-24
4.2.4 TRAY EXIT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT..........................................15-25
B003/B004/B006/B007 xvi SM
5. SERVICE TABLES................................................................... 15-27
5.1 DIP SWITCHES/VRIABLE RESISTORS/LEDS.....................................15-27
5.1.1 DIP SWITCHES............................................................................15-27
5.1.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS ..............................................................15-28
5.1.3 LEDS.....................................................................................................
FIRMWARE HISTORY
1. FIRMWARE HISTORY............................................................... 16-1
1.1 FIRMWARE HISTORY............................................................................16-1
1.1.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE (BICU) FIRMWARE HISTORY .............. 16-1
1.1.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY.............. 16-3
1.1.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MOD HISTORY ..... 16-4
1.1.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY .. 16-8
1.1.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY16-9
Rev. 09/2002
SM i B003/B004/B006/B007
B361/B362
PRINTER/SCANNER CONTROLLERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS...........................................................1-1
1.2 PRINTER INSTALLATION ........................................................................1-1
1.3 POSTSCRIPT UNIT (G577) ......................................................................1-7
1.4 MEMORY (G578/G579) ............................................................................1-8
1.5 NIB (G574) ................................................................................................1-9
1.6 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (G590) ...............................................................1-10
1.7 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS..........................................................1-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................ 2-1
2.1 CONTROLLER ERRORS..........................................................................2-1
2.2 LEDS AND TEST POINTS........................................................................2-1
SERVICE TABLES
3. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 3-1
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................3-1
3.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...........3-1
3.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ......................................................................3-2
3.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................3-2
3.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO PRINTER CONTROLLER.....................3-2
3.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE.....................................................................3-3
3.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE.............................................3-3
3.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................3-11
3.5 POWER-ON SELF TEST ........................................................................3-11
3.6 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST......................................................................3-11
3.7 USER PROGRAM MODE .......................................................................3-12
3.7.1 PRINTER USER PROGRAM MODE..............................................3-12
3.7.2 SCANNER USER PROGRAM MODE............................................3-13
B003/B004/B006/B007 ii SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 4-1
4.1 OVERVIEW...............................................................................................4-1
4.2 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS....................................................................4-2
4.2.1 SAMPLE PRINT ...............................................................................4-2
4.2.2 LOCKED PRINT...............................................................................4-2
4.2.3 PAPER SOURCE SELECTION........................................................4-3
4.2.4 AUTO CONTINUE............................................................................4-4
4.2.5 PAPER OUTPUT TRAY...................................................................4-5
4.2.6 DUPLEX PRINTING.........................................................................4-5
4.2.7 STAPLING........................................................................................4-6
4.2.8 PUNCHING ......................................................................................4-6
4.3 SCANNER FUNCTIONS...........................................................................4-7
4.3.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE ..............................4-7
4.4 NIB ............................................................................................................4-8
4.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................4-8
4.4.2 LED INDICATORS............................................................................4-8
4.5 IEEE1394 INTERFACE.............................................................................4-9
4.5.1 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................4-9
4.5.2 IEEE1394 .........................................................................................4-9
4.5.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................4-10
4.5.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT.........................................................................4-10
4.5.5 REMARKS ABOUT THIS INTERFACE KIT....................................4-11
4.5.6 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES ......................................................4-11
4.6 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE HISTORY..4-12
4.6.1 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY...4-12
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ 5-1
1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................5-1
1.1 PRINTER.............................................................................................5-1
1.2 SCANNER...........................................................................................5-3
2 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ......................................................................5-4
2.1 PRINTER.............................................................................................5-4
2.2 SCANNER...........................................................................................5-5
3 MEACHINE CONFIGURATION....................................................................5-6
3.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS...................................................................5-6
Rev. 02/2002
SM i B003/B004/B006/B007
FAX UNIT B360
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1 FAX UNIT..................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS.......................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 FLOW CHART..................................................................................1-2
1.1.3 FAX OPTION TYPE 1045 INSTALLATION......................................1-3
1.1.4 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 1045 INSTALLATION.........................1-7
1.1.5 ISDN OPTION TYPE 1045 INSTALLATION...................................1-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................. 2-1
2.1 ERROR CODES........................................................................................2-1
2.2 ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION...............................................2-9
2.2.1 D-CHANNEL LAYER MANAGEMENT ...........................................2-10
2.2.2 D-CHANNEL, LAYER 1..................................................................2-10
2.2.3 D-CHANNEL LINK LAYER.............................................................2-10
2.2.4 D-CHANNEL NETWORK LAYER...................................................2-11
2.2.5 B-CHANNEL LINK LAYER.............................................................2-11
2.2.6 B-CHANNEL NETWORK LAYER...................................................2-12
2.2.7 TRANSPORT LAYER.....................................................................2-12
2.2.8 SESSION LAYER...........................................................................2-13
2.2.9 DOCUMENT LAYER......................................................................2-14
2.2.10 PRESENTATION LAYER.............................................................2-14
2.3 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................2-15
2.3.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................2-15
2.3.2 SC1201...........................................................................................2-15
2.3.3 SC1207...........................................................................................2-15
2.3.4 FAX SC CODE TABLE...................................................................2-16
2.4 ISDN TEST FUNCTION..........................................................................2-17
2.4.1 LEDS..............................................................................................2-17
2.4.2 BACK-TO-BACK TEST...................................................................2-18
SERVICE TABLES
3. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 3-1
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................3-1
3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................3-1
3.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES............................................3-4
B003/B004/B006/B007 ii SM
3.2 BIT SWITCHES.......................................................................................3-10
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES.....................................................................3-10
3.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES...3-22
3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES....................................................................3-27
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES.....................................................3-32
3.2.5 G3 SWITCHES...............................................................................3-41
3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES............................................................................3-49
3.2.7 G3-3 SWITCHES............................................................................3-54
3.2.8 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES............................................................3-55
3.2.9 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................3-62
3.3 NCU PARAMETERS...............................................................................3-65
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS......................................3-76
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE....................................................3-76
3.4.2 PARAMETERS...............................................................................3-77
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................3-81
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................4-1
4.1 OVERVIEW4-1
4.2 BOARDS ...................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 FCU..................................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 NCU (US) .........................................................................................4-4
4.2.3 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) ......................................................................4-5
4.2.4 SG3 BOARD.....................................................................................4-6
4.2.5 SIG4 BOARD....................................................................................4-7
4.3 VIDEO DATA PATH..................................................................................4-8
4.3.1 TRANSMISSION..............................................................................4-8
4.3.2 RECEPTION...................................................................................4-11
4.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES .....................................................4-13
4.4.1 PERSONAL/INFORMATION/TRANSFER BOXES ........................4-13
4.4.2 MULTI-PORT..................................................................................4-16
4.4.3 DOCUMENT SERVER...................................................................4-17
4.4.4 LAN FAX DRIVER..........................................................................4-18
4.5 FIRMWARE HISTORY4-20
4.5.1 FAX OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY..4-20
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY...4-22
4.6.1 FAX OPTION SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY4-22
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................5-1
1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................5-1
2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS............................................5-3
3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION......................................................................5-4
Rev. 02/2002
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.
1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
!WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
!WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
INSTALLATION B003/B004/B006/B007
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
INSTALLATION B361/B362
INSTALLATION B360
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B003/B004/B006/B007
PAPER TRAY UNIT A862
TROUBLESHOOTING B361/B362
TROUBLESHOOTING B360
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B003/B004/B006/B007
BRIDGE UNIT A688/B397
SERVICE TABLES B361/B362
SERVICE TABLES B360
TROUBLESHOOTING B003/B004/B006/B007
1 BIN TRAY B376
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B361/B360
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B360
SERVICE TABLES B003/B004/B006/B007
1,000 SHEET FINISHER A681
SPECIFICATIONS B361/B362
SPECIFICATIONS B360
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B003/B004/B006/B007
TWO TRAY FINISHER B352
SPECIFICATIONS B003/B004/B006/B007
NINE TRAY MAILBOX & BRIDGE UNIT G909/G912
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B351
FIRMWARE HISTORY
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
2
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
1
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
3
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
4
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
6
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
5
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
8
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
7
Rev. 09/2002
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
SM 1-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n 1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
!CAUTION
B004I016.WMF
Rating Voltage of Output
Connector, Max. DC24 V
LCT
Rating Voltage of Output
Connector, Max. DC24 V
Finisher
Rating Voltage of Output
Connector, Max. DC24 V
Scanner Unit
Rating Voltage of Output
Connector, Max. DC24 V
ARDF
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-2 SM
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range:
10C to 30C (50F to 86F)
2. Humidity Range:
15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct
sunlight.)
4. Ventilation:
Room air should turn over
at least 30 m
3
/hr/person
5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m
3
(2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd
3
)
6. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea
level.
9. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side
should be no more than 5 mm (0.2").
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
SM 1-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily
accessible. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:
North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A
Europe/Asia 220V~240V, 50Hz/60Hz: more than 8A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10 %
3. Never set anything on the power cord.
A: Front: >75 cm (29.,6 )
B: Left: > 10 cm (4)
C: Rear: > 10 cm (4)
D: Right > 10 cm (4)
NOTE: The 75 cm (29.5") recommended for
the space at the front is for pulling out
the paper tray only. If the operator
stands at the front of the main
machine, more space is required.
Rev. 04/2002
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-4 SM
1.1.5 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE
System Options
~ ~~ ~ = Standard, } = Available, = Requires another option, X = Not available
Option B003/B004 B006/B007 Notes
ARDF DF70 } }
Paper Tray Unit - PS360 } }
Console (Cabinet) } } FAC 18
One Bin Tray PT1045 } }
1000 Sheet Finisher SR720
Requires the Bridge Unit,
Paper Tray Unit or Console
Two Tray Finisher SR760
Requires the Bridge Unit,
Paper Tray Unit or Console
Bridge Unit Type 1045 } }
LCT RT36
Requires Paper Tray Unit or
Console
Mailbox CS360
Requires the Bridge Unit,
Mailbox Bridge Unit is also
required if the Two Tray
Finisher is installed, Paper
Tray Unit or Console
Fax Option Type 1045 } }
Printer/Scanner Option Type
1045
}
Requires Memory Unit Type
B - 64MB and Network
Interface Board
PS3 Option } }
2/3 Hole Punch Unit Type 1045 Requires Two Tray Finisher
Memory Unit Type B 32MB
(Copier)
} }
Required for Preset Stamp,
Background Numbering and
User Stamp features
Memory Unit Type B 64MB
(Copier)
} ~ ~~ ~
Required for Printer/ Scanner
Option
Fax Function Upgrade Type
185 (Fax)
Requires Fax Option
Memory Expansion 32MB (Fax) Requires Fax Option
Network Interface Board
Type 1045
} ~ ~~ ~
Required for Printer/ Scanner
Option
Platen Cover Type 540 } }
Mailbox Bridge Unit Type 460
Required if the Two Tray
Finisher is also installed
External Output Tray Type 450 Requires the Bridge Unit
1394 Interface Unit Type 1045 } }
Special Notes:
Slot 1 on the Controller PCB is for the Function DIMM (Fax DIMM, Printer DIMM or
Printer/Scanner DIMM). Only 1 Function DIMM can be installed on the Controller PCB. The
Fax Function is built into Printer and Printer/Scanner DIMM. When installing the Fax Option,
there is no need to install the Fax DIMM if the Printer or Printer/Scanner DIMM is already
installed.
Only one Memory Option Type B (32MB or 64MB) can be installed on the Controller PCB. Both
allow the Preset Stamp, Background Numbering and User Stamp features. The 64MB Memory
Option is required for the Printer/Scanner Option.
Rev. 04/2002
INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
SM 1-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Bridge Unit: Needed for the finishers and external output tray.
Paper Tray Unit: Needed for LCT and finishers.
Other requirements: See Overall Machine Information Installation Option
Table.
Unpack Copi er
I nst al l t he copi er
I nst al l t he bri dge uni t (i f requi red)
I nst al l t he remai ni ng opt i ons i n any order
Pl ace Copi er on t he paper t r ay uni t
I nst al l t he paper t ray uni t
Does t he user r equi r e t he Paper Tr ay Uni t , LCT, or Fi ni sher ?
Yes No
I f t he cust omer requi res t he 1-bi n t ray:
Remove t he scanner uni t
I nst al l t he 1-bi n t ray
Repl ace t he scanner uni t
B004I510.WMF
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-6 SM
1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Operation Panel Decal (-22 machine).................................... 1
2. Paper Size Decal ................................................................... 1
3. Model Name Decal (-15, -22 machines) ................................ 1
4. NECR English (-17, -57 machines)..................................... 1
5. NECR Multi Language (-19, -21, -27, -29, -67 machines)... 1
6. Energy Star Sticker (-26, -66 machines)................................ 1
7. Operation Instructions System Setting................................ 1
(-15, -17, -19, -21, -26, -29, -55, -57, -66 machines)
8. Operation Instructions Copy Reference.............................. 1
(-14, -15, -17, -19, -21, -26, -29, -55, -57, -66 machines)
9. EU Safety Information (-22, -27, -26, -24).............................. 1
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
SM 1-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. Remove the main machine from the box, and remove all shipping retainers and
tapes.
NOTE: Store all shipping retainers as you remove them. You will need them if
the machine is moved to another location in the future.
2. Remove scanner cushion [A], and install the end fence [B].
3. Pull out the paper trays and remove all tape and bottom plate stoppers [C].
4. On the right side of the machine, open the by-pass tray, duplex unit, and
transfer right cover, and then remove all the shipping retainers [D]
NOTE: If the paper tray unit is to be installed, do this now. ( 1.4)
5. If the paper tray unit is not to be installed, install the middle front cover [E]
(provided in the second paper tray).
B004I100.WMF
B004I102.WMF
B004I101.WMF
B004I103.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[D]
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-8 SM
Development Unit and PCU
1. Open the front cover and remove the tape and retainers [A].
2. Loosen [B] (! x1) and rotate the bracket [C].
3. At [D]: Push down lever !. Pull the PCU out a small distance ", and then
push the development unit to the left # so the development unit is away from
the drum.
4. Slowly slide out the PCU [E] and place it on a clean flat surface.
5. Remove the three clamps and wire [F].
B004I104.WMF
B004I511.WMF
A284I500.WMF
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
SM 1-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
6. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.
NOTE: Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid
attraction to the magnetic development roller.
7. Slide the development unit [A] out and place it on the paper.
8. Remove the tape and tag [B] from the development unit
9. Remove the entrance seal plate [C] (" x2).
B004I512.WMF
B004I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-10 SM
10. Remove the development roller unit [A], and set it on the paper.
11. Pour the developer [B] into the development unit.
NOTE: The developer lot number is embossed on the end of the developer
package. Do not discard the package until you have recorded the lot
number. ( 1-14)
1) Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer evenly along the length of the
development unit.
2) Rotate the drive gear [C] to work the developer into the unit.
3) Repeat until all the developer is in the development unit.
4) Continue to turn the drive gear until the developer is even with the top of the
unit.
12. Reassemble the development unit.
NOTE: Make sure that the earth plate [D] is positioned correctly.
13. Re-install the development unit and PCU.
B004I106.WMF
B004I513.WMF
B004R957.WMF
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
SM 1-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
Toner Bottle
1. Raise the toner bottle holder lever [A], push the lever [B] to the side, and then
pull the toner bottle holder [C] out.
2. Shake the new toner bottle well.
NOTE: Do not remove the toner bottle cap [D] until after shaking.
3. Unscrew the bottle cap and set the bottle in the holder.
NOTE: Do not touch the inner bottle cap [E].
4. Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place, and
then lower the holder lever to secure the toner bottle.
NOTE: The holder lever cannot be lowered unless the toner bottle is installed.
B004I514.WMF
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[E]
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-12 SM
Paper Trays
1. Open the 1st paper tray, and then press down on the right side of the lock [A]
switch to unlock the side fences.
2. If you are loading paper larger than A4 or Letter size in the 1st paper tray,
attach the cushion [B].
NOTE: This is required only for the 1st paper tray. Make sure that the cushion
is not attached over the ribs.
3. Press in on the sides of the fence release [C], and slide the side fences to the
appropriate mark for the paper size, and then load the paper.
4. Press down on the left side of the lock [D] to lock the side fences.
B004I107.WMF
B004I108.WMF
[A]
[C]
[C]
[D]
[B]
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
SM 1-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
5. Turn the dial [A] to the correct setting for the paper size.
6. Pinch the sides of the bottom fence [B] and slide it against the bottom of the
stack.
7. Attach the appropriate paper size decal [C] to the paper tray.
8. Paper size decals are also used for the optional paper tray unit. Keep any
remaining decals for use with the paper tray unit.
9. Repeat this procedure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray.
B004I109.WMF
B004I110.WMF
[A]
[B]
[B]
[C]
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-14 SM
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer
1. Connect the main machine to the power outlet, switch on the main machine,
and wait for the fusing unit to warm up.
2. On the operation panel, press Clear Mode ".
3. Use the number keys to enter 107.
4. Press and hold Clear/Stop # for three seconds.
5. On the touch-panel, press Copy SP.
6. Press SP Direct to highlight SP Direct, enter 2801, and then press $.
7. When the message prompts you to enter the lot number of the developer, enter
the 7-digit lot number, press Yes, and then press Execute on the touch-panel.
This initializes the TD sensor.
NOTE: The lot number is printed on the end of the developer package.
Recording the lot number could help troubleshoot problems later. If the
lot number is unavailable, enter any seven-digit number.
8. Press SP Direct to highlight SP Direct and enter 2805, press $, and then
press Execute on the touch-panel. This initializes the developer.
9. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B004I500.WMF
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
SM 1-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press the Paper Size Setting tab.
4. Press the button for the tray to change.
5. Change the setting and press the OK button.
6. Repeat for each tray installed.
7. Press Exit twice to return to the main display
The 1st and 2nd paper trays are provided with paper size dial selectors. The
dial settings on the paper trays have priority over the UP settings. However,
if you select the asterisk (*) position on the paper size dial, you can select the
paper size with the UP setting.
The 3rd and 4th paper trays of the paper output unit are not equipped with
paper-size selection dials, so you must use the Paper Size UP settings for
the 3rd and 4th trays.
8. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
NOTE: The test pattern print procedure is slightly different for this machine.
Use SP2-902 and select 2 for the IPU Test Print or 3 for the Print Test
Patterns. ( Chapter 5, 5.1.3 Test Pattern Printing)
B004I110.WMF
B004I110.WMF
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-16 SM
Electrical Total Counter
1. Initialize the electrical total counter using SP7-825, depending on the service
contract type.
NOTE: This procedure has an affect only once, when the counter is a
minus ()value.
HDD Caution Decal (for only NA models)
1. Attach the HDD Caution decal [A] to the front cover.
10 mm (0. 4")
25 mm (1. 0")
B004I017.WMF
B004I018.WMF
[A]
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Knob Screw M3 .................................................................. 1
2. Knob Screw M4 .................................................................. 1
3. Joint Bracket .......................................................................... 1
4. Front Stand............................................................................ 1
5. Rear Stand............................................................................. 1
6. Stand Bracket ........................................................................ 1
7. NECR..................................................................................... 1
8. Installation Procedure............................................................ 1
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-18 SM
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord before starting the
following procedure.
1. Unpack the paper tray unit and remove all tape [A] and shipping retainers.
2. Remove the paper trays [B].
A682I111.WMF
A682I112.WMF
[B]
[A]
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
3. Remove the middle front cover [A], and pull out the front handles [B].
4. Using the front handles and rear handles, lift the machine and hold it over the
paper tray unit [C].
5. Slowly lower the main machine onto the paper tray unit with the pegs [D]
aligned with the peg holes on the bottom of the machine.
NOTE: Do not hold the scanner unit.
6. Re-install the middle front cover [A].
7. Attach the lock washer [E] to the short knob screw [F]. Then, secure the paper
tray unit to the machine (! x1, lock washer).
8. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit [G].
9. Secure the joint bracket [H] (! x 1).
10. Remove the connector cover [I] of the main machine (! x1).
11. Connect the paper tray unit harness [J] to the main machine and re-attach the
connector cover.
A682I113.WMF
A682I517.WMF
[A]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[D]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-20 SM
12. Install the front and rear stands [A] and [B]. First attach at ! and then swing
the other end round to ".
13. Install the stand bracket [C].
NOTE: The stand bracket must be installed on the left side in order to allow
installation of the Two-Tray Finisher.
A682I118.WMF
A682I119.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
LEFT SIDE
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
14. Position the side fence [A] and bottom fence [B] of the paper trays, load the
paper, and then lock them in position by tightening the hex nuts with the green
wrench [C] provided in the 1st paper tray.
15. Attach the appropriate tray decals [D] provided in the accessory box for the
main machine.
16. Turn on the machine main power switch.
17. Enter the paper size for each paper tray using the UP mode.
18. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
A682I120.WMF
A682I500.WMF
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-22 SM
1.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Ground Bracket...................................................................... 1
2. Connector Cover.................................................................... 1
3. Base Cover ............................................................................ 1
4. Copy Tray .............................................................................. 1
5. Mylar Strip.............................................................................. 1
6. Stepped Screw M3x8.......................................................... 5
7. Screw M3x8......................................................................... 2
8. Screw M4x7........................................................................ 1
9. Tapping Screw M3x6.......................................................... 2
10. Tapping Screw M3x14........................................................ 1
11. Tapping Screw M3x8.......................................................... 1
12. Installation Procedure............................................................ 1
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord before starting the
following procedure.
1. Remove the scanner unit
NOTE: If the ARDF is installed, remove the ARDF before removing the
scanner unit.
1) Remove the connector cover [A].
2) Disconnect the scanner cable [B].
3) Remove the scanner unit [C] (! x 3).
B376I113.WMF
B376I114.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-24 SM
2. Unpack the 1-bin tray unit and remove the tapes.
3. Remove the front bracket [A] (! x1) and rear bracket [B] (! x1) from the top of
the paper exit cover [C] (! x 1 each).
4. Remove the paper exit cover [C] (! x 4).
5. Cut away two covers [D] from the base cover [E].
6. Trim the edges so they are smooth.
7. Install the base cover [E] (! x 3: stepped screw).
8. Set the 1-bin tray unit [F] on the base cover and slide it onto the heads of the
stepped screws.
B376I201.WMF
B376I102.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
9. Secure the 1-bin tray unit [A] (! x 1: M3x14).
10. Remove the cover [B].
11. Install the grounding bracket [C] (! x 2: M3x6).
12. Connect the harness [D].
13. Install the connector cover [E] (! x 1: M3x8)
14. Re-install the front bracket [F] (! x 2: M4x7, M4x10) and the rear bracket [G]
(! x1 M4x10).
A684I492.WMF
B376I103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-26 SM
15. Attach the copy tray.
Bridge Unit (B397) not installed:
1) Attach the decal [A].
2) Secure [B] (! x2: Stepped screw) into the side of the 1-bin tray housing.
3) Attach the copy tray [C] to the stepped screws.
Bridge Unit (B397) installed:
1) Open the cover of the bridge unit [D].
2) Install the copy tray bracket [E] (! x1: tapping screw).
3) Install the copy tray [F] (" x 1).
A684I493.WMF
B376I501.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-27 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
16. Remove the scanner stand cover [A] (! x1).
17. To adjust the height of the scanner stand, first remove [B] (! x2) to release the
scanner stand [C].
18. Raise the scanner stand until the next set of screw holes in the main frame can
be seen through the screw holes in the scanner stand.
19. Secure the stand and install the cover [D] (! x1).
B376I104.WMF
B376I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-28 SM
20. Attach two mylar strips [A] to the scanner stand [B].
21. Reinstall the scanner stand cover.
22. Reinstall the scanner unit.
23. Turn on the main switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
B376I106.WMF
[A]
[B]
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-29 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 2
2. Connector Cover.................................................................... 1
3. Exit Mylar ............................................................................... 2
4. Installation Procedure............................................................ 1
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-30 SM
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord before starting the
following procedure.
1. Unpack the bridge unit [A] and remove all tapes shipping retainers.
2. Remove the inner tray [B].
3. On the side of the machine, remove the three small covers [C].
If the optional external output tray (A825) will be installed (instead of a
finisher), do Step 4.
4. Remove the two small covers [D].
5. Remove the cover [E] (! x1)
6. Remove the cap [F].
B397I401.WMF
B397I407.WMF
B397I500.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-31 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
7. If an optional finisher is to be installed, attach two mylars [A] to the bridge unit.
8. Remove the cover [B].
9. Install the bridge unit [C] (! x2).
10. Connect the bridge unit I/F harnesses [D] (# x2).
11. Install the connector cover [E].
12. Turn on the main switch and check the bridge unit operation (make sure that
there are no paper jams).
A688I402.WMF
B397I404.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-32 SM
1.7 1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Front Stand..........................................................................1
2. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
3. Knob Screw.........................................................................1
4. Screw - M4x12.....................................................................6
5. NECR (-17 machine) ...........................................................1
6. Installation Procedure..........................................................1
1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
SM 1-33 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord before starting the
following procedure.
NOTE: The bridge unit (B397) and paper tray unit (A682) must be installed before
installing this finisher.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes and retainers.
A681I701.WMF
A681I702.WMF
1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-34 SM
2. Fasten [A] (! x2) loosely.
3. Hang the front stand [B] and rear stand [C] on the screws installed in step 2.
4. To secure the front and rear stands tighten [A] (! x2) and secure the stands (!
x4).
5. At the front, use handle [D] to pull out the stapler unit.
6. Remove the locking lever [E] (! x1).
7. Align the finisher on the stands, and lock it in place by pushing the locking
lever.
8. Secure the locking lever (! x1) and push the stapler unit into the finisher.
A681I705.WMF
A681I704.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
SM 1-35 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
9. Secure the finisher [A] (! x1).
10. Adjust the securing knobs [B] under the front and rear stands until the finisher
is perpendicular to the floor.
11. Install the shift tray [C] (snap ring x1).
NOTE: Make sure that the three pegs [D] fit into the slots [E] properly.
12. Connect the finisher cable [F] to the main machine.
13. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
A681I706.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-36 SM
1.8 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Front Joint Bracket................................................................. 1
2. Rear Joint Bracket ................................................................. 1
3. Shift Tray ............................................................................... 2
4. Screw M3x6........................................................................ 2
5. Screw M4x14...................................................................... 4
6. Lower Ground Plate............................................................... 1
7. Installation Procedure............................................................ 1
TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION
SM 1-37 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord before starting the
following procedure.
NOTE: The Paper Tray Unit (A682) and Bridge Unit (B397) must be installed
before installing this finisher. ( 1.4, 1.6)
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers from outside
the unit.
2. Open the front door [A] and remove all tapes and shipping materials from inside
the finisher unit.
B352I101.WMF
B352I102.WMF
[A]
TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-38 SM
3. Install the left joint bracket [A] (! x2 M4x14) and right joint bracket [B] (! x2
M4x14).
4. Attach the ground plate [C] (! x2 M3x6) to the center of the paper tray.
5. Open the front door of the finisher, and pull out the locking lever [D] (! x1).
6. Push the finisher to the side of the machine with the holes in the finisher
aligned with the joint brackets, and then dock the finisher against the machine.
7. Push in the locking lever and secure it (! x1), then close the front door.
B352I104.WMF
B352I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION
SM 1-39 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
8. Install two trays [A] (! x1 each).
9. Connect the finisher cable [B] to the main machine below the right rear handle.
10. Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation.
NOTE: When moving the finisher to a new location, if you wish to put the finisher
back in the original carton, change the DIP switch settings. See DIP
Switches in the finisher service manual.
B352I103.WMF
B352I106.WMF
[A]
[B]
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-40 SM
1.9 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Punch unit..............................................................................1
2. Sensor arm............................................................................1
3. Hopper...................................................................................1
4. Step screw.............................................................................1
5. Spring ....................................................................................1
6. Spacer (2 mm) .......................................................................1
7. Spacer (1 mm) .......................................................................1
8. Tapping screw .......................................................................1
9. Tapping screw .......................................................................2
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-41 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord. If the Two-Tray
Finisher is installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
( 1.8)
1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] (! x4).
3. Remove the bracket [B] (! x2) and paper guide [C] (! x 1).
B377I102.WMF
B377I103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-42 SM
4. Remove the hopper cover [A] (! x 2).
5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped ! x 1).
6. Install the spring [C].
7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].
8. Install the punch unit [E] (! x 2, stepped ! x 1)
B377I101.WMF
B377I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION
SM 1-43 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown.
NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The
punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine board so it
knows what type of punch unit has been installed.
10. Slide the hopper [B] into the machine.
11. Fasten the two 1 mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.
NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the holes.
12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.
B377I105.WMF
B377I106.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-44 SM
1.10 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
INSTALLATION
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 2
2. Screw M4x10...................................................................... 2
3. Installation Procedure............................................................ 1
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION
SM 1-45 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Unpack the ARDF and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Attach and tighten [A] (! x2 stud).
3. Mount the ARDF by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate
over the stud screws, and slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the ARDF, hold it as shown in the illustration.
4. Secure the ARDF [C] (! x2).
B351I122.WMF
B351I123.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-46 SM
5. Connect the I/F cable [A] (# x1) to the main machine.
6. Turn on the main switch.
7. Check the ARDF operation and copy quality. Be sure to check and adjust the
registration for the ARDF with SP 6006.
B351I124.WMF
[A]
LCT INSTALLATION
SM 1-47 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.11 LCT INSTALLATION
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Qty
1. Joint Pin................................................................................. 2
2. Stepped Screw M3x18........................................................... 4
3. Magnet Cover ........................................................................ 1
4. NECR (-17, -27 machines)..................................................... 1
5. Installation Procedure............................................................ 1
LCT INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-48 SM
1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord before starting the
following procedure.
NOTE: The Paper Tray Unit (A682) must be installed before installing the LCT.
( 1.4)
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.
2. Open the right cover [A] of the paper tray unit.
3. Open the lower right cover [B] and cut the holding band [C].
NOTE: When cutting the holding band, the upper part of the band should be
cut as shown. Otherwise, paper jams may occur.
4. Remove the right lower cover.
A683I501.WMF
A683I604.WMF
A683I500.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
LCT INSTALLATION
SM 1-49 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
6. Install the joint pins [A].
7. Push the release lever [B] and slide the LCT to the right (front view).
8. Hang the LCT [C] on the joint pins, then secure the brackets [D] (! x4).
9. Return the LCT to the previous position and connect the LCT cable [E].
10. Open the LCT cover and load the paper.
11. Turn on the ac switch and check the LCT operation.
A683I503.WMF
[B]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[A]
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-50 SM
1.12 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
1. Install [A] (! x2) on the top cover as shown.
2. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the heads of the stud screws and slide
the platen cover [C] to the left.
A683125.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
[A]
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
SM 1-51 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.13 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
!CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Hold the key counter plates [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and
insert the key counter holder [C]
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket (! x2).
3. Attach the key counter cover [D] (! x2).
4. Remove the connector cover [E].
5. Remove the knockout [F] from the connector cover.
6. Remove the rear upper cover [G] (! x4) and left corner cover [H] (! x2).
A683I001.WMF
A683I518.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-52 SM
7. Connect the key counter connector [A] to CN211 on the I/O board.
8. Reinstall the covers [B] and [C].
9. Attach the double-sided tape to the key counter bracket.
10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape and attach the key counter
assembly [D] to the left side of the scanner unit.
NOTE: When attaching the key counter assembly, press the assembly hard
against the scanner cover. Otherwise, the key counter assembly may
come off easily.
11. Set User Tools, System Settings, Key Operator Tools, and Key Counter
Management to restrict access to each available function mode.
A683I003.WMF
A683I002.WMF
A683I965.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
Rev. 04/2002
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
SM 1-53 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.14 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
1. Remove the ARDF and exposure glass.
NOTE: For details about how to remove the ARDF and exposure glass, see
section 3 REPLACMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, sections 3.9.1 and
3.9.2.
2. Remove the rear cover [A] of the scanner
unit (! x2, # x1)
3. Remove the knockout [B]
4. Push the 1st and 2nd scanners [C] to
the right.
5. Lift the harness guide [D]
6. Install the heater brackets [E] (! x2,
M3x6).
NOTE: Use the screws already attached
at the same position.
7. Install the heater [F] (! x2, M4x6) and
route the harness.
B004I204.WMF
B004I205.WMF
B004I206.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-54 SM
8. Install the ac harness assembly [G] (! x2,
M4x6) and connect the connector [H].
9. Remove the rear lower cover [I] (! x4).
10. Remove knockout [J].
11. Pull out ac harness [K].
12. Connect the ac harness [L] to the ac outlet
[M].
NOTE: Do not remove the ground wire
from the ac outlet.
13. Install the ac outlet.
14. Install the ground wire [N] (! x1, M4x6).
15. Re-install the rear cover, rear lower cover.
16. Connect the harness [O].
B004I208.WMF
B004I209.WMF
B004I210.WMF
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[K]
[L]
[M]
[N]
[O]
TRAY HEATER
SM 1-55 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.15 TRAY HEATER
!CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Attach the tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B].
2. Install the harness holder [C].
3. Remove the rear lower cover.
4. Remove the upper and lower paper trays from the main machine.
5. Install the heater assembly [D] (! x1).
6. Install the harness clamp [E].
7. Fasten the harness [F] with the clamp.
8. Route the heater harness [G] and connect it to the ac harness [H].
A284I531.WMF
B004I203.WMF
B004I202.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[F]
[H]
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-56 SM
1.16 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
!CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Attach the optional tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B].
2. Install the harness holder [C].
3. Remove the rear lower cover of the machine and the rear cover of the optional
paper tray unit.
4. Remove the upper and lower paper trays of the optional paper tray unit.
5. Install the heater assembly [D] (! x1).
6. Install four harness clamps [E].
7. Route the harness [F] and connect it to the harness [G] and heater harness [H].
A284I601.WMF
B004I201.WMF
B004I531.WMF
[G]
[H]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
OPTIONAL USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT
SM 1-57 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.17 OPTIONAL USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT
1. Remove the controller PCB.
2. Install the user account enhancement unit (NVRAM) into IC 10 socket on the
controller PCB.
3. Re-install the controller PCB.
Rev. 04/2002
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PM TABLE
SM 2-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
2.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
B003/B004B006/B007 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
SCANNER/OPTICS
Reflector C C C Optics cloth
1st Mirror C C C Optics cloth
2nd Mirror C C C Optics cloth
3rd Mirror C C C Optics cloth
Scanner Guide Rails
I I I
Do not use alcohol. Lubricate
if necessary.
Platen Sheet Cover
C I I I
Dry cloth or alcohol. Replace
platen sheet if required.
Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth
APS Sensor C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
Exposure Glass (Sheet
through)
C C C
Dry cloth or alcohol
DRUM (OPC) AREA
Charge Roller R R R
Charge Roller Cleaning
Pad
R R R
Quenching Lamp C Dry cloth
Pick-off Pawls R R R
Spurs C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
ID Sensor
C C C
Perform SP3-001-2 after
blower brush cleaning.
CLEANING UNIT
Drum Cleaning Blade R R R
Cleaning Entrance Seal
C C C
Blower brush. Replace if
required.
Side Seal I I I
PM TABLE
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-2 SM
B003/B004B006/B007 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Development Drive
Gears
I I I
Development Filter R R R
Developer I R I
Entrance Seal I I I
Side Seal I I I
Development Roller C C C Dry cloth
PAPER FEED
Registration Roller C C C C Water or alcohol.
Paper Feed Roller I R R R
Separation Roller I R R R
Pick-up Roller I R R R
Paper Feed Roller (By-
pass feed table)
I R R R
Separation Roller (By-
pass feed table)
I R R R
Pick-up Roller
(By-pass feed table)
I R R R
Check counter value for
each (SP7-204). If 150 K,
replace roller. After replacing
the roller, do SP7-816 to
reset counter.
Paper Feed Guides C C C Water or alcohol.
Relay Rollers C C C Water or alcohol.
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Water or alcohol.
Bottom Plate Pad (By-
pass feed)
C C C
Water or alcohol.
Registration Sensor C C C Blower brush
Paper Feed Roller Gear
L L L
Silicone Grease G-501. See
note below.
1
DUPLEX UNIT
Upper Transport Roller C C C Water or alcohol.
Lower Transport Roller C C C Water or alcohol.
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
Transfer Belt C R R R Dry cloth
Transfer Belt Cleaning
Blade
R R R
Transfer Belt Rollers C C C Dry cloth
Entrance Seal C C C Dry cloth
Transfer Entrance
Guide
C C C C
Dry cloth
Used Toner Tank I C C C Empty the tank.
PM TABLE
SM 2-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
B003/B004B006/B007 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT
Fusing Entrance and
Exit Guide Plates
C C C
Water or alcohol.
Hot Roller R R R
Pressure Roller R R R
Fusing Thermistors R R R
Cleaning Roller C C C Water or alcohol.
Cleaning Roller
Bushings
L L L
Grease: Barrierta JFE 55/2
Hot Roller Strippers C R C Water or alcohol.
Paper Exit Guide Ribs C C C Water or alcohol.
Exit Sensor C C C
DRIVE
Drive Belts I Replace if necessary
B351 EM 80K 160K 240K NOTE
ARDF (for originals)
Pick-up Roller C R R R Belt cleaner
Feed Belt C R R R Belt cleaner
Separation Roller C R R R Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C C C Blower brush
Drive Gears L L L Grease, G501
A682 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
PAPER TRAY UNIT
Paper Feed Rollers R R R
Pick-up Rollers R R R
Separation Rollers
R R R
Check counter with SP7-204. If
150 K, replace roller. After
replacing the roller, do SP7-816
to reset counter.
Relay Rollers C C C Dry or damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Dry or damp cloth
A683 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
LCT
Paper Feed Roller
R R R
Check counter with SP7-204. If
150 K, replace roller. After
replacing the roller, do SP7-816
to reset counter.
Pick-up Roller R R R
Separation Roller R R R
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Dry or damp cloth
PM TABLE
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-4 SM
A681/B352 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
1000-SHEET/Two-Tray FINISHER
Rollers C Water or alcohol.
Brush Roller
(A681 only)
I I I I
Replace if required.
Discharge Brush C C C C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if required.
Punch Waste Hopper I I I I Empty hopper.
B376 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
1-BIN TRAY UNIT
Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
1
Note: Lubricate the paper feed clutch
gear [A] with Silicone Grease G501
every P.M.
A689D500.WMF
[A]
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
GENERAL CAUTIONS
SM 3-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
!CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transfer belt, drum, or development unit when it is
removed or re-installed, never turn off either power switch while electrical
components are active.
!CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
any of the procedures in this section.
3.1.1 LASER UNIT
1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode
casing. Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open
the optical housing unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare
hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment. Otherwise, an
SC condition will be generated.
3.1.2 USED TONER
1. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner
into an open flame, for toner dust may ignite.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-2 SM
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Qty
A2309003 Adjustment Cam Laser Unit 1
A2309004 Positioning Pin Laser Unit 1
A2309352 Flash Memory Card 4MB 1
A2309351 Case Flash Memory Card 1
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set) 1
A2929500 Test Chart S5S (10 pcs/Set) 1
G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector 1
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part Number Description Qty
A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1
52039501 Silicone Grease G-501 1
3.2.3 SYMBOLS USED IN TEXT
Screw: ! Connector: " C-clamp (snap ring): # E-clamp: $
FRONT DOOR
SM 3-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.3 FRONT DOOR
1. Open front door.
2. Front door. Left pin [A], right pin [B].
3.4 DUPLEX UNIT
1. Connector cover [A] (! x1)
2. Duplex connectors [B] (" x2)
3. Duplex support arm [C] (# x1)
4. Duplex unit [D]
NOTE: Grip the duplex unit with both hands, slowly rotate it towards you and
then lift up.
B004R951.WMF
B004R003.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
UPPER RIGHT COVER
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-4 SM
3.5 UPPER RIGHT COVER
NOTE: Work carefully to avoid damaging the development roller.
1. Duplex Unit ( 3.4)
2. Transfer belt unit ( 3.13.1)
3. Metal support arm [A] (! x1)
4. Band support arm [B] (loop fastener)
5. Connector [C] (" x1)
6. Upper right cover (# x1, Bushing x1)
B004R915.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
BY-PASS TRAY
SM 3-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.6 BY-PASS TRAY
1. Duplex unit ( 3.4)
2. Left cover [A] (! x1)
3. Right cover [B] (! x1)
4. Connectors [C] (" x2)
5. By-pass unit [D] (! x4)
NOTE: After removing the screws, lift to unhook the by-pass tray unit from the
frame of the machine.
B004R952.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
REAR COVERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-6 SM
3.7 REAR COVERS
3.7.1 REAR UPPER COVER
1. Left corner cover [A] (! x2)
2. Rear upper cover [B] (! x2)
3.7.2 REAR LOWER COVER
1. Rear lower cover [A] (! x4)
B004R953.WMF
B004R954.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
LEFT COVERS
SM 3-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.8 LEFT COVERS
3.8.1 LEFT UPPER COVER
1. Rear left corner cover [A] (! x2)
2. Left upper cover [B] (! x4)
B004R955.WMF
[A]
[B]
SCANNER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-8 SM
3.9 SCANNER UNIT
3.9.1 ARDF
1. Interface connector
2. ARDF [A] (! x2) Push the ARDF towards the front of the machine to align the
keyholes (not shown) of the ARDF base with the heads of the stud screws and
lift.
B004R535.WMF
[A]
[B]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.9.2 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. Open the ARDF or platen cover.
2. Rear scale [A] (! x3)
3. Left scale [B] (! x2)
4. Exposure glass [C]
5. DF exposure glass [D]
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the white dot is
positioned at the rear left corner.
B004R959.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-10 SM
3.9.3 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS/OPERATION PANEL
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass and DF exposure glass( 3.9.2)
3. Operation panel [A] (! x2, " x1)
4. Operation panel base [B] (! x4)
5. Rear cover [C] (! x4). Carefully lift in the direction of the arrow to disconnect
the tab.
6. Right cover [D] (! x3 )
7. Left cover [E] (! x2)
B004R108.WMF
B004R115.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.9.4 LENS BLOCK/SBU ASSEMBLY
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass and DF exposure glass ( 3.9.2)
3. Lens cover [A] (! x4)
4. Flexible cable [B] (" x1)
5. Lens block assembly [C] (! x4)
NOTE: The elements of the lens block assembly have been factory adjusted
and paint locked at 8 points. Do not attempt to replace these items.
Replace the unit.
6. Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments ( 3.21)
B004R512.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-12 SM
3.9.5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass ( 3.9.2)
3. Lens block ( 3.9.4)
4. Original size sensor [A] (! x1, " x1)
5. Original size sensor [B] (! x1, " x1)
6. Original size sensor [C] (! x1, " x1)
B004R958.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.9.6 EXPOSURE LAMP
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass ( 3.9.2)
3. Operation panel [A] (! x2, " x1)
4. Slide 1st scanner [B] to the cutout to expose connector and screw.
5. Exposure lamp [C] (! x1, " x1)
NOTE: Never touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with fingers. Slide
the exposure lamp toward the rear to disengage the tab on its base
from the hole below and then lift out.
B004R105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SCANNER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-14 SM
3.9.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Scanner rear cover ( 3.9.3)
3. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] (! x1)
4. Scanner HP sensor [B] (" x1)
5. Platen cover sensor [C] (! x1, " x1)
B004R107.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.9.8 SCANNER MOTOR
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Scanner rear cover ( 3.9.3)
3. Rear bracket [A] (! x5, " x2)
4. Scanner motor bracket [B] (! x3, " x1, spring x1, timing belt x1)
NOTE: Loosen motor bracket [B] (! x3) to release tension on belt (motor
slides side to side).
5. Scanner motor [C] (! x2, " x1)
6. Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments ( 3.21)
B004R956.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-16 SM
3.9.9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Scanner rear cover ( 3.9.3)
3. Rear bracket [A] (! x5, " x2)
4. Lamp stabilizer [B] (" x2, standbys x3)
5. Scanner motor drive board [C] (" x2, ! x2)
B004R960.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.9.10 SCANNER WIRE
1. ARDF ( 3.9.1)
2. Exposure glass ( 3.9.2)
3. Scanner exterior panels and operation panel ( 3.9.3)
Front wire:
4. Left stay [A] (! x5)
5. Right stay [B] (! x5)
6. Front stay [C] (! x6)
7. Front scanner rail [D] (! x2)
8. To replace the scanner wire, see page 3-19.
B004R109.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SCANNER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-18 SM
Rear wire:
1. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] (! x1)
2. Scanner motor (3.9.8)
3. Rear bracket [B] (! x9)
4. Rear scanner rail [C] (! x2)
5. Scanner drive pulley [D] (! x1)
B004R961.WMF
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
To replace the scanner wire:
1. Front and rear scanner wire bracket [A] (! x1 ea.)
2. Tension spring [B]
3. Tension bracket [C] (! x1). Loosen and do not remove!
4. Remove wires, front and rear.
5. Attach the new wires.
NOTE: Illustration above shows the front wire.
6. Pass the wire through the pulleys as shown in the illustration, and then pass
the bead-end of the wire through the slot in the pulley.
7. Turn the pulley until you see the red mark on the wire. 2 turns and 6 turns (see
top illustration)
8. Without allowing the wire to loosen, tape the wire to the pulley.
9. Pass the wire through !.
10. Complete threading the wire: "#$#%#Tension spring#Screw
11. Scanner wire bracket & (! x1)
B004R111.WMF
B004R112.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-20 SM
Completion:
1. Adjust the 1st scanner [A] position with the scanner positioning tools (P/N
A0069104).
2. Secure the 1st scanner with the scanner wire brackets [B] (! x2)
3. Tighten tension bracket [C] (! x1)
4. Secure scanner wire pulley [D] (Allen screw x1)
1) Remove the positioning tools. After sliding the scanner to the right and left
several times, set the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket
and tension bracket again.
2) Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments
( 3.21)
B004R113.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[A]
LASER UNIT
SM 3-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.10 LASER UNIT
!WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
3.10.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS
Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See next
page for removal instructions.)
A232R500.CDR
LASER-1.WMF
LASER-3.WMF
LASER_PS2.WMF
LASER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-22 SM
3.10.2 LASER UNIT
!WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
this procedure. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
1. Open the front door and raise the toner bottle holder handle [A].
2. Front door [B] (pins x2)
3. Inner cover [C] (! x2, " x2)
4. Shield glass [D]
5. Shield plate [E] (! x2)
6. Laser unit connectors [F] (" x5, " x1 flat cable)
NOTE: Hold the LD board securely when disconnecting connectors.
7. Laser unit [G] (! x2)
NOTE: When sliding out the laser unit, do not hold the LD board. Hold the
laser unit casing.
B004R962.WMF
B004R211.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[D]
LASER UNIT
SM 3-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.10.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
1. Laser unit ( 3.10.2)
2. Laser unit cover [A] (! x4, 2 hooks)
3. Polygon mirror motor [B] (! x4, " x1)
4. After replacing the motor, do the image adjustment. ( 3.21)
B004R903.WMF
B004R201.WMF
B004R202.WMF
[A]
[B]
[B]
45 cpm machine
35 cpm machine
LASER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-24 SM
3.10.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR
1. Laser unit ( 3.10.2)
2. Laser synchronization detector [A] (! x1, " x1).
3.10.5 LD UNIT
1. Laser unit ( 3.10.2)
2. LD unit [A] (! x3, " x1)
NOTE: To avoid damaging the LD board, hold it securely when disconnecting
the connectors. Hold the laser unit casing.
3. After replacing the LD board, perform SP 2-109 to adjust the laser beam pitch
(described on the next page).
B004R206.WMF
B004R513.WMF
[A]
[A]
LASER UNIT
SM 3-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
Laser beam pitch adjustment
After replacing the LD board, perform the laser beam pitch adjustment. There are
two laser beam pitch adjustment procedures: one for 400 dpi, and one for 600 dpi.
These adjustments use the following SP modes.
SP2-110 Test Mode Dpi (0: 400 dpi, 8: 600 dpi)
SP2-109-1: LD Beam Pitch Adjustment 400 dpi
SP2-109-2: LD Beam Pitch Adjustment 600 dpi
SP2-109-3: LD Initial Setting 400 dpi
SP2-109-4: LD Initial Setting 600 dpi
1. Set SP2-110 to 0 (for 400 dpi).
2. Do SP 2-109-8.
3. For SP2-109-1 input 144.
NOTE: The entry 144 is only a starting reference value that will allow the
machine to operate. It is only a starting point for adjustment.
4. Perform SP2-109-3.
5. Print the test pattern onto A3 (11" x 17") paper using SP2-902-3 no.15. (
Section 5 Service Tables, 5.1.2 Test Pattern Printing (SP2-902).
6. On the test pattern write 144, the value of SP2-109-1.
7. Change the value of SP2-109-1 and then print another test pattern, repeating
steps 2 to 4. Print about 5 patterns with different values for SP2-109-1 (e.g. 48,
96, 192, 240).
8. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, the image
looks like a black vertical stripe pattern.
NOTE: For example, if the pattern made with the value 192 has fewer obvious
stripes than the other printouts, the correct value is near 192.
9. Do steps 2, 3, and 4 to adjust the laser beam pitch position until thin lines are of
uniform thickness (no stripes should appear on the printout).
NOTE: In step 2, input a value estimated to be correct, then do steps 3 and 4,
then if necessary go back to step 1 and try another value.
10. After adjusting the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi, adjust the laser beam pitch for
600 dpi, using the same procedure as for 400 dpi (use the SP modes for 600
dpi). Laser beam pitch for 600 dpi should be 24~48 more than for 400 dpi.
A284R512.BMP
A284R513.WMF
Adjustment not complete
Adjustment complete
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-26 SM
3.11 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3.11.1 PCU
1. Open the front door.
2. Lower the by-pass tray, open the duplex unit, and open the transfer unit right
cover.
3. Loosen [A] (! x1).
4. Rotate bracket [B] to the left.
5. Push the release lever !, pull the PCU out slightly", then push the
development unit $ to the left.
6. Grasp handle [C], and slowly pull the PCU out.
NOTE: If the right cover is to be left open for a long time, cover the drum with
paper, or remove the PCU and cover it with paper. This prevents
exposing the drum to strong light. Before you re-install the PCU, align
the brackets on the PCU with the rails above and make sure they are
engaged before you slowly push the PCU into the machine.
B004R500.WMF
B004R301.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
SM 3-27 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.11.2 DRUM
1. PCU ( 3.11.1)
2. Toner cap [A]
3. Insert cap [A] into the toner entrance hole [B].
4. Make sure that the cap is inserted completely into the hole.
5. Turn the PCU upside-down, and remove lower PCU cover [C] (! x2, 3 pawls).
6. Pull the drum [D] towards the front # (the left side in the illustration) while
releasing the charge roller [E] using the release lever $ [F], and then remove
the drum %.
CAUTION: Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.
7. After replacing the drum, perform the ID sensor initial setting using SP3-001-2.
8. Do the process initial setting procedure (SP2-805).
B004R302.WMF
B004R963.WMF
B004R304.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-28 SM
3.11.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS
1. Remove the drum. ( 3.11.2)
2. Pawl assembly [A]
3. Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x1, spur x1)
Pick-off pawl position adjustment
If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can
be adjusted using either method:
Changing the spur position.
Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position
B004R305.WMF
[A]
[B]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
SM 3-29 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING PAD & ROLLER BRUSH
1. Remove the drum. (3.11.2)
2. Two snap rings [A] ( x2)
3. Slide out front charge roller holder [B]
4. Charge roller [C]
NOTE: Do not touch the charge roller.
5. Remove charge roller cleaning pad [D] (4 hooks)
6. After replacing the charge roller, check the value of SP2-001-1. If it is not at the
standard value (1480V), set SP2-001-1 to 1480V.
NOTE: If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the
charge roller voltage will be too high.
Refer To Page 3-30 For The Charge Roller/Charge Cleaning Roller
Brush Replacement Procedure.
B004R306.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Rev. 02/2002
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-30 SM
CLEANING ROLLER BRUSH REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE.
1. Remove the drum. (3.11.2)
2. Two snap rings [A] ( x2)
3. Slide out front charge roller holder [B]
NOTE: Do not touch the charge roller.
4. Remove charge roller [C] and the charge roller cleaning brush [D].
5. After replacing the charge roller, check the value of SP2-001-1. If it is not at the
standard value (1480V), set SP2-001-1 to 1480V.
NOTE: If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the
charge roller voltage will be too high.
Rev. 02/2002
Cleaning Roller2.wmf
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
SM 3-31 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE
1. Remove the drum. (3.11.2)
2. Remove the charge roller.
(3.11.4)
3. Remove the drum cleaning
blade [A] ( x2)
3.11.6 ID SENSOR
1. PCU (3.11.1)
2. Fusing unit (3.15.1)
3. Development unit (3.12.1)
4. Remove the PCU rail [A] ( x2,
x1)
5. Remove the ID sensor bracket [B] (
x1, x1)
6. Remove the ID sensor [C] ( x1)
7. Perform the ID sensor initial setting
with SP3-001-2 ( Chapter 5,
Service Tables)
B004R931.WMF
[A]
B004R931.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
Rev. 02/2002
DEVELOPMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-32 SM
3.12 DEVELOPMENT
3.12.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
1. Open the right upper cover and front cover.
2. PCU. ( 3.11.1)
NOTE: Spread paper on a clean flat surface that is free of pins, paper clips,
staples, screws or any other metal objects.
3. Loosen [A] (! x1)
4. Rotate bracket [B] left.
5. Development unit [C]
NOTE: Pull slowly to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
6. Set the development unit on the spread paper.
7. If you are temporarily installing a used development unit for test purposes,
perform SP2-220 and 2-802-1 after installation ( Chapter 5, Service Tables)
B004R500.WMF
B004R401.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
DEVELOPMENT
SM 3-33 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.12.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER
1. Development unit ( 3.12.1)
2. Upper development cover [A] (# x 2)
3. Development filter [B]
NOTE: Make sure that the surface with the red mark is facing up.
4. Make sure that the ground plate [C] is positioned correctly.
3.12.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER
1. Development unit ( 3.12.1)
2. Upper development cover ( 3.12.2)
3. Development roller [A] (! x2)
NOTE: Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
B004R957.WMF
B004R402.WMF
B004R106.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
[C]
DEVELOPMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-34 SM
3.12.4 DEVELOPER
1. Development unit ( 3.12.1)
2. Remove the development roller ( 3.12.3)
3. Empty toner [A]
4. Turn drive gear [B] to ensure that no developer remains in the unit or on the
developer roller.
NOTE: Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations.
Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
5. Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer [C] evenly along the length of the
development unit.
6. Rotate the drive gear [D] to work the developer into the unit. Repeat [C] and [D]
until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges.
B004R404.WMF
B004R405.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
DEVELOPMENT
SM 3-35 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
7. Reassemble the development unit
8. Cover the toner entrance hole [A] with a piece of paper.
9. Install the development unit in the machine.
10. Turn on the main power switch, make sure that the machine has warmed up,
then perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP 2-801.
NOTE: When performing this setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a
piece of paper. This prevents used toner falling from the PCU into the
development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering
with the Vref setting (toner density reference voltage).
11. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet [A] from the
development unit.
B004R518.WMF
[A]
DEVELOPMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-36 SM
3.12.5 TD SENSOR
1. Remove the development unit ( 3.12.1)
2. Empty all developer from the developer ( 3.12.4)
3. TD sensor [A] (! x1)
NOTE: The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double-sided tape. Pry it
off with the flat head of a screwdriver. Use fresh double-sided tape to
re-attach the sensor.
4. Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial
setting using SP2-801.
NOTE: When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance
hole with a piece of paper ( 3.12.4).
B004R975.WMF
[A]
TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-37 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.13 TRANSFER UNIT
3.13.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
NOTE: To avoid exposing the PCU drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the
right cover will be open for a long period.
1. Lower the by-pass tray, open the duplex unit, and open the right cover.
2. Transfer unit [A] (1 hook)
3. Transfer belt [B] (springs x2, 1 hook)
NOTE: Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
B004R501.WMF
B004R522.WMF
[A]
[B]
TRANSFER UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-38 SM
3.13.2 TRANSFER BELT
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. ( 3.13.1)
2. Belt drive gear [A]
3. Set screws [B] (! x2)
4. Lay on a flat, clean surface and fold the unit to release the tension on the belt
[C].
5. Transfer belt [D]
NOTE: 1) Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
2) Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and shafts
with alcohol to prevent the belt from slipping.
3) When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the
pin [E].
4) To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the
rollers and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the
edges of any of the rollers.
B004R524.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-39 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.13.3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE AND TONER
OVERFLOW SENSOR
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
1. Transfer belt unit. ( 3.13.1)
2. Transfer belt. ( 3.13.2)
3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] (! x3)
NOTE: Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for
dust or damage.
Toner Overflow Sensor
1. Transfer belt unit. ( 3.13.1)
2. Transfer belt. ( 3.13.2)
3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] (! x3)
4. Turn over the transfer unit and empty the used toner in the transfer unit.
5. Toner overflow sensor [B] (! x1, " x3)
NOTE: Re-install the color-coded wires in the correct order.
B004R523.WMF
[B]
[A]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-40 SM
3.14 PAPER FEED
3.14.1 PICK-UP, SEPARATION, AND FEED ROLLERS
1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A]
3. Feed roller [B] (# x 1)
4. Separation roller [C] (# x 1)
NOTE: Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands. After installing the new
rollers, do SP 7-816 for the appropriate paper tray.
B004R918.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED
SM 3-41 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.14.2 LOWER RIGHT COVER
1. Duplex unit ( 3.4)
2. By-pass tray ( 3.6)
3. LCT (if installed)
4. Lower right cover [A] (! x5)
5. Vertical transport cover [B]
NOTE: Push the cover completely to the left and then press in on the right tab
to release the peg from the hole.
B004R904.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-42 SM
3.14.3 RELAY/UPPER PAPER FEED AND LOWER PAPER FEED
CLUTCHES
1. Rear lower cover ( 3.7.2)
2. First paper feed clutch bracket [A] (! x2, bushing x1)
3. Second paper feed clutch bracket [B] (! x2, bushing x1)
4. Drive bracket [C] (! x1, spring x1, bearing x1)
5. Relay clutch [D] (" x1)
6. Upper paper feed clutch [E] (" x1)
7. Lower paper feed clutch [F] (" x1)
B004R973.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PAPER FEED
SM 3-43 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.14.4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1
1. Upper paper tray
2. Right lower cover. ( 3.14.2)
3. Upper right cover ( 3.5)
4. Upper paper feed clutch [A] ( 3.14.3)
5. 3 relay gears [B]
6. Upper paper feed unit [C] (! x2, " x1)
B004R910.WMF
B004R911.WMF
[A]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-44 SM
3.14.5 LOWER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2
1. Lower the paper trays
2. Right lower cover (3.14.2)
3. Remove the lower paper feed clutch [A] ( 3.14.3)
4. Relay gears [B] (x3)
5. Cover [C] (! x2)
6. Gear [D] (x1)
7. Lower paper feed unit [E] (! x2, " x1)
B004R913.WMF
B004R974.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
PAPER FEED
SM 3-45 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.14.6 PAPER END/PAPER HEIGHT/RELAY SENSORS
1. Appropriate paper feed unit ( 3.14.4, 3.14.5)
2. Paper height sensor [A] (" x1)
3. Paper end sensor [B] (" x1).
4. Relay sensor bracket [C] (! x1, " x1)
5. Relay sensor [D]
B004R914.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-46 SM
3.14.7 REGISTRATION SENSOR
1. Front door ( 3-3 )
2. Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1)
3. Right door and transfer belt unit
(3.5, 3.13.1
4. PCU ( 3.11.1)
5. Development unit ( 3.12.1)
6. Inner cover [A] (! x2)
7. Front registration holder [B] (! x1)
8. Front registration roller gear [C] ($ x1)
9. Registration roller bushing [D] (Spring x 1)
10. High voltage power supply board [E]
(! x3, " x6)
11. Flywheel [F] (! x3)
12. Right rear cover [G] (! x3)
13. Right cover switch bracket [H] (! x1)
14. Rear registration holder [I] ($ x1,
spring x1)
15. Registration roller bushing [J] ($ x1)
B004R932.WMF
B004R972.WMF
B004R933.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
PAPER FEED
SM 3-47 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
16. Guide plate [A] and registration roller [B] (spring x1, # x 1)
17. Registration guide plate [C] (! x2, " x1)
18. Sensor bracket [D] (! x1)
19. Registration sensor [E] (! x1, " x1)
B004R934.WMF
B004R935.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-48 SM
3.14.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1. Rear lower cover ( 3.7.2)
2. Bracket [A] (! x2)
3. Motor control board [B] (! x2, " x13)
4. Tray lift motor [C] (! x2)
B004R964.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED
SM 3-49 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.14.9 FEED/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
1. Rear lower cover (! x4) (3.7.2)
2. Rear upper cover (! x4) (3.7.1)
3. Tray lift motor ( 3.14.8)
4. Support [A] (! x2, harnesses x2)
5. Timing belt [B] (Raise arm to release tension on belt.)
6. Feed/development motor [C] (! x3, " x2)
B004R902.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-50 SM
3.15 FUSING
3.15.1 FUSING UNIT
!CAUTION
Allow time for the unit to cool before doing the following procedure.
1. Open front door, duplex unit, and right door.
2. Set screw [A] (! x1)
3. Fusing unit release lever [B]
4. Slide out fusing unit [C]
NOTE: After removing the fusing unit, close the right cover.
B004R611.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING
SM 3-51 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.15.2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE
1. Fusing unit ( 3.15.1)
2. Exit guide [A]
NOTE: Press the guide to the left and then press on the right end to release
the peg from the hole.
3.15.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS
1. Fusing unit ( 3.15.1)
2. Fusing unit cover [A] (! x4)
NOTE: Note the positioning of the step screws x2 and the set screws x2.
3. Hot roller strippers x7, springs x7
B004R601.WMF
B004R602.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
FUSING
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-52 SM
3.15.4 FUSING LAMPS
1. Fusing unit ( 3.15.1)
2. Fusing unit cover ( 3.15.3)
3. Fusing entrance guide [A] (! x2)
4. Lower cover [B] (! x1)
Left side
5. Two terminals [C] (! x2)
6. Center fusing lamp lead [D] (3 clamps)
7. Bracket [E] (! x1)
B004R603.WMF
B004R606.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
FUSING
SM 3-53 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
Right side
1. Two terminals [A] (! x2)
2. Spring [B]
3. Connector bracket [C] (! x2)
4. Bracket [D] (! x2)
NOTE: To avoid breaking the fusing lamps, handle them with care. Avoid
touching the lamps with your fingers. Note the top/bottom positioning of
the fusing lamps as you remove them. The sizes of the holes in the
holder match the sizes of the ends of the 650 W lamp (red) and 550 W
lamp (brown).
5. Remove both fusing lamps.
B004R607.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FUSING
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-54 SM
3.15.5 THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS
1. Fusing unit ( 3.15.1)
2. Fusing upper and lower cover. ( 3.15.3, 3.15.4)
3. Center thermistor [A] (! x1, " x1, holder x1)
4. End thermistor [B] (! x1, " x1, holder x1)
CAUTION: The thermistors are thinly coated and extremely fragile. Handle with
care to avoid damaging them. They should be replaced every 150K.
5. Center thermostat [C] (! x2)
6. End thermostat [D] (! x2)
B004R605.WMF
B004R604.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FUSING
SM 3-55 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.15.6 FUSING ROLLER/PRESSURE ROLLER
1. Fusing unit ( 3.15.1)
2. Fusing upper and lower cover. ( 3.15.3, 3.15.4)
3. Fusing lamp. ( 3.15.4)
4. Springs x2 [A] (both sides)
5. Arms x2 [B] (both sides)
6. Pawl bracket [C] (! x4)
B004R608.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-56 SM
1. Hot roller [A]
CAUTION: The hot roller is easily damaged. Always handle it carefully.
2. C-rings x2 [B] (both ends)
3. Drive gear [C]
4. Bushing x2 [D] (both ends)
5. Pressure roller [E]
6. Fusing knob [F] (! x1)
7. Bushing x2 [G] (both ends)
NOTE: 1) Before installing the new hot roller, peel off 3 cm (1 inch) from both
ends of the protective sheet on the new roller.
2) Never touch the surface of the rollers.
3) Work carefully to damaging the surface of the hot roller.
4) The standard pressure roller spring position is the upper position.
5) When reinstalling the hot roller assembly and pressure roller
assembly, make sure that the flange position of the bushings is as
shown.
6) When reinstalling the C-rings [B] of the hot roller, make sure that the
position of the C-rings is as shown.
B004R609.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
BY-PASS TRAY
SM 3-57 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.16 BY-PASS TRAY
3.16.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
1. Rear cover [A] (! x1)
2. Front cover [B] (! x1)
3. Hinge cover [C] (! x1)
4. Upper cover [D] (! x2)
5. Close duplex unit and pull out upper cover.
B004R540.WMF
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
BY-PASS TRAY
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-58 SM
3.1.2 BY-PASS PAPER FEED AND PICK-UP ROLLER
REPLACEMENT
1. Upper cover ( 3.16.1)
2. Lift up paper end feeler [A] to lock feeler in position.
NOTE: Before reinstalling the upper cover, return the paper end feeler to its
original position.
3. Replace the paper feed roller [B] (# x1)
4. Replace pick-up roller [C].
B004R541.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
BY-PASS TRAY
SM 3-59 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.16.3 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1. Close by-pass table.
2. Remove separation roller [A] from the bottom (# x1)
A689R502.WMF
[A]
BY-PASS TRAY
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-60 SM
3.16.4 PAPER END SENSOR AND PICK-UP SOLENOID
REPLACEMENT
1. Upper cover ( 3.16.1)
2. Lift paper end feeler [A].
NOTE: Before reinstalling the upper cover, return the paper end feeler to its
original position.
3. Replace paper end sensor [B] (" x1).
4. Pick-up solenoid [C] (! x1, ") x1, spring x1).
B004R543.WMF
[C]
[B] [A]
BY-PASS TRAY
SM 3-61 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.16.5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT
1. Hook [A]
2. Paper tray [B] (" x1).
3. Size sensor board [C].
NOTE: To avoid breaking the hook of the paper size sensor board, handle it
carefully during removal.
B004R544.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
BY-PASS TRAY
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-62 SM
3.16.6 BY-PASS TABLE REMOVAL
1. Hinge cover ( 3.16.1)
1. Harness [A] (" x1).
2. Screws [B] (! x2)
3. Retard spring bracket and remove the by-pass table [C].
CAUTION: To relieve pressure on the spring during removal, depress it as shown
in the illustration.
B004R505.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
BY-PASS TRAY
SM 3-63 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.16.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
1. By-pass tray.
2. Paper feed unit [A] (! x2, " x2)
3. Rear bracket [B] (! x4, clip x1, bushing x1)
4. Paper feed clutch [C] (" x1)
A689R506.WMF
A689R507.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
DUPLEX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-64 SM
3.17 DUPLEX UNIT
3.17.1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL
1. Duplex unit cover [A] (! x4)
B363R101.WMF
[A]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 3-65 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Duplex unit cover ( 3.17.1)
2. Sensor holder [A] (! x1)
3. Entrance sensor [B] (" x1)
B004R102.WMF
[A]
[B]
DUPLEX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-66 SM
3.17.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Duplex unit (3.4)
2. Sensor bracket [A] (! x1)
3. Exit sensor [B] (" x1)
B004R103.WMF
[A]
[B]
DRIVE AREA
SM 3-67 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.18 DRIVE AREA
3.18.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH AND TRANSFER BELT
CONTACT CLUTCH
1. Rear upper cover (not shown) (! x2)
2. High voltage supply board [A] (" x6, ! x3)
NOTE: Make sure that you re-connect the wires in
the correct order. They are labeled 1 # 2
# B # C
3. Flywheel [B] (! x3)
4. Registration clutch [C] ($ x1, " x1)
5. Transfer belt contact clutch [D] (" x2, ! x2)
B004R965.WMF
B004R966.WMF
B004R502.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
DRIVE AREA
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-68 SM
3.18.2 MAIN MOTOR
1. Rear upper cover, high voltage power supply, flywheel ( 3.18.1)
2. Timing belt [A] x1
3. Bracket [B] (! x3)
4. Main motor [C] (" x2, ! x3)
B004R907.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
DRIVE AREA
SM 3-69 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.18.3 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
1. Open the front door
2. Raise holder handle [A]
3. Push the holder lever [B] to the right
4. Stopper [C]
5. Toner bottle holder and bottle [D]
6. Motor harness [E] (clamps x 2)
7. Toner supply motor [F] (hooks x2, " x1)
NOTE: Press in on both sides of the motor to release it.
B004R921.WMF
B004R922.WMF
[B]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[D]
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-70 SM
3.19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
3.19.1 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
1. Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1)
2. High voltage power supply [A] (! x3, " x6)
B004R965.WMF
[A]
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
SM 3-71 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.19.2 I/O BOARD
1. Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1)
2. Rear left corner cover ( 3.8.1)
3. Expansion box [A] (! x5)
4. I/O board [B] (! x2, " x all)
NOTE: Make sure that the DIP switch settings on the new board are the same
as those on the old board.
B004R967.WMF
B004R968.WMF
[A]
[B]
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-72 SM
3.19.3 BICU BOARD
1. I/O Board ( 3.19.2)
2. BICU board [A] (! x5, "x all)
3.19.4 PSU
1. Left upper cover ( 3.8.1)
2. PSU [A] (! x4, " x all)
B004R969.WMF
B004R970.WMF
[A]
[A]
HARD DISK/CONTROLLER BOARD
SM 3-73 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.20 HARD DISK/CONTROLLER
BOARD
1. Left rear corner cover ( 3.8.1)
2. Expansion spacer [A] ( x2)
3. Controller board [B] ( x2)
NOTE: Use the wire handle to slide the
HDD out of the expansion box.
4. Remove the NVRAM from the old
Controller Board and install it on the new
board.
5. HDD unit bracket [C] ( x3, x2)
6. HDD unit [D] ( x4)
NOTE: Work carefully to avoid
dropping or hitting the HDD.
B004R104.WMF
B004R971.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Rev. 09/2002
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-74 SM
3.21 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
NOTE: 1) Perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following:
Scanner Wire
Lens Block/SBU Assembly
Scanner Drive Motor
Polygon Mirror Motor
Paper Side Fence
Memory All Clear
( Chapter 5, Service Tables)
3.21.1 PRINTING
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these
adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No. 11 to print the test pattern for
the following procedures.
3. After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0
again.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
1. Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001.
Specification: 3 2mm.
2. Check side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust with the
following SP modes.
SP mode Specification
1st paper feed SP1-002-1
2nd paper feed SP1-002-2
3rd paper feed
(Optional PFU tray 1)
SP1-002-3
4th paper feed
(Optional PTU tray 2)
SP1-002-4
From the duplex tray SP1-002-5
By-pass feed SP1-002-6
LCT SP1-002-7
2 1.5 mm
B
A
A284R506.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
SM 3-75 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within
specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the
following SP modes.
SP mode Specification
Trailing edge SP2-101-2 3 2 mm
Right edge SP2-101-4 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
Leading edge SP2-101-1 3 2 mm
Left edge SP2-101-3 2 1.5 mm
Trailing edge (duplex
copy, 2
nd
side)
SP2-101-5 1.2 2 mm
Left edge (duplex copy,
2
nd
side)
SP2-101-6 0.3 1.5 mm
Right edge (duplex
copy, 2
nd
side)
SP2-101-7 0.3+2.5/-1.5 mm
Main Scan Magnification
1. Use SP2-902-3, 5 (Printing Test Pattern, Single-Dot Line) to print a single dot
pattern.
2. Check magnification, and then SP2-909-1 (Main Scan Magnification: Copy) to
adjust magnification if required. Specification: 2%.
D
C
B
A
B004R507.WMF
A: Trailing edge blank margin
B: Right edge blank margin
C: Leading edge blank margin
D: Left edge blank margin
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-76 SM
Parallelogram Image Adjustment
Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing
registration or printing margin using a trimming area pattern.
The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration
for each paper tray station.
Use SP2-902-3 No. 11 (Printing Test Pattern: Belt Pattern Trimming Area) to
determine whether a parallelogram image appears. If the parallelogram pattern
appears, perform the following procedure.
1. Laser unit [A]
2. Bracket [B] (! x2)
3. Install adjustment cam [C] (P/N: A2309003)
4. Secure positioning pin [D] (P/N A2309004) with the two screws removed with
the bracket [B]. Do not tighten the screws at this time.
5. To adjust the position of the laser unit [E]
1) Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam. (See illustration
above.)
2) Tighten the adjustment bracket.
3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not
satisfactory, repeat steps 1 to 3.
B004R207.WMF
Tur n
cl ockwi se
Tur n
count er cl ockwi se
B004R515.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
[D]
[E]
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
SM 3-77 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.21.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the
following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode
Leading Edge SP4-010
Side-to-side SP4-011
Magnification
Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Sub Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a
copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 (Scanner
Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if necessary.
Specification: 0.9%.
B
A
B004R508.WMF
A
B004R510.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
A: Main scan magnification
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-78 SM
3.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Registration
1. Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
2. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
3. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-1 Side-to-Side Registration 3.0 mm
SP6-006-2 Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) 3.0 mm
SP6-006-3 Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: Front) 4.2 mm
SP6-006-4 Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: Back) 4.2 mm
B004R511.WMF
B
A
B004R508.WMF
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
SM 3-79 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.21.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
After clearing the memory, or if the touch panel detection function is not working
correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only.
1. Press ", press #$$%, and then press & 5 times to open the Self-
Diagnostics menu.
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press #).
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ').
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
B004R503.WMF
B004R504.WMF
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
A
To prevent damage to the machine, the main
machine cannot be operated until the SC has
been reset by a service representative (see the
note below).
Enter SP mode, and then turn
the main power switch off and
on.
B
If the SC was caused by incorrect sensor
detection, the SC can be reset by turning the
main power switch off and on.
Turn the operation switch and
main power switch off and on.
C
The main machine can be operated as usual,
excluding the unit related to the service call.
Turn the operation switch off
and on.
D
The SC history is updated. The machine can be
operated as usual.
The SC will not be displayed.
Only the SC history is updated.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before replacing motors or sensors.
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-2 SM
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Exposure lamp error 101 C
The standard white level was not
detected properly when scanning the
white plate.
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective
Exposure lamp connector defective
Standard white plate dirty
Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of
position or dirty
SBU defective
Scanner home position error 1 120 B
The scanner home position sensor
does not detect the on condition
during initialization or copying.
SIB or scanner drive motor defective
Scanner motor defective
Harness between SIB and scanner
drive motor disconnected
Harness between SIB and scanner
drive motor power source
disconnected
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between SIB and HP sensor
disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
Scanner home position error 2 121 B
The scanner home position sensor
does not detect the off condition
during initialization or copying.
SIB or scanner motor drive board
defective
Scanner motor defective
Harness between SIB and scanner
drive motor disconnected
Harness between SIB and scanner
drive motor power source
disconnected
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between SIB and scanner HP
sensor disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
SBU defective 130 B
Within 1 second after power on, the
SOUT signal does not go high, or
within 1 second after power on the
SOUT signal goes high, but the SBU
ID could not be read after two
attempts.
SBU defective
BICU defective
Harness between SBU and BICU
disconnected or damaged
F-Gate asserts during shading 131 B
F-Gate was asserted by the DF during
shading.
While scanning at the DF, a software
setting procedure caused an error.
You must reboot the machine.
Charge roller current leak 302 C
A charge roller current leak signal was
detected.
Charge roller damaged
High voltage supply board defective
PCU harness defective or disconnected
Charge roller current correction error 304 C
The charge roller bias correction is
performed twice even if the
maximum charge roller bias (-2000V)
is applied to the roller.
ID sensor defective
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Polygon motor error 320 C
The polygon motor does not reach its
operating speed within 25 seconds
after the polygon motor on signal, or
the lock signal is still activated for
more than 2 seconds after the
polygon motor off signal.
I/F harness at the polygon drive motor
disconnected or defective
Polygon motor or polygon motor driver
defective
Polygon motor drive pulse not output
correctly
LOCK signal could not be detected
F-Gate error: No laser writing signal 321 C
The laser writing signal (F-GATE) does
not go to LOW for more than 30
seconds after the copy paper
reaches the registration sensor.
BICU board defective
PCI harness between the controller
board and the BICU defective or
disconnected
1st laser synchronization error 322 C
The 1st laser synchronization signal
cannot be detected by the main scan
synchronization detector board even
if the laser diodes are activated.
Poor I/F harness connection between
the laser synchronization detector
board and the LD unit.
Laser synchronization detector board
out of position and angle of reflection
not correct
Laser synchronization detector board
defective
LD unit defective
LD drive current over 323 C
The LD drive board applies more than
100 mA to the LD.
LD unit defective (not enough power,
due to aging)
Poor connection between the LD unit
and the BICU board
BICU defective
2nd laser synchronization error 326 C
The 2nd laser synchronization signal
cannot be detected by the main scan
synchronization detector board even if
the laser diodes are activated.
Poor connection between the laser
synchronization detector board and
the LD unit.
Laser synchronization detector board
out of position
Laser synchronization detector board
defective
LD unit defective
LD unit home position error 1 327 B
The LD unit home position sensor does
not detect an on condition when the LD
unit moves to its home position.
HP sensor/harness defective
LD unit home position sensor defective
LD positioning motor harness defective
LD unit movement blocked because of
incorrect connector routing
LD unit home position error 2 328 B
The LD unit home position sensor does
not detect an off condition when the LD
unit moves from its home position.
HP sensor/harness defective
LD positioning/harness motor defective
LD unit movement blocked because of
incorrect connector routing
LD unit beam pitch adjusted incorrectly 329 B
The LD unit HP sensor does not detect
the ON condition while changing the LD
unit position for correcting the LD
position or changing the dpi.
After initialization of the SP modes,
SP2-109-3 or SP2-109-4 was not
executed.
The harness is blocking the LD drive
(PCB), preventing adjustment of the
pitch.
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-4 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
ID sensor pattern test error 350 C
One of the following ID sensor
output voltages was detected twice
consecutively when checking the ID
sensor pattern.
1) Vsp 2.5V
2) Vsg 2.5V
3) Vsp = 0V
4) Vsg = 0V
ID sensor defective
ID sensor connector defective
Poor ID sensor connector connection
I/O board (IOB) defective
High voltage supply board defective
ID sensor dirty
Defect at ID sensor pattern writing area
of the drum
ID sensor Vsg test error 351 C
When the ID sensor was checked, the
ID sensor output voltage was 5.0V
while the PWM signal input to the ID
sensor was 0.
ID sensor defective
ID sensor connector defective
Poor ID sensor connection
I/O board (IOB) defective
Scanning system defective
High voltage supply board defective
ID sensor dirty
Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing
area of the drum
ID sensor, pattern edge detect error 352 C
The ID sensor pattern edge voltage is
detected to be not 2.5V twice
consecutively during an 800 ms
interval.
ID sensor defective
ID sensor connector defective
Poor ID sensor connector connection
I/O board (IOB) defective
High voltage supply board defective
Dirty ID sensor
Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing
area of the drum
ID sensor, LED current abnormal at
initialization
353 C
One of the following ID sensor
output voltages is detected at ID
sensor initialization.
1) Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum
PWM input (255) is applied to
the ID sensor.
2) Vsg 4.0V when the minimum
PWM input (0) is applied to the
ID sensor.
ID sensor defective
ID sensor harness defective
ID sensor connector defective
Poor ID sensor connection
I/O board (IOB) defective
Exposure system defective
High voltage supply board defective
Dirty ID sensor
ID sensor timeout abnormal at
adjustment
354 C
Vsg falls out of the adjustment target
(4.0 0.2V) at the start of Vsg checking
after 20 seconds
ID sensor defective
ID sensor harness defective
ID sensor connector defective
I/O board (IOB) defective
Exposure system defective
Poor ID sensor connector connection
High voltage supply board defective
Dirty ID sensor
TD sensor error: Test value abnormal 390 C
The TD sensor output voltage is less
than 0.5V or more than 5.0V after 10
consecutive times during copying.
TD sensor defective
TD sensor not connected or connector
damaged
Poor connection between the TD
sensor and the I/O board (IOB)
I/O board (IOB) defective
Toner supply defective
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
TD sensor error: Auto adjust error 391 C
During automatic adjustment of the TD
sensor, output voltage is less than 1.8V
or more than 4.8V during TD sensor
initial setting.
TD sensor abnormal
TD sensor disconnected
Poor TD sensor connection
I/O Board (IOB) defective
Toner supply defective
Development output abnormal 395 C
A development bias leak signal is
detected. High voltage output to the
development unit exceeded the upper
limit (65%) for 60 ms.
High voltage supply board defective
Poor connection at the development
bias terminal
Poor connection at the high voltage
supply board
Transfer roller leak detected 401 C
A transfer roller current leak signal is
detected.
High voltage supply board defective
Poor cable connection or defective
cable
Transfer connector defective
Transfer roller open error 402 C
The transfer roller current feedback
signal is not detected.
High voltage supply board defective
Transfer connector cable defective
Transfer connector defective
Poor PCU connection
Transfer belt position sensor error 403 C
The transfer belt position sensor does
not activate even if the transfer belt
contact clutch has been switched on
twice and rotated once.
Main motor/drive malfunction
Transfer belt contact clutch defective
Harness disconnected
Transfer belt error 405 C
The transfer belt does not move away
from the drum during ID sensor pattern
checking.
Main motor/drive malfunction
Transfer belt position sensor defective
Poor transfer belt position sensor
connection
Main motor lock 440 C
A main motor lock signal is not detected
within 2 seconds after the main motor
turns on.
Too much load on the drive mechanism
Main motor defective
Exhaust fan motor lock 490 C
An exhaust fan motor lock signal is not
detected within 5 seconds after the
exhaust fan motor turns on.
Too much load on the drive mechanism
Exhaust fan motor defective or a loose
object is interfering with the fan
Poor fan motor connector connection
Cooling fan motor lock 492 C
A cooling fan motor lock signal is not
detected within 5 seconds after the
cooling fan motor turns on.
Too much load on the drive mechanism
Cooling fan motor defective or a loose
object is interfering with the fan
Poor fan motor connector connection
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-6 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
1st Tray lift malfunction 501 C
The paper height sensor is not
activated after the tray lift motor has
been on for 10 seconds. If the main
power switch is turned on when the
paper is already at the feed height, the
paper height position is detected again.
At this time, the paper height sensor
should de-activate within 5 seconds
after the paper bottom plate starts to
drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s
four times consecutively, a message
will prompt the user to reset Tray 1.
After two attempts to release the error
by re-setting the paper tray, if this does
not solve the problem then this SC is
displayed.
Lift motor malfunction or disconnected
Height sensor abnormal, or connector
loose
Loose paper or object between the tray
and motor
Pick-up arm malfunction
2nd Tray lift malfunction 502 C
The paper height sensor is not
activated after the tray lift motor has
been on for 10 seconds. If the main
power switch is turned on when the
paper is already at the feed height, the
paper height position is detected again.
At this time, the paper height sensor
should de-activate within 5 seconds
after the paper bottom plate starts to
drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s
four times consecutively, a message
will prompt the user to reset Tray 2.
After two attempts to re-set the paper
tray, if this does not solve the problem
then this SC is displayed.
Lift motor abnormal or disconnected
Height sensor defective or
disconnected
Loose paper or object between the tray
and motor
Pick-up arm malfunction
3rd Tray lift malfunction (optional paper
tray unit)
503 C
The paper height sensor is not
activated after the tray lift motor has
been on for 13 seconds.
If the main power switch is turned on
when the paper is already at the feed
height, the paper height position is
detected again. At this time, the paper
height sensor should de-activate within
5 seconds after the paper bottom plate
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate
within 5 s four times consecutively, the
tray lift motor halts. After two attempts
to re-set the paper tray, if this does not
solve the problem, then this SC is
displayed and tray control halts.
Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
Height sensor defective or
disconnected
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
4th Tray lift malfunction (optional paper
tray unit)
504 C
The paper height sensor is not
activated after the tray lift motor has
been on for 13 seconds.
If the main power switch is turned on
when the paper is already at the feed
height, the paper height position is
detected again. At this time, the paper
height sensor should de-activate within
5 seconds after the paper bottom plate
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate
within 5 s four times consecutively, the
tray lift motor halts. After two attempts
to re-set the paper tray, if this does not
solve the problem, then this SC is
displayed and tray control halts.
Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
Height sensor defective or
disconnected
Paper tray unit main motor lock
(optional paper tray)
506 C
A main motor lock signal is detected for
more than 50 ms during rotation.
Paper tray unit main motor defective
Paper tray unit main motor connection
loose
Too much load on the drive mechanism
LCT main motor lock (optional LCT) 507 C
A main motor lock signal is detected for
more than 50 ms during rotation.
LCT main motor defective
Paper tray unit main motor connection
loose
Too much load on the drive mechanism
LCT tray malfunction 510 C
1) The LCT lift sensor does not
activate for more than 18
seconds after the LCT lift motor
turned on.
2) The LCT lower limit sensor
does not activate for more than
18 seconds after the LCT lift
motor turned on.
3) The LCT lift sensor is already
activated when the LCT lift
motor turns on.
4) After the paper end sensor is
actuated while the tray is
raising, the upper limit sensor is
not actuated within 5 s. A
message is displayed to remind
the user to set the paper and
tray control halts. Resetting the
display is done by opening and
closing the LCT door.
5) The 4) state has been detected
3 times in succession.
LCT lift motor defective or
disconnected.
Upper limit sensor defective or
disconnected
Pick-up solenoid defective or
disconnected
Paper end sensor defective
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-8 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Fusing thermistor open 541 A
The fusing temperature detected by the
thermistor was below 7C (44.6
o
F) for 5
seconds, or 2 seconds after reaching
45
o
C (113
o
F) the temperature does not
reach an additional 15
o
C (59
o
F) after
checking five times at 0.1 intervals.
Fusing thermistor disconnected
Fusing thermistor connector defective
Fusing thermistor damaged or warped
Fusing temperature 15% less than the
standard input voltage
Fusing temperature warm-up error 542 A
The fusing temperature does not reach
the fusing standby temperature of 45
o
C
(113
o
F) within 9 seconds for the B003,
B006 (35 cpm) (14 seconds for the
B004, B007 (45 cpm) after switching on
the main power or closing the front
cover, or 40 seconds after reaching
50
o
C the fusing roller does not reach
warm-up temperature.
Fusing lamp defective
Poor fusing unit connector
Thermistor warped or broken
Thermostat has tripped
BICU defective
Power supply board defective
Fusing overheat error (software
detection)
543 A
A fusing temperature of over 230C
(446
o
F) is detected for 5 seconds by the
fusing thermistors at the center or at
either end of the fusing roller.
Power supply unit defective
I/O board (IOB) defective
BICU defective
Fusing thermistor defective
Fusing overheat error (hardware circuit
detection)
544 A
The dual monitoring circuitry of the
BICU detects extremely high
temperature and tripped the relay circuit
off.
Power supply unit defective
I/O board (IOB) defective
BICU defective
Fusing thermistor defective
Fusing lamp remains on 545 A
After warm-up the fusing lamp remains
at full power for 10 seconds without the
hot roller rotating.
Thermistor is out of position.
Fusing ready temperature unstable 546 A
The fusing temperature is fluctuating.
Thermistor connection loose
Fusing unit connector loose
Zero cross signal malfunction 547 B
The applied power supply ac frequency
was detected at over 66Hz or below
45Hz, and the zero cross signals are
not detected within a certain period
within 500 ms after the main power
switch has been turned on.
Power supply board defective
Noise on the ac power line
Fusing unit installation error 548 A
The machine cannot detect the fusing
unit when the front cover and right
cover are closed.
Fusing unit is not installed
Fusing unit connection loose
1-bin tray motor lock (optional 1-bin tray
unit)
599 C
A 1-bin tray motor lock signal is not
detected for more than 300 ms during
rotation.
1-bin tray motor locked from overload
1-bin tray motor defective
1-bin tray motor connection loose
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Communication error between BICU
and scanner unit
601 C
Within 800 ms after power on, after 3
attempts the BICU does not
communicate with the SIB via the serial
line.
Serial line connecting the BICU and SIB
defective
External noise on the serial line
SIB board defective
BICU board defective
Communication timeout error between
BICU and ADF
610 C
The BICU cannot receive a response
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after
sending data to the ARDF.
BICU board and ADF main board serial
line connection defective
External noise
ADF main board defective
BICU board defective
Communication break error between
BICU and ADF
611 C
The BICU receives a break signal from
the ADF main board.
Serial line connecting BICU and ADF
unstable
External noise
ADF main board defective
BICU board defective
Communication command error
between BICU and ADF
612 C
The BICU sends a command to the
ADF main board that it cannot execute.
Abnormal operation performed by
software
Communication timeout error between
BICU and finisher or mailbox
620 C
The BICU cannot receive a response
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after
sending data to the finisher or mailbox.
Serial line connecting BICU and finisher
unstable
External noise
BICU board and finisher main board
connection defective or loose
Finisher main board defective
BICU board defective
Communication timeout error between
BICU and finisher or mailbox
621 C
A break (low) signal was received from
the finisher or the mailbox.
Serial line connecting BICU and finisher
unstable
External noise
Communication timeout error between
BICU and paper tray unit
623 C
The BICU cannot receive a
response within 100 ms after 3
attempts after sending data to the
paper tray unit.
Serial line connecting BICU and paper
tray unit unstable
External noise
BICU board and paper tray main board
connection defective or loose
Paper tray main board defective
BICU board defective
Communication break error between
BICU and paper tray unit
624 C
The BICU cannot communicate with the
paper tray unit normally as a result of
receiving a break signal.
Serial line connecting BICU and paper
tray unit unstable
External noise
BICU board and LCT main board
connection defective or loose
Optional paper feed unit interface board
defective
BICU board defective
Communication timeout error between
BICU and LCT
626 C
The BICU cannot receive a response
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after
sending data to the LCT.
Serial line connecting BICU and LCT
unit unstable
External noise
BICU board and LCT main board
connection defective or loose
LCT interface board defective
BICU board defective
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-10 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Communication break error between
BICU and LCT
627 C
The BICU cannot communicate with the
LCT unit normally as a result of
receiving a break signal.
Serial line connecting BICU and LCT
unit unstable
External noise
BICU board and LCT main board
connection defective or loose
LCT interface board defective
BICU board defective
SC630 Communication failure with CSS
(RSS)
630 D
The communication from the copier
was detected as abnormal at the CSS
center. This error occurs when the
acknowledge signal from the LADP
does not complete normally.
Occurred with a SC call, CC call,
Supply Management call, User call,
or CE call.
Timeout while no response from the
LADP, and signal on the RS-485 line
between PI and LADP is abnormal.
BICU control data transfer sumcheck
error
640 D
A sampling of control data sent from the
BICU to the controller reveals a
sumcheck error. Only the logging count
is performed.
Controller board defective
External noise
BICU board defective
BICU control data transfer abnormal 641 D
A sampling of the control data sent from
the BICU reveals an abnormality.
Controller board defective
External noise
BICU board defective
Engine response error 670 B
After powering on the machine, a
response is not received from the
engine within the specified time.
BICU installed incorrectly
BICU defective
Controller board defective
Controller-to-operation panel
communication error at startup
672 B
After powering on the machine, the
communication circuit between the
controller and the operation panel is not
opened, or communication with
controller is interrupted after a normal
startup.
Controller stall
Controller board installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel connector loose or
defective
GAVD block I
2
C bus error 690 A
An error is detected in the GAVD
communication I
2
C control register of
the GABIC2.
I
2
C bus on BICU defective
GAVD FCI block I
2
C bus error 691 A
An error is detected in the FCI
communication I
2
C control register of
the GABIC2.
I
2
C bus on BICU defective
CDIC GAVD block I
2
C bus error 692 A
An error is detected in the CDIC
communication I
2
C control register of
the GABIC2.
I
2
C bus on BICU defective
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
ARDF original pick-up malfunction 700 B
After the pick-up motor is turned on, the
original stopper HP sensor is not
detected.
Original stopper HP sensor (output
abnormal)
Pick-up motor defective (not rotating)
Timing belt out of position
ADF main board defective
ARDF original pick-up/paper lift
mechanism malfunction
701 B
The original pick-up HP sensor does
not activate three times consecutively
after the pick-up motor has turned on.
Original pick-up HP sensor defective.
Pick-up motor defective
ADF main board defective
Finisher jogger motor error 722 B
The finisher jogger HP sensor does not
return to the home position, or move
out of the home position, within the
specified time.
Jogger HP sensor defective
Jogger motor defective
Finisher staple hammer motor error 724 B
Stapling does not finish within 600 ms
after the staple hammer motor turned
on.
Staple jam
Stapler overload caused by trying to
staple too many sheets
Staple hammer motor defective
Finisher stack feed-out motor error 725 B
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does
not activate within a certain time after
the stack feed-out motor turned on.
Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
Stack feed-out motor overload
Stack feed-out motor defective
Finisher shift tray 1 lift motor error 726 B
Tray shift does not finish within the
specified time after the shift motor
turned on, or the stack height sensor
does not activate within the specified
time after the shift tray lift motor turned
on.
Shift motor defective or overloaded
Shift tray lift motor defective or
overloaded
Finisher stapler rotation motor error 727 B
Stapler rotation does not finish within
the specified time after the staple
rotation motor turned on, or the stapler
does not return to its home position
within the specified time after stapling
finished.
Stapler rotation motor defective or
overloaded
Stapler rotation motor connection loose
or connector defective
Finisher punch motor error 729 B
After the punch motor is turned on, the
punch HP sensor does not activate
within the specified time.
Punch motor defective or overloaded
Punch HP sensor defective
Punch motor connection loose or
connector defective
Finisher stapler positioning motor error 730 B
After the stapler motor is turned on, the
stapler does not return to its home
position within the specified time, or the
stapler HP sensor does not activate
within the specified time after the
stapler motor is turned on.
Stapler positioning motor defective or
overloaded
Stapler HP sensor defective
Stapler positioning motor connection
loose or connector defective
Finisher exit guide open/close motor
error
731 B
After the finisher exit guide open/close
motor is turned on, the open/close
sensor does not activate within the
specified time.
Finisher exit guide open/close motor
defective
Open/close sensor defective
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-12 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Finisher upper tray shift motor error 732 C
The upper tray shift motor does not
stop operation with the specified time.
Upper tray shift motor defective or
overloaded
Upper tray shift sensor defective
Finisher lower tray lift motor error 733 C
The stack height sensor does not
activate within a certain time period
after the lower tray lift motor turned on.
Lower tray lift motor defective or
overloaded
Upper stack height sensor defective
Lower tray lower limit sensor defective
Finisher lower tray shift motor error 734 C
The lower tray shift motor driving the
lower tray does not stop within the
specified time.
Lower tray shift motor defective or
overloaded
Lower tray shift sensor defective
Startup without video output end error
(K)
800 B
Video transfer to the engine is started,
but a video transmission end command
was not issued by the engine within the
specified time.
Control board defective
Startup without video input end (K) 804 B
A video transmission was requested
from the scanner, but a video
transmission end command was not
issued by the scanner within the
specified time.
Control board defective
Watchdog error 818 B
The Bus line is held up by another
device, or a CPU/device infinite loop
has occurred.
Incorrect Function DIMM installed in
Slot #2 on Controller PCB. (Slot #2 is
for PostScript Option only)
Reload System Firmware.
Replace Controller PCB
Kernel mismatch error 819 B
Software bug
Software application error
Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU 820 B
The central processing unit returned an
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Controller board defective
Software defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC 821 B
The ASIC returned an error during the
self-diagnostic test because the ASIC
and CPU timer interrupts were
compared and determined to be out of
range.
Controller board defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD 822 B
The hard disk drive returned an error
during the self-diagnostic test.
HDD defective
HDD connector defective
Controller board defective
Self-diagnostic Error: NIB 823 B
The network interface board returned
an error during the self-diagnostic test.
Network interface board defective
Controller board defective
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM 824 B
The resident non-volatile RAM returned
an error during the self-diagnostic test.
NVRAM damaged or abnormal
Backup battery has discharged
NVRAM socket damaged
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM/Optional
NVRAM
826 B
The NVRAM or optional NVRAM
returned an error during the self-
diagnostic test.
NVRAM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: RAM 827 B
The resident RAM returned a verify
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Memory malfunction
Self-diagnostic Error: ROM 828 B
The resident read-only memory
returned an error during the self-
diagnostic test.
Controller board defective
Firmware defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM 829 B
The optional RAM returned an error
during the self-diagnostic test.
RAM DIMM defective
Controller board defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: Parallel Interface 835 B
Loopback test error.
Loopback connector not detected
IEEE1284 connector defective
Controller board defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Resident Font
ROM
836 B
The resident font ROM returned an
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Font ROM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional Font
ROM
837 B
The optional font ROM returned an
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Font ROM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator 838 B
Verify error occurred when setting data
was read from the clock generator via
the I2C bus.
Clock generator abnormal
I2C bus abnormal
CPU port for the I2C bus abnormal
Network I/F Abnormal 850 B
NIB interface error.
NIB defective
Controller board defective
IEEE 1394 I/F Abnormal 851 B
IEEE1394 interface error.
IEEE1384 interface board defective
Controller board defective
Startup without HD connection at main
power on
860 C
The hard disk connection is not
detected.
Cable between HDC and HD loose or
defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
HDC defective
Startup without HD detection at power
key on
861 C
The hard disk connection is not
detected.
Cable between HDC and HD loose or
defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
HDC defective
Maximum number of bad sectors
detected on HD
862 A
Up to 101 bad sectors have appeared
in the area on the hard disk where
image data is archived, and the hard
disk may require replacement.
SC863 returned while reading data
from the HD and the number of
registered bad sectors reached 101.
Startup without HD data lead
863 B
Data stored on the hard disk is not read
correctly.
A bad sector occurred during operation
of the HD
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-14 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
HD data CRC error 864 B
During operation of the HD, the HD
responded with a CRC error.
Data transfer was abnormal in the data
read from the HD.
HD access error 865 B
The hard disk detected an error.
Error detected other that the bad
sectors error (SC863) or the CRC
error (SC864)
Electronic total counter error 900 B
The value of the total counter has
already exceeded 9,999,999
NVRAM defective
SC901 Mechanical total count error 901 B
The IO board cannot receive the
mechanical total count data.
Mechanical total counter defective
F-gate error at write request 951 C
After the IPU receives an F-gate signal,
it receives another F-gate signal.
Software defective
BICU defective
Scanner setting error 953 C
The IPU does not respond with the
scanner setting signal required to start
scanning processing.
Software defective
Printer setting error 954 B
The IPU does not respond with the
settings that are required to start image
processing by the printer.
Software defective
Memory setting error 955 C
The IPU does not respond with the
settings that are required to start image
processing using the memory.
Software defective
Printer ready error 964 C
The printer ready signal is not
generated within 17 seconds after the
IPU received the print start signal.
Software defective
Print image data transfer error 984 B
The image transfer from the controller
to the engine via the PCI bus does not
end within 15 s after starting.
Controller board defective
BICU defective
Connectors between BICU and
controller loose or defective
Scanner image data transfer error 985 B
The image transfer from the engine to
the controller via the PCI bus does not
end within 3 s after starting.
Controller board defective
BICU defective
Connectors between BICU and
controller loose or defective
SIB defective
Software write parameter setting error 986 C
An unstable area at the storage
destination in the settings table is set
NULL for the parameter received by the
write module.
Software defective
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Software performance error 990 B
The software attempted to perform an
unexpected operation.
Software defective
Internal parameter incorrect
Insufficient working memory
When this SC occurs, the file name,
address, and data will be stored in
NVRAM. This information can be
checked by using SP7-403. Note the
above data and the situation in which
this SC occurs. Then report the data
and conditions to your technical
control center.
Software continuity error 991 D
The software attempted to perform and
unexpected operation. However, unlike
SC990, the object of the error is
continuity of the software.
Software bug
Internal parameter incorrect
Insufficient working memory
FCU board error 996 B
FCU board is connected but not ready.
FCU board defective and requires
replacement
Firmware incorrect
Application function selection error 997 B
The application selected by a key press
on operation panel does not start or
ends abnormally.
Software defective
An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
Application start error 998 B
After power on the application does not
start within 60 s. (All applications
neither start nor end normally.)
Software defective
An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
Program download error
The download (program, print data,
language data) from the IC card
does not execute normally.
999 B Board installed incorrectly
BICU defective
IC card defective
NVRAM defective
Loss of power during downloading
Important Notes About SC999
Primarily intended for operating in the
download mode, logging is not
performed with SC999.
If the machine loses power while
downloading, or if for some other
reason the download does not end
normally, this could damage the
controller board or the PCB targeted
for the download and prevent
subsequent downloading. If this
problem occurs, the damaged PCB
must be replaced.
Rev. 04/2002
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-16 SM
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.2.1 SENSORS
Component
(Symbol)
CN Condition Symptom
Scanner Home
Position (S1)
504-5(SIB) Open SC121 is displayed.
Shorted SC120 is displayed.
Platen Cover
(S2)
504-8 (SIB) Open APS and ARE do not function properly.
Shorted No symptom.
Original Width
(S3)
505-3, 4
(SIB)
Open CPU cannot detect the original size properly.
APS and ARE do not function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-1
(S4)
505-8,9
(SIB)
Open CPU cannot detect the original size properly.
APS and ARE do not function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-2
(S5)
505-13
(SIB)
Open CPU cannot detect the original size properly.
APS and ARE do not function correctly.
Shorted
LD Unit Home
Position (S6)
220-2 (IOB) Open SC328 is displayed when the laser beam pitch
is changed.
Shorted SC327 is displayed when the laser beam pitch
is changed.
Toner Density
(TD) (S7)
205-5 (IOB) Open Add toner indicator blinks even if there is toner
in the development unit.
Shorted SC390-01 is displayed.
Paper Exit (S8) 203-B2
(IOB)
Open Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy
is made.
Shorted Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no
paper.
Registration (S9) 207-B2
(IOB)
Open Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no
paper.
Shorted The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a
copy is made.
Image Density
(ID) (S10)
219-5 (IOB) Open SC350-03 is displayed after copying.
Shorted SC350-01 is displayed after copying.
Upper Paper
Height (S11)
235-2
(PFB)
Open Add Paper is displayed even if there is paper.
If this condition occurred four times, SC501-02
will be displayed.
Shorted SC501-01 is displayed.
Lower Paper
Height (S12)
236-2
(PFB)
Open Add Paper is displayed even if there is paper.
If this condition occurred four times, SC502-02
will be displayed.
Shorted SC502-01 is displayed.
Upper Paper End
(S13)
235-8
(PFB)
Open Paper End indicator lights even if paper is
placed in the upper paper tray.
Shorted Paper End indicator does not light even if there
is no paper in the upper paper tray.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
SM 4-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Component
(Symbol)
CN Condition Symptom
Lower Paper End
(S14)
236-8
(PFB)
Open Paper End indicator lights even if paper is
placed in the lower paper tray.
Shorted Paper End indicator does not light even if there
is no paper in the lower paper tray.
Upper Relay
(S15)
235-5
(PFB)
Open Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy
is made.
Shorted Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no
paper.
Lower Relay
(S16)
236-5
(PFB)
Open Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy
is made.
Shorted Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no
paper.
Transfer Belt
Position (S19)
203-A10
(IOB)
Open No symptom
Shorted SC403 is displayed
4.2.2 SWITCHES
Component
(Symbol)
CN Condition Symptom
Right Lower
Cover (SW1)
232-3
(PFB)
Open Doors/Covers Open is displayed even if the
right lower cover is closed.
Shorted LCD goes blank when the lower cover is
opened.
Main (SW3) 102-1~4
(PSU)
107-1
Open machine does not turn on.
Shorted Machine does not turn off.
Front Cover
Safety (SW4)
107-1
(PSU)
Open Doors/Covers Open is displayed even if the
front cover is closed.
Shorted Doors/Covers Open is not displayed even if the
front cover is opened.
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-18 SM
4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Rating
Fuse
115V 210 ~ 230V
Symptom at power on
Power Supply Board
FU1 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V Doors/Covers Open is displayed
FU2
6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V Doors/Covers Open for the finisher is
displayed
FU3 6.3A / 125V 4A / 250V Paper end condition
FU4 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V SC121 is displayed
FU5 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V SC302, or SC403, or SC405 displayed
FU101 15A / 125V --- No response
FU102 10A / 125V 5A / 250V No response
FU103 2A / 125V 1A / 250V Normal operation (optional heaters do not work)
4.4 LEDS
BICU
Number Monitored Signal
LED101
Monitors whether the program is working normally or not. The LED blinks
in normal conditions.
LED102 Flashes during program downloading.
4.5 TEST POINTS
Controller Board
Number Monitored Signal
TP1 +2.5V
TP2 +3.3V
TP3-9 Ground
TP10 Data Strobe
TP11 Busy
TP12 Acknowledge
TP13 DB0TXD
TP14 +15V
TP15 GND
TP16 DB0RXD
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5. SERVICE TABLES
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and
adjust values. Two service program modes are provided:
SP Mode (Service). Includes all the options in the SP displays for normal
maintenance and adjustments.
SSP Mode (Special Service). Includes the normal SP modes and some
additional options in the SP displays not required for normal settings and
adjustments. (Most are marked DFU (Design or Factory Use) in the following
tables.) Do not change these important settings needlessly. For details, contact
your supervisor.
Entering and Exiting SP mode
" 1. Press the Clear Mode key.
#$% 2. Use the keypad to enter 107.
& 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
4. Enter the Service Mode.
To enter the Normal Service Mode:
Copy SP On the touch-panel, press Copy SP.
To enter the Special service Mode:
' Copy SP Hold down ' and then press Copy SP.
Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
NOTE: Use SP2-902 to perform test pattern printing. ( 5.1.3)
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-2 SM
SP Mode Button Summary
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
! !! !
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
" "" "
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
# ## #
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP mode
screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
$ $$ $
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then press
'. (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP Mode if it
is not highlighted.)
% %% %
Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
& && &
Press any Group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For example, to
open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press Group1. If an SP has sublevels, click the
appropriate button to expand the list.
' '' '
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
( (( (
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
) )) )
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
* ** *
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
B004S500.WMF
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing
1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start ( to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. ( 5.1.2)
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 5.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
Press ! to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter will write over the previous
setting.
Press ' to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy
window and select the settings for the test print. Press Start ( twice, and then
press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode
display.
3. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B004S501.WMF
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-4 SM
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
Service Table Key
Notation What it means
[range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in
the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the value
can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.
italics Comments added for reference.
* Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value (factory
setting) is restored.
1111 An SP number set in bold-italic denotes a Special Service Program
mode setting that appears only after entering the SP mode by pressing
' and Copy SP together. ( 5-1)
B003 & B006 Denotes the 35 cpm model.
B004 & B007 Denotes the 45 cpm model.
DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
(S) Sideways feed direction
(L) Lengthwise feed direction
SP1-xxx: Feed
SP1 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
1001* Leading Edge Registration Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using
the trimming area pattern (SP2-902-3, No.11).
[+9 ~ 9 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm]
Use ! to toggle between before entering the
value.
Specification: 3 2 mm
1002* Side-to-Side Registration Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from
the 3rd paper feed station using the trimming area
pattern (SP2-902-3, No.11).
Use the ! key to toggle between + and before
entering the value.
Specification: 2 1.5 mm
1 Tray1
2 Tray2
[9~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm step]
3 Tray3
4 Tray4
[9~ +9/ +2.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
Tray3, Tray4 for Paper Feed Unit.
5 Duplex Tray [9~ +9/ +0.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
6 By-pass Tray [9~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
7 LCT (if present) [9~ +9/ +1.5 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
1003* Registration Buckle Adjustment
1 Paper Feed Trays/LCT
2 Duplex Tray
3 By-pass Tray
4 Tray1 Feed
Adjusts the relay clutch timing at registration. Relay
clutch timing determines the amount of paper
buckle at registration. (A + setting causes more
buckling.)
[9~+9/+0.0 mm (1 mm for 1st Tray Feed)/0.1 mm
step]
1007 By-pass Feed Paper Size
Display
Displays the paper width sensor data for the by-
pass feed table.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP1 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
1012* Exit Junction Solenoid
Start Timing
Adjust the operation timing of the solenoids at the
entrance and exit of the paper exit section to
accommodate the increased speed of the duplex
unit.
This SP has been added to compensate for the
increased operation speed of the duplex unit for this
machine. Increase the value if the leading edges
are jamming. Decrease the value if trailing edges
are bending at the entrance.
1* Exit Entrance Junction
Solenoid
B003 &
B006
[200~450 ms / 370 ms / 10 ms]
2* Exit Last Junction
Solenoid
B004 &
B007
[200~450 ms / 300 ms (entrance)
370 ms (exit) /10 ms]
1103* Fusing Idling Switches fusing idling on/off. When on, the hot roller
will not rotate until enough time has elapsed so the
hot roller can reach optimum temperature. This
ensures even heat on the hot roller.
Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is
incomplete (this may occur if the room is cold.)
1* Enable Fusing Idling 0 = Off, 1 = On
In a cold environment, switch on and then set the
idling time with SP1-103-2 to ensure the quality of
the first copies.
2* Fusing Idling Interval [0~60 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 sec.]
You must switch SP1-103-1 on before you can set
the fusing idling interval.
1104* Fusing Temperature
Control
Selects the fusing temperature control mode.
[0 = On/Off / 1 phase
1105* Fusing Temperature
Adjustment
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center and
both ends of the hot roller for paper fed from a tray.
Use SP1-105-1, SP1-105-2 to adjust for any tray
other than the by-pass tray. Use SP1-105-3, SP1-
105-4 to adjust for by-pass tray.
Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at
the center and ends of the roller for the quality or
thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this
machine has two fusing lamps: one heats the
center of the roller, the other heats both ends. Each
fusing lamp can be adjusted separately.
1* Roller Center: Trays [120
o
C ~ 200
o
C / 160
o
C (B004 & B007: 180
o
C) /
1
o
C step]
2* Roller Ends: Trays [120
o
C ~ 200
o
C / 170
o
C (B004 & B007: 185
o
C) /
1
o
C step]
3* Roller Center: By-pass
4* Roller Ends: By-pass
[120
o
C ~ 220
o
C / 175
o
C (B004 & B007: 190
o
C) /
1
o
C step]
5* Re-load Temp. Minus:
Roller Center
6* Re-load Temp. Minus:
Roller Ends
Adjusts the temperature for re-heating the hot roller.
Re-load Temp. = Fusing. Temp SP Value
[0
o
C ~ 60
o
C / 30
o
C / 1
o
C step]
When the fusing temperature surpasses this
setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a
re-load temperature (Spec. Temp SP Value) that
is higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-6 SM
SP1 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7* Roller Center: By-pass
(Thick Paper)
Adjusts temperature of the hot roller when feeding
thick paper.
[120
o
C ~ 220
o
C / 190
o
C (B004 & B007: 200
o
C) /
1
o
C step]
1105* 8* Roller Ends: By-Pass
(Thick Paper Feed)
9* Re-load Temp. Minus:
Roller Center (Thick
Paper)
10* Re-load Temp. Minus:
Roller Ends (Thick Paper)
Forces paper feed to wait until the fusing unit has
reached the specified temperature.
Feed temp. = Spec. temp. for thick paper SP
value
Feed begins when the hot roller reaches the
specified temperature.
[0
o
C ~ 60
o
C / 0
o
C (B004 & B007: 5
o
C / 1
o
C step]
1106 Fusing Temperature
Display
1 Roller Center
2 Roller Ends
Displays the fusing temperature for the center or
ends of the hot roller.
This machine has two fusing lamps inside the hot
roller: one lamp heats the center of the roller, the
other lamp heats both ends.
1109* Fusing Nip Band Check Checks the fusing nip band. ( 5.1.7)
[0=Off, 1=On]
1111* Paper Reverse Timing
(Duplex)
Adjusts the timing for stopping the rotation of the
reverse roller after the trailing edge of the paper
passes the duplex entrance sensor.
[+5 ~ 5 / 0 mm / 1 mm step]
Adjust the timing if paper frequently jams at the
inverter gate in the duplex unit.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP2-xxx: Drum
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2001* Charge Roller Bias Adjustment
1* Copying Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate for
copying.
[1000 ~ 2000 / 1480V / 10V step]
2* ID Sensor Pattern Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller
when making the VSDP ID sensor pattern (for
charge roller voltage correction). The actual charge
roller voltage is this value plus the value of SP2-
001-1.
[0 ~ 700 / 200V / 10V step]
2005* Charge Roller Bias Correction Adjustment
1* Charge Roller Voltage
Correction 1
Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge
roller correction.
When the value of VSP/VSG is greater than this
value, the charge roller voltage increases by 30 V
(e.g., from 500 to 530).
[0.1 ~ 1.0 / 0.85 / 0.05 step]
2* Charge Roller Voltage
Correction 2
Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge
roller correction.
When the value of VSP/VSG is greater than this
value, the charge roller voltage decreases by 30 V
(absolute value).
[0.1 ~ 1.0 / 0.90 / 0.05 step]
3* Charge Roller Voltage
Adjustment 1
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller
voltage correction.
[1000 ~ 2000 / 1480V / 10V step]
4* Charge Roller Voltage
Adjustment 2
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller
voltage correction.
[1000 ~ 2000 / 2000V / 10V step]
5* Charge Roller Voltage Step Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
[0 ~ 100V / 30V / 10V step]
2101* Printing Erase Margin Adjusts the leading edge (top), trailing edge
(bottom), left, and right margins.
1* Leading Edge (Top)
2* Trailing Edge (Bottom)
[0.9 ~ 9.0 / 3 / 0.1 mm step]
Specification: 2 mm
3* Left Edge
4* Right Edge
[0.9 ~ 9.0 / 2 / 0.1 mm step]
Specification: 1.5 mm
5* Trailing Edge - Back side Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin on the
reverse side of duplex copies.
[0.0 ~ 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm step]
Recommended: 2 1.5 mm
6* Back Side - Right Adjusts the right side erase margin in the reverse
side of duplex copies.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm step]
Recommend: 2 1.5 mm
7* Back Side - Left Adjusts the left side erase margin in the reverse
side of duplex copies.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm step]
Recommended: 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-8 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2103* LD Power Adjustment Adjusts the intensity of the laser for the copier,
printer, and fax unit. The Copier and Printer, FAX,
settings can be adjusted separately.
When Copier LD1, LD2 are set 50 and Printer,
Fax LD1, LD2 are set 35, if the Copier setting is
adjusted by +5 (-45) then Printer, Fax is
automatically reset to 30. Replacing the OPC
resets the default values for these settings.
1* LD1 (Copier)
2* LD2 (Copier)
(55~+64 / 20 /1 LSB step)
Approx. 50/128 = .4%
3* LD1 (Printer, FAX)
4* LD2 (Printer, FAX)
5* LD1 Adjustment Start/End
6* LD2 Adjustment Start/End
(50~ 35 / 5 /1 LSB step)
2109* LD Beam Pitch Adjustment Adjusts the beam gap for the dual beam system.
After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing
the NVRAM, use this SP mode to adjust the laser
beam pitch.
This adjustment is performed by specifying the
number of pulses to the stepping motor that will
adjust the angle of rotation of the LD unit from the
home position.
1* 400 dpi Adjusts the laser beam pitch value for 400 dpi
resolution.
400 dpi: [8~262 / 144 / 1 pulse step]
After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing
NVRAM, use this SP and SP2-109-3 to adjust the
laser beam pitch.
2* 600 dpi Adjusts the laser beam pitch value for 600 dpi
resolution.
600 dpi: [30~284 / 168 / 1 pulse step]
After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing
NVRAM, use this SP and SP2-109-4 to adjust the
laser beam pitch.
3* 400 dpi Initial Setting Initializes the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi using the
value for SP2-109-1.
After entering a value for SP2-109-1, this SP must
be used.
4* 600 dpi Initial Setting Initializes the laser beam pitch for 600 dpi using the
value for SP2-109-2.
After entering a value for SP2-109-2, this SP must
be used.
5* Auto Pitch Adjustment
Interval
Sets the interval for automatic laser beam pitch
adjustment.
[0 ~ 65535 / 1000 / 1 step]
When the number of times that the resolution has
been changed reaches this value, the laser unit
position is automatically corrected.
6 Current LD Unit Position Displays the current LD unit position (number of
pulses from home position). If this is different from
the value of 2-109-1 or 2-109-2, LD unit positioning
has failed.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2109* 7 Beam Pitch Change
Counter
Displays how many times the LD unit position has
been changed (how many times the resolution has
changed.)
When the laser beam pitch adjustment is done, this
counter is reset to zero.
8 Beam Pitch Data Reset Resets the values of SP2-109-6 and SP2-109-7.
After replacing the LD unit, this SP mode must be
performed.
2110 Test Mode dpi Sets the scanning resolution (dpi). DFU
[See below / 8 / 0~18]
Range 0 400 x 400 dpi
1 391 x 406 dpi
2 406 x 391 dpi
4 300 x 300 dpi
8 600 x 600 dpi
15 439 x 430 dpi
16 476 x 476 dpi
17 483 x 465 dpi
18 465 x 483 dpi
2112 Polygon Motor Off Timer Input the time that the polygon motor is to switch off
after the printer has remained idle for the specified
time and entered the standby mode.
If set to zero, the polygon motor never switches off
in standby mode. However, if the machine enters
the energy saver mode, the polygon motor will
ignore the zero setting and switch itself off.
[0~60 s / 10 s / 5 s step]
2201* Development Bias Adjustment
1* Development Bias Adjusts the development bias for copying.
Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies
from an aging drum.
[200~700 / 600V / 10V step]
2* ID Sensor Pattern Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor
pattern for VSP
[200~700 / 380V / 10V step]
2207 Forced Toner Supply Forces the toner bottle to supply toner at 1-second
intervals for up to 30 seconds. To start, press '.
2208* 1* Toner Supply Mode Selects the toner mode.
0: Sensor control
1: Image pixel count.
If you select 1, SP2-209-002 should be set to its
default value. Use image pixel count modes only as
a temporary measure if the ID or TD sensor is
defective.
2209* Toner Supply Rate Adjusts the toner supply rate.
1* Toner Rate Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by
the toner supply motor.
Increasing this value reduces the toner supply
clutch on time. Use a lower value if the user tends
to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of
black.
[10~800 mg/s / 60 mg/s / 5 mg/s step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-10 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2209* 2* Toner Supply Correction
Data
Displays the toner supply correction coefficient (K).
It can also be used to adjust K, but the value is
changed again when VT is measured for the next
copy.
The toner supply rate depends on the amount of
toner in the toner bottle. This change is corrected
using this coefficient. This SP can be used to check
the toner supply condition. The lower the value of K,
the lower the toner density.
[25 ~300 / 300 / 25 step]
2210* ID Sensor Pattern Interval Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern prints.
This setting allows adjustment for customers who
do not make many copies daily. The zero value
disables this setting.
[0~200 / 10 / 1 copy step]
2213* 1* Copies After Toner Near-
End
Selects the number of copies that can be printed
once the copier has detected toner near-end.
Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies
of high density.
0: 90 copies
1: No copies
2: 10 copies
2220* Vref Manual Setting Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). [1.0
~ 5.00 V / 4.00V / 0.01V step]
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another unit that
contains toner.
1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit and
the machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit into SP2-
220.
3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220 back to
the original value.
2223* Vt Display Displays the TD sensor output voltage for each
copy.
1* Current Displays TD sensor output voltage of the
immediately previous copy.
2* Average Previous 10 copies Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor
outputs (from the previous 10 copies).
3* Rate of Change Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor
output.
4* GAIN Displays GAIN used to calculate the on time for the
toner supply motor.
5* Image Pixel Count Displays the image pixel count.
2301* Transfer Current
Adjustment
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt
during copying the 5 phases listed below.
1* 1st Side of Paper Printing the first side of the paper (image area).
If the user uses thicker paper, the current may have
to be increased to ensure sufficient transfer of
toner.
[20~100A / 35 (B004 & B007: 45) / 1A step]
2* 2nd Side of Paper Printing the second side of the paper (image area).
[20~100A / 35 (B004 & B007: 40) / 1A step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2301* 3* Leading Edge Copying at leading edge of the paper.
Increase the current to separate the paper from the
drum properly in high humidity and high
temperature conditions.
[20~100A / 35 (B004 & B007: 45) / 1A step]
4* By-pass Feed Copying from the by-pass tray (image area).
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the
bypass tray, use a higher setting.
[20~100A / 35 (B004 & B007: 45) / 1A step]
5* Leading Edge By-pass
Feed
Copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the
by-pass tray.
Increase the current to separate the paper from the
drum properly in high humidity and high
temperature conditions.
[20~100A / 45 (B004 & B007: 60) / 1A step]
2309* Transfer Current Correction Corrects the transfer current for the items below.
1* Paper Lower Width (a) Adjusts the lower paper width threshold for the
transfer current, charge voltage, and development
bias corrections.
Use this SP when an image problem (e.g.,
insufficient toner transfer) occurs with a small width
paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value,
the transfer current will be multiplied by the factor in
SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or SP2-309-5 (by-pass).
[0~297 / 150 / 1 mm step]
2* Paper Upper Width (b) Adjusts the upper paper width threshold for the
transfer current, charge voltage, and development
bias corrections.
As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in SP2-309-4
(paper tray) and SP2-309-6 (by-pass).
[0~297 / 216 / 1 mm step]
3* Paper Tray () Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient
used if the paper width is less than the setting of
SP2-309-1.
[1.0~3 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm step]
4* Paper Tray () Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient
used if the paper width is less than the setting of
SP2-309-2.
[1.0~3 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm step]
5* By-Pass Feed () Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient
used if the paper width is less than the setting of
SP2-309-1.
[1.0~3 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm step]
6* By-Pass Feed () Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient
used if the paper width is less than the setting of
SP2-309-2.
[1.0~3 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm step]
2801* TD Sensor Initial Setting Performs the TD sensor initial setting. This SP
mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor
to make the TD sensor output about 4.0 V. Press 1
to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor output
voltage is displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine,
changing the TD sensor, or adding new developer.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-12 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2802* TD Sensor Manual Setting Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually
for the following.
1* VTS Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT).
Change this value after replacing the development
unit with another one that already contains toner.
For example, when using a development unit from
another machine for test purposes. To adjust VT,
use a similar procedure as for SP2-220.
[1.00~5.00V / 4.78V / 0.02V step]
2* VTMAX Adjusts the maximum value for SP2-802-1.
[1.00~5.00V / 4.78V / 0.02V step]
3* VTMIN Adjusts the minimum value for SP2-802-1.
[1.00~5.00V / 1.00V / 0.02V step]
2805 Developer Initialization Performs the developer initialization. Press 1 to
start.
This SP should be performed after doing SP2-801-
1 at installation and after replacing the drum.
2902 2 IPU Test Pattern Prints the test patterns for the IPU chip. ( 5.1.3)
[0~15 / 0 / 1 step]
This SP mode is useful for finding whether the
BICU or the SBU is defective. If the printout is not
OK, the BICU is defective.
3 Printing Test Pattern Prints the printer test patterns. Select the number of
the test pattern that you want to print. ( 5.1.3)
[0~38 / 0 / 1 step]
This SP mode is useful for finding whether the
LDDR or the BICU is defective. If the printout is not
satisfactory, the LDDR is defective.
[0~38 / 0 ]
2909* Main Scan Magnification
1* Copier Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction
for copy mode.
Press ! to toggle .
[2.0~+2.0 / 0 / 1% step]
2* Printer Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction
when printing from a personal computer. Press !
to toggle .
[2.0~+2.0 / 0 / 1% step]
2911 Transfer Current On/Off
Timing
Adjusts the transfer current timing for the three
items below.
1 La (On Timing) On timing at leading edge.
[30~+30 / 0 mm / 1 mm step]
2 Lb (Switch Timing) Transfer current switch timing. This determines
when the leading edge stops and the image area
current begins (see SP2-301).
[0~+30 / 10 mm / 1 mm step]
3 Lc (Off Timing) Transfer current timing (e.g. 5 mm) is 5 mm after
the trailing edge.
[30~+30 / 5 mm / 1 mm step]
2912 1 Drum Reverse Rotation
Interval
DFU.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2913* 1* Print Density for Test
Pattern
Sets the print density for the patterns printed with
SP2-902-3.
[0~15 / 15 / 1 ]
2914* Process Control Setting
By-pass
Adjusts the charge roller voltage for the following
items.
1* C Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper
with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The
paper width below which the correction starts
depends on the value of SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem (such as white
spots at the center of black dots or breaks in thin
black lines) occurs when paper with a small width is
fed from the by-pass feed tray.
[0 ~ 400 / 250 / 10V step]
2* C Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper
with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The
paper width below which the correction starts
depends on the value of SP2-309-2.
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1)
occurs when paper with a small width is fed from
the by-pass feed tray.
[0 ~ 400 / 50 / 10V step]
3* B Adjusts the development bias used when paper
with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The
paper width below which the correction starts
depends on the value of SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1)
occurs when paper with a small width is fed from
the by-pass feed tray.
[0 ~ 300 / 200 / 10V step]
4* B Adjusts the development bias used when paper
with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The
paper width below which the correction starts
depends on the value of SP2-309-2.
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1)
occurs when paper with a small width is fed from
the by-pass feed tray.
[0 ~ 300 / 50 / 10V step]
2920 LD Off Check DFU
2960* Toner Overflow Sensor Selects whether the toner overflow sensor is
activated or not.
0 = No, 1 = Yes
2964* 1* Transfer Cleaning Blade
Forming
Applies a pattern of toner to the transfer belt at a
defined interval between sheets on the transfer belt
in order to reduce friction between the belt surface
and the cleaning blade.
[0 ~ 30/ 3 / 1 sheets]
Under conditions of high temperature and high
humidity, the density control feature may reduce the
amount of toner, which also reduces the amount of
toner on the surface of the transfer belt. With less
toner on the belt, the coefficient of friction ()
between the belt and the blade increases, and
could cause the blade to bend or scour the surface
of the belt.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-14 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2969* LD PWM Selection
1* Printer Output LD PWM
Selection
Changes the LD power PWM control for printed
copies. A smaller value produces a lighter image.
Use this SP to adjust the image density for printing
from a personal computer or printing a received fax
message.
[1 ~ 5 / 1 / 1 step]
2* Fax Output LD PWM
Selection
Changes the LD power PWM control for printed fax
messages. A smaller value produces a lighter
image
Use this SP to adjust the image density for printing
fax messages.
[1 ~ 5 / 1 / 1 step]
2971 Toner Full Sensor Count DFU
2972* Grayscale Limit A new feature of this machine that controls the
halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the
OPC. The halftone density is detected by an ID
sensor that adjusts the intensity of the LD beam
according to the upper/lower limit setting.
1* Upper Limit Defines the upper limit for grayscale.
A larger value sets a wider halftone width, a smaller
value a narrower width. A smaller value can
eliminate the appearance of white dots in dark
areas.
[0 ~ 100 / 85 / 1 step]
2* Lower Limit Defines the lower limit for grayscale.
A larger value sets a narrower halftone width; a
smaller value sets a wider width.
[0 ~ 100 / 65 / 1 step]
2973* 1* Grayscale Copy Interval
Check
Sets the halftone operation interval in order to
prevent deterioration of the OPC. If the number of
copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or
if the door is opened and closed, charge correction
is executed.
[0 ~ 1000 / 100 / 10 step]
2974* 1* Image Density Adjustment Adjusts image density. Changing this setting
adjusts development bias and ID sensor output
voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
[1 ~ 5 / 3 / 1 step]
2980* Charge Counter Sets the number of pages to print after toner and
carrier initialization before the charge input is
increased to compensate for deterioration over time
in the polarity of the carrier.
[0 ~ 1000000 / 0 / 1 step]
The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the
toner will eventually decrease and cause lower
charge output. Setting the charge output to
increase after a specified number of copies can
compensate for this effect.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP3-xxx: Process
SP3 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
3001* ID Sensor Initial Setting
* 1* ID Sensor PWM Setting Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor
LED to avoid a service call error after clearing
NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
[0 ~ 255 / 100 / 1 step]
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
2* ID Sensor Initialization Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor
output for the bare drum (VSG) is adjusted
automatically to 4.0 0.2 V.
Press # to start. Perform this setting after
replacing or cleaning the ID sensor, replacing the
drum, or clearing NVRAM.
3103* ID Sensor Output Display Displays the current VSG, VSP, VSDP, and
grayscale control.
1* Vsg (Drum Surface Output)
2* Vsp (Pattern Output)
3* Vpdp (Immediate Post-
Pattern Output).
4* Vsm/Vsg (Immediate
Grayscale Post-Pattern
Output)
[0V ~ 5.00V]
If the ID sensor does not detect the ID pattern,
VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V
is displayed and an SC code is generated.
If the ID sensor does not detect the bare area of
the drum,
VSP = 0.0 V/VSG =0.0 V
is displayed and an SC code is generated.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-16 SM
SP4-xxx: Scanner
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4008* Scanner Sub Scan
Magnification
Adjusts the magnification of the sub scan
direction during scanning. Changing this value
changes the scanner motor speed. Press ! to
toggle .
[0.9 ~ 0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
4010* Scanner Leading Edge
Registration
Adjusts the leading edge registration for
scanning. Press ! to toggle .
As you enter a negative value, the image moves
toward the leading edge.
[0.9 ~ 0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
4011* Scanner Side-to-Side
Registration
Adjusts side-to-side registration for scanning.
Press ! to toggle .
As you enter negative values, the image will
disappear at the left, and as you enter positive
values, the image will appear at the left.
[4.6 ~ +4.6 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
4012* Scanner Erase Margin Adjusts scanning margins for the following items.
Do not adjust unless the customer desires a
scanner margin greater than the printer margin.
1* Leading Edge Adjusts leading edge erase margin for sub
scanning. Specification: 3 2 mm
[0 ~ 9 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step]
2* Trailing Edge Adjusts trailing edge erase margin for sub
scanning. Specification: 2 2 mm
[0 ~ 9 / 0.5 / 0.1 mm step]
3* Right Adjusts right margin for main scanning.
Specification: +2.5 ~ -1.5 mm
[0 ~ 9 / 0.5 / 0.1 mm step]
4* Left Adjusts left margin for main scanning.
Specification: 2 1.5 mm
[0 ~ 9 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step]
4013 Scanner Free Run Performs a scanner free run with the exposure
lamp off.
4301 APS Sensor Output Display Displays the time required to detect the size of
the paper on the scanner exposure glass.
Asterisks (*) are displayed if the size cannot be
detected. ( Chap. 6, Original Size Detection
in Platen Mode.
Dimensions are displayed in inches for North
America and in mm for other areas.
4303* APS A5/LT Size Detection Determines whether the original is A5/HLT size
when the APS sensor does not detect the
original size.
0: not detected, 1: A5 length 5 x 8
If 1 is selected, paper sizes that cannot be
detected are regarded as A5 lengthwise. If 0 is
selected, Cannot detect original size will be
displayed.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4305* 8K/16K Detection Selects whether or not the copier determines
that the original is 8K/16K size when the APS
sensor does not detect the original size.
This SP is intended for use with 8K/16K Chinese
paper sizes only.
For Chaina/Taiwan area:
[0,1 /0/1]
0: 8k/16k not detected Non-standard size
1: 8K, 16K paper size detect enabled
Other areas:
[0,1 /0/1]
0: 8k/16k not detected - Non-standard size
1: 8k/16k not detected - Non-standard size
4307* APS Sensor Output Display Determines whether or not the original size is
detected while the exposure lamp lights during
initialization.
0 ~ 1 /1 / 1 step
0: Original size detection at power on disabled.
1: Original size detection at power on enabled.
4428 1 Flag Display DFU
2 Start DFU
3 Flag Reset DFU
4901* 1 Image Data Path Setting DFU
2 Read ASIC ID DFU
3 BK Adjustment DFU
4 EO Adjustment DFU
5 Dummy Range Adjustment DFU
6 Range Adjustment DFU
7 Gain Adjustment Ech DFU
8 Gain Adjustment Och DFU
9 Dummy Range Adjustment DFU
10 Range Adjustment DFU
11 Scan-Apli. Gain Adjustment
Ech
DFU
12 Scan-Apli. Adjustment
Och
DFU
13 Standard White Level
Adjustment
DFU
14 Overflow Flag DFU
15 Time-Out Flag DFU
16 Error Flag DFU
17 SBU Reset Error Flag DFU
18* Range Adjustment DFU
19* Gain Adjustment Ech at
Factory
DFU
20* Gain Adjustment Och at
Factory
DFU
21* Standard White Level
Adjustment at Factory
DFU
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-18 SM
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4901* 22* A/D Standard Voltage in AE
Mode
DFU
23* BK Adjustment DFU
24* EO Adjustment DFU
26* Range Adjustment DFU
27* Gain Adjustment Ech DFU
28* Gain Adjustment Och DFU
29* Apli. Dummy Range
Adjustment
DFU
30* Apli. Range Adjustment DFU
31* Apli. Gain Adjustment
Ech
DFU
32* Apli. Gain Adjustment
Och
DFU
33 Dummy Gain Adjustment
Ech
DFU
34 Dummy Gain Adjustment
Och
DFU
4903* Filter Setting
5 Full Size Mode Selects whether the copy is always full size,
even if the magnification ratio has been
changed.
Set to 1 to check the main scan magnification. If
the magnification is not 100%, the image
processing circuits could be malfunctioning.
[0~1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Normal operation
1: Always full-size mode
7 Image Shift in Magnification Adjusts the amount of pixel shift in the main
scan direction in the magnification mode.
[0~7680 / 0 / 1 step] DFU
8* Fax 25%, 50% Reduction Determines whether 25% and 50% reduction is
available in the fax mode.
[0~1 / 0 / 1 step] DFU
0: Available
1: Not available
9* Filter Type Selection
Photo Mode
Selects the filter to be used for originals that
contain photos.
[0~1 / 1 / 1 step]
0: Selects MTF correction for continuous
grayscale photos. To set the MTF coefficient
and strength, set:
SP4-903-036
SP4-903-038
1: Selects smoothing for originals that contain
dithered images. If you select 1, set the filter
smoothing coefficient with:
SP4-903-037
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4903* 10* Pre-Filter: Text 25%~64% Selects the Pre-Filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for text mode. Pre-filter
emphasizes lines parallel to the direction of
feed. ( Chap.6, Image Processing.
[0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
Increasing this value strengthens smoothing but
can also increase the occurrence of moir and
reduce sharpness.
11* Pre-Filter: Text 65%~154% Selects the Pre-Filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for text mode. Pre-filter
emphasizes lines parallel to the direction of
feed. ( Chap.6, Image Processing.
[0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
Increasing this value strengthens smoothing but
can also increase the occurrence of moir and
reduce sharpness.
12* Pre-Filter: Photo Selects the Pre-Filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for photo mode. ( Chap.6,
Image Processing.
[0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
13* Pre-Filter: Text/Photo
25%~64%
Selects the Pre-Filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for text/photo mode (25%~64%)
emphasizes lines parallel to the direction of
feed. ( Chap.6, Image Processing.
[0~3 / 1 / 1 step]
Increasing this value strengthens smoothing but
can also increase the occurrence of moir and
reduce sharpness.
14* Pre-Filter: Text/Photo
65%~154%
Selects the Pre-Filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for text/photo mode (65%~154%)
and emphasizes lines parallel to the direction of
feed. ( Chap.6, Image Processing.
[0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
Increasing this value strengthens smoothing but
can also increase the occurrence of moir and
reduce sharpness.
15* Pre-Filter: Light Selects the Pre-Filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for low density mode and
enhances lines parallel to the direction of feed.
( Chap.6, Image Processing.
[0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
Increasing this value strengthens smoothing but
can also increase the occurrence of moir and
reduce sharpness.
16* Pre-Filter: Generation Selects the Pre-Filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for copied original mode
emphasizes lines parallel to the direction of
feed. ( Chap.6, Image Processing.
[0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
Increasing this value strengthens smoothing but
can also increase the occurrence of moir and
reduce sharpness.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-20 SM
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4903* 18* Black Streaking Correction Corrects streaks, black lines is copies caused by
a dirty platen or scanning glass.
[0~8 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Off (no black streaking adjustment is
performed)
Select a higher value (1 to 8) to eliminate black
streaking. However, raising the value could
lighten parts of the image or cause part of the
image or text to drop out.
20* Filter Level: Text 25%~64% Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the text
mode in the main scan direction.
[0~15 / 9 / 1 step]
21* MTF Filter Level: Text
25%~64%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the text
mode in the sub scan direction.
[0~13 / 13 / 1 step]
22* Filter Strength: Text
25%~64%
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction for the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
23* MTF Filter Strength: Text
25%~64%
Selects the MTF filter strength in the sub scan
direction for the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
24* Filter Level: Text
65%~154%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the main
scan direction in the text mode.
[0~15 / 12 / 1 step]
25* MTF Filter Level:
65%~154%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the sub
scan direction in the text mode.
[0~13 / 13 / 1 step]
26* Filter Strength: 65%~154% Selects the MTF filter strength for the main scan
direction in the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
27* MTF Filter Strength: Text
65%~154%
Selects the MTF filter strength for the sub scan
direction in the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
28* Filter Level: Text
155%~256%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the main
scan direction in the text mode.
[0~15 / 14 / 1 step]
29* MTF Filter Level: Text
155%~256%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the sub
scan direction in the text mode.
[0~13 / 13 / 1 step]
30* Filter Strength Text:
155%~256%
Selects the MTF filter strength for the main scan
direction in the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
31* MTF Filter Strength: Text
155%~256%
Selects the MTF filter strength for the sub scan
direction in the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
32* Filter Level: Text
257%~400%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the sub
scan direction in the text mode.
[0~15 / 15 / 1 step]
33* MTF Filter Level:
257%~400%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the sub
scan direction in the text mode.
[0~13 / 13 / 1 step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4903* 34* MTF Filter Strength: Text
257%~400%
Selects the MTF filter strength for the main scan
direction in the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
35* MTF Filter Strength: Text
257%~400%
Selects the MTF filter strength for the sub scan
direction in the text mode.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
36* MTF Filter in Photo Mode Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the main
scan direction in the photo mode. Use this
setting to eliminate moir from continuous
grayscale images and sharpen images.
[0~6 / 0 / 1]
This item is enabled only after 0 has been
selected for SP-4-903-009 to switch on MTF
correction.
37* Smoothing Filter in Photo
Mode
Selects the filter coefficient for smoothing in the
photo mode. The higher the number you select,
the greater the applied smoothing effect.
[0~7 / 2 / 1]
This item is enabled only after 1 has been
selected for SP-4-903-009 to switch on
smoothing.
Selects the MTF filter strength for the sub scan
direction in the photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
[0~7 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 2: 1/8x 4: 1/2x 6: 2x
38* Filter Strength: Photo Mode
1: 1/16x 3: 1/4x 5: 1x 7: 4x
39* Filter Level: Text/Photo
25%~64%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction in the text/photo mode. Select a
higher number for stronger application of the
filter. However, increasing the value could
increase the incidence of moir.
[0~15 / 9 / 1 step]
40* MTF Filter Level:
Text/Photo 25%~64%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~13 / 10 / 1 step]
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
41* Filter Strength: Text/Photo
25%~64%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-22 SM
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
Selects the MTF filter strength in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
4903* 42* MTF Filter Strength:
Text/Photo 25%~64%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
43* Filter Level: Text/Photo
65%~154%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction in the text/photo mode. Select a
higher number for stronger application of the
filter. However, increasing the value could
increase the incidence of moir.
[0~15 / 10 / 1 step]
44* MTF Filter Level:
Text/Photo 65%~154%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~13 / 13 / 1 step]
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
45* MTF Filter Strength:
Text/Photo 64%~154%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
Selects the MTF filter strength in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
46* MTF Filter Strength:
Text/Photo 65%~154%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
47* Filter Level: Text/Photo
155%~256%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction in the text/photo mode. Select a
higher number for stronger application of the
filter. However, increasing the value could
increase the incidence of moir.
[0~15 / 14 / 1 step]
48* MTF Filter Level:
Text/Photo 155%~256%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~13 / 13 / 1 step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
4903* 49* Filter Strength: Text/Photo
155%~256%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
Selects the MTF filter strength in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
50* MTF Filter Strength:
Text/Photo 155%~256%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
51* Filter Level: Text/Photo
257%~400%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction in the text/photo mode. Select a
higher number for stronger application of the
filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~15 / 9 / 1 step]
52* MTF Filter Level:
Text/Photo 257%~400%
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~13 / 10 / 1 step]
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
53* Filter Strength: Text/Photo
257%~400%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
Selects the MTF filter strength in the sub scan
direction in the text/photo mode. Select a higher
number for stronger application of the filter.
However, increasing the value could increase
the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x 1: 1/16x 2: 1/8x 3: 1/4x
54* MTF Filter Strength:
Text/Photo 257%~400%
4: 1/2x 5: 1x 6: 2x 7: 4x
55* Filter Level: Light Original Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the low-
density mode.
Although selecting a larger number strengthens
application of the filter and improves contrast, it
could also increase the incidence of moir.
[0~6 / 6 /1]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-24 SM
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4903* 56* Filter Strength: Light
Original
Selects the MTF filter strength in the low-density
mode.
Although selecting a larger number strengthens
application of the filter and improves contrast, it
could also increase the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 3 /1 step]
0: 1/32x
1: 1/16x
2: 1/8x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/2x
5: 1x
6: 2x
7: 4x
57* Filter Level: Generation
Copy
Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the copied
original mode. Select a higher number for
stronger application of the filter.
Although selecting a larger number strengthens
application of the filter and improves contrast, it
could also increase the incidence of moir.
[0~6 / 3 /1 step]
58* Filter Strength: Generation
Copy
Selects the MTF filter strength for the copied
original mode. Select a higher number for
stronger application of the filter.
Although selecting a larger number strengthens
application of the filter and improves contrast, it
could also increase the incidence of moir.
[0~7 / 2 / 1 step]
0: 1/32x
1: 1/16x
2: 1/8x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/2x
5: 1x
6: 2x
7: 4x
60* Independent Dot Erase:
Text Mode
Selects the independent dot erase level for the
text mode.
A larger value erases more dots. If zero is
selected, independent dot erase is disabled.
[0~15 / 5 / 1 step]
62* Independent Dot Erase:
Text/Photo
Selects the independent dot erase level for the
text/photo mode.
A larger value erases more dots. If zero is
selected, independent dot erase is disabled.
[0~15 / 0 / 1 step]
63* Independent Dot Erase:
Light Original
Selects the independent dot erase level for the
light original mode.
A larger value erases more dots. If zero is
selected, independent dot erase is disabled.
[0~15 / 0 / 1 step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4903* 64 Independent Dot Erase:
Generation Copy
Selects the independent dot erase level for the
generation copy mode.
A larger value erases more dots. If zero is
selected, independent dot erase is disabled.
[0~15 / 8 / 1 step]
65* Background Erase Level:
Text Mode
Adjusts the threshold for background erase for
the text mode. A larger value reduces dirty
background. If zero is selected, background
erase is disabled.
[0~255 / 10 / 1 step]
66* Background Erase Level:
Photo
Adjusts the threshold for background erase for
the photo mode. A larger value reduces dirty
background. If zero is selected, background
erase is disabled.
[0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
67* Background Erase Level:
Text /Photo
Adjusts the threshold for background erase for
the text/photo mode. A larger value reduces dirty
background. If zero is selected, background
erase is disabled.
[0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
68* Background Erase Level:
Light Original
Adjusts the threshold for background erase for
the light original mode. A larger value reduces
dirty background. If zero is selected, background
erase is disabled.
[0~255 / 10 / 1 step]
69* Background Erase Level:
Generation Copy
Adjusts the threshold for background erase for
the generation copy mode. A larger value
reduces dirty background. If zero is selected,
background erase is disabled.
[0~255 / 20 / 1 step]
70* Edge Detection: Text Selects edge detection for the text mode
(65%~154%). Edge detection applies MTF
correction only to edges.
[0~1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Edge detection not conducted.
1 Conducts edge detection processing.
71* Edge Detection: Text/Photo Selects edge detection for the text/photo mode
(65%~154%). Edge detection applies MTF
correction only to edges.
[0~1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Edge detection not conducted.
1 Conducts edge detection processing.
72* Edge Detection Threshold
Value: Text
Selects the threshold value for edge detection
for the text mode (65%~154%).
[0~8 / 4 / 1 step]
The larger the value, the easier the edge
detection and the better the text quality.
The lower the value, the more difficult the edge
detection and the better the pattern quality. As
MTF correction is applied only to edges, this
function is effective in reducing moir. However,
a higher value could cause image quality to
deteriorate as a result of erroneous edge
detection output.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-26 SM
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4903* 73* Edge Detection Threshold
Value: Text/Photo
Selects the threshold value for edge detection
for the text/photo mode (65%~154%).
[0~8 / 4 / 1 step]
75* Line Width Correction:
Generation Mode
Selects how line widths are corrected in the
copied original mode for both the main and sub
scan direction.
In copied original mode, lines may bulge in the
main scan direction. Adjust until result is
satisfactory.
[0~15 / 8 / 1 step]
Value Main Scan Line
Correction
Sub Scan Line
Correction
1 None Thin
2 None Very thin
3 None Thick
4 None None
5 Very thin Very thin
6 Very thin Thin
7 Very thin Thick
8 Thin None
9 Thin Very thin
10 Thin Thin
11 Thin Thick
12 Thick None
13 Thick Very thin
14 Thick Thin
15 Thick Thick
76* Line Width Correction
Threshold (Main Scan)
Selects the threshold for line width detection in
the main scan direction in the copied original
mode.
[0~5 / 1 / 1 step]
Low: More difficult to thicken thin lines.
High: Easier to thicken thin lines.
77* Line Width Correction
Threshold (Sub Scan)
Selects the threshold for line width detection in
the sub scan direction in the copied original
mode.
[0~5 / 1 / 1 step]
Low: More difficult to thicken thin lines.
High: Easier to thicken thin lines.
4904* IPU Setting 1
Selects the size of the dither matrix for the photo
mode.
[0~4 / 2 / 1]
Value Method Lines Effect
0 Error Diffusion Best resolution
1 Dither 8 x 8 75 Screening
2 Dither 8 x 8 106 Best grayscale
3 Dither 6 x 6 142 Good grayscale
2* Gradation Processing
Selection
4 Dither 4 x 4 212 Good resolution
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-27 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4904* 3* Density Setting for Low
Density Original Mode
Selects the density factor for the low-density
original mode.
[0~1 / 0 / 1]
0: Selects normal density.
1: Digitizes to near binary image.
Use to achieve better balance between text and
images, correct shadows that appear around
text in handwritten documents, to enhance
documents written in pencil, or to achieve stark
contrast when copying blueprints, building plans,
etc.
4* Density Setting for Copied
Original Mode
Setting same as above.
[0~1 / 0 /1 step]
7* Error Diffusion Pattern Adjusts the threshold level for error diffusion
processing in the text/photo mode.
[0~2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: No pattern (matrix) used.
1: Matrix 1 used.
2 Matrix 2 used.
Select zero for daily use. Select 1 or 2 to
improve the texture.
12* Binary Threshold Level Selects the threshold value for binary digitization
of the copied image.
Image data equal to or greater than the value is
processed as black; image data less than the
value is processed as white.
[0~255 / 128 / 1 step]
This feature is not used for copy applications.
Other applications set for binary digital
processing will use the SP as the default setting.
18* Binary Dither Pattern Selects the dithering threshold value for the
pattern to be used in the photo mode during
binary processing.
[0~3 / 0 / 1 step]
0: 106 lines (8 x 8 matrix)
1: 141 lines (6 x 8 matrix)
2: 212 lines (8 x 8 matrix)
3: 268 lines (8 x 8 matrix)
4905 Image Data Path
1 Filtering/Magnification DFU
2 Gradation DFU
4 Printout Type Selection DFU
4909 IPU Settings 2
1 IPU Module Skip Setting
(Image Processing)
DFU
17 Image Data Path CDIC DFU
19 Image Data Path
Application
DFU
20 Image Data Path Printer DFU
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-28 SM
SP4 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
4911 HDD Enter the Copy SP mode, select the desired SP,
and then press Execute on the touch panel. (
5.1.1)
Note: After execution, you must cycle the
machine off and on with the main power switch.
1 HDD Formatting (All) Initializes the entire hard disk.
2 HDD Formatting (IMH) Initializes documents stored with the document
servers, stamp print data, scanner send data,
fax send data
3 HDD Formatting (NFA) Initializes NetFile thumbnail images.
4 HDD Formatting (Job Log) Initializes job logging data (for popular server)
5 HDD Formatting (Printer
Fonts)
Initializes printer and stored fonts.
9 HDD Formatting (Debug) DFU
.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-29 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP5-xxx: Mode
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5024* mm/inch Display Selection Selects the unit of measure.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and
on.
0: Europe/Asia 1: North America
0: mm, 1: inch
5044 Operation Panel Bit SW DFU
5104* A3/DLT Double Count Specifies whether the counter is doubled for
A3/DLT.
0: No, 1: Yes
If # is selected, the total counter and the current
user code counter count up twice when A3 or
DLT paper is used.
5106* 6* ADS Level Selection Selects the image density level used in ADS
mode.
[1~7 / 4 / 1 notch per step]
Example: If you set SP5-106-6 to 2: Pressing
the Auto Image Density key toggles the display
off and manual notch 2 is selected.
Adjust this SP if the customer cannot attain clean
copies after performing automatic density
adjustment.
5112* Non-Standard Paper
Selection
Determines whether a non-standard paper size
can be initialized for copying or not.
0: No, 1: Yes
If # is selected, a non-standard size can be
input using the UP mode.
5113* Optional Counter Type Selects the corresponding key for installed
devices such as a coin lock. Japan only
[0~5 / 0 / 1 step]
0 None.
1 Key card (RK3, RK4)
2 Key card (subtraction count setting)
3 Pre-paid card
4 Coin lock
5 MF key card
5118* Disable Copying DFU
5120* Mode Clear Opt. Counter
Removal
Clears all coin devices. Japan only
[0~2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Normal reset.
1: Resets only when job finished or before job
begins.
2: Not normal reset.
5121* Counter Up Timing Determines whether the optional key counter
counts up at paper feed or at paper exit.
0: Feed, 1: Exit
The total counter is not affected by this SP mode.
5127* APS Mode Selects whether the APS function is enabled or
disabled with the contact of a pre-paid card or
coin lock.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-30 SM
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5129* F Paper Size Selection Selects the F paper size
[0~2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: 8 13 (L)
1: 8 13 (L)
2: 8 13 (L)
5131* Paper Size Type Selection Selects the paper size (type) for both originals
and copy paper.
[0~2 / DIP SW setting / 1 step]
0: Japan
1: North America
2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and
on. If the paper size of the archive files stored on
the HDD is different, abnormal copies could
result. Perform SP5-822 and ask the customer to
restore the archive files.
5150* By-Pass Wide Paper
Mode
Determines whether the transfer sheet from the
by-pass tray is used or not.
0: Off, 1: On
Normally the length for sub scanning paper from
the by-pass tray is limited to 600 mm, but this can
be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5212* Page Stamp
3* Duplex Printout Right/Left
Position
Determines how horizontal printing is executed
during duplex printing. Sets the upper right corner
of the front side and the upper left corner of the
backside so the starting points for horizontal
printing are the same on both sides DFU.
[10~+10 / 0 / 1 mm step]
10: Extreme right
+10: Extreme left
4* Duplex Printout High/Low
Position
Determines how vertical printing is executed
during duplex printing. Sets the upper right corner
of the front side and the upper left corner of the
backside so the starting points for vertical printing
are the same on both sides. DFU
[10~+10 / 0 / 1 mm step]
10: Extreme top
+10: Extreme bottom
5302* 2* Set Time Adjusts the RTC time setting for the local time
zone.
[1440~+1440 / 1 min. step]
Example: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9
hours x 60 min.)
5501* 1* PM Alarm Interval Sets the PM alarm interval.
[0~255 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Alarm off
1~255: Alarm goes off when
Value (1~255) x 1000 PM counter
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-31 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5501* 2* Original Count Alarm Sets the alarm to sound after the specified total
number of originals goes through the ARDF.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals
passing through the ARDF 10,000
5504* Jam Alarm Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level
(document mis-feeds are not included). DFU
[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
5505* Error Alarm Sets the error alarm level. Japan only
[0~255 / ACV / 100 copies per step]
5507* 1* Paper Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the paper
supply. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified
number transfer sheets for each paper size
(A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
2* Staple Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the stapler
installed in the finisher. Japan only
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
3* Toner Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the toner end.
DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select 1 the alarm will sound when the
copier detects toner end.
128* Others
132* A3
133* A4
134* A5
141* B4
142* B5
160* DLT
164* LG
166* LT
172* HLT
The Paper Supply Call Level: nn SPs specify
the paper control call interval for the referenced
paper sizes. DFU
[00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
5508* CC Call
1* Remain of Jam
(Unattended Jam)
Switches the control call on/off for an unattended
jam. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select 1, the alarm sound if a jam is left
unattended for 15 minutes.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-32 SM
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5508* 2* Continuous Jam
Occurrence
Switches the control call on/off for the occurrence
of consecutive jams. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select 1, the alarm will sound if 5
consecutive jams occur in the copier.
3* Continuous Door Open Switches the control call on/off for the cover open
alarm. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select 1, the alarm will sound if the door
remains open for 15 minutes.
5801* Memory Clear Resets all correction data for process control and
all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values. (! 5.18)
To execute, hold down $ for over 3 seconds,
and then turn the copier off and on again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or
after the copier has malfunctioned due to a
damaged NVRAM.
5802* Printer Free Run Performs a free run. The scanner scans once and
the printer prints for the number of copies
requested.
To perform the free run, after selecting 1, press
the Copy Window to enter copy mode, input the
number of copies, and then press the Start key.
To stop the free run, press *.
0: Off, 1: On
5803 Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches. (! 5.1.4)
5804 Output Check Turns on the electrical components individually
for test purposes. (! 5.1.5)
5807 Option Connection Check
1 ARDF
2 Bank (Paper Tray Unit)
3 LCT
4 Finisher (1000-sheet,
Two-Tray finisher)
Checks the connectors to the optional peripheral
devices. Execution will return either a 1 or 0:
1: Device connected correctly.
2: Device not connected correctly.
5811* 1* Machine Serial Number Use to input the machine serial number. This is
normally done at the factory.
If you want to know the serial number, print the
system parameter list. Press ! and then input
A.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
1* Service Tel. Number Use this to input the telephone number of the
service representative. This number is displayed
when a service call condition occurs.
Press the ! key to input a pause. Press the
Clear modes key to delete the telephone
number.
Rev. 11/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-33 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5812* 2* SMC Report Transfer Fax.
No.
Use this to input the fax number of the service
representative This number is printed on the
Counter Report (UP: System No. 19)
Press the key to input a pause.
Press the Clear modes key to delete the
telephone number.
1 CSS Function On/Off Japan Only
0: Off, 1: On.
5816*
2 CE Call Japan Only
0: Start, 1: Finish
5821* CSS PI Device Code Selects the PI device code. DFU
[0~4 / 0 / 1 step]
5824 NVRAM Data Upload Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for
counters and the serial number) from NVRAM on
the control board to a flash memory card. (
5.3.1)
5825 NVRAM Data Download Downloads the content of a flash memory card to
the NVRAM on the control board. ( 5.3.2)
After executing this SP, switch the copier off and
on.
5828* 25* Software Switch Sets the reference for the network software.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
26* Network Operation Mode
Setting
Sets the TCP operation mode for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
27* Network Syslog Server
Address Setting
Sets the syslog server address for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 7F000001h / 1 hex unit step]
28* Network Time Server
Address Setting
Sets the time server address for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
29* Network DNS Server
Address Setting
Sets the DNS server address for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
30* Network Directprint Port
Number Setting
Sets the directprint port number for the network.
[1024~65535 / 9100 / 1 step]
31* Network IPP Timeout
Setting
Sets the IPP timeout for the network.
[30~65535 / 900 / 1 step]
32 Network IPX Address
Setting (NetWare)
Sets the IPX Address.
33* Network Remote Printer
Number Setting
(NetWare)
Sets the remote printer number for the network.
[0~254 / 0 / 1 step]
34* Network Software Switch
Setting (NetWare)
Sets the software switch for the network.
[0000~FFFFh / 0003h / 1 hex unit step]
35* Network Transport
Protocol of Print Server
Setting (NetWare)
Sets the transport protocol of print server for the
network.
0001h: TCP & IPX
0100h: TCP& IPX (Priority: IPX)
0102h: TCP Only (Priority: TCP)
0001h: IPX Only
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-34 SM
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5828* 36 Network AppleTalk
Module Setting
Sets the AppleTalk module for the network.
2: EtherTalk Phase2
37 Network NetNo Setting
(AppleTalk)
Sets the NetNo of AppleTalk network.
38 Network Object Name
Setting (AppleTalk)
Sets the object name of AppleTalk network.
39* Network AppleTalk Type
Setting
Sets the AppleTalk type for the network.
40 Network Working Zone
Setting (AppleTalk)
Sets the AppleTalk working zone for the network.
47* Network Job Analysis
Timeout Setting
(Centronics)
Sets the Centronics job analysis timeout for the
network.
[0~4200 s / 3 s / 1 sec. step]
48* Network Job Timeout
Setting (Centronics)
Sets the Centronics job timeout for the network.
[0~4200 s / 0 s / 1 sec. step]
49* Network Noise Cancel
Setting (Centronics)
Sets the noise cancel level for the network.
[4~7 / 4 / 1 clock per step]
50* Network 1284
Compatibility Setting
(Centronics)
Switches Centronics IEEE1284 compatibility
on/off for the network.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Selecting 0 disables bi-directional data
transmission.
51* Network Data Transfer
Speed Setting
(Centronics)
Sets the Centronics transfer speed for the
network.
0: SLOW, 1: FAST
If you select 0 there will be a 120 s delay from
the STP signal to the data transfer. (With 1: FAST
there is no delay.)
52* Network ECP Setting
(Centronics)
Switches the ECP setting for Centronics off/on.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
With 1 selected, SP5-828-050 must be enabled
for 1284 mode compatibility.
Network Transmission
Speed Setting
Selects the Ethernet transmission speed.
[0x00~0x03 / 0x00 / 0x01 step]
Bit1 Bit2 Speed
0 0 Auto Sense
0 1 10Base-T
1 0 100Base-Tx
53*
1 1 Auto
65,
66,
69
For Japanese models only Please do not adjust these modes, they will not
function correctly even if the settings are
changed.
5833 Job Log Transfer On/Off
Setting
Switches the job log transfer on/off for Poplar
server.
0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable)
5834 Enable Operation Panel
Image Settings
Enables and disables the operation panel read
(dump) feature. After powering on the machine,
set this option to 1 to enable this feature.
0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable)
To reset the machine to 0, the machine must be
turned off and on again. Selecting 0 for this option
without cycling the power off and on does not
restore the default setting (0).
Rev. 09/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-35 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5907* Plug & Play Sets the brand name and the production name for
Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored
in NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective or has
been replaced, these names should be registered
again.
To set the plug and play model name, enter the
model number, and then press .
5914* Application Counter
Display
Selects whether or not the total printer counter is
displayed in the UP mode.
0: Off, 1: On
5915 Mechanical Counter
Detection
Checks whether the mechanical counter inside
the inner cover is connected or not.
Display:
0: Not detected
1: Detected
2: Unknown
5918* A3/DLT Counter Display Sets the key press display for the counter key.
[0, 1 / 1 / --]
This setting has no relation to (SSP) SP5-104
A3/DLT Double Count.
5923* Flame Elimination Area
Change
Toggles between two settings that affect the
appearance of the pages for border removal and
printed facing pages: (1) Using the original area
as the allotted area, or (2) Using only the copy
paper as the allotted area.
[0, 1/ 0 / --]
0: Original area used as base
1: Copy used as the base
5958 Feed Clutch Start Timing
Adjustment
Adjusts the clutch timing to optimize the intervals
between fed sheets to reduce jams in the feed
unit.
[35 ~ 57.5 / 42.5 / 2.5mm]
5961* Large Capacity Exit Mode Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent
to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Tray finisher is
installed.
[0, 1 / 1 / ---]
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5970* Debug Serial Output DFU
5974* Cherry Server lite/ Switch
to Full
Switches writing between the Cherry lite
application provided and the optional full version.
0: Lite, 1: Full
5990 SMC Printout
1 All (Data List)
2 SP (Mode Data List)
3 User Program
4 Logging Data
5 Diagnosis Report
7 NIB Summary
21 Copier User Program
22 Scanner SP
23 Scanner User Program
Prints all of the system parameter lists for the
item selected. ( 5.1.6) Input the number for the
item that you want to print, and then press :
Execute on the touch panel.
Rev. 09/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-36 SM
SP6-xxx: Peripherals
SP6 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
6006* DF Registration Adjustment Adjusts the side-to-side and leading edge
registration for simplex and duplex original
feeding in ARDF mode. Press ! to toggle .
1* Side-to-side [3 ~ +3 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
2* Leading Edge (Thin Original) [30 ~ +30 / 0.0 / 0.17 mm step]
3* Leading Edge (Duplex Front)
4* Leading Edge (Duplex Rear)
[42 ~ +42 / 0.0 / 0.12 mm step]
6007 ADF Input Check
1 Group 1
2 Group 2
Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches of the ARDF.( 5.1.4)
6008 ADF Output Check Switches on each electrical component (ARDF
motor, solenoid, etc.) of the ARDF for testing. (
5.1.5)
Press # to switch on or $ to switch off.
6009 DF Free Run
1 Duplex Mode
2 Stamp Mode
Performs a free run with the ARDF for duplex and
stamp testing. Input the number for the item you
want to check, and then press # to start.
1: To Start, 0: To cancel
This is a general free run controlled from the
copier. For more detailed free run modes, see the
ARDF manual.
6010* DF Stamp Position
Adjustment
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the
scanned originals.
[7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps]
Sets detection of an original size that is larger
than the size above the size assigned to the
original detection sensor which otherwise may not
be possible. This provides an alternate selection
for detection, other than that assigned with SP5-
131.
0 / 1
0: Allows settings shaded in table below.
1: Allows settings not shaded in table below.
Setting
Bit 0 1
7 A4 (L) LT (L)
6 11 x 15 DLT (L)
5 DLG (L) 11 x 15
4 LT (S) US Exec (S)
3 LT (L) 8* x 10 (L)
2 LG (L) F4 (L)
1 A4 (L) 16K (L)
6016* Original Size Decision
Priority
0 8K (L) DLT (L)
6017* Sheet Through Magnification Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan
direction for ADF mode.
[50.0 ~ +50.0 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
Use the ! key to toggle between + and - before
entering the value
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-37 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP6 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
6105* Staple Position Adjustment Adjusts the staple position in the main scan
direction when using the two-tray finisher.
[3.5~+3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm step]
Press ! to toggle . A larger value shifts the
staple toward the edge of the paper.
6113* Punch Hole Adjustment Adjusts the punch hole position.
[7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps]
Press ! to toggle . A larger value shifts the
holes toward the edge of the paper.
1* 2-Holes 2-hole punches for Japan, North America,
Europe, and 4-hole punches for Northern Europe.
2* 3-Holes 3-hole punches for North America, and 4-hole
punches for Europe.
6902* Fold Position Adjustment Japan Only
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-38 SM
SP7-xxx: Data Log
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7001* Main Motor Operation Time The number of prints and drive time for drum
revolutions can be obtained by counting the main
motor revolution time. If the amount of the time
required for the drum to revolve to print 1 copy
increases, this data combined with the number of
copies can be used to analyze problems and
could be useful for future product development.
Display: 00000000~99999999 min.
7002* Original Counter
1* Total Counter
2* Copier
3* Fax
4* Document Box
5* Scanner
6* Others
Select a number to display the total original count
(number of originals fed) for the selected item.
7003* Print Counter
1* Total Counter
2* Copier
3* Fax
4* Printer
5* Others
Select a number to display the total print count for
the selected item.
7006* C/O, P/O Counter
1* C/O (Copies/Original)
2* P/O (Prints/Original)
Displays the number of copies per original when
making more than 10 copies.
For example, if you make 15 copies of a 3 page
original document, for a total of 45 sheets, then
the counter would be 15 (5 copies counted from
11 to 15 x 3 originals). No count will be returned
for 1~10 copies of an original.
7007* Other Counters
1* Duplex Counter
2* A3/DLT Counter
3* Staple Counter
4* Scan Counter
Displays the count total for the selected item.
7101* Copy Counter: Paper Size Displays the total number of prints by paper size.
5* A4 H (Sideways)
6* A5 H (Sideways)
14* B5 H (Sideways)
38* LT H (Sideways)
44* HLT H (Sideways)
132* A3 V (Lengthwise)
133* A4 V (Lengthwise)
134* A5 V (Lengthwise)
141* B4 V (Lengthwise)
142* B5 V (Lengthwise)
160* DLT V (Lengthwise)
164* LG V (Lengthwise)
166* LT V (Lengthwise)
172* HLT V (Lengthwise)
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-39 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7101* 255* Others
7201* Total Scan Counter Displays the total number of originals scanned.
7204* Copy Counter: Paper Tray Displays the total number of sheets fed from each
paper feed tray.
1* Paper Tray 1 Copier
2* Paper Tray 2 Copier
3* Paper Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
4* Paper Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
5* LCT Large Capacity Tray (Option)
6* By-Pass Copier
7205* Total ADF Counter Displays the total number of originals fed by the
ARDF.
7206* Staple Counter Display the total number of staples fired.
1* Normal Staple
2* Booklet Staple Japan Only
7209* Punch Displays the total times the punch has fired.
7301* Copy Count: Magnification
1* Reduce 25%-49%
2* Reduce 50%~99%
3* Full Size
4* Enlarge 101%~200%
5* Enlarge 201%~400%
6* Direct Mag. 2
7* Direct Size Mag. mm (inch)
8* Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Displays the total number of prints by
magnification rate.
7304* Copy Counter: Copy Mode Displays the total number of prints by copy
operation mode.
1* Original Mode: Text
2* Original Mode: Text/Photo
3* Original Mode: Photo
4* Original Mode: Generation
5* Original Mode: Pale
6* Punch
7* Repeat
8* Sort
9* Staple
10* Series
11* Erase
12* Duplex
13* ADF
14* Double Copy
15* Duplex Original
16* Interrupt Copy
17* Combine 1 Side
18* Combine 2 Side
19* Booklet
20* Magazine
21* Batch
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-40 SM
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7304* 22* SADF Displays the total number of prints by copy
operation mode.
23* Mixed Sizes
24* Stamp
25* Cover Page/Chapter Page
26* Slip Sheet
7305* Copy Counter Set
Number
Displays the total number of prints for multiple
copy jobs.
1* 1 to 1
2* 1 to 2~5
3* 1 to 6~10
4* 1 to 11~20
5* 1 to 21~50
6* 1 to 51~100
7* 1 to 101~300
8* 1 to 301~ Over
7306* Job Counter Copy Mode Displays the total number of prints based on the
job mode.
1* Sort
2* Staple
3* Punch
4* Reserve Copy
5* Check Copy
7320* Document Server: Scan
Storage
1* Scanning Count
Displays the original count stored on the
document server.
7321* Document Server: Each
Size of Originals
Displays the number of originals by paper size
scanned at the copy server.
4* A3
5* A4
6* A5
13* B4
14* B5
32* DLT
36* LG
38* LT
44* HLT
128* Others
7323* Document Server: Each
Size of Printouts
Displays the number of prints by paper size.
5* A4 (S)
6* A5 (S)
14* B5 (S)
38* LT (S)
44* HLT (S)
128* Other
132* A3 (L)
133* A4 (L)
134* A5 (L)
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-41 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7323* 141* B4 (L) Displays the number of prints by paper size.
142* B5 (L)
160* DLT (L)
164* LG (L)
166* LT (L)
172* HLT (L)
7324* Document Server: Print Job
Counter
Displays the number of jobs classed by job
content.
1* Duplex
2* Sort
3* Staple
4* Punch
5* Check Copy
6* Print 1st Page
7325* Document Server: Job
Counter Page Number
1* 1-page
2* 2-pages
3* 3~5 pages
4* 6~10 pages
5* over 11 pages
Displays the number of print jobs classed by size
of the job.
7326* Document Server: Job
Counter File Number
1* 1 file
2* 2~5 files
3* 6~10 files
4* over 11 files
Displays the number of print jobs classed by the
number of files.
7327* Document Server: Job
Counter Set Number
Displays the number of print jobs classed by the
set sizes.
1* 1 to 1
2* 1 to 2~5
3* 1 to 6~10
4* 1 to 11~20
5* 1 to 21~50
6* 1 to 51~100
7* 1 to 101~300
8* 1 to 301~ over
7328* Document Server: Print
Counter Print Mode
Displays the number of prints by mode.
6* Punch
8* Sort
9* Staple
12* Duplex
19* Booklet
20* Magazine
24* Stamp
25* Cover/Chapter Page
26* Slip Sheet
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-42 SM
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7401* Total SC Counter Displays the total number of service calls that
have occurred. Display range: 0000~9999
7403* SC History
1* Latest
2* Latest 1
3* Latest 2
4* Latest 3
5* Latest 4
6* Latest 5
7* Latest 6
8* Latest 7
9* Latest 8
10* Latest 9
Displays the most recent service calls successive
groups of 10.
7502* Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams.
Display range: 0000~9999
7503* Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of original jams.
Display range: 0000~9999
7504* Paper Jam Counter by Jam
Location
Displays the total number of copy jams by
location.
Display range: 0000~9999
A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails
to activate the sensor at the precise time. A
Paper Lag paper jam occurs when the paper
remains at the sensor for longer than the
prescribed time.
Paper Late
Error No.
Paper Lag
Error No.
Error
1* At Power On
3* 1st Paper Feed Sensor
4* 2nd Paper Feed Sensor
5* 3rd Paper Feed Sensor
6* 4th Paper Feed Sensor
7* 57* LCT Tray Relay Sensor
8* 58* Transport sensor 1
9* 59* Transport sensor 2
10* 60* Transport sensor 3
61* Transport sensor 4
13* 63* Registration Sensor
14* 64* Fusing Exit Sensor
16* 66* Exit Entrance Sensor
17* 67* Relay Sensor 1 (option)
18* 68* Relay Sensor 2 (option)
19* 69* Duplex Entrance Sensor
23* 73* Duplex Exit Sensor
24* 74* 1-Bin Tray Sensor
25* Finisher Entrance
26* Finisher Proof Tray
27* Finisher Shift Tray
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-43 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7504* 28* Finisher Staple Tray
29* Finisher Tray
30* Mailbox Entrance Sensor
31* Mailbox Proof Tray Exit Sensor
32* Mailbox Relay Sensor
33* Mailbox Exit Sensor
35*
36*
37*
38*
39*
40*
41*
Booklet Finisher (Japan Only)
7505* Total Original Jam by Location Displays the total number of original jams by
location. These jams occur when the original
does not activate the sensors.
A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails
to activate the sensor at the precise time. A
Paper Linger paper jam occurs when the paper
remains at the sensor for longer than the
prescribed time.
1* At Power On
Paper Late Error
No.
Paper Lag Error
No.
Error Location
3 53 Skew Correction Sensor
4 54 Interval Sensor
5 55 Registration Sensor
6 56 Relay Sensor
7 57 Inverter Sensor
7506* Jam Count by Copy Size Displays the total number of copy jams by paper
size.
5* A4 H (Sideways)
6* A5 H (Sideways)
14* B5 H (Sideways)
38* LT H (Sideways)
44* HLT H (Sideways)
132* A3 V (Lengthwise)
133* A4 V (Lengthwise)
134* A5 V (Lengthwise)
141* B4 V (Lengthwise)
142* B5 V (Lengthwise)
160* DLT V (Lengthwise)
164* LG V (Lengthwise)
166* LT V (Lengthwise)
172* HLT V (Lengthwise)
255* Others
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-44 SM
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7507* Copy Jam History
(Transfer Sheet)
1* Last
2* Last 1
3* Last 2
4* Last 3
5* Last 4
6* Last 5
7* Last 6
8* Last 7
9* Last 8
10* Last 9
Displays the copy jam history of the transfer unit
in groups of 10, starting with the most recent 10
jams.
Sample Display:
CODE: 007
SIZE: 05h
TOTAL: 0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
where:
CODE is the SP7-505-*** number (see above.
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003)
DATE is the date the previous jam(s) occurred.
Paper Size ASAP Code (hex)
A4 (S) 05
A5 (S) 06
B5 (S) 0E
LT (S) 26
HLT (S) 2C
A3 (L) 84
A4 (L) 85
A5 (L) 86
B4 (L) 8D
B5 (L) 8E
DLT (L) A0
LG (L) A4
LT (L) A6
HLT (L) AC
Others FF
7508* Original Jam History
1* Last
2* Last 1
3* Last 2
4* Last 3
5* Last 4
6* Last 5
7* Last 6
8* Last 7
9* Last 8
10* Last 9
Displays the original jam history in groups of 10,
starting with the most recent 10 jams.
Sample Display:
CODE: 007
SIZE: 05h
TOTAL: 0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
where:
CODE is the SP7-505-*** number (see above.
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
TOTAL is the total error count (SP7-003-001)
DATE is the date the previous jam(s) occurred.
7801 ROM No./Firmware
Version
Displays the ROM number and firmware version
numbers.
7803* PM Counter Display Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
7804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM counter. To reset, press #.
7807 SC/Jam Counter Reset Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press
#.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters:
SP7-507, SP7-508.
7808 Counter Reset Resets all counters except SP7-003-***, SP7-006-
***. To reset, press #.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-45 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7810 Access Code Clear Use to clear the access code if the customer
forgets the code. After clearing the code is reset
for Null and the password entry display does not
open. To clear, press #.
7811 Original Count Clear Clears the original total display, displayed with
SP7-002-***. To clear, press #.
7816 Print Counter Reset
1 Tray1
2 Tray2
3 Tray3
4 Tray4
5 LCT
6 By-pass
Resets the total copy count by paper tray. To
reset, press #.
Use these SP modes when replacing the pick-up,
feed, and separation rollers.
7822 Copy Counter Reset
Magnification
Resets all counters of SP7-301 (Copy Count:
Magnification). To reset, press #.
7825 Total Counter Reset Resets all electronic counters. To reset, press #.
This SP mode is usually performed at installation
7826* MF Device Error Count This display is for the Japanese version only.
Japan Only
7827 MF Device Error Count
Clear
This SP is for the Japanese version only. (Clears
SP7-826.) Japan Only
7832 Self-Diagnosis Result
Display
Execute to open the Self-Diagnose Result
Display to view details about errors. Use the keys
on in the display on the touch-panel to scroll
through all the information. If no errors have
occurred, you will see the No Error notation.
7904 Copy Counter Reset:
Copy Mode
Resets all counters for SP7-301, SP7-304. To
reset, press #.
7905 Job Counter Reset: Set
Number
Resets all counters for SP7-305. To reset, press
#.
7907 Job Counter Reset: Copy
Mode
Resets all counters for SP7-306. To reset, press
#.
7908 Job Counter Reset:
Originals
Resets the counter for SP7-002-2. To reset, press
#.
7920 Document Server: Scan
Storage Reset
Clears the count for SP7-320. To reset, press #.
7921 Document Server: Original
Counter Reset
Clears the count for SP7-321. To reset, press #.
7923 Document Server: Print
Counter Reset by Size
Clears the count for SP7-323. To reset, press #.
7924 Document Server: Print
Job Counter Reset
Clears the count for SP7-324. To reset, press #.
7925 Document Server: Job
Counter Reset Page
Number
Clears the count for SP7-325. To reset, press #.
7926 Document Server: Job
Count Reset File
Number
Clears the count for SP7-326. To reset, press #.
7927 Document Server: Job
Counter Reset Set
Number
Clears the count for SP7-327. To reset, press #.
7928 Document Server: Print
Count Reset Print Mode
Clears the count for SP7-328. To reset, press,
#.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-46 SM
SP7 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
Execute this SP to clear the following SP modes:
7930* Copy Document Server: All
Counter Clear SP7-301 Copy Count: Magnification
SP7-304 Copy Count: Copy Mode
SP7-305 Copy Counter: Copy Mode
SP7-306 Job Counter: Copy Mode
SP7-320 Doc. Server: Scan Storage
SP7-321 Doc. Server: Original Counter
SP7-323 Doc. Server: Paper Size Counter
SP7-324 Document Server: Job Counter
SP7-325 Doc. Server: Job Counter Page No.
SP7-326 Doc. Server: Job Counter File No.
SP7-327 Doc. Server: Job Counter Set No.
SP7-328 Doc. Server: Count by Mode
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-47 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING: SP2-902
NOTE: Always print a test pattern to confirm correct operation of the machine.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-902.
2. Press * or +.
* IPU Test Print
+ Test Pattern
3. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press '. (See
the tables below.)
4. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes. This selects the
test pattern for printing.
5. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for
the test print (paper size, etc.)
6. Press Start ( twice. (Ignore the Place Original messages) to start the test
print.
7. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-2: IPU Test Print)
No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
0 None 8 Grayscale (Horizontal)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 9 Grayscale (Vertical)
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 10 Cross Pattern (8)
3 Vertical Line (2 dot) 11 Cross Shape
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot) 12 Argyle Pattern
5 Alternate Dot Pattern 13 Cross Pattern (256)
6 Grid Pattern (1-dot) 14 Cross Pattern (64)
7 Vertical Strips
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-48 SM
Test Pattern Table: SP2-902-3 Printing Test Patterns
No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
0 None 20 Horizontal Line (1-dot) (Reversed LD1, LD2)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 21 Grid Pattern (1-dot) (Reversed LD1, LD2)
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 22 Grid Pattern (1-dot pair) (Reversed LD1, LD2)
3 Vertical Line (2-dot) 23 Independent Pattern (1-dot) (Reversed LD1, LD2)
4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 24 3 Grayscale
5 Grid Pattern (1-dot) 25 Grayscale (Horizontal)
6 Grid Pattern (1-dot pair) 26 Grayscale (Vertical)
7 (not used) 27 Grayscale (Vertical/Horizontal)
8 (not used) 28 Grayscale (Grid)
9 Full Dot Pattern 29 Grayscale (Horizontal Extension)
10 Black band 30 Grayscale (Vertical Extension)
11 Trimming Area 31 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
12 Trimming Area (2-dot) 32 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
13 Argyle Pattern 33 Grayscale (Vertical/Horizontal Margin)
14 Argyle Pattern (2-dot_) 34 Grayscale (Horizontal Extension Margin)
15 Hounds Tooth Check (2-dot
Horizontal)
35 Grayscale (Vertical Extension Margin)
16 Checker Flag Pattern 36 White Pattern
17 Point Black Pattern 37 Grid (1-dot pair) (OR Outside Data 1)
18 Black Band (Vertical) 38 Trimming Area (OR Outside Data)
19 Independent Pattern (4-dot)
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-49 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK
Main Machine Input Check: SP5-803
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-803.
2. Enter the number (1 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
Reading
Number Bit Description
0 1
7 Fusing Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Near End Sensor 2 Activated Deactivated
5 Near End Sensor 1 Activated Deactivated
4 Not Used --- ---
3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Activated Deactivated
2 Paper Size Sensor 3 Activated Deactivated
1 Paper Size Sensor 2 Activated Deactivated
1: Paper Feed
1 (Upper Tray)
0 Paper Size Sensor 1 Activated Deactivated
7 Duplex Unit Set Sensor Unit set Unit not set
6 Near End Sensor 2 Off On
5 Near End Sensor 1 Off On
4 Not used --- ---
3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Activated Deactivated
2 Paper Size Sensor 3 Activated Deactivated
1 Paper Size Sensor 2 Activated Deactivated
2: Paper Feed
2 (Lower Tray
0 Paper Size Sensor 1 Activated Deactivated
7 Zero Cross Signal Detected Not detected
6 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not present Present
5 Exhaust Fan Lock Signal Not locked Locked
4 Cooling Fan Lock Signal Not locked Locked
3 Main Motor Lock Signal Not locked Locked
2 Toner Overflow Sensor Tank not full Tank full
1 Cover Open Cover closed Cover opened
3: Registration
and Others
0 Registration Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-50 SM
Reading
Number Bit Description
0 1
7 Duplex reverse path door Closed Open
6 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5 Not used
4 Paper Size Sensor 4, By-pass Activated Deactivated
3 Paper Size Sensor 3, By-pass Activated Deactivated
2 Paper Size Sensor 2, By-pass Activated Deactivated
1 Paper Size Sensor 1, By-pass Activated Deactivated
4: By-pass
Feed
0 Unit Set Signal Yes No
7 Not used Yes No
6 Unit Set Signal Connected Not connected
5 Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
4 Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
3 Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
2 Left Cover Switch Switch pressed
(cover closed)
Switch not pressed
1 Middle Cover Switch Switch pressed
(cover closed)
Switch not pressed
5: Relay Unit
(Bridge Unit)
0 Right Cover Switch Switch pressed
(cover closed)
Switch not pressed
7 Feed Motor Lock No Yes
6 F-Gate Signal Active Not active
5 Height Sensor Feed height Not feed height
4 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
3 Fusing Unit Detected Not detected
2 Total Counter Not detected Detected
1 Key Counter Detected Not detected
6: Unit Set
0 Key Card Present Detected Not detected
7 Front cover/open closed Open Closed
6 Vertical feed path Clear Not clear
5 2nd Tray Height Sensor Paper not at upper
limit
Paper at upper limit
4 1st Tray Height Sensor Paper not at upper
limit
Paper at upper limit
3 Lower Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
2 Upper Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
1 Lower Paper End Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
7: Paper End
0 Upper Paper End Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-51 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
Reading
Number Bit Description
0 1
7 Dip Switch - 8 On Off
6 Dip Switch - 7 On Off
5 Dip Switch - 6 On Off
4 Dip Switch - 5 On Off
3 Dip Switch - 4 On Off
2 Dip Switch - 3 On Off
1 Dip Switch - 2 On Off
8: DIP
Switches
0 Dip Switch - 1 On Off
7 Not used
6 Right cover open/closed Closed Open
5 1-Bin Unit Set Detected Not detected
4 LD, HP sensor Positioned Not positioned
3 Exit Sensor (Jam) Paper detected Paper not detected
2 Entrance Sensor (Jam) Paper detected Paper not detected
1 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
9: Duplex Unit
0 Duplex Unit Switch Cover closed Cover open
7 Tray 4: Bit 1
8 Tray 4: Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Capacity
5 Tray 3: Bit 1 1 1 Full
4 Tray 3: Bit 0 1 0 50% or more
3 Tray 2: Bit 1 0 1 10% or more
2 Tray 2: Bit 0 0 0 Out, or tray not set
1 Tray 1: Bit 1
10:
Remainder of
Feed Tray 1
0 Tray 1: Bit 0
7 By-pass Yes/No
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Not Used
3 Not Used Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Capacity
2 LCT: Bit 2 1 1 1 Full
1 LCT: Bit 1 1 0 0 80% or more
11:
Remainder of
Feed Tray 2
0 LCT: Bit 0 0 1 1 50% or more
0 1 0 30% or more
0 0 0 10% or more
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-52 SM
Reading
Number Bit Description
0 1
7 Mailbox 9-bin Not full or no tray Full
6 Mailbox 8-bin Not full or no tray Full
5 Not used - -
4 Finisher: Shift Tray 1 Not full or no tray Full
3 Finisher: Shift Tray 2 Not full or no tray Full
2 Not used - -
1 1-Bin Exit Not full or no tray Full
12: Full Exit
Tray 1
0 Machine Exit Not full or no tray Full
7 Mailbox 7-bin Not full or no tray Full
6 Mailbox 6-bin Not full or no tray Full
5 Mailbox 5-bin Not full or no tray Full
4 Mailbox 4-bin Not full or no tray Full
3 Mailbox 3-bin Not full or no tray Full
2 Mailbox 2-bin Not full or no tray Full
1 Mailbox 1-bin Not full or no tray Full
13: Full Exit
Tray 2
0 Mailbox Proof Tray Not full or no tray Full
Table 1: By-pass Feed Table Paper Size Data
Number. Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Paper Width
4: By-pass 1 1 1 1 Post Card
1 1 1 0 B6 lengthwise
1 1 0 1 B5 lengthwise
1 1 0 0 A5 lengthwise / 5.5
1 0 1 1 B4 lengthwise
1 0 0 1 A4 lengthwise / 8.5 / 8
0 1 1 1 A3 lengthwise
0 0 1 1 11 x 17
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-53 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP6-007.
2. Enter the number (1 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
Reading
Group Bit No. Description
0 1
7 Original width sensor 4 Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Original width sensor 3 Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Original width sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Original width sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Original length sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Original length sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
1
0 Original LG sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original stopper
down
6 Pick-up HP sensor Cover closed Cover opened
5 Top cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened
4 Lift sensor Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller down
3 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2
0 Interval Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-54 SM
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK
NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check: SP5-804
1. Open SP mode 5-804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched on for a long time.
B004S502.WMF
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-55 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP5-804 Output Check Table
No. Description No. Description
1 1st Paper Feed Cl. 45 Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid ()
2 2nd Paper Feed Cl. 46 Not used
3 3rd Paper Feed Cl. (PTU) 47 Relay Junction Gate Solenoid
4 4th Paper Feed Cl. (PTU) 48~49 Not used
5 By-pass Paper Feed Cl. 50 Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6 LCT Paper Feed Cl. 51 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
7 ~ 12 Not used 52 Positioning Roller Solenoid (Finishers)
13 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid 53~55 Not used
14 LCT Pick-up Solenoid 56 Toner Bottle Motor
15~16 Not used 57 Transfer Belt Positioning Clutch
17 Transport Motor 1 58~61 Not used
18 Transport Motor 2 62 Quenching Lamp
19 Exit Motor 63 Charge Bias
20 Staple Motor 64~66 Not used
21 Punch Motor 67 Development Bias
22 ~ 24 Not used 68 Not used
25 LCT Motor 69 Transfer Belt Voltage
26 Bank Motor (Paper Tray Unit) 70 ID Sensor LED
27 Not used 71~74 Not used
28 Main Motor 75 Exhaust Fan Motor
29 Duplex Transport Motor 76 Electrical Equipment Cooling Fan Motor
30 Duplex Inverter Motor Rev. 77 Not used
31 Duplex Inverter Motor Fwd 78 Relay Fan Motor
32 Feed/Development Motor 79~84 Not used
33~34 Not used 85 Total Counter
35 Bank Relay Clutch (Paper
Tray Unit)
86~89 Not used
36 Relay Clutch 90 LD (Laser Diode)
37 Not used 91 Not used
38 LCT Relay Clutch 92 Shift Tray Lift Motor (Finishers)
39 Registration Clutch 93 Jogger Motor
40 Development Clutch 94 Stapler Unit Motor
41 Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
(Upper Unit)
95 Stack Feed Out Motor (Finishers)
42 Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
(Lower Unit)
96 Shift Motor (Finishers)
43~44 Not used 97 Stapler Rotation Motor (Two-Tray Finisher)
98 ~ 99 Not used
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-56 SM
ARDF Output Check: SP6-008)
1. Open SP mode SP6-008.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
No. Description
1 Feed Motor (Forward)
2 Feed Motor (Reverse)
3 Drive Motor (Forward)
4 Inverter Motor (Forward)
5 Inverter Motor (Reverse)
6 Feed Clutch
7 Inverter Solenoid
8 Pick-up Motor (Forward)
9 Pick-up Motor (Reverse)
5.1.6 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS: SP5-990
1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you
wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists)
1 All Data List
2 SP Mode Data List
3 UP Mode Data List
4 Logging Data List
5 Self-Diagnostics Results List
7 NIB Summary
21 Copy UP Mode List
22 Scanner SP Mode List
23 Scanner UP Mode List
2. Press ' and then press Yes to confirm the selection of the list that you want to
print.
3. Press Copy Window to return to the copy window.
4. Select the paper size and press Start ( twice to print the list.
5. After printing the list, press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode
display.
6. Press Exit twice to close the SP Mode screen and return to copy mode.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-57 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
List Contents
Here is a brief summary of what is contained on the Logging Data List.
System Counts
Total Count
CE Count
PM Count
Count Timing Printed outputs completed.
No Counts White copied both sides, SMC prints, free runs, DF jams not counted.
Other Single count only, even if double-count selected. (Japan only: (1)
Double count setting cannot be performed, (2) Abnormal coin operations
are counted.)
ARDF Feed-ins
Count Timing Original feed-ins, originals inverted completed.
No Counts ---
Other Feed-in jams.
Scan Starts
Count Timing Engine starts for scanning, image write operations started.
No Counts Prints from external video.
Other Prints from sources other than scanning operation are counted.
Examples: Less than 2 retention copies, SMC prints, white copies
Staples
Count Timing Staple engine cycles completed, number of staples fired.
No Counts Staple jams.
Other ---
Prints by Paper Feeds
Count Timing Paper feeds initiated.
No Counts White duplex copies, SMC prints, free runs, ARDF jams.
Other Jams that interfered with the total count. Trays are counted started from
the Duplex Tray.
Prints by Paper Size
Count Timing Paper feed starts.
No Counts White duplex copies, SMC prints, free runs, ARDF jams.
Other Jams that interfered with the total count.
Scanner SCs
Count Timing SC10n, SC12n occurences counted.
No Counts ---
Other ---
IPU SCs
Count Timing SC19n occurences counted.
No Counts ---
Other ---
Printer SCs
Count Timing SC30n, SC32n, SC35, SC39n, SC40n, SC42n, SC44n, SC49n, SC52n,
SC54n, SC72n occurences counted.
No Counts ---
Other ---
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-58 SM
System Counts
Other SCs
Count Timing SCs generated other than those listed above for Scanner, IPU, Printer.
No Counts ---
Other ---
Operation Time
Count Timing Operation time of the main motor in increments of 100 ms.
No Counts ---
Other Counts scanner and ARDF operation time when these devices are
operating alone so these counts will not match the time count for drum
rotation.
Application Software Counts
Original Total for Copy Application
Count Timing Counts the number of times the size of an original is detected for every
original feed-in.
Other For double-sided originals, counts 1 the first time the backside is set.
Inverting is not counted. This count is different from the ADF Feed-ins
reading described above.
Copy Total for Copy Application
Count Timing Feed-ins started.
Other Blank (white) pages output.
Mode Counts for Copy Application
Copies by Magnifications
Reduction (25%~49%)
Reduction (50%~99%)
1:1
Enlargement (101%~200%)
Enlargement (201%~400%)
Custom (Paper, dimensions,
area, etc.)
Count Timing Number of executions for each magnification category.
Other Also counts white (blank) copies, and the number of
times the operation panel keys are operated for
zooming. For example, an AMS 71% copy is not
counted for 50%~90%.
Copies by Color
Black Copies
Red Copies
Blue Copies
2-Color Copies
Count Timing Feed-in starts for each category. Counts according to
the selection information of the basic screen.
Other Also counts white sheets according to the mode.
Copies by Quality Mode
Text/Photo Mode
Photo Mode
Photo Original Mode
Pencil Original Mode
Count Timing Feed-in starts for each category. Counts according to
the selection information of the basic screen.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-59 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
Mode Counts for Copy Application
Other Also counts white sheets according to the mode.
Copies by Print Function
Job No.
Stamp
User Stamp
User Pattern
Date Stamp
Page Numbering
Count Timing Feed-in starts for each category. (Counts according to
the print tags for each function in the selection
information.)
Other Counts even white sheets (blanks) according to the
selected mode. The feed-times of first pages without
stamps, for example, are also counted. User patterns
are also counted when user stamp is selected or when
pattern mode is selected.
Into1 Function Copies
Count Timing Feed-ins for multiple page per sheet printing (2-up, 4-
up, etc).
Other White sheets (blank) for each mode.
Copies by Editing Mode
Center Erase
Color Erase
All Edit
Pen Area Edit
Editor Edit
Synthesis
Nega/Posi
Center Erase
Center Fill
Mirror
Skew
Shadow Effect
Screening
Gradation
Background Gradation
Repeat, Double Copy
Internal, External Color
Internal, External Erase
Count Timing Feed-ins for each edit mode.
Other White sheets (blank) for each mode. In the Editor Edit
mode, the edit and file are counted during fill execution.
Mode Program
Count Timing Mode program calls.
Other ---
High Speed
Count Timing Feed-in starts while the high speed key is selected.
Other White sheets (blank) while the high speed key is
selected.
Image Rotation
Count Timing Feed-in starts for user image rotation, stapler rotation,
and duplex rotation.
Other White sheets (blank) for the selected mode.
Auto Start
Count Timing Copy feed-ins for Auto Start mode.
Other White sheets (blank) for the high speed mode are also
counted..
Electronic Collate
Count Timing Feed-ins with the collate function selected.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-60 SM
Mode Counts for Copy Application
Other Output to the rotational stacker are not counted. White
sheets (blanks) for the high speed mode are also
counted.
Mechanical Collate
Count Timing Feed-in starts with Sort selected on the finisher.
Other Counts even for stapling. White sheets (blanks) for the
high speed mode are also counted.
Stapler
Count Timing Feed-in starts with Staple selected on the finisher.
Other Not counted for the Collate mode.
5.1.7 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT: SP1-109
When paper wrinkling or image offset occurs, the pressure from the pressure roller
can be adjusted by changing the position of the pressure springs. At this time, the
nip bandwidth can also be checked with SP1-109.
1. Execute SP5-802 to perform a free run of about 50 sheets.
2. Open SP1-109-1, press ', and then press Yes to confirm the selection.
3. Press Copy Window to return to the copy window.
4. Place an OHP sheet (A4/8.5" x 11" sideways) on the by-pass feed tray.
5. Press Start ( twice. The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for about 10
seconds, then it exits automatically.
6. Check the nip bandwidth [A]. The relationship between the position of the
pressure spring and the bandwidth is as follows.
NOTE: Check the nip bandwidth around the center of the OHP.
Pressure spring position Nip width
Upper (default position) 6.0 0.5 mm
Lower 6.5 0.6 mm
If the width is out of the above specification, the pressure spring should be
replaced.
P
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
OHP
A231M509.WMF
[A]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-61 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.1.8 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5-801
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP7-003-1: Electrical total counter value
SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP mode 5-801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules or select the appropriate number from the table below.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All modules Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
processing settings.
3 SCS (System Control
Service)/SRM
Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
5 MCS (Memory Control
Service)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP Bit SW, and printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the Scanner SP modes.
10 Network application Deletes the NFA management files and thumbnails,
and initializes the JOB login ID.
11 NCS (Network Control
Service)
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
(IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the Job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, Job History, and local storage file numbers.
4. Press Execute, and then follow the prompts on the display to complete the
procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Do the laser beam pitch adjustment (SP2-109).
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.21 Replacement and Adjustment, Copy Adjustments).
Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.21.4 Replacement and Adjustment,
touch screen calibration).
Rev. 09/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-62 SM
Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been
changed from their factory settings.
Do SP 3-001-2 (ID Sensor Initial Setting) and SP4-911-1 (HDD media
check).
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
5.1.9 SOFTWARE RESET
The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up. Use the following
procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Press and hold down ! ' together for over 10 seconds. When the machine
beeps once release both buttons. After Now loading. Please wait is displayed for
a few seconds the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal
operation.
5.1.10 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down ' and then press System Settings.
NOTE: You must press ' first.
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
B004S503.WMF
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-63 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
Copier Setting Reset
The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down ' and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press ' first.
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
B004S504.WMF
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-64 SM
5.2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Remove the IC card [A] cover.
3. Insert the IC card [B] containing the software
you wish to download into the card slot of the
controller.
4. Turn on the main power.
5. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD
panel
6. Monitor the downloading status on the
operation panel.
While downloading is in progress, the LCD will
display Writing. When downloading has
been completed, the panel will display OK.
For operation panel software, the Start key lights red while downloading is in
progress, and then lights green again after downloading is completed.
!CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the
new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
7. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and
remove the IC card.
8. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7.
9. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally.
B004I015.WMF
[A]
[B]
UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
SM 5-65 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.3 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from a flash
memory card.
5.3.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824)
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the IC card cover [A].
3. Plug the flash memory card [B] into the card
slot.
4. Turn on the main switch.
5. Execute SP5-824.
6. Press # to start uploading the NVRAM data.
B004I015.WMF
[A]
[B]
UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-66 SM
5.3.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825)
The following data are not downloaded from the flash card:
Total count categories (SP7-003-*** Copy Counter)
C/O, P/O Counter (SP7-006-*** C/O, P/O Count Display)
Dupelx, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning
counters (system settings).
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the IC card cover [A].
3. Plug the flash memory card [B] into the card
slot.
4. Turn on the main switch.
5. Execute SP5-825.
6. Press # to start downloading the NVRAM data.
Note that the following errors could occur during
downloading:
If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that
downloading cannot proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by
pressing #.
If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you
press # a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the
card is abnormal and the execution will halt.
B004I015.WMF
[A]
[B]
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SM 5-67 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.4 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5.4.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial
settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-
diagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart
shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC code is
displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction
or abnormal condition.
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow
Power On
ASI C Check
Ini ti al i zati on
Memor y Check f or
Sel f -Di agnost i c Test
SSCG Check
HDD Check
Memor y Check
OPC Check
I EEE1284
I / F Check
CPU Check
Pr ogr am ROM,
DI MM CRC Check
NVRAM Check
Il l egal Interrupt
Check
Font ROM Check
RTC Check
I C Car d
I / FCheck
Net wor k Check
Engi ne I / F Check
Syst em OS,
Appl i cat i on Check
Self-Diagnostic
Mode Selection
B004S516.WMF
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-68 SM
5.4.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually
in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-
diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No. Name
G02119350 Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis
Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down ', press and hold down ,, and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine.
You will see Now Loading on the touch-panel, and then you will see the
results of the test.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SM 5-69 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
A report like the one below is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test
is executed, whether errors were detected or not.
MODEL NAME XXXX
Seri al No. : ACLD000034 Fi rmware P/ # : ACP82XXXX [1/1]
Fi r mwar e Versi on : 2.49.01 Wed Nov 22 13: 15: 30 2000
[ Syst em Const ruct i on]
Kernel Versi on : Net BSD 1. 3. 3 ( SHI NYOKOHAMA_ROM) #0: Sat Nov 11 16: 15: 35 JST 2000
CPU Syst em Bus Cl ock : 100. 0 MHz CPU Pi pel i ne Cl ock : 200. 0 MHz
Boar d Type : 7 ASI C Versi on : 1397306160
RTC Exi st ence : exi st ence RAM Capaci t y : 100. 663296 MB
HDD Exi st ence : exi st ence HDD Model :
[ Tot al Count er ]
0001000
[ Pr ogr am No. @]
MAI N : ACP82XXXX ENGI NE : Ver 1. 96
LCDC : V1. 39 PI :
ADF : B3515620B SI B : B0045383
FI N : FI N_SDL :
BANK : A6825150 LCT :
MBX : FCU :
DPX :
[ Error Li st @@@]
SCCODE (ERROR CODE ) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE)
SC835 (110C) SC820 (0001) SC820 (0002) SC820 (0003)
SC820 (0004) SC820 (0005)
Sel f - Di agnosi s Repor t
B004S515.WMF
USER PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-70 SM
5.5 USER PROGRAM MODE
The user program (UP) mode is accessed by users and operators, and by sales
and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copiers default settings. The
default settings can be reset at any time by the user. ( 5.1.10)
5.5.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display
To enter the UP mode, press User Tools/Counter .
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, press System Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the User
Tools/Counter display, and then press exit to return to the copy window.
B004S505.WMF
B004S506.WMFF
USER PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-71 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
Copier/Document Server Features
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Copy/Document Server Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the User
Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner
Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more
settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen.
B004S507.WMF
B004S509.WMF
USER PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-72 SM
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Counter.
View the settings, press Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter
display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
B003SL07.WMF
DIP SWITCHES
SM 5-73 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.6 DIP SWITCHES
Controller: DIP SW2
DIP SW No. ON OFF
1 IC Card Boot System ROM Boot
2
3
4
Keep at OFF
I/O Board: DIP SW101
DIP SW No. Function ON OFF
1 Copy Speed 35 cpm (180 mm/s) 45 cpm (230 mm/s)
2 Jam Detection
(see Note)
Off On
3 SC Generation Disabled Enabled
4 Not used OFF (Do not change)
5 Not used OFF (Do not change)
6
7
Destination OFF Japan
OFF
ON North America
OFF
OFF Europe
ON
ON Not used
ON
8 Not used OFF (Do not change)
NOTE: Disabling jam detection is effective only for the main machine (not for the
options).
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
OVERVIEW
SM 6-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
B004V500.WMF
11
10
16
14
12
13
19
18
17
20
21
22
24
23
26
25
27
37
36
39
38
41
40
42
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
43
OVERVIEW
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-2 SM
1 Exposure Glass 23 Pick-up Roller
2 2nd Mirror 24 Paper End Sensor
3 1st Mirror 25 Paper Feed Roller
4 Exposure Lamp 26 Separation Roller
5 Original Width Sensors 27 Upper Relay Roller
6 Original Length Sensors 28 Feed Roller
7 Lens 29 Separation Roller
8 SBU 30 Pick-up Roller
9 Scanner Motor 31 Bottom Plate
10 Hot Roller 32 Development Unit
11 Entrance Sensor 33 Charge Roller
12 Inverter Gate 34 F Mirror
13 Inverter Roller 35 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)
14 Pressure Roller 36 Polygonal Mirror Motor
15 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 37 Laser Unit
16 Upper Transport Roller 38 Toner Supply Bottle Holder
17 Transfer Belt 39 Exit Junction Gate
18 OPC Drum 40 Exit Roller
19 Registration Roller 41 Paper Exit Sensor
20 Lower Transport Roller 42 3rd Mirror
21 Exit Sensor 43 Scanner HP Sensor
22 By-pass Tray
OVERVIEW
SM 6-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.1.2 PAPER PATH
1 ARDF
2 Interchange unit
3 Duplex unit
4 By-pass tray
5 Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
6 Paper tray unit
7 Two-Tray Finisher
8 Bridge unit
9 1-Bin Tray
B004V903.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OVERVIEW
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-4 SM
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1 Transfer Belt Clutch 5 Relay Clutch
2 Registration Clutch 6 Main Motor
3 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 7 Paper Feed/Development Motor
4 Lower Paper Feed Clutch
In this machine, the development unit is provided with its own motor, separate from
the main motor.
B004V106.WMF
Fusing
Transfer
Development
PCU Drive
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BOARD STRUCTURE
SM 6-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
This machine uses the GW (Grand Work) architecture, which allows the copier to
be expanded as an MFP by installing simple modular components (ROM DIMMs)
on the controller board. The BICU and Controller are connected to the FCU and
other components via a PCI bus.
1. Controller (Main Board)
Takes charge of controlling memory and all peripheral devices.
2. BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit)
This is the engine control board. It controls the following functions.
Engine sequence
Timing control for peripherals
Image processing, video control
Cont r ol l er
HDD
FCU
Car d
I C Car d
Mot her Boar d
BI CU
OPU
SBU
ARDF
Exposur e
Lamp
I NVERTER
HP Sensor
APS Sensor s
MDB
Sensor s
Fusi ng Uni t
Hi gh Vol t age
Power Suppl y
Scanner
Mot or
By- Pass
Paper Tr ay
LCT
Sensor s
PSU
PFB
SI B
I OB
Pl at en Cover
Sensor
1- Bi n Tr ay Fi ni sher Dupl ex
LD
Mai n
Mot or
Pol ygonal
Mot or
Mi r r or
LDDR
Mot or
PF/ Dev.
B004D511.WMF
BOARD STRUCTURE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-6 SM
3. IOB (Input/Output Board)
The IOB handles the following functions:
Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the main unit
PWM control for the high voltage supply board
Serial interface with peripherals
Fusing control
4. PFB (Paper Feed Control Board)
Controls paper feed.
5. SIB (Scanner Interface Board)
Controls the scanner, and serves as the signal I/F board for the SBU and the
OPU. The SIB passes signals between the BICU and the scanner unit
components, and transmits video signals from the SBU to the BICU.
6. OPU (Operation Panel Unit)
Controls operation panel and display.
7. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
Receives analog signals from the CCD and converts them into digital signals.
8. LDDR (Laser Diode Driver)
The LD driver circuit board.
9. MDB (Motor Drive Board)
Controls the scanner motor.
10. Mother Board
This board interfaces the controller and the BICU and FCU.
11. FCU (Facsimile Control Unit)
Controls fax communications and fax features.
BOARD STRUCTURE
SM 6-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.2.2 CONTROLLER
The controller employs GW (Grand Workware) architecture that allows the board to
control all applications, including copier, printer, scanner, and fax applications. To
add the optional printer, scanner, or fax applications, ROM DIMMs must be
installed on the controller. The fax option, however, also requires FCU and NCU
installation.
The following systems and application software can be downloaded from the
Controller IC Card.
Controller (System OS/Copier)
Operation panel
BICU (engine control)
Printer
Scanner
Fax
PostScript 3
NIB
FCU
For details about how to download software from an IC card, see Software
Download in Chapter 5.
I EEE1284 I C Card
Pri nter/
Scanner
(Fax)
PS3
RAM
(32/ 64 MB)
NI B
I EEE1394
Pri nter
(Fax)
Fax
IC Card I/F I DE Sl ot 1 Sl ot 2
SDRAM
DI MM
Syst em
Fl ash ROM
(8 MB)
Resi dent
SDRAM
(32 MB)
SI MAC CPU
NVRAM
(32 kB)
PCI
FCU NCU
Operat i on Panel
PCI
P
C
I
Fl ash ROM (4 MB)
or
or OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
SI B
Fl ash ROM
( 4 MB)
3. 5" HDD
More t han
10 GB
Fl ash ROM DI MM (4/ 8 MB)
CONTROLLER
MOTHER BOARD
BICU
NVRAM
(32 kB)
OPTION
B004D512.WMF
BOARD STRUCTURE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-8 SM
1. CPU. Employs QED RM5231. Clock frequency: 200 MHz.
2. ASIC: SIMAC. Uses a dedicated chip developed for use with GW architecture.
The CPU and memory I/F employ a 100 MHz bus (32 bit). These components
perform CPU and I/F control and also control all of the following functions:
memory, local bus, interrupts, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation
panel, IEEE1284, and image processing.
3. SDRAM. Comprises a 32 MB RAM chip, expandable with a 32 MB or 64 MB
SDRAM.
4. System Flash ROM. Provided with an 8 MB Flash ROM for the system OS and
copier application.
5. Flash ROM DIMM Slots. Two slots are provided for two ROM DIMMs (4 MB or
8MB). Expansion slots provided for the optional printer, scanner, facsimile, and
PostScript 3 applications.
6. NVRAM. 32 KB of NVRAM are provided for the system. NVRAM stores many
settings, including OS System log information, copier calendar, current system
settings, user accounts (max. 100) and all settings for the fax, printer, scanner,
and network. NVRAM also has the RTC (Real Time Clock) for time
management.
NOTE: Optional NVRAM, which can store to 400 user accounts, can be
installed on the controller.
7. HDD. A 3.5" HDD (more than 10 GB) can be connected using an IDE I/F. The
hard disk is partitioned as shown below.
Partition Size Function Power OFF Comment
File System 1 500 MB Downloaded fonts,
forms.
Remains
File System 2 200 MB Job spooling area. Erased
File System 3 1500 MB Work data area Remains Used for document
server application.
Image TMP 2780 MB Collation, sample print,
protected print.
Erased
Image LS*
1
4320 MB Document server, local
storage archive
Remains
Commonly used area
for applications. Stores
copy, printer, fax, and
scanner data.
Storage capacity:
About 9000 pages
(3,000 files)
Image Area
Management
100MB Stores image area
information
Remains
Job Log 10 MB Job log. Remains
Total 10 GB Remains
*1
When an application uses an image page, first it uses the Image LS area. If
this area is in use and not available, then it uses the Image TMP area.
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
SM 6-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
Exposure
The xenon lamp [A] exposes the original. The reflected light is passed to the CCD,
where it is converted into analog data, processed, and stored in the memory. The
data is retrieved and sent to the laser diode for printing
Drum charge
The charge roller [B] gives a negative charge to the organic photoconductive
(OPC) drum. The charge remains on the surface of the drum because the OPC
layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark.
Laser exposure
Processed data from the scanned original is retrieved from the memory and
transferred to the drum by two laser beams [C], which form an electrostatic latent
image on the drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on
the drum depends on the laser beam intensity, controlled by the BICU.
Development
The magnetic developer brush on the development roller [D] contacts the latent
image on the drum. Toner particles are electrostatically attracted to the areas of the
drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge on the drum.
B004D501.WMF
B004V101.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-10 SM
Image transfer
Paper is fed into the area between the drum surface and the transfer belt [E] at the
proper time to align it with the image on the drum. The transfer bias roller applies a
high positive charge to the reverse side of the paper through the transfer belt. This
positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper while
the paper is electrostatically attracted to the transfer belt.
Separation
Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrical attraction between the
paper and the transfer belt. Pick-off pawls [F] help separate the paper from the
drum.
ID sensor
The ID sensor [G] measures the reflectivity of the pattern formed by the laser on
the surface of the drum. This output signal is used for toner supply control and also
measures the drum surface reflectivity, which is used for charge roller voltage
control.
Cleaning
The drum cleaning blade [H] removes any toner remaining on the drum surface
after the image is transferred to the paper.
Quenching
Finally, the light from the quenching lamp [I] electrically neutralizes the charge on
the drum surface.
SCANNING
SM 6-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.4 SCANNING
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
1 Exposure lamp 7 Original length sensors 1, 2
2 1st Scanner 8 Original width sensors
3 Exposure glass 9 2nd Scanner
4 Lens block 10 Anti-condensation heater (option)
5 Scanner drive motor 11 Exposure glass (for document feeder)
6 Original length sensor 3 12 Scanner HP sensor
The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp). The image is
reflected onto a CCD (charge coupled device) on the lens block via the 1st, 2nd,
and 3rd mirrors, and through the lens on the lens block.
The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector, and the 1st mirror.
The exposure lamp is energized by a dc supply to avoid uneven light intensity
while the 1st scanner moves in the sub scan direction (down the page). The entire
exposure lamp surface is frosted to ensure even exposure in the main scan
direction (across the page).
The light reflected by the reflector is of almost equal intensity in all directions, to
reduce shadows on pasted originals.
When the optional optics anti-condensation heater is installed on the left side of the
scanner, it turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in.
B004D101.WMF
1
2
3 4
5
6 7 8 9 10
11
12
SCANNING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-12 SM
6.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE
Book Mode
Scanner drive motor [A] and timing belt drive the scanner drive shaft [B]. The drive
shaft drives the pulleys attached to the two scanner wires [C] (front and back). The
scanner wires move the 1st and 2nd scanners [D] on their rails. The 2nd scanner
speed is half that of the 1st scanner.
The scanner interface board (SIB) controls the scanner drive motor. In full size
mode, the 1st scanner speed is 230 mm/s during scanning.
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the
magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner drive motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done
by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the
scanner drive motor speed using SP4-008.
ADF mode
The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner home position
sensor [E] detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the
original through the ADF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change
in the sub-scan direction is done by changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification
in the main scan direction is done in the BICU board, like for book mode.
NOTE: Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the
ADF motor speed using SP6-017. In the main scan direction, it can be
adjusted with SP2-909, like for book mode.
B004D102.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
SCANNING
SM 6-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] detect the original length. These reflective photo sensors are referred
to collectively as the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors.
While the power is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is always
sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover
sensor [C] is activated after the platen reaches about 15 cm above the exposure
glass as it is closed. The main CPU detects the original size by the on/off signals
received from the APS sensors.
NOTE: If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the main CPU determines
the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start ! key is pressed.
B004D163.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
SCANNING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-14 SM
Original Size Length Sensor
Width
Sensor
A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
SP4-301
display
A3 11 x 17 O O O O O 00011111
B4 10 x 14 O O O X O 00011101
F4 8.5 x 14 (8 x 13) O O O X X 00011100
A4-L 8.5 x 11 X O O X X 00001100
B5-L X X O X X 00000100
A4-S 11 x 8.5 X X X O O 00000011
B5-S X X X X O 00000001
A5-L, A5-S 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 5.5 X X X X X 00000000
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present X: Low
For other combinations, "CANNOT DETECT ORIG. SIZE" will be indicated on the
operation panel display.
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine's productivity.
However, if the by-pass tray is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy
paper is lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-
pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area,
disregarding the original size sensors.
W1
W2
L3 L2 L1
B004D540.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
SBU: The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the analog signal from the
CCD to an 8-bit digital signal and sends it to the SIB.
SIB: Relays image signals and controls the scanner.
BICU: The BICU (Base Engine Image Control Unit) performs timing control
and command control. The IPU on the BICU processes auto shading,
filtering, magnification, correction, and gradation. The memory
controller performs image compression, decompression, and
memory address control (for binary picture processing mode only)
LD Unit: Performs dual channel multi-beam exposure, multiple exposure, and
synchronous detection.
Controller: Controls image archiving, controls printing, and secondary image
compression/decompression.
SIB
IPU
Drum
BICU LDDR
Controller
SBU
C
C
D
HDD
FCI
LD
Controller
(GAVD) LD
Driver
SIB
M
o
t
h
e
r
B
o
a
r
d
B004D532.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-16 SM
6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)
The CCD converts the light reflected from the original into an analog signal. The
CCD line has 7200 pixels at a resolution of 600 dpi.
The CCD has two output lines to the analog processing ASIC, one for handling odd
and one for handling even pixels. The analog processing ASIC performs the
following operations on the signals received from the CCD:
1. Z/C (Zero/Clamp)
Adjusts the black level for even pixels to match the odd pixels.
2. Signal composition
Analog signals for odd and even pixels from the CCD are merged by a
switching device.
3. Signal amplification
The analog signal is amplified by amplifiers in the AGC circuit. The maximum
gains of the amplifiers are controlled by the CPU on the BICU board.
After the above processing, the analog signals are converted to 8-bit signals by the
A/D converter. This gives a value for each pixel on a scale of 256 shades of gray.
Then, this data goes to the BICU via the SIB.
IPU
SBU
C
C
D
BI CU
S
I
B
Anal og
Pr ocessi ng
ASI C
A/ D
Conver t er
A/ D
Conver t er
GA
S
e
r
i
a
l
D
r
i
v
e
r
8 bi t Seri al Dat a
B004D510.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS)
This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies.
The copier scans the auto image density detection area [A]. This corresponds to a
narrow strip at one end of the main scan line, as shown in the diagram. As the
scanner scans down the page, the IPU on the BICU detects the peak white level
for each scan line, within this narrow strip only. From this peak white level, the IPU
determines the reference value for A/D conversion for the scan line. Then, the IPU
sends the reference value to the A/D controller on the SBU.
When an original with a gray background is scanned, the density of the gray area
is the peak white level density. Therefore, the original background will not appear
on copies. Because peak level data is taken for each scan line, ADS corrects for
any changes in background density down the page.
As with previous digital copiers, the user can select manual image density when
selecting auto image density mode and the machine will use both settings when
processing the original.
75mm
15mm
0. 5mm
Sub scan di r ect i on
B004D550.WMF
[A]
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-18 SM
6.5.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)
Overview
The image data from the SBU goes to the IPU (Image Processing Unit) IC on the
BICU board, which carries out the following processes on the image data:
1. Auto shading
2. Filtering (MTF and smoothing)
3. Magnification
4. correction
5. Grayscale processing
6. Binary picture processing
7. Error diffusion
8. Dithering
9. Video path control
10. Test pattern generation
The image data then goes to either the LDDR or the HDD depending on the
selected copy modes.
LD1
LD2
Controller
SBU
SIB
BICU
LDDR
M
o
t
h
e
r
B
o
a
r
d
HDD
GAVD
FCI
IPU
B004D520.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.5.5 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES
The user can select one of the following modes with the User Tools screen: Text,
Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation. Each of these modes has a range of different
settings (e.g. Soft, Normal, Sharp, etc). For each mode, a Custom Setting options
is also available. This Custom Setting holds the values selected with the SP
modes, which can be adjusted to meet special requirements that cannot be
covered by the standard settings.
To display this screen, press User Tools/Counter , press Copier/Document
Server Settings, press the General Features tab, and then press Copy Quality.
Mode Function
Text
Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. Ignores background
texture. ( pg. 6-22)
Text/Photo
Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate
grayscaling, better than that achieved in the Text mode. ( pg. 6-
23)
Photo Best possible reproduction of photographs. ( pg.6-24)
Pale
Reproduction similar to text mode, but of lower contrast. Ideal for
copying thin originals. ( pg.6-25)
Generation Copy
Attempts to achieve the best reproduction of copied originals, which
have faded due to making copies of copies. ( pg.6-26)
B004D800.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-20 SM
General Image Processing Flow
Signals from SBU Processing conducted as required.
!
Shading Correction
Black Line Processing
! !! !
Background Erase
! !! !
Smoothing
! !! !
Main Scan
Magnification
! !! ! BICU Controller
Independent Dot Erase HDD
! !! !
Filtering
! !! ! Primary Compression,
Decompression
Secondary Compression,
Decompression
Coefficient "
!
! !! ! Video Control Scanner/Printer Application
Grayscale Processing FCU
! !! ! FAX Application
LD Unit
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.5.6 SUMMARY OF IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS
1. Shading correction. Compensates for the possible differences in the amount
of light at the edges and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner
lens, or scatter among pixels of the CCD.
2. Black line correction. Attempts to compensate for black lines in copies
caused by dirt on the exposure glass of the optional sheet-through document
feeder.
3. Background erase. Attempts to eliminate the heavy background texture from
copies of newspaper print or documents printed on coarse paper. Elements
below the selected threshold level are eliminated.
4. Smoothing. Attempts to reproduce halftones with simple, parallel smooth
processing. Smoothing the image density reduces the incidence of moir, but
also reduces sharpness.
5. Main scan magnification. Adjusts magnification to the desired level by
processing adjusting multiple, adjacent pixels in the direction of main scanning.
(Adjustment of magnification in the sub scan direction is done by changing the
scanning speed.)
6. Independent dot erase. Attempts to recognize and eliminate scattered,
independent dots in copies. Processes only pixels of high density and
eliminates those of low density.
7. Filtering (MTF filter/smoothing). Performs mainly edge enhancement with the
MTF filter. Performs smoothing only in the photo mode. The matrix size of the
filter is 9 pixels x 7 lines.
8. Gamma ( ) coefficient. Controls the image density for images processed with
grayscaling. Copy density adjustment is achieved with special notch
coefficient conversion. The best coefficient suited for the selected mode can
be stored and adjusted as needed.
9. Grayscale processing. Performs reproduction of grayscales, using mainly
error diffusion. (In the photo mode, conducts processing with dithering.)
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-22 SM
6.5.7 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS AND RELATED SP MODES
Text Mode
The text mode achieves a quality reproduction of text and sharp lines and ignores
background texture. Processing is conducted with a high resolution MTF filter;
special processing with the coefficient prevents background reproduction and
achieves the best reproduction of images with error diffusion. Because the Soft and
Normal settings use a weak MTF filter, the quality of the image is improved with the
elimination of moir. The Sharp selection uses an MTF filter stronger than that of
the Normal setting, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Correction
Shading Correction
!
Pre-Entry
Processing
Background Erase SP4-903-65 (Background Erase Level)
!
Smoothing SP4-903-10 (Pre-Filter Coefficient 25%~64%)
SP4-903-11 (Pre-Filter Coefficient 65%~154%)
!
Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2-909-01 (Main Scan Magnification)
!
Independent Dot Erase SP4-903-60 (Independent Dot Erase Level)
!
Filter Processing MTF Correction SP4-903-20~35 (MTF Filter Coefficients,
Strength)
!
Density Control Coefficient
!
Grayscale
Processing
Error Diffusion
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Text/Photo Mode
Text/photo mode achieves high quality reproduction of pictures with accurate
grayscaling. Processing is conducted with the special coefficient which
reproduces a wide range of grayscale. Compared with the text mode, text
reproduced in the text/photo mode could appear lighter and textured backgrounds
could appear on copies, but the incidence of moir is reduced by the employment
of a weak MTF filter. Because Photo Priority uses an MTF filter weaker than that of
the Normal setting, the quality of the image is improved with the elimination of
moir. The Text Priority selection uses an MTF filter stronger than that of the
Normal setting, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Correction
Shading Correction
!
Pre-Entry
Processing
Background Erase SP4-903-67 (Background Erase Level)
!
Smoothing SP4-903-13 (Pre-Filter Coefficient 25%~64%)
SP4-903-14 (Pre-Filter Coefficient 65%~154%)
!
Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2-909-01 (Main Scan Magnification)
!
Independent Dot Erase SP4-903-62 (Independent Dot Erase Level)
!
Filter Processing MTF Correction SP4-903-39~54 (MTF Filter Coefficients,
Strength)
!
Density Control Coefficient
!
Grayscale
Processing
Error Diffusion SP4-904-07 (Error Diffusion Pattern)
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-24 SM
Photo Mode
Photo mode emphasizes grayscale processing to achieve the best possible
reproduction of photographs and eliminate moir by using the highest density and
coefficient in the reproduction of grayscales and dithering. Print Photo performs
smoothing and dithering for photos copied from magazines, newspapers, etc. The
Normal selection uses a higher resolution setting and employs error diffusion but
does not use smoothing to improve the appearance of text in photographs. Glossy
photo paper employs MTF filter processing and error diffusion to copy glossy or
matte photographs and achieves a low incidence of moir, thus reproducing copies
of photographs of high resolution.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Correction
Shading Correction
!
Pre-Entry
Processing
Background Erase SP4-903-66 (Background Erase Level)
!
Smoothing SP4-903-12 (Pre-Filter Coefficient)
!
Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2-909-01 (Main Scan Magnification)
!
Independent Dot Erase Not done in Photo mode
!
Filter
Processing MTF Correction
SP4-903-09 (Filter Selection)
SP4-903-37 (Smoothing Filter Coefficient)
SP4-903-36 (MTF Filter Coefficient)
SP4-903-38 (MTF Filter Strength)
!
Density Control Coefficient
!
Grayscale
Processing
Dither/Error Diffusion SP4-904-02 (Photo Mode Image Quality
Processing Dither Matrix Type)
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Pale (Low-Density Mode)
Pale achieves image quality comparable with text mode, but of lower contrast. Pale
employs an MTF filter stronger than that employed by the text mode and uses a
darker coefficient, thus increasing the incidence of copying textured backgrounds.
Ideal for copying extremely thin originals. Soft employs an MTF filter weaker than
Normal, thus achieving a softer image with less moir. Sharp employs an MTF filter
stronger than that of Normal, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Correction
Shading Correction
!
Pre-Entry
Processing
Background Erase SP4-903-68 (Background Erase Level)
!
Smoothing SP4-903-15 (Pre-Filter Coefficient)
!
Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2-909-01 (Main Scan Magnification)
!
Independent Dot Erase SP4-903-63 (Independent Dot Erase Level)
!
Filter
Processing MTF Correction
SP4-903-55 (MTF Filter Coefficient)
SP4-903-56 (MTF Filter Strength)
!
Density Control Coefficient
!
Grayscale
Processing
Dither/Error Diffusion
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-26 SM
Generation Copy Mode
Generation Copy, based mainly on text mode, aims to achieve the best
reproduction of copied originals (so called generation copies or copies of copies).
This mode employs an MTF filter weaker than that of the text mode to eliminate
spurious dots, uses the coefficient to smooth the image, and uses generation
processing to thicken thin lines. Soft employs an MTF filter weaker than the Normal
setting to achieve a softer image with less moir. Sharp employs an MTF filter
stronger than that for Normal to emphasize lines for better image quality.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Correction
Shading Correction
!
Pre-Entry
Processing
Background Erase SP4-4903-69 (Background Erase Level)
!
Smoothing SP4-903-16 (Pre-Filter Coefficient)
!
Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2-909-01 (Main Scan Magnification)
!
Independent Dot Erase SP4-903-64 (Independent Dot Erase Level)
!
Generation Mode SP4-903-75~77 (Line Width Detection)
Filter
Processing
MTF Correction SP4-903-57 (MTF Filter Coefficient)
SP4-903-58 (MTF Filter Strength)
!
Density Control Coefficient
!
Grayscale
Processing
Dither/Error Diffusion
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-27 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Auto shading (shading correction)
Auto shading does two things.
Zeroes the black level for each scan line of data
Corrects for variations in white level across the main scan.
Background erase
By default, this process is used only in text mode, pale original mode, and
generation mode. However, it can be enabled for other modes with SP mode.
Usually, dirty background is erased using the Auto Image Density (ADS) function.
However, sometimes, dirty background areas will still appear. These can be erased
by this function.
If any low image density data which is lower than a threshold level remains after
auto shading, this data will be changed to 0 = white.
The threshold level (erase level) can be changed with the following SP modes.
65 Background Erase Level (Text)
66 Background Erase Level (Photo)
67 Background Erase Level (Text /Photo)
68 Background Erase Level (Pale)
SP4-903
69 Background Erase Level (Generation)
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-28 SM
Independent dot erase
By default, this process is used only in text mode and generation mode to erase
independent black dots appearing in the copy or reduce their image density.
However, it can be enabled for other modes with the following SP modes.
60 Independent Dot Erase Level (Text)
62 Independent Dot Erase Level (Text/Photo)
63 Independent Dot Erase Level (Pale)
SP4903
64 Independent Dot Erase Level (Generation)
The machine compares each pixel (refer to the diagram below) with the pixels
around the edges of the surrounding 3 x 5 area. If the sum of the pixels at the
edges is smaller than the threshold value stored in the SP, the object pixel is
changed to 0 (white) or reduced in density to an average of the pixels around the
edge, depending on the SP mode setting. Each SP mode has 16 levels as follows.
A= Sum of the pixels at the edges
SP mode
value
Function
SP mode
value
Function
0 Disabled 8 Disabled
1 If A < 16, the pixel is deleted 9 If A < 16, density is reduced
2 If A < 32, the pixel is deleted 10 If A < 32, density is reduced
3 If A < 48, the pixel is deleted 11 If A < 48, density is reduced
4 If A < 64, the pixel is deleted 12 If A < 64, density is reduced
5 If A < 80, the pixel is deleted 13 If A < 80, density is reduced
6 If A < 96, the pixel is deleted 14 If A < 96, density is reduced
7 If A < 128, the pixel is deleted 15 If A < 128, density is reduced
Pixel density reduction works as follows. For the example in the
following drawing, when the SP mode value is 11, the sum of the
pixels around the edge is less than 48, the object pixel value is
reduced from 90 to 3 as shown below.
A: (0 + 0 + 30 + 7 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0) / 12 = 3
0 0
0
0
0
0 0 0
0
0 90
30
7
B004D503.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-29 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Filtering
After auto shading, the image data is processed by both filtering and main scan
magnification. However, to reduce the occurrence of moir in the image, the
processing order depends on the reproduction ratio, as follows.
1. 64% reduction or less
Main Scan Reduction Filtering
2. 65% reduction or higher
Filtering Main Scan Magnification
There are two software filters: MTF and smoothing.
MTF emphasizes lines parallel to the direction of feed. There are four types of MTF
setting:
Filter coefficient for main scan direction
Filter strength for main scan direction
Filter coefficient for sub scan direction
Filter strength for sub scan direction
Refer to the following charts to determine how to make the filters weaker or
stronger. The values in bold are the default settings.
Pre-Filter
Pre-Filter smoothes mainly parallel lines in the main scanning direction and
extended lines in the sub-scanning direction. The Pre-Filter is a setting intended for
use with the Text/Photo modes and cannot be used with the initial settings of other
modes. Setting a large value for the Pre-Filter setting greatly increases the
smoothing of parallel lines and reduces moir and spurious noise in images, but
may also reduce sharpness and lower contrast.
(Weak) 0 (Off) 1 2 3 (Strong)
SP-903-10: Text Mode (25%~64%)
SP-903-11: Text Mode (65%~154%)
SP-903-12: Photo Mode
SP-903-13: Text/Photo Mode (25%~64%)
SP-903-14: Text/Photo Mode (65%~154%)
SP-903-15: Low Density Mode
SP-903-16: Generation Mode (25%~64%)
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-30 SM
Text Mode
The following SP modes select the MTF filter coefficient and strength in the main
scan direction for text mode.
SP4-903-20 to SP4-903-23 (25%~64%)
SP4-903-24 to SP4-903-27 (65%~154%)
SP4-903-28 to SP4-903-31 (155%~256%)
SP4-903-32 to SP4-903-35 (257%~400%)
NOTE: Increasing this value strengthens MTF but can also increase the
occurrence of moir and reduce sharpness.
Text mode: 25 ~ 64 %
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-20)
0 9 15
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-21)
0 13 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-22)
0 2 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-23)
0 2 7
Text mode: 65 ~ 154 %
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-24)
0 12 15
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-25)
0 6 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-26)
0 2 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-27)
0 2 7
Text mode: 155 ~ 256 %
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-28)
0 14 15
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-29)
0 6 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-30)
0 2 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-31)
0 2 7
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-31 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Text mode: 257 ~ 400 %
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-32)
0 14 15
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-33)
0 6 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-34)
0 2 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-35)
0 2 7
Photo Mode
Either MTF or smoothing can be used.
To use MTF, set SP4-903-9 to 0 then use SP4-903-36 and SP4-903-38 to set the
filter coefficient and strength for scanning grayscale images.
Photo mode
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-36)
0 4 6
Filter strength (SP4903-38) 0 1 7
To use smoothing, set SP4-903-9 to 1 then use SP4-903-37 to select the setting
for smoothing.
Photo mode
Smoothing filter Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Smoothing filter coefficient
(SP4903-37)
0 2 7
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-32 SM
Text/Photo Mode
The following SP modes selects the MTF filter coefficient and strength in the main
scan direction for text/photo mode.
SP4-903-39 to SP4-903-42 (25%~64%)
SP4-903-43 to SP4-903-46 (65%~154%)
SP4-903-47 to SP4-903-50 (155%~256%)
SP4-903-51 to SP4-903-54 (257%~400%)
Text/Photo mode 25~64%
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-39)
0 9 16
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-40)
0 10 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-41)
0 1 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-42)
0 1 7
Text/Photo mode 65~154%
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-43)
0 10 15
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-44)
0 6 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-45)
0 1 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-46)
0 1 7
Text/Photo mode 155~256%
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-47)
0 14 15
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-48)
0 6 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-49)
0 1 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-50)
0 1 7
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-33 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Text/Photo mode 257~400%
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Main scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-51)
0 9 15
Sub scan: Filter coefficient
(SP4903-52)
0 10 13
Main scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-53)
0 2 7
Sub scan: Filter strength
(SP4903-54)
0 2 7
Low Density Mode
The following SPs control MTF for low density (pale) original mode.
Low density mode
MTF strength Weakest
(Soft)
Default
Strongest
(Sharp)
Filter coefficient (SP4903-55)
0 1 6
Filter strength
(SP4903-56)
0 3 7
Generation Mode
The following SPs control MTF for generation mode.
Generation mode
MTF strength Weak
(Soft)
Default
Strong
(Sharp)
Filter coefficient
(SP4903-57)
0 3 6
Filter strength
(SP4903-58)
0 1 7
IMAGE PROCESSING
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-34 SM
Main scan magnification and reduction
Reduction and enlargement in the sub scan direction is achieved by changing the
scanner speed. However, reduction and enlargement in the main scan direction
are handled by the IPU chip.
To reduce or enlarge an image, imaginary points are calculated that would
correspond to a physical enlargement or reduction of the image. The image density
is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the image data of the
nearest four true points. The calculated image data then becomes the new
(reduced or enlarged) image data.
correction
Gamma () correction ensures accurate generation of the various shades in the
gray scale from black to white, accounting for the characteristics of the scanner
and printer.
Scanner gamma correction corrects the data output to the IPU to account for the
characteristics of the scanner (e.g., CCD response, scanner optics).
Printer gamma correction corrects the data output from the IPU to the laser diode
to account for the characteristics of the printer (e.g., the characteristics of the drum,
laser diode, and lenses).
The data for the scanner and printer gamma correction are fixed and stored in the
memory. There are no SP adjustments in this machine.
Gradation processing
These are three types of gradation processing:
1. Grayscale processing: This has 256 output levels for each pixel.
2. Error diffusion: In text/photo mode, this is used with grayscale processing.
3. Dithering: In photo mode, this is used with grayscale processing.
These three processes are used as follows.
Text mode Grayscale processing
Text/photo mode: Error diffusion (256 levels)
Photo mode: Dithering (256 levels)
Generation mode: Grayscale processing + line width correction
Pale mode Grayscale processing
Type 1: Grayscale processing. As stated above, this process generates up to
256 image density levels for each pixel. To realize this, this machine uses a form of
pulse width modulation. In this machine, pulse width modulation consists of the
following processes:
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-35 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Laser diode pulse positioning
Laser diode power/pulse width modulation
Laser diode power and pulse width modulation is performed by the laser diode
drive board (LDDR). Briefly, the width of the laser pulse for a pixel depends on the
output level (from 0 to 255) required for the pixel.
This machine can also change the laser pulse position (at the left side of the pixel,
at the center, or at the right side) automatically, depending on the location of the
image pixel so that the edges of characters and lines become clearer. There is no
SP mode adjustment for this, unlike in some earlier models.
Note that binary picture processing (one bit per pixel) is not used for copy mode.
However, it is used for printer and fax mode. In binary picture processing, each
pixel is converted from 8-bit to 1-bit in accordance with a threshold value. The
threshold value can be adjusted with SP 4-904-12.
Type 2: Error diffusion. This is used only in text/photo mode. The error diffusion
process reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix. Separate error diffusion matrixes are used for copy mode and fax mode.
1. Grayscale processing mode
The output image signal level has 9 levels (from white to black). There is only
one matrix available.
2. Binary picture processing mode
The output image signal level has just 2 levels (white and black).
Type 3: Dithering. This is only used in photo mode. Each pixel is compared with a
pixel in a dither matrix. Several matrixes are available, to increase or decrease the
detail on the copy.
1. Grayscale processing mode
The matrix type can be selected with SP4-904-2.
2. Binary picture processing
The matrix type can be selected with SP4-904-18.
Line width correction
This function is effective only in Generation Copy mode.
Usually, lines will bulge in the main scan direction as a result of the
negative/positive development system that is used in this model. So, pixels on
edges between black and white areas are compared with adjacent pixels, and if the
pixel is on a line, the line thickness will be reduced.
The line width correction type can be selected with SP4-903-75~77.
LASER EXPOSURE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-36 SM
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
1 LD unit 6 Synchronizing detector
2 Cylindrical lens 7 BTL (Barrel Toroidal Lens)
3 Polygonal mirror 8 F-theta mirror
4 Shield glass 9 Toner shield glass
5 Mirror
This machine uses two laser diodes to produce electrostatic images on an OPC
drum. The laser diode unit converts image data from the BICU board into laser
pulses, and the optical components direct these pulses to the drum. To produce a
high quality copy image, these are 256 gradations for the laser power.
The output path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above. The LD unit
outputs two laser beams to the polygon mirror through the cylindrical lens and the
shield glass.
Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects two full main scan lines. The laser
beams go to the F-theta mirror, mirror, and BTL (barrel toroidal lens). Then these
laser beams go to the drum through the toner shield glass. The laser synchronizing
detector determines the main scan starting position.
NOTE: The front door and right door (transfer door) are equipped with safety
switches that automatically shut down the laser unit when either door is
opened.
B004D541.WMF
1
3
2
4
8 5
7
9
6
LASER EXPOSURE
SM 6-37 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC)
The LD driver on the LDDR drives the laser diode. Even if a constant electric
current is applied to the laser diode, the intensity of the output light changes with
the temperature. The intensity of the output decreases as the temperature
increases.
In order to keep the output level constant, the LDDR monitors the electrical current
passing through the photodiode (PD). Then it increases or decreases the current to
the laser diode as necessary, comparing it with the reference level. This auto
power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing while
the laser diode is active.
The reference levels are adjusted on the production line. Do not touch the variable
resistors on the LDDR in the field.
LASER EXPOSURE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-38 SM
6.6.3 DUAL BEAM WRITING
This LD unit employs two laser diodes
[A] (LD) and [B] (L2). Each face of the
polygon mirror writes two main scan
lines, and twelve main scans are
produced when the polygon mirror
rotates once. This reduces polygon
motor rotation speed, reduces noise
generated by the polygon motor, and
reduces the frequency of the image data
clock.
The two laser beams follow the path:
collimating lenses [C] # prism [D] #
polygonal mirror [E]
The two laser beams arrive on the drum surface about 2 mm apart in the main
scan direction and about 0.06 mm apart (at 400 dpi) in the sub scan direction (see
the next page). The two-mm difference in the main scan direction allows the
machine to detect the laser synchronization signal for each beam.
B004D203.WMF
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
P1: 400 dpi
P2: 600 dpi
2 mm
P1
P2
LASER EXPOSURE
SM 6-39 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.6.4 LASER BEAM PITCH CHANGE MECHANISM
When the LD positioning motor [A] turns, the metal block [B] in contact with the LD
unit housing [C] moves up and down and changes the position of L2 (L1 does not
move).
Both LD unit positions are at fixed distances from the LD unit home position sensor
[D].
Usually, the LD unit moves directly to the proper position. However, when the
number of times that the resolution has changed reaches the value of SP2-109-5
(LD Beam Pitch Adjustment), the LD unit moves to the home position, and this re-
calibrates the LD unit positioning mechanism.
B004D543.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
LASER EXPOSURE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-40 SM
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES
To ensure personal safety and to prevent the laser beam from inadvertently
switching on during servicing, power to the laser diode is switched off when the
front cover or upper right cover is opened. Four safety switches are installed in
series on the LD5 V line from the power supply unit (PSU) via the BICU board.
CN403- 1
CN403- 3
CN402- 4 CN312- 1
C
N
1
0
9
-
8
C
N
3
0
1
-
1
0
+5V
PSU
BI CU LDDR
+5V
LD5V
LD1
LD2
Front Cover
Saf et y Swi t ch
Upper Ri ght
Cover Swi t ch
B004D505.WMF
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
SM 6-41 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1 Toner Collection Coil 6 Transfer Entrance Guide
2 Toner Collection Plate 7 Charge Roller Cleaning Pad
3 Spur 8 Charge Roller
4 Pick off Pawl 9 Cleaning Blade
5 OPC Drum (60 mm)
B004D301.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-42 SM
6.7.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
The drive from the main motor [A] is
transmitted to the drum [B] through a
series of gears, a timing belt [C], and
the drum drive shaft [D].
The main motor has a drive controller,
which outputs a motor lock signal when
the rotation speed is out of the
specified range. The flywheel [E] on the
end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes
the rotation speed (this prevents
banding and jitter on copies).
6.7.3 DRUM PAWLS
The pick-off pawls [A], mounted in the
holders [B] on the drum and in contact
with the drum, strip paper from the drum if
it has not yet separated. The gears [C] are
removable, and the positions of the
holders can be adjusted.
6.7.4 DRUM TONER SEALS
Seals have been added to the structure
of the PCU (photoconductor unit) to
further prevent toner leakage.
B004D302.WMF
B004R305.WMF
B004D902.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
DRUM CHARGE
SM 6-43 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.8 DRUM CHARGE
6.8.1 OVERVIEW
This copier uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum.
The drum charge roller [A] contacts the surface of the drum [B] to give it a negative
charge. The high voltage supply board [C] supplies a negative dc voltage to the
drum charge roller through the charge roller terminal [D], bias plate [E], and the
rear roller bushing [F] to give the drum surface a negative charge of 950V.
B004D525.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
DRUM CHARGE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-44 SM
6.8.2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION
Correction for Environmental Conditions
The voltage transferred from roller to drum could vary with the temperature and
humidity around the drum charge roller. The lower the temperature or humidity, the
higher the applied voltage required.
The ID sensor measures the effects of ambient conditions, and any small change
in drum potential caused by changes in temperature/humidity is reflected in the
amount of toner transferred to the drum.
This measurement is done immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner density
control. After creating ID sensor pattern [A], another pattern [B] is made. To do this,
the LD switches off, the charge roller voltage drops, and the drum potential is
reduced to -600V. At the same time, development bias returns to -550V. The drum
potential is now slightly higher than the development bias, so only a very small
amount of toner transfers to the drum. The ID sensor measures the density of
pattern [B], and Vsdp, the output voltage, is compared with Vsg which was read
from the bare drum at the same time.
ID Sensor Pattern
t
Drum Potential
Development Bias
ID Sensor Output
-950 V
-600 V
-550 V
-380 V
-150 V
V sg (4.00 V)
V sdp (3.50 V)
V sp (0.31 V)
Charge Voltage
Laser Diode
3 cm
3 cm 3 cm
On
Off
-1480 V
Sub Scan Direction
B004D506.WMF
[A] [B]
Rev. 05/2002
DRUM CHARGE
SM 6-45 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only)
The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrower than sizes
accepted by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in
the by-pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed
below in order to avoid jams and copy quality problems.
SP Mode SP Name
SP2-001-1 Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Width 216 - 297 mm
SP2-309-1 Paper Lower Width [a] Width limit: 150 mm
SP2-309-2 Paper Upper Width [b] Width limit: 216 mm
SP2-914-1 C Adjust 10V/step
SP2-914-2 C Adjust 10V/step
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray
is 200 mm, the charge roller voltage will be 1480 V + 50 V.
0 mm
SP 2-309-1
Default: 150 mm
SP 2-309-2
Default: 216 mm
297 mm
Voltage:
SP2-001-1 + SP2-914-1
Default: -1480+250 V
Voltage:
SP2-001-1 + SP2-914-2
Default: -1480+50 V
Voltage:
SP2-001-1
Default: -1480 V
B004D507.WMF
Rev. 09/2002
DRUM CHARGE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-46 SM
6.8.3 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING
An ID sensor pattern is created after the main machine is powered on, and after
finishing a job of 10 or more sheets.
The ID sensor pattern production interval can be adjusted with SP2-210 (ID Sensor
Pattern Interval).
6.8.4 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING
The drum charge roller [A], always in contact with the drum, gets dirty easily, so the
cleaning pad [B] also remains in contact with the charge roller to clean it. The pin
[C] in contact with the cam gear [D] enables the gear to move the cleaning pad
from side to side and improve cleaning.
New Vref Decision
........
1 10 9 8 3 2
Vref Decision
1 3 2
........
12 15 14 13
Series of copies
ID sensor pattern
Vsp/Vsg
ID sensor pattern
Vsp/Vsg
New Vref Decision
B004D535.WMF
B004D303.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
DEVELOPMENT
SM 6-47 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.9 DEVELOPMENT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
1 Drum 5 Mixing Auger
2 Development Roller 6 Development Filter
3 Paddle Roller 7 Doctor Blade
4 TD Sensor
B004D401.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DEVELOPMENT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-48 SM
6.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
The feed/development motor [A]
drives the development roller [B]
through the gears and the paddle
roller gear [C].
The drive shaft engages and
disengages the paddle roller gear
when the development unit is
inserted into and removed from the
machine.
NOTE: The development drive
gears are helical gears,
quieter than normal gears.
6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING
The dual mixing roller consists of the outer paddle [A] and the inner auger [B].
The outer paddle moves developer to the front " and supplies it to the
development roller. Developer that spills off by the doctor blade # passes through
the holes [C] in the outer paddle, and is transported to the rear $ by the inner
auger.
While the dual mixing roller is moving the developer, some developer also passes
back to the development unit through the holes in the bottom of the paddle roller
%. New toner from the toner bottle and recycled toner from the toner collection coil
both enter the development unit at [D].
B004D402.WMF
B004D403.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
$
#
#
%
[C]
[C]
%
#
"
DEVELOPMENT
SM 6-49 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
Mechanism
In a negative-positive development
system, black areas of the latent image
are at a low negative charge (about
150 V) and white areas are at a high
negative charge (about 950 V).
To attract negatively charged toner to
the black areas of the latent image on
the drum, the high voltage supply board
[A] applies a bias of 600 volts to the
development roller throughout the image
development process. The bias is
applied to the development roller shaft
[B] through the bias terminal spring [C]
and bias terminal [D].
The development bias voltage (-600 V) can be adjusted with SP2-201
(Development Bias).
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only)
The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrow than sizes accepted
by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in the by-
pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in
order to avoid jams and misfeeds.
SP Mode SP Name
SP2-201-1 Development Bias Width 216 - 297 mm
SP2-309-1 Paper Lower Width [a] Width limit: 150 mm
SP2-309-2 Paper Upper Width [b] Width limit: 216 mm
SP2-914-3 Process Control Setting (B) Adjust 10V/step
SP2-914-4 Process Control Setting (B) Adjust 10V/step
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray
is 200 mm, the development bias voltage will be 600 + 50 V.
B004D404.WMF
0 mm
SP 2- 309- 1
Def aul t : 150 mm
SP 2- 309- 2
Def aul t : 216 mm
297 mm
Voltage:
SP2-201-1 + SP2-914-3
Default: -600+250 V
Voltage:
SP2-201-1 + SP2-914-4
Default: -600+50 V
Voltage:
SP2-201-1
Default: -600 V
B004D508.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
DEVELOPMENT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-50 SM
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY
Toner bottle replenishment mechanism
When the toner bottle is installed in the bottle holder [A], pin [B] slides up the side
of the PCU [C], pulling out the toner shutter [D]. When the toner bottle holder lever
[E] is returned to its original position, the cap [F] pulls away and is kept in place by
the chuck [G].
The toner bottle holder lever [E] cannot be lowered when a toner bottle is not
installed in the holder. This prevents toner falling out of the holder unit as a result
of lowering the handle with no toner bottle installed.
The toner bottle has a spiral groove [H], which rotates the bottle to move toner to
the development unit. When the bottle holder unit is pulled out, the chuck [G]
releases the toner bottle cap and the toner shutter [D] closes and blocks the
opening.
B004D504.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
DEVELOPMENT
SM 6-51 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Toner supply mechanism
The toner supply motor [A] rotates the
toner bottle [B] and the mylar blades
[C].
Toner falls into the toner bottle holder, and
the toner supply mylar blades transfer the
toner to slit [D]. Installing the PCU opens the
shutter [E].
The toner falls into the development unit
through the slit.
B004D545.WMF
B004D509.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
DEVELOPMENT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-52 SM
Toner density control
There are two modes for controlling and maintaining constant toner supply: sensor
control (both direct and indirect) and image pixel count control. The mode can be
changed with SP2-208-1 (Toner Supply Mode).
NOTE: The factory setting is sensor control mode; image pixel count mode should
only be used temporarily until a defective TD or ID sensor can be replaced.
Sensor Control Mode
In the sensor control mode, the amount of toner required to print the page is
calculated by the CPU; it adds up the image data value of each pixel and converts
the sum to a value between 0 and 255. (255 would mean a completely black page.)
The machine must vary toner supply for each copy in order to maintain the correct
amount of toner in the developer and to account for changes in drum reflectivity
due to changes in temperature and humidity. The CPU uses data from the TD
sensor and ID sensor to determine whether or not the toner supply motor should be
switched on and to calculate how long it should remain on in order to supply more
toner to the mixture in the development unit.
TD Sensor. When new developer of standard toner concentration is installed,
namely 20 g of toner per 500 g of developer (4.0% by weight), the TD sensor must
be set to its initial setting of 4.0V with SP2-801. This initial setting is used as the
toner supply reference voltage or Vref. For every copy cycle, the TD sensor directly
checks the toner density in the developer mixture, and after 10 copies these 10
readings are averaged and this value becomes TD sensor output voltage Vt(10).
The machine compares Vt(10) with Vref. If Vt(10) is greater than Vref, the toner
concentration in the development unit judged to be low. When Vt(10) is detected to
be greater than Vref 20 times, then this indicates that the toner concentration is
consistently low, Vref is incremented by 0.1V, and the conditions are checked
again. The result of this check determines the value of K, the toner supply rate
coefficient, which is one of the factors that is used in the toner supply motor on-
time calculation.
ID Sensor. In addition to comparing Vt(10) from the TD sensor and Vref, after
every 10 copies the ID sensor, located at the lower right area of the drum, checks
both the reflectivity (Vsg) and the pattern on the drum (Vsp), created by the laser
diodes and charge roller. If the reflected light is too strong, this indicates that toner
is low and toner is added to the development unit. (The frequency of these checks
can be adjusted with SP2-210 (ID Sensor Pattern Interval).
DEVELOPMENT
SM 6-53 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Image Pixel Count Mode
This mode should only be used only as a temporary measure while waiting for
replacement parts, such as a TD sensor. This mode controls the toner supply
amount using the same method for determining the toner bottle motor on time.
However, the values that were in effect when the toner density control mode was
changed over to image pixel count mode with SP2-208-1 (Toner Supply Mode)
remain in effect and cannot be changed.
6.9.6 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION
The toner near-end condition is detected based on the Vt(10) output from the TD
sensor. If the difference between Vref (toner supply reference voltage) and Vt (10)
is less than or equal to 0.45, then toner concentration is judged be very low and K
(the toner supply coefficient) is set to 0.25, the machine enters the toner near end
condition and the machine switches on the toner supply motor.
If a difference greater than 0.45 is detected, then toner concentration is judged as
low but the machine does another test by comparing Vref and Vt (10). If the
machine determines that Vt (10) is greater than Vref 40 times, the toner supply
motor switches on and remains on for twice the time that Vt (10) was greater than
Vref. If the toner concentration is still low, then the machine enters the toner near
end condition.
The final toner end is detected using the ID sensor. If the ID sensor detects that the
ID sensor pattern is very light (Vsp drops below 2.0V), then the sensor triggers the
toner end condition.
If Vsp is less than 2.0V, the density of the ID sensor pattern is very light, so the
machine detects the toner end condition. However, if Vsp remains higher than 2.0V
but 90 copies have been made after toner near end was determined, the machine
enters the toner end condition.
NOTE: The number of copies between toner near-end and toner end can be
changed with SP2-213. The default is 90 copies.
DEVELOPMENT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-54 SM
6.9.7 TONER END RECOVERY
If the front door is opened and then closed while a toner near end/end condition
exists, the machine will attempt to recover. When the front door is closed, the toner
supply motor turns on to supply toner. The machine checks the TD sensor output 2
seconds after the main motor turns on (Vtp), and the sensor is checked again
every 1 second (Vtp
1
)
The machine detects the toner concentration using Vref, Vt (10), Vtp, and Vtp
1
. If
the toner concentration is still too low, the toner supply motor remains on for
another 10 seconds while the machine checks Vt. If toner concentration is judged
to be at the standard level, then the toner near end/end condition is cancelled and
K (toner supply coefficient) is reset. If toner concentration has not reached the
standard level, the toner supply motor rotates continuously until it does (maximum
motor on time is 16 seconds) and then it will switch off.
6.9.8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS
The TD sensor is checked every copy. If the readings from the TD sensor become
abnormal during a copy job, the machine holds the GAIN factor constant (GAIN is
normally calculated from TD sensor readings) to allow toner supply to vary with
only pixel count for the rest of the copy job. Then at the end of the copy job, an SC
code is generated and the machine must be repaired.
The ID sensor is checked every 10 copies. If readings become abnormal, an SC
code is generated and the machine must be repaired. If this happens during a copy
job, Vref is not changed, the copy job is allowed to finish, and then the SC code is
generated.
If spare parts are not available, the technician can use SP2-208-1 to temporarily
put the machine in image pixel count mode. ( Chapter 5 Service Tables)
DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING
SM 6-55 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING
6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING
This machine employs a counter
blade system. After the image is
transferred to paper, a cleaning
blade [A] removes any toner
remaining on the drum. The toner
collection coil [B] carries scraped off
toner to the toner collection plate [C].
The collar [D] on the cleaning blade
bracket contacts the outer rim of cam
gear [E], which moves the cleaning
blade side to side. This side-to-side
movement disperses accumulated
toner to prevent early blade edge
wear at one location.
The drum reverses about 5 mm after
every copy job to remove particles on
the edge of the cleaning blade.
6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING
Toner collected by the toner collection
coil [A] is transported to the opening [B].
This toner falls into the development unit
with new toner coming from the toner
bottle. The paddle roller [C] mixes the
collected toner with the new toner.
NOTE: A screen filter [D) has been
added to strain out paper dust
and other foreign matter.
B004D547.WMF
B004D509.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-56 SM
6.11 PAPER FEED
6.11.1 OVERVIEW
1 Upper pick-up roller 9 Lower paper feed roller
2 Upper paper height sensor 10 Lower separation roller
3 Upper paper feed roller 11 Lower paper height sensor
4 Upper relay sensor 12 Lower pick-up roller
5 Upper relay roller 13 Lower paper size dial
6 Upper separation roller 14 Lower paper size switch
7 Lower relay sensor 15 Upper paper size dial
8 Lower relay roller 16 Upper paper size switch
Each paper tray, which employs the FRR system, can hold 500 sheets. Two relay
sensors, positioned above each set of relay rollers, detect paper jams. A selection
dial allows you to select the setting for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
B004D701.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
15
16
11
12
7 8
9
10
13
14
PAPER FEED
SM 6-57 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE
The feed/development motor [A] drives
the pick-up and feed mechanism of both
the upper and second paper feed stations
through gears and the paper feed
clutches [B].
When the paper feed clutch turns on, the
pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and
separation roller start rotating to feed the
paper. The paper feed clutch stays on
until shortly after the registration sensor
[C] actuates.
6.11.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE
MECHANISM
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the
machine, the separation roller [B] is
away from the paper feed roller [C] and
the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper
position.
When the paper tray is set into the
machine, it pushes the release lever [E].
This causes the pick-up roller [D] to go
down and the separation roller [B] to
move up and contact the paper feed
roller.
B004D703.WMF
B004D704.WMF
B004D763.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-58 SM
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT
The paper size switch [A] detects when
the paper tray [B] is set in the machine,
and the tray lift motor [C] rotates, and
the coupling gear [D] on the tray lift
motor engages the pin [E] on the lift
arm shaft [F]. Then the tray lift arm [G]
lifts the tray bottom plate [H].
When the paper tray is set in the machine,
the pick-up roller [I] lowers. When the top
sheet of paper reaches the proper height
for paper feed, the paper pushes up the
pick-up roller, and the actuator [J] on the
pick-up roller supporter activates the
paper height sensor [K] to stop the tray lift
motor.
After several paper feed cycles, the paper
level gradually lowers and the paper
height sensor is de-activated. The tray lift
motor turns on again until this sensor is
activated again.
When the paper tray is removed from the
machine, the tray lift motor coupling gear
disengages the pin on the lift arm shaft,
and the tray bottom plate then drops
under its own weight.
B004D702.WMF
B004D526.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[K]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-59 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION
If there is paper in the paper tray, the
paper end feeler [A] is raised by the
paper stack, and the paper end sensor
[B] is deactivates.
When the paper tray runs out of paper,
the paper end feeler drops into the
cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and
the paper end sensor is activated.
6.11.6 PAPER REGISTRATION
The registration drive roller [A] and
idle roller [B] correct the skew of
the transferred paper to ensure that
the leading edge of the paper is
positioned correctly on the OPC.
The paper feed/development motor
[C] drives the registration
mechanism.
The registration sensor [E] is
positioned just before the
registration rollers. When the
leading edge activates the
registration sensor, the registration
clutch is off and the registration
rollers are not turning.
However, the relay clutch [F] remains on slightly longer. This delay allows time for
the paper to press against the registration rollers and buckle slightly to correct
skew.
Next, the registration clutch [D] actuates and the relay clutch re-actuates at the
proper time to align the paper with the image on the drum. The registration rollers
then feed the paper to the image transfer section.
NOTE: The registration sensor is also used for paper misfeed detection.
B004D706.WMF
B004D703.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PAPER FEED
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-60 SM
6.11.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
The paper size switch includes four microswitches. Actuators behind the paper size
dial actuate the sensors.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To
determine the paper size, the CPU reads which switches the actuator has turned
off.
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If
the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the printer control
board recognizes that the paper tray is not installed.
When the paper size actuator is at the mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using one of the user tools
on the machines operation panel.
Models Paper Size Switch
North America Europe/Asia 1 2 3 4
81/2" x 13" Portrait A3 Portrait ON ON OFF ON
A4 Landscape A4 Landscape ON ON ON ON
A4 Portrait A4 Portrait ON OFF ON ON
11" x 17" Portrait A5 Portrait OFF OFF ON ON
81/2" x 14" Portrait 8" x 13" Portrait ON OFF OFF OFF
81/2" x 11" Portrait 81/2" x 11" Portrait ON ON OFF OFF
81/2" x 11" Landscape 81/2" x 11" Landscape ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON OFF
ON: Pushed OFF: Not Pushed
BY-PASS TRAY
SM 6-61 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1 Paper feed roller
2 Paper end sensor
3 Pick-up Roller
4 By-pass Tray
5 Separation roller
B004V510.WMF
[1]
1
2
3
4
5
BY-PASS TRAY
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-62 SM
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION
The by-pass unit is directly driven by the copier through gear [A].
When the print key is pressed, the pick-up solenoid [B] turns on and the pick-up
roller [C] moves onto the paper. When the by-pass tray runs out of paper, the
paper end feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the by-pass tray and the paper end
sensor [E] is activated.
B004D500.WMF
B004D501.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
BY-PASS TRAY
SM 6-63 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION
The paper size sensor board [A] monitors the paper width.
The rear side fence is connected to the terminal plate. The pattern for each paper
width is unique. Therefore, the copier determines which paper has been placed in
the by-pass tray by the signal output from the board. However, the copier does not
determine the paper length from the by-pass tray hardware.
B004D522.WMF
A3 B4 A4L B5L A5L B6L
51/ 2" 81/ 2" 11"
B004D523.WMF
[A]
DUPLEX UNIT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-64 SM
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.1 OVERVIEW
1 Entrance sensor 4 Upper transport roller
2 Inverter gate 5 Lower transport roller
3 Inverter roller 6 Exit sensor
B004D101.WMF
6
1
2
3
4
5
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 6-65 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT
1 Inverter roller 4 Transport motor
2 Inverter motor 5 Lower transport roller
3 Upper transport roller
B004D103.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
DUPLEX UNIT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-66 SM
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION
To increase the productivity of the duplex unit, copies are printed as follows.
Larger than A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise
The duplex unit can store only one sheet of copy paper.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
Up to A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise
The duplex unit can store two sheets of copy paper
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
5 3 1 2
4
6
8
7
1 1 4 2 2 3 3 4
B004D530.WMF
4 1 5 3 2
6
8
7
1 4 2 3 3 4 1 2
B004D531.WMF
[B]
[A]
[B]
[A]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 6-67 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM
Feed-in
The inverter gate solenoid [A] stays off and the inverter rollers [B] rotate clockwise.
A sheet of paper is sent to the inverter section [C].
NOTE: The cover guide has been eliminated in order to accommodate paper sizes
longer than A4/LT in the reverse feed path which has been lengthened in
the design of this machine.
Inversion and Exit
The inverter gate solenoid turns on and the inverter motor turns on in reverse
shortly after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the entrance sensor [D].
As a result, the inverter gate [E] is opened and the inverter roller rotates
counterclockwise. The paper is sent to the copier through the upper and lower
transport rollers [F, G].
B004D105.WMF
B004D104.WMF
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[G]
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-68 SM
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.14.1 OVERVIEW
1 Transfer belt 6 OPC
2 Drive roller 7 Pick-off pawls
3 Transfer belt cleaning blade 8 ID sensor
4 Transfer roller 9 Contact lever
5 Idle roller 10 Transfer belt contact clutch
B004D561.WMF
1 2
3
4
5
8
7
6
9
10
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
SM 6-69 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM
After the main motor switches on during
copying, the transfer belt contact clutch [A]
switches on after a specified interval and
the cam [F] makes a half-turn to raise the
contact lever [E] and bring the transfer belt
[D] into contact with the drum.
The actuator [C], on the same axis as the
cam, and the transfer belt position sensor
[B] detect whether the drum and transfer
belt are in contact.
When the main motor is off, or when the ID
sensor pattern is being measured, the
transfer belt unit separates from the drum.
The ID sensor pattern must not be transferred to the belt. Also, the transfer belt
and drum must not remain in contact for too long, to prevent contamination of the
drum with oil or other foreign material from the transfer belt.
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM
The belt contact and release mechanism
consists of the belt contact clutch [A], cam
[B], and contact lever [C]. The belt contact
clutch turns on and the cam attached to
the clutch rotates half a complete rotation.
The contact lever, riding on the cam, is
lifted up and the spring [D] pushes the
belt into contact with the drum.
The transfer belt position sensor [E]
detects the home position of the cam (this
is when the belt is away from the drum).
The belt must be released from the drum
between copy jobs in order to prevent the
ID sensor pattern from being rubbed off
and to prevent contamination of the drum
from the surface of the belt.
B004D563.WMF
B004D563.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-70 SM
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
MECHANISM
When the registration clutch switches on to align
the leading edge of the paper [A] with the image
on the drum [B], the transfer belt is [C] is away
from the drum.
At the designated time after the main motor
switches on, the transfer belt contact clutch
switches on and the transfer belt touches the
drum.
When the paper enters the gap between the belt
and the drum, the high voltage supply board [D]
applies a high positive current to the belt to
transfer the image to the paper.
After receiving the image from the drum, the paper
is fed by the belt. The paper moves to the end of
the transfer belt unit, where it separates from the
belt as the belt curves away and moves on to the
fusing unit.
B004D552.WMF
B004D553.WMF
B004D521.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
SM 6-71 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE
Mechanism
The high voltage supply board [A] applies the positive current to the transfer belt
[B] through the terminal block [C], terminal plate [D], and the bias roller [E].
The high voltage supply board adjusts the current to the roller to keep a small but
constant current flow to ground through the belt, paper, and drum. If this current is
not kept constant, efficiency of toner transfer and paper separation will vary with
paper thickness, type, environmental condition, or changes in transfer belt surface
resistance.
B004D564.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-72 SM
Correction for paper width and thickness
A range of SP modes is available in order to adjust the machine so it can handle
papers of non-standard size and thickness.
For paper width, there are two thresholds. The factory settings are 150 mm (5.9)
and 216 mm (8.5). Below 216 mm, the transfer current can be increased. By
default, the current is multiplied by 1.2 for the main machine paper trays. For paper
widths below 150 mm, the transfer current can be set higher, but by default it is
kept the same as the current for paper widths below 216 mm. The higher current
allows for the tendency of the current to flow directly from the transfer belt to the
drum and not through the paper which could cause an insufficient amount of toner
to transfer to narrow width paper.
Thick paper must be fed from the by-pass tray because SP modes are available
only for the by-pass tray in order to accommodate thick paper. By default, the
current for paper narrower than 216 mm is 1.5 times the normal current.
This illustration shows the SP modes, which control these currents. The base
transfer current (current in the diagram) depends on SP 2-301. This is different for
various parts of the image, and is different for the by-pass tray; see the next page
for details.
SP2- 309- 1
Def aul t : 150 mm
SP2- 309- 2
Def aul t : 216 mm 297 mm
SP2- 309- 3
Current x 1. 2
SP2- 309- 4
Current x 1. 2
Current x 1. 0
SP2- 309- 5
Current x 1. 5
Paper Tray
SP2- 309- 6
Current x 1. 5
Current x 1. 0
By-pass Tray
0
B004D571.WMF
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
SM 6-73 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Currents applied to leading edge and image areas, and for by-pass feed
Transfer current can also be adjusted for the leading edge and the image area, and
for by-pass feed. The timing for starting to apply leading edge current, for the
switchover from leading edge current to image area current, and for switching off at
the trailing edge can also be changed.
The table below lists the SP modes you can use to adjust these settings.
SP2-301 Transfer Current Adjustment
Image areas SP2-301-1 1st Side of Paper
SP2-301-2 2nd Side of Paper
SP2-301-4 By-pass Feed
Leading edge
areas
SP2-301-3 Leading Edge
SP2-301-5 Leading Edge By-pass Feed
SP2-911 Transfer Current Timing
Timing SP2-911-1 On Timing
SP2-911-2 Switch Timing
SP2-911-3 Off Timing
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-74 SM
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM
The cleaning blade [A], always in contact with the transfer belt, scrapes off toner
and paper dust remaining on the transfer belt.
Scraped off toner and paper dust falls into the toner collection tank [B] in the
transfer belt unit. This toner is not recycled. When the toner overflow sensor [C]
detects toner overflow, the toner overflow indicator lights. Up to 999 copies can be
made before the toner overflow condition shuts down the machine.
B004D524.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
SM 6-75 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.15.1 OVERVIEW
1 Paper exit sensor 10 Cleaning roller
2 De-curler rollers 1, 2 11 Entrance guide
3 Junction gate 12 Fusing lamp (center)
4 Idle roller (duplex unit) 13 Fusing lamp (ends)
5 Fusing unit exit sensor 14 Thermistors (central/end)
6 Spring 15 Thermostat (central/end)
7 Fusing exit guide plate 16 Hot roller
8 Pressure roller 17 Hot roller strippers
9 Pressure arm 18 Exit roller
B004D601.WMF
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Rev. 09/2002
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-76 SM
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE
The main motor [A] drives the fusing unit
through the gears [B] and also drives the
paper exit rollers [C] through a gear and a
timing belt [D].
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM
The fusing unit drive release mechanism
automatically disengages the fusing unit
drive gear [A] when the right door [B] is
opened.
When the right cover is opened, the
actuator plate [C] pulls release wire [D].
The wire pulls the fusing drive gear bracket
[E] and the fusing unit drive is disengaged.
B004D603.WMF
B004D605.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
SM 6-77 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM
The entrance guide [A] has two holes on
each side to adjust for paper thickness to
prevent creasing. Normally, the left screw
hole [C] on each side is used.
For thin paper, use screw holes [B] to
move the entrance guide to the left. This
setting allows more direct access to the
gap between the hot and pressure rollers,
and prevents thin paper from buckling
against the hot roller which can cause
blurring at the leading edge of the copy.
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS
The exit guide plate [A] also functions as
pressure roller stripper. The exit guide
plate can be moved in order to remove
jammed paper.
Stacking has been improved by mounting
a face-curl correction mechanism at the
paper exit roller.
Two de-curler rollers [B] and [C] have
been added under the exit roller [D] to
correct the curl that paper acquires during
transport through the fusing unit.
B004R610.WMF
B004D601.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-78 SM
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER
The pressure springs [A] apply constant
pressure between the hot roller [B] and
the pressure roller [C]. The applied
pressure can be changed by adjusting the
position of the pressure springs. The left
position [D] is the normal setting, and the
right position [E] increases the pressure to
prevent insufficient fusing by the fusing
unit.
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM
The cleaning roller [A], in constant contact
with the pressure roller [B], collects toner and
paper dust from the surface of the pressure
roller. Because the cleaning roller is metal, it
can collect adhering matter better than the
pressure roller, which is coated with Teflon.
B004D663.WMF
B004D515.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
SM 6-79 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.15.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The fusing unit for this machine is equipped
with two fusing lamps: the first fusing lamp
(center: 650W) [A] heats the center of the
fusing roller, and the second fusing lamp
(ends: 550W) [B] heats both ends of the
fusing roller. This arrangement ensures
even heat on all surfaces of the roller.
In order to control the temperature of the
roller, two high response thermistors are
attached to the unit, one near the center [C]
and one at the end [D] of the fusing roller.
Temperature Control
There are two types of temperature control:
On/off control (Default)
Phase control.
Either mode can be selected with SP1-104 (Fusing Temperature Control).
After the machine is powered on, the CPU checks the ac frequency for 500 ms, in
case phase control is selected later for the temperature control, and then switches
on the fusing lamp.
As soon as both the center and end thermistors detect the re-load temperature
(Fusing temperature (minus) 30
o
C), the machine can operate. As soon as the
thermistors detect the fusing temperature, the CPU switches the lamps off but
frequently switches on/off again in order to maintain the fusing temperature.
B004D602.WMF
Center
End
Center
End
185C
180C
Main SW ON Re-load
50
200
150
100
C
155
Fusing Temp.
Model B004 & B007
(45 CPM)
B004D519.WMF
Center
End
Center
End
170C
160C
Main SW ON Re-load
50
200
140
100
C
130
Fusing Temp.
Model B003 & B006
(35CPM)
B004D518.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-80 SM
Fusing Idling Temperature
If copies are not sufficiently fused soon after the main power switch is turned on,
fusing idling should be enabled with SP1-103-1. When fusing idling is enabled, it is
done when the temperature reaches the value of the re-load temperature. The re-
load temperature can be adjusted with SP1-105-5, 6.
In the opposite case, even if fusing idling is disabled, it is done when the
temperature at power-up 15C
The fusing idling time is as follows.
Fusing Idling Mode Temperature at
power-on
0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP1-103-1
15C or less 30 s 30 s
Higher than 15C Not done 30 s
SP1-103-2
6.15.9 OVERHEAT PROTECTION
If the hot roller temperature becomes greater than 250C, the CPU cuts off the
power to the fusing lamp, and SC543 Fusing Overheat Error will be displayed.
Even if the thermistor overheat protection fails, there is a thermostat in series with
the common ground line of the fusing lamp. If the temperature of the thermostat
reaches 180C, the thermostat opens, removing power from the fusing lamp. At the
same time, the copier stops operating. At this time, SC542 Fusing Temperature
Warm-up Error will be displayed.
Rev. 09/2002
ENERGY SAVER MODES
SM 6-81 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.16.1 OVERVIEW
When the machine is not used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Energy saver mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
Energy timer (UP mode)
Auto off timer (UP mode)
Auto off disabling (SP mode)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Mode
(Low Power Mode)
Auto Off Mode
Off Stand-by
Mode
Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc.
Printer Data in
After Printing
Energy Saver Key Off
Return Time Less than 3 s
Energy Saver Key On
-or-
Energy Saver Timer
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s)
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer - Energy Saver Timer
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s)
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open/Close
Original Set ADF
Return Time Less Than:
10 s: Model B003 & B006
15 s: Model B004 & B007
B004D604.WMF
ENERGY SAVER MODES
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-82 SM
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE
Entering the energy saver mode
The machine enters energy saver mode when one of the following is done.
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for a second.
The energy saver timer runs out after the end of a job.
What happens in energy saver mode
When the machine enters energy saver mode, the fusing lamp drops to a certain
temperature, and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the
Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the CPU receives the image print out command from an application (e. g. to print
incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the fusing temperature rises to print
the data.
Return to stand-by mode
If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The recovery time from energy saver mode is about 3 s.
Mode
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Temp. +24V System +5V
Energy
Saver
On On
B003 & B006: 130
o
C
B004 & B007: 150
o
C
On On
ENERGY SAVER MODES
SM 6-83 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE
There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machines condition when the
machine enters Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes
The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off mode when one of the following
is done.
The auto off timer runs out
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
If one or more of the following conditions exits, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters Off Mode.
Error or SC condition
An optional G4 unit is installed
Image data is stored in the memory
During memory TX or polling RX
The handset is off hook
An original is in the ADF
The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode
The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode
The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
recovery time is about 10 s for the B003 & B006 and 15 s for the B004 & B007.
Mode
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver
Mode
Fusing Lamp +24V
System
+5V
Note
Off Stand-by Off Off
Off
(On when printing)
On On
Off Off Off Off Off Off
+5VE is
supplied
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration Desktop
Copy Process Dry electrostatic transfer system
Original Sheet/Book
Original Size Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Paper tray,
Duplex:
A3/11" 17" - A5 (L)
By-pass tray: A3/11" 17" - A6 (L)
Copy Paper Size
Non-standard
sizes:
Width: 100 - 305 mm (3.9" - 12")
Length: 148 - 432 mm (5.8" 17.0")
Paper Tray
/Duplex:
64 - 105 g/m
2
(20 - 28 lb) Copy Paper Weight
By-pass: 52 - 163 g/m
2
(16 44 lb)
7R5E: Metric version (%): 400, 200, 141, 122, 115,
93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
Inch version (%): 400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 93,
85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
Reproduction Ratios
Zoom: 25 ~ 400% in 1% steps
B003 & B006: 35 cpm (A4/11" 8.5" (S)) Copying Speed
B004 & B007: 45 cpm (A4/11" 8.5" (S))
First Copy Time B003 & B006: 4.5 s (1
st
Tray, A4/11" 8.5" (S))
B004 & B007: 3.6 s (1
st
Tray, A4/11" 8.5" (S))
B003 & B006: Less than 15 s Warm-up Time
B004 & B007: Less than 20 s
Continuous Copy 1~999 (operation panel entry)
Paper Capacity 1,050 sheets
(500 sheets/tray x 2 with 50 sheets in by-pass tray)
A4/8 x 11" and
smaller
500 sheets Paper Output
B4 and larger: 250 sheets
North America: 120V/60Hz, More than 12 A Power Source
Europe/Asia: 220 240V/50, 60Hz, More than 8A
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
670 mm x 650 mm x 720 mm (26.3 x 25.6 x 28.3)
Weight Less than 78 kg (172 lb)
Resolution 600 dpi (Scanning and Printing)
Gradation 256 levels (Scanning and Printing)
Original Archive More than 9,000 A4 pages for document server.
Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange (550g)
Total Counter Electric counter
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 7-2 SM
NOTE: The following notations are used to describe the paper feed direction
Power Consumption
Mainframe only
Model -B003 & B006 Model -B004 & B007
Copying Less than 1.2 kW Less than 1.2 kW
Warm-up Less than 1.25 kW Less than 1.25 kW
Stand-by Less than 150 W/h Less than 170 W/h
Energy Saver Mode Ave. 115 W/h Ave. 150 W/h
Auto Off Mode Ave. 6 W/h Ave. 6 W/h
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW Less than 1.44 kW
System
Model -B003 & B006 Model -B004 & B007
Copying Less than 1.4 kW Less than 1.4 kW
Warm-up Less than 1.3 kW Less than 1.3 kW
Stand-by Less than 170 W/h Less than 195 W/h
Energy Saver Mode Ave. 118 W/h Ave. 153 W/h
Auto Off Mode Ave. 8 W/h Ave. 8 W/h
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW Less than 1.44kW
Noise Emission:
Mode Model Mainframe Only System
B003 &
B006
69 dB(A) or less
73 dB(A) or less
Copying
B004 &
B007
70 dB(A) or less 74 dB(A) or less
B003 &
B006
42 dB(A) or less
Stand-by
B004 &
B007
42 dB(A) or less
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.
Full system measurements include the ARDF, Finisher and LCT unit.
In the above stand-by condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not rotating.
Lengthwise (L) Sideways (S)
B004V501.WMF
Rev. 09/2002
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1 Platen cover 7 Copier
2 ARDF 8 Paper tray unit
3 One-bin tray 9 Two-tray finisher (2 shift trays)
4 Duplex unit 10 1000-sheet finisher (1 shift tray)
5 By-pass tray 11 External tray
6 LCT (Large Capacity Tray) 12 Bridge unit
NOTE: The Bridge Unit is required for the optional 1000-Sheet Finisher and the
Two-Tray Finisher.
B004V502.WMF
7
8
9
1
3
4
10
12
2
5
6
11
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 7-4 SM
Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products
Item Key Machine Code
Copier Model 35CPM B003
Copier Model 45CPM B004
Printer Model 35CPM
(USA model only)
B006
Printer Model 45 CPPM
(USA model only)
B007
ARDF (See Note 1.) U B351
Platen Cover (See Note 1.) C A381
Paper Tray Unit C A682
LCT (Large Capacity Tray) C A683
1-Bin Tray U B376
Bridge Unit U A688/B397
1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 2.) C A681
Two-tray Finisher (See Note 2.) U B352
Punch Unit (See Note 3.) C B377-17 (2/3-hole) US
Punch Unit (See Note 3.) C B377-27 (2/4-hole) Metric
Punch Unit (See Note 3.) C B377-31 (4-hole) Northern
Europe
External Output Tray (See Note 4.) C A825
Key Counter Bracket C A674
Copier
User Account Enhance Unit U B443
Fax Option U B360
ISDN Option U B367
G3 Interface Unit U B366
JBIG C A892
Fax
Handset (USA model only) C A646
Printer Unit U B362
Printer/Scanner Unit U B361
PostScript3 Unit U G577
Network Interface Board U G574
1394 Interface Unit C G590
Mailbox C G909
Mailbox Bridge Unit C G912
Memory Unit 64 MB C G579
Printer/
Scanner
Memory Unit 32 MB C G578
Notes
1. The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together.
2. The finishers require the paper tray unit and bridge unit.
3. The punch unit requires the two-tray finisher.
4. The external output tray requires the bridge unit.
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
3. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
ARDF
Original Size: Normal Original Mode:
A3 to B6, DLT to HLT
Duplex Original Mode:
A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Original Weight: Normal Original Mode: 40 ~ 128 g/m
2
(11 ~ 34 lb)
Duplex Original Mode: 52 ~ 105 g/m
2
(14 ~ 28 lb)
Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Reproduction Range: 30 ~ 200% (Sub scan direction only)
Power Source: DC 24V from the copier
Power Consumption: Less than 60 W
Dimensions (W D H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4 x 20.4 x 5.9)
Weight: 12 kg
PAPER TRAY UNIT
Paper Size: A5 (L) to A3
HLT (L) to DLT
Paper Weight: 64 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
(20 lb ~ 28 lb)
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb )
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from the copier)
120 Vac: 115 V version (from the copier)
220 ~ 240 Vac: 224/240 V version (from the copier)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: Less than 25 kg (55.1 lb)
Size (W x D x H): 540 mm x 600 mm x 270 mm (21.3 x 23.6 x 10.6)
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 7-6 SM
ONE-BIN TRAY
Paper Size: A5 (L) to A3
HLT to DLT
Paper Weight: 60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
(16 lb ~ 28 lb)
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Power Source: 5 Vdc, 24 Vdc (from copier)
Power Consumption: 15 W
Weight: Less than 4 kg (8.8 lb)
Size (W x D x H): 470 mm x 565 mm x 140 mm (18.5 x 22.2 x 5.5)
1000-SHEET FINISHER
Paper Size: No staple mode:
A3 to A6 (L)
DLT to HLT (L)
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5 (S)
DLT to LT
Paper Weight: No staple mode: 52 ~ 157 g/m
2
(14 ~ 42 lb)
Staple mode:64 ~ 80 g/m
2
(17 ~ 20 lb)
Stapler Capacity: 20 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)
30 sheets (A4, B5 (S), LT)
Paper Capacity: No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Staple mode: (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb, number of sets)
Set Size 2 to 10
Size 2 to 5 6 to 10
11 to 20 21 to 30
A4/LT (S)
B5 (S)
100 85 40 25
A4/LT (L) 50 25 15
A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 25
Staple positions 1
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (3,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 48 W
Weight: 21 kg (46.3 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x
H):
568 x 520 x 625 mm (22.4 x 20.5 x 24.6)
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
TWO-TRAY FINISHER
NOTE: The punch unit is an option for this machine.
Paper Size Normal/Shift Mode:
A3 to A5/DLT to HLT
(A6L in no shift mode and no staple mode)
Staple Mode:
A3 to B5/DLT to LT
Punch Mode:
2 Holes: A3 to A5/DLT to HLT
3 Holes: A3 to B5/DLT to LT
4 Holes (Europe/Asia) : A3 to A5/ DLT to HLT
4 Holes (North Europe): A3 to B5/DLT to LT
Paper Weight: Normal/Shift Mode:
52 g/m
2
~ 163 g/m
2
(14 ~ 43 lb)
Staple Mode:
64 g/m
2
~ 90 g/m
2
(17 ~ 23 lb)
Punch mode (All types):
52 g/m
2
~ 163 g/m
2
(14 ~ 43 lb)
Tray Paper Capacity: Upper Tray:
500 sheets (A4S ~ A5S/LTS, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
250 sheets (A3 ~ A4L/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
100 sheets (A5L/HLT, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Lower Tray (Multi-tray Staple Mode):
1500 sheets (A4S/LTS, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
750 sheets (A3 ~ B5/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
500 sheets (A5S, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
100 sheets (A5L/HLT, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Lower Tray (Normal Mode):
2000 sheets (A4S/LTS, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
750 sheets (A3 ~ B5/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
500 sheets (A5S, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
100 sheets (A5L/HLT, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Stapler Tray Capacity: No Mixed Original Mode:
50 sheets (A4 ~ B5/LT, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
30 sheets (A3 ~ B4/DLT ~ LG, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Mixed Original Mode:
30 sheets
(A4S/A3, B5S/B4, LTS/DLT, 80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Staple Position: 4 positions
1 staple: 3 positions (Front, Rear, Rear-Slant)
2 staple: 1 position
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples)
Power Source: 24 Vdc (from copier)
Power Consumption: 60 W
Weight: Less than 53 kg (116.8 lb) (without punch unit)
Less than 55 kg (121.3 lb) (with punch unit)
Size (W x D x H): 680 mm x 620 mm x 1030 mm
(26.8 x 24.4 x 40.6)
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 7-8 SM
BRIDGE UNIT
Paper Size: Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m
2
~ 135 g/m
2
, 16 lb ~ 42 lb
LCT
Paper Size: A4 (S)/LT (S)
Paper Weight: 60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
, 16 lb ~ 28 lb
Tray Capacity: 1500 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier)
Power Consumption: 40 W
Weight: Less than 17 kg (37.5 lb)
Size (W x D x H): 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm
(15.4 x 19.7 x 15.4)
MAILBOX
Number of Trays 9 trays + proof tray
Tray Capacity: Trays and proof tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Paper Size for Trays: Trays:
Maximum: A3 or 11 x 17
Minimum: A5 (S) or 11 x 8
Proof tray:
Maximum: A3 or 11 x 17
Minimum: A6 (S) or 11 x 8
Paper Weight: Trays: 60 ~ 90 g/m
2
(16 ~ 24 lb)
Proof tray: 52 ~ 157 g/m
2
(14 ~ 42 lb)
Power Consumption: 48 W or less (average)
Power Source: DC24 V, 5 V (from the main unit)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 600 mm x 550 mm x 960 mm (23.6 x 21.7 x 37.8)
Weight: 40 kg (88.2 lb)
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
B351
COVERS
SM 8-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COVERS
1. Front cover [A] (! x2)
2. Rear cover [B] (! x2)
3. Top cover [C] (! x1, " x2)
4. Original tray [D] (" x1, # x1)
5. Platen sheet [E] (Velcro pads)
6. Original exit tray [F] (! x2). Slide to the right and then pull out.
!CAUTION
The hinge of the ARDF is spring-loaded and becomes much lighter with all the
covers removed. After removing all the covers, lay a heavy book on the front right
corner of the ARDF to prevent it from springing up unexpectedly.
B351R111.WMF
B351R110.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-2 SM
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1. Open the top cover.
2. Original feed unit [A]
Press it toward you on its shaft to
release and lift out.
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER
1. Original feed unit ( 1.2)
2. Pick-up roller [A] (# x1)
B351R101.WMF
B351R102.WMF
[A]
[A]
ORIGINAL FEED BELT
SM 8-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT
1. Original feed unit and original pick-up roller ( 1.2, 1.3)
2. Shaft [A] (# x1, spring x1)
NOTE: Before removing the shaft, note carefully the positioning of the spring
[B]. This must be reset during re-installation.
3. Feed belt cover [C] (Timing belt, gear, shaft, springs x2).
NOTE: Do not lose the springs.
4. Original feed belt [D].
B351R104.WMF
B351R103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/
REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-4 SM
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/
REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS
1. Open the top cover.
2. Upper original guide [A] (! x3).
3. Skew correction sensor [B] (" x1)
4. Interval sensor [C] (" x1)
5. Registration sensor [D] (" x1)
6. Original width sensor bracket [E] (! x1, " x4)
7. Original width sensors [F]
B351R106.WMF
B351R105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS
SM 8-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS
1. Raise the original table.
2. Lower cover of original tray [A] (! x4)
3. Original length sensor-1 [B] (" x1)
4. Original length sensor-2 [C] (" x1)
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER
1. Original feed unit.( 1.2)
2. Separation roller cover [A].
3. Separation roller [B] (# x1)
B351R107.WMF
B351R108.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
[C]
INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-6 SM
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS
1. Rear cover. ( 1.1)
2. Lower the original stopper [A] by
rotating the pick-up motor.
3. Original feed unit.( 1.2)
4. Feed guide plate [B] (! x5)
NOTE: Raise the original tray before
you re-install the paper feed guide.
5. Separation roller, torque limiter (# x1)
( 1.7)
6. Bracket [C] (! x1, " x1)
7. Inverter sensor [D] (! x1)
8. Original set sensor [E] (" x1)
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP
SENSOR/PICK-UP HP SENSOR
1. Rear cover ( 1.1)
2. Pick-up motor [A] (" x1, ! x2, Timing
belt)
3. Sensor bracket [B] (" x2, ! x1)
4. Pick-up HP sensor [C]
5. Original stopper HP sensor [D]
B351R109.WMF
B351R114.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SCANNER MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
SM 8-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
1.10 SCANNER MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
1. Rear cover ( 1.1)
2. Pick-up roller assembly [A] (# x1, ! x3, " x3)
3. Motor bracket [B] (! x3, " x2, Timing belt x2)
4. Scanner motor [C] (! x2)
NOTE: To re-install the scanner motor, secure the motor after the motor
bracket has been installed.
5. Inverter motor [D] (! x2)
B351R113.WMF
B351R112.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-8 SM
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER
CLUTCH
1. Rear cover ( 1.1)
2. Motor bracket [A] (! x5, " x1)
3. Feed motor [B] (spring [C] x1)
NOTE: To re-install the feed motor, secure the motor after the motor bracket
has been installed.
4. Clutch stopper [D] (! x1)
5. Skew correction roller clutch [E] (" x1)
B351R115.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
EXIT SENSOR
SM 8-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
1.12 EXIT SENSOR
1. Open the ARDF.
2. Pull platen cover [A] off halfway.
3. Open exit guide plate [B].
4. Exit guide plate cover [C] (! x2)
5. Exit sensor [D] (! x1, " x1)
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID
1. Rear cover, front cover, platen sheet, exit
tray ( 1.1)
2. Open the original guide [A].
3. Plate [B] (! x1)
4. Stamp solenoid [C] (! x1, " x1)
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Rear cover ( 1.1)
2. Controller board [A] (! x4, all ")
B351R116.WMF
B351R201.WMF
B351R202.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[C]
TIMING CHARTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-10 SM
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 TIMING CHARTS
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDE ORIGINAL MODE
0 500 0 500 1000 0 500 1000
RXD
TXD
ON
OFF
CCW
OFF
CW
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CCW
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Ori gi nal Set Sensor
Pi ck-up Mot or
Ori gi nal St opper H. P Sn.
Ori gi nal Pi ck-up H. P Sn.
Feed Mot or
Feed Cl ut ch
Skew Correct i on Sn.
Interval Sn.
Regi st rat i on Sn.
Transport Mot or
DF Gat e
Exi t Sn.
Inverter Motor
1600 pps
1600 pps
600 pps
4400 pps
4320 pps
10866 pps
JAM1
JAM2
JAM3
JAM4
JAM5
JAM6 JAM7
( ms)
CCW
OFF
CW
B351D500.WMF
TIMING CHARTS
SM 8-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
1.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE
0 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 0 500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500 2000
Ori gi nal Set Sensor
RXD
TXD
ON
OFF
CCW
OFF
CW
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CCW
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
CW
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Pi ck-up Mot or
Ori gi nal St opper H. P Sn.
Ori gi nal Pi ck-up H. P Sn.
Feed Mot or
Feed Cl ut ch
Skew Correct i on Sn.
Interval Sn.
Transport Mot or
Regi st rat i on Sn.
DF Gat e
Exi t Sn.
I nvert er Mot or
Inverter Sol .
Inverter Sn.
1600 pps
1600 pps
6000 pps
4400 pps
4320 pps
10866 pps
1886 pps
73 mm
1500 pps
4400 pps
1995 pps
JAM9
JAM8
( ms)
CCW
OFF
CW
CCW
60 mm
B351D501.WMF
JAM DETECTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-12 SM
2.2 JAM DETECTION
Jam Site Cause
Original stopper HP
sensor (Jam 1)
Original stopper home position could not be detected within 500 ms
after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating counter-
clockwise.
Pick-up HP sensor
(Jam 2)
Pick-up roller home position could not be detected within 500 ms
after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating clockwise.
Skew correction
sensor jam (Jam 3)
The skew correction sensor does not turn on after the feed motor
has fed the original 91.4 mm.
Transport jam
(Jam 4)
The interval sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed the
original 70.7 mm.
Registration sensor
(Jam 5)
The registration sensor does not turn on after the interval sensor
turned on and the original has been fed 74.1 mm.
Exit jam (Jam 6) The exit sensor does not turn on after the transport motor has fed
the original 124 mm.
Exit jam (Jam 7) The exit sensor does not turn off after the exit sensor turned on and
original has been fed 294 mm.
Inverter sensor jam
(Jam 8)
The inverter sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed
the original 50 mm.
Interval sensor jam
(Jam 9)
The interval sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed
the original 388.66 mm.
DIP SWITCHES
SM 8-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
DPS101
1 2 3 4
Description
0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode, with/without stamp.
0 0 0 1 Not used
0 0 1 0 Not used
0 0 1 1 Not used
0 1 0 0 Feed motor rotation (feed mode) 4400 pps (1-2 phase)
0 1 0 1 Feed motor rotation (pull-out mode) 6100 pps (1-2 phase)
0 1 1 0 Scanner motor rotation 4320 pps (2 phase)
0 1 1 1 Inverter motor rotation 6000 pps (1-2 phase)
1 0 0 0 Free run: one-sided original 100%
1 0 0 1 Free run: one-sided original 30%
1 0 1 0 Free run: one-sided original 71%
1 0 1 1 Free run: one-sided original 200%
1 1 0 0 Free run: two-sided original 100%
1 1 0 1 Free run: two-sided original 200%
1 1 1 0 Free run: one-sided (fax mode) 32.6%
1 1 1 1 Free run: one-sided (mixed original size mode) 100%
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP100 (GND) Ground
TP101 (Vcc) +5V
TP103 (TXD) TXD to the copier
TP104 (RXD) RXD from the copier
3.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects the 24 V line.
MAIN COMPONENTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-14 SM
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS
1 Pick-up roller 10 Exit sensor
2 Original tray 11 Idle roller 3
3 Original length sensor 1 12 Idle roller 2
4 Original length sensor 2 13 Transport roller
5 Reverse table 14 Registration sensor
6 Inverter roller 15 Idle roller 1
7 Junction gate 16 Original width sensor
8 Separation roller 17 Skew correction roller
9 Exit roller 18 Feed belt
Pick-up Mechanism. Picks up the originals for scanning.
Feed/Separation Mechanism. Comprised of the feed belt and separation roller,
feeds and separates the originals, and corrects skew.
Original Size Detection Sensors. Comprised of 4 width sensors and 2 length
sensors, detect the sizes of the originals.
Original Transport Mechanism. Comprised of the transport roller, ADF exposure
glass, and exit roller.
Original Reverse/Exit Mechanism. Exit/junction gate.
B351D103.WMF
1
2
3
4
5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DRIVE LAYOUT
SM 8-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
1 Feed motor 7 Inverter roller
2 Feed belt 8 Exit roller
3 Pick-up roller 9 Separation roller
4 Pick-up motor 10 Transport roller
5 Transport motor 11 Skew correction roller
6 Inverter motor
B351D102.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-16 SM
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM
The original size is detected by the four original width sensors [A] and two original
length sensors, [B] and [C].
The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original
activates the registration sensor.
The ARDF detects the original size by combining the readings of four width
sensors and two length sensors. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in
the table on the next page.
B351D110.WMF
[B] B5
[C] LG
[A]
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
SM 8-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
Width Sensor Length Sensor
Size (Width x Length)
B5 LG
A3 L*
1
(297 x 420 mm) ON ON ON ON ON ON
B4 L (257 x 364 mm) ON ON - - ON ON
A4 L (210 x 297 mm) ON - - - ON -
A4 S*
2
(297 x 210 mm) ON ON ON ON - -
B5 L (182 x 257 mm) - - - - ON -
B5 S (257 x 182 mm) ON ON - - - -
A5 L (148 x 210 mm) - - - - - -
A5 S (210 x 148 mm) ON - - - - -
B6 L (128 x 182 mm) - - - - - -
B6 S (182 x 128 mm) - - - - - -
DLT L (11 x 17) ON ON ON - ON ON
11 x 15 L ON ON ON - ON ON
10 x 14 L ON ON - - ON ON
LG L (8 x 14) ON - - - ON ON
F4 L (8 x 13) ON - - - ON ON
F L (8 x 13) ON - - - ON ON
LT L (8.5 x 11) ON - - - ON -
LT S (11 x 8.5 ON ON ON - - -
7 x 10 L ON - - - ON -
10 x 7 S ON ON ON - - -
8 x 10 L ON - - - ON -
HLT L 5 x 8 - - - - - -
HLT S 8 x 5 ON - - - - -
267 x 390 mm ON ON ON - ON ON
195 x 267 mm ON - - - ON -
267 x 195 mm ON ON ON - - -
*
1
L: Lengthways
*
2
S: Sideways
ON: Paper present
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-18 SM
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE
This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size
mode.
Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original
document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but
the document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed
is slightly slower.
Document length detection
From when the registration sensor switches on until the interval sensor switches
off, the CPU counts the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines
the length of the original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the
image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the
document length has been accurately detected. The length must be determined
before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
An original follows this path during transport:
1. Document length detection ! Scanning glass ! Inverter table
2. Inverter table ! Scanning glass ! Inverter table (restores original order)
3. Inverter table ! Scanning glass (image scanned) ! Exit tray
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the rate of
reduction/enlargement has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In
order to store the scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected document
width x 432 mm) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detected
document length is read from memory and printed.
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
SM 8-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
4.4.1 PICK AND SEPARATION
When the original is set on the original table, it contacts the original stopper [A] and
pushes the actuator [B] out of the original set sensor [C].
When Start " is pressed, the pick-up motor [D] turns on and the original stopper
cam [E] rotates. The original stopper lowers and releases the original.
Next, the pick-up roller cam [F] lowers the pick-up roller, and then the feed motor
[G] turns on to feed the top sheet of paper. After being fed from the pick-up roller,
the top sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller [H] and the feed
belt [I].
B351D109.WMF
A858D505.WMF
[H]
[I]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-20 SM
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION
This mechanism is the same as the skew correction used by the registration roller
in the main machine.
The feed motor and the skew correction clutch control the skew correction roller.
Immediately after separation, the skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading
edge of the original. The feed belt [B] moves the paper slightly until it presses
against the skew correction roller [C] and buckles slightly to correct any skew.
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES
After performing skew correction, the feed motor runs at a speed higher than its
original speed in order for the next original to catch up to the one ahead of it. This
reduces the gap between the leading edge of the next original with the trailing edge
of the one ahead.
When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [A], the feed
motor slows to match the speed of paper transport.
B351D202.WMF
AMCONFUS.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[A]
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
SM 8-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
The transport motor drives the transport roller [A] and the exit roller [B]. When the
leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [C], the transport motor
rotates the transport roller. The transport roller then feeds the original through
scanning area. After scanning, the original is fed out by the exit roller to the exit
tray.
B351D104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-22 SM
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
Shortly after the transport motor has been
turned on, the inverter solenoid is
activated and junction gate [A] opens. The
original is then scanned and transported
towards the reverse table [B].
Shortly after the original exit sensor [C]
detects the trailing edge of the original, the
inverter solenoid turns off and the junction
gate [D] closes.
Next, the inverter motor turns on and the
inverter roller [E] starts rotating to feed the
original from the reverse table.
Then the original is fed to the transport roller
and the scanning area [F] (where the
reverse side is scanned).
After scanning the reverse side of the
original, the original is then sent to the
reverse table [G] a second time and turned
over. This ensures that the double side
original will be properly stacked in the correct
order, front side down, in the original exit tray
[H].
B351D105.WMF
B351D107.WMF
B351D106.WMF
B351D108.WMF
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[G
[H]
[C]
[D]
STAMP
SM 8-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
A
u
t
o
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
F
e
e
d
e
r
B
3
5
1
4.6 STAMP
NOTE: This function is only for fax mode.
The stamp [A] is located between the transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C].
When the original reaches the stamp, the transport motor stops and the stamp
solenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully (immediate transmission) or
stored successfully (memory transmission). After stamping, the ARDF feed motor
re-starts to feed out the document.
NOTE: The position of the stamp can be adjusted with the Stamp Position
Adjustment SP mode.
B351D201.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
DF70, SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-24 SM
4.7 DF70, SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DF70 (ARDF) SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
SOFTWARE
LEVEL
PRODUCTION
DATE
VERSION
First mass production B3515620 F First mass
production
1.74
Corrects the following:
When scanning originals with the DF in Mixed
Original or Double-Sided Original modes, a
noise can sometimes be heard when the
original is output to the reverse table. To ensure
this noise does not occur, bit4 of the ADF
controller DIPSW has been modified so that the
reverse paper exit speed can be adjusted as
follows:
ADF DIPSW bit4 OFF: 4310pps (pulses per
sec.)
ON: 4166pps
This bit is set at the factory, depending on
which setting produces less noise (most
cases: set to ON). However in the field, if a
noise occurs after replacing the motor or
ADF controller, this can be eliminated or at
least minimized by changing the bit to the
opposite setting (e.g. ON OFF).
B3515620 G June 2001
Production
1.75
Sometimes with Mixed Original Size mode, the
motor remains on and/or a DF jam occurs.
B3515620 J July 2001
Production
1.79
Part Number Version
C. SUM
Production
B3515620J 1.79 0E62 July 2001 production
B3515620G 1.75 17E9 June 2001 production
B3515620F 1.74 862A 1st mass production
Rev.02/2002
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
L
a
r
g
e
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
T
r
a
y
A
6
8
3
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 9-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: A4 sideways/LT sideways
Paper Weight: 60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
, 16 lb ~ 28 lb
Tray Capacity: 1500 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier)
Power Consumption: 40 W
Weight: 17 kg
Size (W x D x H): 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 9-2 SM
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Relay Roller
2. Relay Sensor
3. Paper Feed Roller
4. Pick-up Roller
5. Paper End Sensor
6. Paper Tray
7. Separation Roller
A683V500.WMF
2
7
3
4
5 1
6
L
a
r
g
e
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
T
r
a
y
A
6
8
3
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SM 9-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Relay Clutch
2. Paper Feed Clutch
3. LCT Motor
4. Paper Height 1 Sensor
5. Paper Height 2 Sensor
6. Paper Height 3 Sensor
7. Main Board
8. Side Fence Position Sensor
9. Lower Limit Sensor
10. LCT Set Sensor
11. Tray Cover Switch
12. Lift Motor
13. Down Switch
14. Relay Sensor
15. Paper End Sensor
16. Lift Sensor
17. Pick-up Solenoid
A683V501.WMF
10
6
5
7
4
3
2
1
8
9
12
11
13
14
15
16
17
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 9-4 SM
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1 LCT Drives all rollers. 3
M2 Lift Drives the paper tray up or down. 12
Sensors
S1
Paper End Informs the copier when the paper has run
out.
15
S2
Relay Detects the copy paper coming to the relay
roller and checks for misfeeds.
14
S3
Lift Detects when the paper is at the correct
paper feed height.
16
S4
Lower Limit Detects when the tray is completely lowered,
to stop the LCT motor.
9
S5 Paper Height 1 Detects the paper height. 4
S6 Paper Height 2 Detects the paper height. 5
S7 Paper Height 3 Detects the paper height. 6
S8
LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set or
not.
10
S9
Side Fence
Position
Detects when the side fence is set at the A4
size position.
8
Switches
SW1
Tray Cover Stops the LCT lift motor when the tray cover
is opened.
11
SW2
Down Lowers the LCT bottom plate if pressed by
the user.
13
Solenoids
SOL1
Pick-up Controls up-down movement of the pick-up
roller.
17
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Paper Feed Drives the paper feed roller. 2
MC2 Relay Drives the relay roller. 1
PCBs
PCB1
Main Controls the LCT and communicates with the
copier.
7
L
a
r
g
e
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
T
r
a
y
A
6
8
3
DRIVE LAYOUT
SM 9-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Relay Clutch
2. Paper Feed Clutch
3. LCT Motor
4. Tray Bottom Plate
5. Pick-up Roller
6. Tray Drive Belts
7. Lift Motor
8. Separation Roller
9. Paper Feed Roller
10. Relay Roller
A683V502.WMF
6
4
5
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
PAPER FEED MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 9-6 SM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
This machine uses the FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) paper feed system (paper
feed roller [A], separation roller [B], pick-up roller [C]).
When the start key is pressed, the pick-up solenoid [D] energizes and the pick-up
roller touches the paper.
A683D500.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
L
a
r
g
e
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
T
r
a
y
A
6
8
3
TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM
SM 9-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
MECHANISM
The lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the tray bottom plate [B] through
gears and timing belts [C].
Tray lifting conditions
When the tray lift sensor [D] turns off in the following conditions, the tray lift motor
raises the tray bottom plate until the tray lift sensor [D] turns on again.
Just after the main switch is turned on
During copying
Just after the tray cover is closed
Just after leaving the energy saving mode
Tray lowering conditions
In the following conditions, the lift motor lowers the tray bottom plate until the lower
limit [E] sensor turns on.
Just after the paper end sensor turns on
Just after the down switch is pressed by the user
The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high/low outputs
from three sensors (paper height sensor 1 [F], 2 [G], and 3 [H].)
Amount of paper
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 2
Paper Height
Sensor 3
Near end On (High) Off (Low) Off (Low)
25% Off (Low) On (High) Off (Low)
50% Off (Low) On (High) On (High)
75% Off (Low) Off (Low) On (High)
100% Off (Low) Off (Low) Off (Low)
A683D501.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[H]
[G]
[F]
[D]
TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 9-8 SM
2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM
When there is a paper jam between the copier and the LCT, the user releases the
lock lever [A] and can slide the LCT away from the copier to remove the jammed
paper.
When sliding the LCT back into position, the LCT is secured against the copier in
the correct position by the docking pins [B] on the LCT.
A683D502.WMF
[B]
[A]
L
a
r
g
e
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
T
r
a
y
A
6
8
3
DIP SWITCHES
SM 9-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
DPS101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Description
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Free run
NOTE: 1) Do not use any other settings.
2) To do the free run, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the paper from the LCT (this is because the machine has no
jam detection).
2. Set DPS101 for the free run as shown above.
3. Turn the main switch off, wait a few seconds, then switch back on.
4. Press SW101 to start the free run.
5. To stop the free run, press SW102.
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP100 (24 V) +24 V
TP101 (GND) Ground
TP103 (TXD) TXD to the copier
TP104 (RXD) RXD from the copier
TP105 (5 V) +5 V
TP106 (GND) Ground
3.3 SWITCHES
No. Function
SW101 Starts the free run
SW102 Stops the free run
3.4 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects the 24 V line.
COVER REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 9-10 SM
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
Tray Cover
1. Remove the tray cover [A] (1 snap ring).
Front Cover
1. Remove the front cover [B] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the tray cover.
2. Remove the cover hinge [C] (2 screws).
3. Remove the rear cover [D] (3 screws).
Right Lower Cover
1. Remove the right lower cover [E] (2 screws).
Upper Cover
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the upper cover [F].
A683R500.WMF
[D]
[F]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
L
a
r
g
e
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
T
r
a
y
A
6
8
3
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
SM 9-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT
4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
1. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest
position.
2. Open the tray cover.
Pick-up Roller
3. Replace the pick-up roller [A] (1 snap ring).
Paper Feed Roller
3. Replace the paper feed roller [B] (1 snap ring).
Separation Roller
3. Remove the guide plate [C] (2 screws).
4. Replace the separation roller [D] (1 snap ring).
A683R501.WMF
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 9-12 SM
4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the front and rear cover.
2. Remove the upper cover.
3. Remove the sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
Tray Lift Sensor
3. Replace the tray lift sensor [B] (1 connector).
Paper End Sensor
3. Replace the paper end sensor [C] (1 connector).
A683R502.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
L
a
r
g
e
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
T
r
a
y
A
6
8
3
RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
SM 9-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Pull out the LCT.
2. Remove the joint guide [A] (4 screws).
3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (1 screw).
4. Replace the relay sensor [C] (1 connector).
A683R503.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE
B003/B004/B006/B007 9-14 SM
4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE
1. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest
position.
2. Remove the tray cover.
3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] (1 screw each).
4. Install the side fences in the correct position.
A683R504.WMF
A4
[A]
[B]
LT
A4 LT
PAPER TRAY UNIT A682
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 10-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT lengthwise to DLT
Paper Weight: 60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
, 16 lb ~ 28 lb
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb ) x 2
Paper Feed System: FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller)
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from the copier)
120 Vac: 115 V version (from the copier)
220 ~ 240 Vac: 224/240 V version (from the copier)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: 25 kg
Size (W x D x H): 540 mm x 600 mm x 270 mm
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-2 SM
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Upper Pick-up Roller
2. Upper Paper Feed Roller
3. Upper Relay Roller
4. Upper Separation Roller
5. Lower Relay Roller
6. Lower Paper Feed Roller
7. Lower Separation Roller
8. Lower Pick-up Roller
9. Lower Tray
10. Upper Tray
A682V500.WMF
10
9
8
5
6
7
4
3
2
1
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SM 10-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Main Board
2. Upper Tray Switch
3. Lower Tray Switch
4. Tray Motor
5. Upper Lift Sensor
6. Relay Clutch
7. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
8. Tray Lift Motor
9. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
10. Vertical Guide Switch
11. Lower Lift Sensor
12. Lower Paper End Sensor
13. Lower Relay Sensor
14. Upper Relay Sensor
15. Upper Paper End Sensor
16. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor
17. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor
18. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor
19. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor
A682V501.WMF
8
1
17
16
18
19
9
10
11
12
13
14 15
2
3
4 5
7
6
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-4 SM
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1 Tray Drives all rollers. 4
M2
Tray Lift Lifts the upper and lower tray bottom plates
(there are two motors in this unit, one for each
tray.
15
Sensors
S1
Upper Lift Detects when the paper in the upper tray is at
the correct feed height.
5
S2
Lower Lift Detects when the paper in the lower tray is at
the correct feed height.
11
S3
Upper Paper
End
Informs the copier when the upper tray runs
out of paper.
15
S4
Lower Paper
End
Informs the copier when the lower tray runs
out of paper.
12
S5 Upper Relay Detects misfeeds. 14
S6 Lower Relay Detects misfeeds. 13
S7
Upper Paper
Height 1
Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray.
17
S8
Upper Paper
Height 2
Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray.
16
S9
Lower Paper
Height 1
Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray.
19
S10
Lower Paper
Height 2
Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray.
18
Switches
SW1
Upper Tray Informs the copier when the upper tray is set
in the machine.
2
SW2
Lower Tray Informs the copier when the lower tray is set
in the machine.
3
SW3
Vertical Guide Detects whether the vertical guide is opened
or not.
10
Magnetic Clutches
MC1
Upper Paper
Feed
Starts paper feed from the upper tray.
7
MC2
Lower Paper
Feed
Starts paper feed from the lower tray.
9
MC3 Relay Drives the transport rollers. 6
PCBs
PCB1
Main Controls the paper tray unit and
communicates with copier.
1
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
DRIVE LAYOUT
SM 10-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Tray Motor
2. Relay Clutch
3. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
4. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
5. Lower Relay Roller
6. Lower Separation Roller
7. Lower Paper Feed Roller
8. Lower Pick-up Roller
9. Upper Separation Roller
10. Upper Relay Roller
11. Upper Paper Feed Roller
12. Upper Pick-up Roller
A682V502.WMF
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-6 SM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE
MECHANISM
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the paper tray unit, the separation roller [B] is
away from the paper feed roller [C], and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper
position.
When the paper tray is put into the paper tray unit, it pushes the release lever [E].
This causes the pick-up roller to move down (top diagram) and the separation roller
to move into contact with the paper feed roller (bottom diagram).
A682500.WMF
A682D501.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
SM 10-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
The paper tray switch [A] detects when the paper tray [B] is placed in the machine.
When the machine detects that the paper tray is in the machine, the tray lift motor
[C] rotates and the coupling gear [D] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [E] on
the lift arm shaft [F]. Then the tray lift arm [G] lifts the tray bottom plate [H].
A682D502.WMF
[E]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[H]
[F]
[G]
[B]
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-8 SM
When the paper tray is placed in the machine, the pick-up roller [A] lowers. When
the top sheet of paper reaches the proper height for paper feed, the paper pushes
up the pick-up roller, and the actuator [B] on the pick-up roller supporter activates
the lift sensor [C] to stop the tray lift motor.
After several paper feed cycles, the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor
is de-activated. The tray lift motor turns on again until this sensor is activated
again.
When the tray is drawn out of the machine, the tray lift motor coupling gear
disengages the pin on the lift arm shaft, and the tray bottom plate then drops under
its own weight.
A682D504.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
PAPER END DETECTION
SM 10-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION
If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper end feeler [A] is raised by the
paper stack and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout
[C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
When the paper tray is drawn out, the paper end feeler is lifted up by the pick-up
roller supporter [D].
A682D503.WMF
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-10 SM
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
35 11 33 34 35
35 11 33 34 35
35 11 33 34 35
35 11 33 34 36
A682D505.WMF
The amount of paper in the tray is
detected by the combination of two paper
height sensors, [A] and [B].
When the amount of 2 paper decreases,
the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves
up and the actuator [D] which is mounted
on the same drive shaft as the pressure
lever rotates.
The following combination of sensor
signals is sent to the copier.
Amount of
Paper
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 2
Full OFF ON
Near Full ON ON
Near End 1 ON OFF
Near End 2 OFF OFF
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
Full
Near Full
Near End 1
Near End 2
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
DIP SWITCHES
SM 10-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
DPS101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Description
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Free run, feed from upper tray
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Free run, feed from lower tray
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Free run, feed from upper and lower trays alternately
NOTE: 1) Do not use any other settings.
2) To do the free run, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the paper from the tray (this is because the machine has no
jam detection).
2. Set DPS101 for the required free run as shown above.
3. Turn the main power switch off, wait a few seconds, then switch on.
4. Press SW101 to start the free run.
5. To stop the free run, press SW102.
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP100 (24 V) +24 V
TP101 (GND) Ground
TP103 (TXD) TXD to the copier
TP104 (RXD) RXD from the copier
TP105 (5 V) +5 V
TP106 (GND) Ground
3.3 SWITCHES
No. Function
SW101 Starts the free run
SW102 Stops the free run
3.4 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects the 24 V line.
COVER REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-12 SM
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
Right Cover
1. Remove the right cover [A] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the rear cover [B] (2 screws).
A682R500.WMF
[A]
[B]
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
SM 10-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT
4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
1. Remove the paper tray.
Pick-up Roller
2. Replace the pick-up roller [A].
Paper Feed Roller
2. Replace the paper feed roller [B] (1 snap ring).
Separation Roller
2. Replace the separation roller [C] (1 snap ring).
A682R501.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-14 SM
4.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the tray motor [A] (1 connector, 3 screws).
A682R502.WMF
[A]
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
PAPER FEED AND RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
SM 10-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
4.4 PAPER FEED AND RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the upper paper feed clutch holder [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the lower paper feed clutch holder [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the gear holder [C] (3 screws, 1 spring, 1 bearing).
5. Replace the relay clutch [D] (1 connector).
6. Replace the upper feed clutch [E] (1 bushing, 1 connector).
7. Replace the lower feed clutch [F] (1 connector).
A682R503.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[F]
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-16 SM
4.5 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the upper and lower paper feed clutch holder.
3. Remove the gear holder.
4. Remove the upper feed clutch [A] or lower feed clutch [B].
5. Remove the upper or lower gear [C, D].
A682R504.WMF
A682R505.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
P
a
p
e
r
T
r
a
y
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
2
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
SM 10-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
Upper Paper Feed Unit
6. Remove the docking bracket [A] (1 screw).
7. Remove the vertical transport cover [B] of the copier (1 snap ring).
8. Remove the upper paper feed unit [C] (2 screws, 1 connector).
Lower Paper Feed Unit
6. Remove the docking bracket [D] (1 screw).
7. Remove the vertical transport guide [E] (2 screws).
8. Remove the lower paper feed unit [F] (2 screws, 1 connector).
A682R507.WMF
A682R506.WMF
[D]
[F]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, AND RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 10-18 SM
4.6 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, AND RELAY SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the paper feed unit.
Paper End Sensor
2. Replace the paper end sensor [A] (1 connector).
Tray Lift Sensor
2. Replace the tray lift sensor [B] (1 connector).
Relay Sensor
2. Remove the sensor bracket [C] (1 screw).
3. Replace the relay sensor [D] (1 connector).
A682R508.WMF
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
BRIDGE UNIT
A688/B397
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 11-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
8
/
B
3
8
7
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Standard sizes
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m
2
~ 135 g/m
2
, 16 lb ~ 42 lb
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 11-2 SM
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Upper Exit Roller
2. Junction Gate Solenoid
3. Junction Gate
4. 1st Transport Roller
5. Relay Sensor
6. 2nd Transport Roller
7. Left Exit Roller
A688V500.WMF
2
3
1
4 5 6
7
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SM 11-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
8
/
B
3
8
7
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Left Guide Switch
2. Right Guide Switch
3. Tray Exit Sensor
4. Cooling Fan Motor
5. Tray Exit Unit Switch
6. Junction Gate Solenoid
7. Relay Sensor
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1 Cooling Fan Cools the transport unit. 4
Sensors
S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 3
S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds. 7
Switches
SW1 Tray Exit Unit Detects when the tray exit unit is opened. 5
SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened. 2
SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened. 1
Solenoids
SOL1
Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct the paper
to the upper or left tray.
6
A688V501.WMF
5
1
2
3
4
6
7
DRIVE LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 11-4 SM
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Left Exit Roller
2. 2nd Transport Roller
3. Upper Exit Roller
4. 1st Transport Roller
A688V502.WMF
2
3
4
1
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
SM 11-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
A
6
8
8
/
B
3
8
7
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
Depending on the selected mode, the copies are directed up or down by the
junction gate [A], which is controlled by the junction gate solenoid [B].
When the upper tray is selected, the junction gate solenoid turns on and the paper
is sent to the upper tray through the upper exit roller [C].
When the left tray or the finisher is selected, the junction gate stays off and the
paper is sent to the left tray or the finisher through the transport rollers [D] and the
left exit roller.
A688D500.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 11-6 SM
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the whole unit from the copier.
2. Remove the rear upper cover [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the upper cover unit [B] (2 screws, 2 connectors).
4. Remove the exit guide plate [C] (2 screws).
5. Replace the exit sensor [D] (1 connector).
A688R500.WMF
A688R501.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
1-BIN TRAY
B376
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 12-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
B
i
n
T
r
a
y
B
3
7
6
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Paper Weight: 60 g/m
2
~ 105 g/m
2
, 16 lb ~ 28 lb
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Power Source: 5 Vdc, 24 Vdc (from copier)
Power Consumption: 15 W
Weight: 4 kg
Size (W x D x H): 470 mm x 550 mm x 110 mm
MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 12-2 SM
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Paper Limit Sensor
2. Exit Roller
3. Entrance Sensor
4. Entrance Roller
5. Paper Sensor
6. Paper Tray
7. Tray Motor
B376V500.WMF
B376V501.WMF
2
6
4
7
6
3
4
5
1 2
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SM 12-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
B
i
n
T
r
a
y
B
3
7
6
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Motor Lock Sensor
2. Main Board
3. Tray Motor
4. Right Cover Switch
5. Paper Limit Sensor
6. Paper Sensor
7. Entrance Sensor
8. Paper Indicator
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1 Tray Drives the entrance and exit rollers. 3
Sensors
S1 Entrance Checks for misfeeds. 7
S2 Paper Limit Detects the paper stack limit in the tray. 5
S3 Paper Detects whether there is paper in the tray. 6
S4 Motor Lock Detects whether the tray motor is turning. 1
Switches
SW1 Right Cover Detects whether the right cover is opened. 4
PCBs
PCB1
Main Controls the 1-bin tray and communicates
with the copier.
2
LEDs
LED1 Paper Indicator Indicates when there is paper in the tray. 8
B376V502.WMF
4
8
7
6
5
3
2 1
BASIC OPERATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 12-4 SM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
When the leading edge of the first sheet of copy paper reaches the copiers hot
roller, the tray motor [A] starts and turns off approximately 0.5 s after the trailing
edge of the paper passes through the exit rollers [B].
The tray lock sensor [C] checks whether the tray motor rotates or not. When the
tray lock sensor does not generate pulses for 300 ms while the tray motor is on, the
copier will stop and display an SC code.
The paper sensor [D] checks whether there is paper in the tray or not. The paper
sensor turns on when paper is stacked in the tray, and the paper indicator is turned
on.
The paper limit sensor [E] detects when the tray is full. While a sheet of copy paper
is passing this sensor, the sensor feeler is always pushed up by the paper. When
the paper limit sensor stays on for more than the expected time (based on the copy
speed and paper size), the copier indicates that the tray is full.
B376V501.WMF
B376V500.WMF
[E] [B]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
COVER REMOVAL
SM 12-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
B
i
n
T
r
a
y
B
3
7
6
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 COVER REMOVAL
Front Cover
1. Remove the scanner unit if it is at the front.
2. Remove the front cover [A] (1 screw).
Upper Cover
1. Remove the scanner unit.
2. Remove the upper cover [B] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the scanner unit.
2. Remove the rear cover [C] (2 screws).
B376R500.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 12-6 SM
3.2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Remove the exit guide plate [A] (1 screw).
3. Replace the paper sensor [B] (1 connector).
B376R501.WMF [B]
[A]
ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
SM 12-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
B
i
n
T
r
a
y
B
3
7
6
3.3 ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the front and upper covers.
Paper Limit Sensor
2. Replace the paper limit sensor [A] (1 connector).
Entrance Sensor
2. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (1 screw, 1 spring).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [C] (1 connector).
B376R502.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
1,000-SHEET FINISHER A681
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 13-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: No staple mode:
A3 to A6 lengthwise
DLT to HLT lengthwise
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5 sideways
DLT to LT
Paper Weight: No staple mode: 52 ~ 157 g/m
2
, 16 ~ 42 lb
Staple mode: 64 ~ 80 g/m
2
, 17 ~ 21 lb
Stapler Capacity: 20 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)
30 sheets (A4, B5 sideways, LT)
Paper Capacity: No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m
2
, 21 lb)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m
2
, 21 lb)
Staple mode: (80 g/m
2
, 21 lb, number of sets)
Size of each set 2 to 10
Size 2 to 5 6 to 10
11 to 20 21 to 30
A4/LT sideways
B5 sideways
100 85 40 25
A4/LT lengthwise 50 25 15
A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 25
Staple Positions: 1
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (3,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from the copier)
Power Consumption: 48 W
Weight: 21 kg
Dimensions (W x D x H): 568 x 520 x 625 mm
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-2 SM
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Shift Tray
2. Exit Roller
3. Exit Roller Release Cam
4. Upper Transport Roller
5. Middle Transport Roller
6. Junction Gate
7. Lower Transport Roller
8. Entrance Roller
9. Stapler Unit
10. Positioning Roller
11. Stack Feed-out Belt
A681V503.WMF
2 1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
SM 13-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Stack Height Sensor
2. Exit Sensor
3. Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
4. Exit Motor
5. Exit Guide Plate Open Sensor
6. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
7. Exit Guide Plate Motor
8. Shift Tray Half-turn Sensor
9. Shift Motor
10. Junction Gate Solenoid
11. Transport Motor
12. Positioning Roller Solenoid
13. Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor
14. Entrance Sensor
15. Main Board
16. Right Cover Safety Switch
17. Shift Tray Lift Motor
18. Staple Hammer HP Sensor
19. Staple Hammer Motor
20. Cartridge Set Switch
21. Staple End Switch
22. Jogger Fence HP Sensor
23. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
24. Jogger Fence Motor
25. Jogger Unit Paper Sensor
26. Rear Fence Motor
27. Rear Fence HP Sensor
28. Stack Feed-out Motor
A681V500.WMF
4
6
5 3
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2
1
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-4 SM
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1
Transport Drives the entrance roller, transport rollers,
and positioning roller.
11
M2 Jogger Fence Drives the jogger fence. 24
M3 Rear Fence Drives the rear fence. 26
M4
Staple
Hammer
Drives the staple hammer.
19
M5 Stack Feed-out Drives the stack feed-out belt. 28
M6
Exit Guide
Plate
Opens and closes the exit guide plate.
7
M7 Exit Drives the exit roller. 4
M8 Shift Tray Lift Moves the shift tray up or down. 17
M9 Shift Moves the shift tray from side to side. 9
Sensors
S1
Entrance Detects copy paper entering the finisher and
checks for misfeeds.
14
S2
Jogger Unit
Paper
Detects copy paper in the jogger unit.
25
S3
Jogger Fence
HP
Detects the home position of the jogger fence.
22
S4
Rear Fence
HP
Detects the home position of the rear fence.
27
S5
Stack Feed-out
Belt HP
Detects the home position of the stack feed-
out belt.
23
S6
Staple
Hammer HP
Detects the staple hammer home position.
18
S7
Exit Guide
Plate HP
Detects the home position of the exit guide
plate.
6
S8
Exit Guide
Plate Open
Detects whether the exit guide plate is
opened or not.
5
S9 Exit Checks for misfeeds. 2
S10 Stack Height Detects the top of the copy paper stack. 1
S11
Shift Tray
Lower Limit
Detects the lower limit position of the shift
tray.
13
S12
Shift Tray
Half-turn
Detects the stop position of the shift tray
during the side-to-side movement.
8
Solenoids
SOL1 Junction Gate Drives the junction gate. 10
SOL2
Positioning
Roller
Moves the positioning roller.
12
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
SM 13-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Switches
SW1
Shift Tray
Upper Limit
Detects the upper limit position of the shift
tray.
3
SW2
Right Cover
Safety
Cuts the dc power when the right cover is
opened.
16
SW3 Cartridge Set Detects whether a staple cartridge is installed. 20
SW4 Staple End Detects staples in the cartridge. 21
PCBs
PCB1
Main Controls the finisher and communicates with
the copier.
15
DRIVE LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-6 SM
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Exit Guide Plate Motor
2. Exit Motor
3. Exit Roller
4. Shift Tray Lift Motor
5. Shift Motor
6. Lower Transport Roller
7. Positioning Roller Drive Roller
8. Transport Motor
9. Entrance Roller
10. Middle Transport Roller
11. Upper Transport Roller
12. Rear Fence
13. Stack Feed-out Motor
14. Rear Fence Motor
15. Jogger Fence Motor
16. Jogger Fence
17. Stack Feed-out Belt
A681V501.WMF
A681V502.WMF
9
10
11
8
7
6
1
2
4
3
5
17
16
12
13
14
15
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
SM 13-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
Depending on the selected finishing mode, the copies are directed to the left or
right by the junction gate [A], which is controlled by the junction gate solenoid [B].
This happens when the exit sensor of the copier turns on.
Staple mode
When the exit sensor of the copier turns on, the junction gate solenoid is
energized. The paper is sent to the jogger unit.
No staple mode
The junction gate solenoid stays off and the paper is sent to the shift tray directly.
A681D500.WMF A681D501.WMF
[B]
[A]
[B]
- Staple mode - - No staple mode -
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-8 SM
2.2 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the entrance sensor [B] turns off and the positioning roller [C] pushes the copy
against the bottom of stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 10 mm away from the side of the paper. After
the vertical position is aligned, the jogger fence pushes the paper 20 mm against
the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then the jogger fence moves back to
the previous position.
The stapler is mounted on the rear fence.
A681D502.WMF
[F]
[C]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[B]
EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE MECHANISM
SM 13-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
2.3 EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE MECHANISM
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up and this makes a gap between the exit rollers [B]. This operation is
done at all paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [C] and exit roller release cam [D] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate is moved up. When the exit guide plate open sensor [E] turns on, the
motor stops. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on again to
close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [F] turns on, the
motor stops.
A681D503.WMF
[A]
[D]
[A]
[F]
[E]
[C]
[B]
STAPLER
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-10 SM
2.4 STAPLER
The stapler is mounted on the rear fence. When the rear fence moves, the stapler
moves.
The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A].
When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a
staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple
cartridge [B]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out
the staple cartridge.
If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge,
staple end is indicated on the operation panel.
This machine has only one stapling position.
A681D504.WMF
[A]
[B]
FEED OUT MECHANISM
SM 13-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
2.5 FEED OUT MECHANISM
The stack feed-out belt [A] and the exit roller feed out the set of stapled copies.
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [B] turns on to drive
the stack feed-out belt.
When the leading edge of the copies reaches the exit rollers, the exit guide plate
motor turns on and the exit roller comes down to transport the set of stapled
copies. Shortly afterwards, the stack feed-out motor stops, and the exit motor feeds
out the stack.
When the stack has been fed out to the shift tray, the stack feed-out motor turns on
again. When the stack feed-out belt HP sensor [C] turns on, the stack feed-out
motor turns off.
A681D505.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-12 SM
2.6 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISM
The shift tray lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the shift tray [B] through
some gears. Just after the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the
upper position. The tray upper position is detected when the stack height sensor
[C] is activated by the shift tray.
During copying, every ten copies in no staple mode or for each set of copies in
staple mode, the shift tray is lowered until the stack height sensor turns off then
raised until the stack height sensor turns on, and lowered again until the stack
height sensor turns off.
In either mode, the shift tray will rise when the user takes the stack of paper from
the tray during copying.
When the shift tray reaches its lower limit, the actuator [D] turns on the shift tray
lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
When the stack height sensor stays off for 2 seconds in standby mode, the shift
tray is raised till the stack height sensor turns on.
The shift tray upper limit switch [F] prevents the drive gears from being damaged if
the stack height sensor fails. When the shift tray turns on the shift tray upper limit
switch, the switch cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor.
A681D506.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MECHANISM
SM 13-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
2.7 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MECHANISM
In the sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray,
the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D]. The end fence
[E] is positioned by the link, creating the side-to-side movement.
When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees (when the shift tray is fully shifted
across), the cut-out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half-turn sensor [F]
and the shift motor stops. The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns
on, repeating the same process and moving the tray back to the previous position.
A681D507.WMF
[B]
[A]
[E]
[C] [F] [D]
JAM CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-14 SM
2.8 JAM CONDITIONS
1. When the entrance sensor does not turn off within 1,000 ms after it turns on.
2. When the exit sensor does not turn off within 1,000 ms after it turns on.
3. When the exit sensor does not turn on in no staple mode within 1,250 ms after
the entrance sensor turns on.
TIMING CHARTS
SM 13-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
2.9 TIMING CHARTS
2.9.1 NO STAPLE MODE (A4 SIDEWAYS, 3 SHEETS/2SETS)
Copi er Fi ni sher
Fi ni sher Copi er
Tr anspor t Mot or
Exi t Mot or
Ent r ance Sensor
Exi t Sensor
Shi f t Mot or
Mot or
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Shi f t Mot or ON
Exi t Compl et ed Exi t Compl et ed Exi t Compl et ed Exi t Compl et ed Exi t Compl et ed Exi t Compl et ed
Mot or OFF
A681D508.WMF
TIMING CHARTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-16 SM
2.9.2 STAPLE MODE (A4 SIDEWAYS, 2 SHEETS/2 SETS)
Copi er Fi ni sher
Fi ni sher Copi er
Tr anspor t Mot or
Exi t Mot or
Junct i on Gat e
Sol enoi d
Ent r ance Sensor
Exi t Sensor
Motor
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
ON
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exit
Sensor
OFF
Exi t Compl eted Exi t Compl eted Stapl i ng Compl eted Exi t Compl eted Exi t Compl eted
Mot or OFF
Posi t i oni ng
Rol l er Sol enoi d
Jogger Fence
Mot or
Rear Fence
Mot or
St apl e Hammer
Mot or
St ack Feed- out
Mot or
Stapl i ng Compl eted
Stapl er ON
A681D509.WMF
DIP SWITCH TABLE
SM 13-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
3. SERVICE TABLE
3.1 DIP SWITCH TABLE
DPS101
1 2 3 4
Description
0 0 0 0 Default
1 1 1 0 Free run: staple mode
1 1 0 1 Free run: no-staple mode
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP100 (5 V) +5 V
TP101 (GND) Ground
3.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU100 Protects the 24 V line.
COVER REMOVAL
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-18 SM
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 COVER REMOVAL
Front Door
1. Remove the front door [A] (2 screws).
Front Cover
1. Remove the front door.
2. Remove the front cover [B] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the rear cover [C] (2 screws).
Upper Cover
1. Remove the front door.
2. Remove the front cover.
3. Remove the rear cover.
4. Remove the upper cover [D] (2 screws).
A681R500.WMF
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
COVER REMOVAL
SM 13-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
Lower Left Cover
1. Remove the lower left cover [A] (2 screws).
Front Shift Tray Cover
1. Remove the front shift tray cover [B] (1 screw).
Rear Shift Tray Cover
1. Remove the rear shift tray cover [C] (1 screw).
Shift Tray
1. Remove the shift tray [D] (1 snap ring).
A681R500.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-20 SM
4.2 ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the finisher from the copier.
2. Replace the entrance sensor [A] (1 connector).
A681R501.WMF
[A]
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
SM 13-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
4.3 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the upper cover.
2. Remove the exit sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Replace the exit sensor [B] (1 screw, 1 connector).
A681R502.WMF
[B]
[A]
STACK HEIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-22 SM
4.4 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Remove the shift tray lift motor [A] (2 screws).
NOTE: The shift tray must be pulled up to remove the two screws.
3. Remove the rear cover.
4. Remove the exit motor unit [B] (2 screws, 1 spring, 1 timing belt).
5. Remove the lower exit guide [C] (4 screws).
6. Remove the front and rear end fence holders [D,E] (1 screw each).
7. Remove the end fence [F] (1 snap ring).
8. Remove the stack height sensor cover [G] (1 screw).
9. Remove the stack height sensor bracket [H] (1 screw).
10. Replace the stack height sensor [I] (1 connector).
A681R503.WMF
A681R504.WMF
A681R505.WMF
[A]
[H]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[G]
[I]
[F] [D]
POSITIONING ROLLER REPLACEMENT
SM 13-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
4.5 POSITIONING ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1. Pull out the jogger unit.
2. Remove the snap ring [A].
3. Release the rubber belt [B].
4. Remove the positioning roller [C].
A681R506.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
STAPLER REPLACEMENT
B003/B004/B006/B007 13-24 SM
4.6 STAPLER REPLACEMENT
1. Pull out the jogger unit.
2. Disconnect the stapler connector [A].
3. Remove the lower cover screw [B].
4. Remove the upper cover [C] (2 screws).
5. Remove the stapler with the lower cover [D] (2 screws).
6. Release the harness from the lower cover.
7. Replace the stapler.
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
ROM HISTORY
SM 13-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
1
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
A
6
8
1
4.7 ROM HISTORY
A681 Firmware Modification History (1000 Sheet Finisher)
Description of Modification Level Prod. Date Ver.
Corrects the following:
Paper jams due to an error in the vertical
movement of the tray.
A6815103K NA K
Corrects the following:
Jams that occur when the door is opened
during a staple job.
After the power is turned on, the copier
reaches ready status even though the shift
tray lower limit sensor is on (and the stack is
full). A jam occurs if a copy job is started.
A6815103J NA J
Corrects the following:
The mainframe locks up during jam recovery.
The frequency of occurrence is extremely low.
The user cancels the staple job when there is
only one sheet in the staple tray and the sheet
is automatically removed from the tray. A
paper jam occurs when the next sheet is fed
for stapling.
A6815103H NA H
Corrects the following:
The jam detection timing has been changed so
the A681 can also be used with the A265 and
A267. This change has no effect on the A232
series.
A6815103G NA G
Corrects the following:
Stapled paper did not stack straight.
A6815103F NA F
Corrects the following:
Paper rolling on the shift tray.
A6815103E NA E
Rev. 01/2000
TWO-TRAY FINISHER
B352
COVERS
SM 14-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
1. Top cover [A] (! x4)
If the shift tray below is blocking the
screw hole, remove the shift
tray.
2. Bracket [B] (! x1)
3. Front door [C]
4. Rear cover [D] (! x4)
1.1.2 INNER COVER
1. Front cover ( 1.1.1)
2. Inner cover [A] (! x3, tabs [B] x3)
B352R101.WMF
B352R102.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[B]
POSITIONING ROLLER
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-2 SM
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER
1. Open the front door.
2. Positioning roller [A] (" x1)
3. Belt [B]
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR
1. Top cover ( 1.1.1)
2. Open transport door [A]
3. Bracket [B] (! x1, (# x1)
4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]
B352R103.WMF
B352R104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
[C]
ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR
SM 14-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE
SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] (! x1, # x1)
2. Entrance sensor [B] (! x1)
3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] (! x1,
# x1)
4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D]
1.5 STAPLER TRAY
1. External covers, front door, inner cover ( 1.1.1, 1.1.2)
2. Two clamps [A]
3. Harnesses [B] (# x8)
4. Stapler tray [C] (! x2 [D], ! x2 [E])
At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.
B352R105.WMF
B352R107.WMF B352R106.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[E]
UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-4 SM
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER
LIMIT SWITCH
1. External covers ( 1.1.1)
2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to
release the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
4. Tray 1 back fence [C] (! x4)
5. Sensor stay [D] (! x2, (# x4)
6. Plastic bracket [E] (! x1)
7. Stack height sensors [F]
8. Metal bracket [G] (! x1)
9. Upper limit switch [H]
B352R201.WMF
B352R109.WMF
B352R110.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
SM 14-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
1. Tray 1 back fence ( 1.6)
2. Exit guide plate motor [A] (! x2, # x1)
Disengage the shaft of the exit guide plate motor
from the ring.
1.8 LIFT MOTORS
1. Top cover and rear cover ( 1.1.1)
2. Tray 1 back fence [A] ( 1.6)
3. Sensor stay [B] (! x4)
B352R111.WMF
B352R203.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
LIFT MOTORS
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-6 SM
4. Motor bracket [C] (! x3, # x 2)
5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] (! x2, drive belt)
6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] (! x2, drive belt)
B352R204.WMF
B352R205.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
LOWER EXIT SENSOR
SM 14-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR
1. Front door, external and internal
covers. ( 1.1)
2. Exit guide plate motor ( 1.7)
3. Guide plate [A] (" x1)
Pull the shaft toward you through the
round hole.
4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] (# x1,
" x1)
5. Anti-static brush [C] (! x2)
6. Bracket guide exit [D] (! x2)
7. Lower exit sensor [E] (! x1, # x1)
B352R112.WMF
B352R113.WMF
B352R114.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-8 SM
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
1. Stapler tray ( 1.5)
2. Sensor bracket [A] (! x1, # x2)
3. Bracket [B] (! x1)
4. Feeler [C]
5. Lower stack height sensors [D]
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR
1. Stapler tray ( 1.5)
2. Sensor bracket [A] (! x1, # x1)
3. Tray 2 position shunt sensor [B] (! x1)
B352R116.WMF
B351R202.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
STAPLER UNIT
SM 14-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
1.12 STAPLER UNIT
1. Open the front door
2. Stapler unit [A] (! x1, # x2)
Hold the stapler holder [B] with one
hand as you remove the
stapler. Do not twist or rotate
the stapler bracket as you
remove it.
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR
1. Stapler unit ( 1.12)
2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder
[A].
3. Stapler cover [B] (! x1)
4. Sensor bracket [C] (! x1, # x1)
5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D]
B352R117.WMF
B352R118.WMF
[A]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-10 SM
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR
1.1.1 TRAY 1 COVERS
1. Tray 1 [A] (! x1)
2. Rear tray cover [B] (! x1)
3. Front tray cover [C] (! x1)
4. Bottom tray cover [D] (! x2)
5. Bottom bracket [E] (! x3)
B352R207.WMF
B352R208.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
SM 14-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR
1. Tray 1 covers ( 1.14.1)
2. Gear disk [A] (" x1)
3. Tray shift sensors [B] (# x1 each).
4. Tray release sensor [C] (# x1)
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Tray 1 covers ( 1.14.1)
2. Motor bracket [A] (! x3, # x1)
3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] (! x3, belt x1)
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH
1. Tray 1 covers ( 1.14.1)
2. Back fence lock clutch [A] (" x1, #
x1)
B352R210.WMF
B352R209.WMF
B352R211.WMF
[A]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[A]
FINISHER MAIN BOARD
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-12 SM
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD
1. Rear cover ( 1.1.1)
2. Main PCB [A] (! x 6, All #)
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use the
appropriate SP mode.
To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with the
punch unit.
1. Rear cover ( 1.1.1)
2. Punch unit [A] (! x3, # x5)
3. Spacers [B]
The punch position can be
adjusted by up to 4 mm using
combinations of the 3 spacers
provided with the finisher.
B352R206.WMF
B352R119.WMF
[A] [B]
[A]
TIMING CHARTS
SM 14-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 TIMING CHARTS
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 1
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
T
i
m
e
(
m
s
)
M
a
i
n
U
n
i
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
O
N
S
h
i
f
t
O
N
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
O
F
F
S
t
o
p
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
M
a
i
n
U
n
i
t
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
U
p
p
e
r
E
x
i
t
S
e
n
s
o
r
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
M
o
t
o
r
U
p
p
e
r
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
P
u
n
c
h
M
o
t
o
r
P
u
n
c
h
C
l
u
t
c
h
P
u
n
c
h
H
.
P
.
S
e
n
s
o
r
T
r
a
y
1
S
h
i
f
t
M
o
t
o
r
T
r
a
y
1
S
h
i
f
t
S
e
n
s
o
r
<
J
a
m
D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
>
0 1
O
N
O
F
F 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
0
1
5
7
9
3
1
5
7
4
6
7
2
0
4
6
3
6
2
4
1
0
9
5
7
6
1
6
8
8
2
1
5
5
3
2
6
6
3
7
3
3
1
1
6
6
1
6
3
3
2
6
4
5
3
1
1
2
4
2
2
3
4
6
9
0
5
0
0
m
s
1
3
1
m
s
1
5
5
m
s
1
2
5
0
m
s
3
4
p
u
l
s
e
(
7
0
0
m
s
)
6
6
p
u
l
s
e
(
1
3
5
3
m
s
)
3
4
p
u
l
s
e
(
7
0
0
m
s
)
3
9
9
p
u
l
s
e
(
2
s
)
L
o
w
B352D501.WMF
TIMING CHARTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-14 SM
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 2
T
i
m
e
(
m
s
)
M
a
i
n
U
n
i
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
O
N
S
h
i
f
t
O
N
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
O
F
F
S
t
o
p
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
M
a
i
n
U
n
i
t
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
L
o
w
e
r
E
x
i
t
S
e
n
s
o
r
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
M
o
t
o
r
U
p
p
e
r
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
P
u
n
c
h
M
o
t
o
r
P
u
n
c
h
C
l
u
t
c
h
P
u
n
c
h
H
.
P
.
S
e
n
s
o
r
T
r
a
y
2
S
h
i
f
t
M
o
t
o
r
T
r
a
y
2
S
h
i
f
t
S
e
n
s
o
r
<
J
a
m
D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
>
0 1
O
N
O
F
F 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
0
5
0
0
m
s
1
5
5
m
s
1
2
5
0
m
s
6
6
p
u
l
s
e
(
1
3
5
3
m
s
)
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
5
7
9
3
1
5
7
4
6
7
2
0
4
6
3
6
2
4
1
0
9
5
7
6
1
0
5
4
1
5
2
1
1
6
8
8
2
1
5
5
2
6
3
3
3
1
0
0
3
2
6
6
3
7
7
4
4
2
0
0
4
6
6
7
1
3
1
m
s
3
4
p
u
l
s
e
(
7
0
0
m
s
)
3
4
p
u
l
s
e
(
7
0
0
m
s
)
3
9
9
p
u
l
s
e
(
2
s
)
L
o
w
B352D502.WMF
TIMING CHARTS
SM 14-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
2.1.3 A4(S)/LT(S) STAPLE MODE WITH PUNCH
T
i
m
e
(
m
s
)
M
a
in
U
n
it
F
in
is
h
e
r
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
O
N
S
t
a
p
l
e
O
N
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
O
F
F
S
t
o
p
F
in
is
h
e
r
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
S
t
a
p
le
T
r
a
y
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
S
t
a
p
le
T
r
a
y
P
a
p
e
r
S
e
n
s
o
r
L
o
w
e
r
E
x
it
S
e
n
s
o
r
U
p
p
e
r
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
L
o
w
e
r
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
P
r
e
-
s
t
a
c
k
M
o
t
o
r
P
u
n
c
h
M
o
t
o
r
P
u
n
c
h
C
l
u
t
c
h
<
J
a
m
D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
>
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
S
t
a
p
le
D
o
n
e
F
in
is
h
e
r
M
a
in
U
n
it
O
N
O
F
F
J
o
g
g
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
S
t
a
p
le
r
M
o
t
o
r
C
C
W
O
F
F
P
r
e
-
s
t
a
c
k
G
a
t
e
S
o
le
n
o
id
S
t
a
p
le
r
G
a
t
e
S
o
le
n
o
id
P
o
s
it
io
n
in
g
R
o
lle
r
S
o
le
n
o
id
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
S
t
a
p
l
e
H
u
m
m
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
S
t
a
p
l
e
H
u
m
m
e
r
H
.
P
.
S
e
n
s
o
r
S
t
a
c
k
F
e
e
-
o
u
t
M
o
t
o
r
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
C
W
C
C
W
O
F
F
C
W
C
C
W
O
F
F
C
W
E
x
it
M
o
t
o
r
O
F
F
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
M
o
t
o
r
O
N
O
F
F
S
t
a
c
k
F
e
e
d
-
o
u
t
H
.
P
.
S
e
n
s
o
r
O
F
F
0 0
2
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
1
5
7
9
3
1
5
7
4
7
3
6
6
3
1
4
7
8
9
3
1
0
9
5
7
6
1
6
8
8
2
1
5
5
3
2
6
6
3
7
3
3
4
8
4
5
5
3
1
2
6
4
2
3
6
8
9
0
8
0
0
2
8
4
6
9
1
5
2
5
1
7
7
2
3
1
0
4
3
3
5
1
4
6
8
2
4
9
2
9
7
8
3
9
8
0
8
6
9
4
1
8
9
6
6
5
6
3
3
2
1
1
0
6
8
1
1
3
5
3
1
2
0
5
6
8
7
6
6
8
8
1
6
1
5
2
8
6
6
6
1
7
7
3
2
0
1
3
1
m
s
1
5
5
m
s
1
5
6
m
s
2
4
5
p
u
ls
e
(
7
6
1
m
s
)
1
3
4
8
2
9
2
7
4
5
0
5
1
8
6
p
u
ls
e
(
4
5
9
m
s
)
4
8
4
p
u
ls
e
(
1
1
9
4
m
s
)
5
3
0
4
6
0
3
9
7
6
6
2
9
2
4
1
7
7
6
5
1
8
9
2
1
2
0
m
s
4
3
5
p
u
ls
e
(
1
0
7
3
m
s
)
1
9
3
2
2
2
5
2
2
2
7
8 2
4
0
4
1
0
0
m
s
2
3
3
8
3
4
7
1
3
5
1
1
4
0
0
6
4
0
3
2
4
0
9
2
4
1
5
8
5
0
8
9
5
0
4
9
5
4
0
9
5
4
3
7
5
4
9
2
5
5
2
0
5
6
7
0
5
6
9
8
6
1
4
8
6
1
6
8
6
7
7
2
6
8
1
4
8
8
2
7
8
8
9
3
8
2
0
6
8
2
4
6
8
7
4
1
8
7
6
7
1
0
2
2
8
1
0
2
5
6
9
7
8
5
9
8
2
5 1
0
1
4
5
1
0
2
5
6
1
0
4
0
6
1
0
4
3
4
1
0
8
8
4
1
0
9
0
4
1
1
5
0
8
1
1
5
4
5
5
9
1
8
1
0
0
m
s
1
8
7
2
2
1
5
2
3
4
5
1
3
5
4
6
5
0
2
9
5
3
0
9
5
4
9
2
5
5
6
7
8
1
8
6
8
2
8
1
9
7
0
5
1
0
0
4
5
1
0
2
2
8
1
0
3
0
3
1
0
8
8
4
6
1
4
8
1
5
0
m
s
6
8
4
4
6
1
6
8
5
7
1
8
6
7
6
7
6
9
5
8
1
0
4
5
4
1
1
5
0
3
1
0
9
0
4
1
1
5
7
5
1
1
6
8
9
1
3
7
7
7
1
3
0
3
6
1
1
1
5
4
8
3
0
0
6
1
4
8
2
5
0
m
s
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
2
0
0
0
m
s
1
0
2
p
u
ls
e
(
2
5
1
6
m
s
)
3
4
p
u
ls
e
(
8
3
9
m
s
)
3
4
p
u
ls
e
(
8
3
9
m
s
)
6
0
0
m
s
1
5
0
0
m
s
1
2
6
0
m
s
B352D503.WMF
JAM DETECTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-16 SM
2.2 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Shift Staple
Jam Content
! ! Entrance sensor:
On check
The entrance sensor does not turn on within
399 pulse after the main machine exit
sensor turns off.
*1
! ! Entrance sensor:
Off check
The entrance sensor does not turn off within
34 pulse after it turns on.
*1
! Tray exit sensor:
On check
The tray exit sensor does not turn on within
66 pulse after the entrance sensor turns off.
*1
! Tray exit sensor:
Off check
The tray exit sensor does not turn off within
66 pulse after the tray exit sensor turns on.
! Stapler tray
entrance sensor:
On check
The stapler tray entrance sensor does not
switch on within 102 pulses after the
entrance sensor switched off.*
1
! Stapler tray
entrance sensor:
Off check
The staple tray entrance sensor does not
turn off within 34 pulse after the stapler tray
entrance sensor turns on.*
1
! Lower tray exit
sensor:
On check
The lower exit sensor does not on within
1260 ms after the stack feed-out motor turns
on.
! Lower tray exit
sensor:
Off check
The lower exit sensor does not off within
1500 ms after it turns on.
*1
Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
SM 14-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
DPS101
1 2 3 4
Mode Description
0 0 0 0 Default.
1 1 1 0 Free run. No paper.
0 0 0 1 Factory shipping. See the note below.
To position the shift trays for shipping, on the finisher main board set DIP SW4 ON,
cycle the main machine power off and on, then set DIP SW4 OFF. The
shift trays move automatically to the shipping position. After unpacking the
machine again and switching on, turn all DIP switches off to put the
machine into factory default mode.
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP101 GND Ground
TP102 5V 5V
TP103 RXD Received command data
TP104 TXD Transmitted command data
3.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects 24 V.
GENERAL LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-18 SM
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1 Upper junction gate 5 Stapler
2 Punch unit (option) 6 Stapler tray
3 Stapler junction gate 7 Tray 2
4 Pre-stack tray 8 Tray 1
Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode,
the stack always goes out to the lower exit.
Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray.
Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple copies (A4 S, LT S, B5 S only) in the staple
mode, the first sheet of the second copy waits here for the next sheet to feed while
the previous stack is stapled. After the second copy is fed, the first and second
sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough time for the
previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed.
Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode,
and raise and lower to receive ejected copies.
Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacks
for stapling.
Punch unit. Punches holes in stacked copies.
B352D118.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DRIVE LAYOUT
SM 14-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Tray 1 lift motor
2. Entrance roller
3. Tray 2 lift motor
4. Upper exit roller
5. Tray 1 shift motor
6. Exit guide plate motor
7. Lower exit roller
8. Tray 2 shift motor
9. Exit motor
10. Lower transport motor
11. Pre-stack motor
12. Upper transport motor
13. Punch motor
14. Entrance motor
15. Stack feed-out motor
16. Jogger motor
17. Stapler motor
18. Stapler rotation motor
B352D104.WMF
B352D103.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
JUNCTION GATES
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-20 SM
4.3 JUNCTION GATES
The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations.
In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junction
solenoid [A] is on, and the copies go to the upper exit
(tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).
In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction
gate solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid
[B] are off, and copies go to the lower exit.
In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off and
the stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and copies
go to the stapler tray.
B302D506.WMF
B302D505.WMF
B302D507.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[B]
TRAY SHIFTING
SM 14-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING
4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS
Tray 1 (Upper Tray)
In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.
The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of
tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].
After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the gear
disk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.
Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is a
cut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift
sensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.
The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite
direction until the other shift sensor is activated.
B352D106.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
TRAY SHIFTING
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-22 SM
Tray 2 (Lower Tray)
In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.
The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the
tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side
to side (not just the tray).
After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters the
tray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints is
delivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previous
position.
B352D105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[E]
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
SM 14-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.5.1 TRAY 1
Introduction
The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
Normal and sort/stack modes
When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. To
do this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.
During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motor
lowers the tray for a specified time.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1
overflow sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate the
sensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded a certain
limit.
The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged if
the upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the tray
positioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 lift
motor.
B352D204.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[G]
[F]
[H]
[I]
[C]
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-24 SM
Staple mode
In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go
to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper
exit.
Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1
then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.
When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out of
the way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]
detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).
The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2
sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack height
has exceeded the overflow limit.
B352D204.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[G]
[F]
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
SM 14-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
Tray 1 release mechanism
When tray 1 is selected for staple mode,
tray 1 must be moved down to the lower
paper exit. However, to move past the
sensors at the lower exit, the tray must be
moved away from the finisher.
To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns until
the cut-out in the gear disk enters the tray
release sensor [A]. At this time, the arm
[B] has reached position [C], and is
pushing against the plate [D], in towards
the finisher. However, the plate is fixed, so
the tray moves out away from the finisher.
Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then the
tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.
When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is
activated (as described on the previous
page), the tray has moved past the
sensors at the lower exit. The tray 1 shift
motor turns on again until the gear disk
activates the tray shift sensor [E]. This
moves the tray back against the finisher.
Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects
that the tray is at the correct height.
B352D201.WMF
B352D202.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-26 SM
When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray
lock solenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G]
locks the tray. This prevents the user from
moving the tray out of position (the first tray
has some play when it is at the lower
position).
Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit
area, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off to
unlock the tray. In addition, the back fence
lock clutch [H] turns on to hold the back
fence [I]. This prevents the springs inside
the back fence from suddenly contracting
(these springs normally keep the tray
steady during side-to-side shift).
Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to
the upper exit area.
B352D203.WMF
[F]
[H]
[I]
[G]
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
SM 14-27 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
4.5.2 TRAY 2
The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.
When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the
tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see
Normal Mode in the above diagram).
In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machine
detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the
actuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].
The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and
stops the tray 2 lift motor.
The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.
B352D109.WMF
Nor mal Mode Mul t i Tr ay St apl e Mode
Overf l ow condi t i on
B352D500.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[H]
[D]
[F]
[E]
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-28 SM
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM
This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.
During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activates
the entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].
The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the
paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving
the pre-stack tray.
At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the second
sheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by the
pre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge of
the second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then both
sheets are sent to the stapler tray together.
00MTY.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
SM 14-29 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the stapler tray.
Vertical Paper Alignment
After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], the
positioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push the
positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.
The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of
the paper against the stack stopper [D].
Horizontal Paper Alignment
When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences
[F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the
selected paper.
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the
jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After a
short time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment then
returns to the waiting position.
B352D110.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
STAPLER MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-30 SM
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT
The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the
requirements of the selected stapling mode.
Stapler Rotation
After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit
[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler moves
from front to rear of the finisher.
When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves
to the stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees
(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.
Side-to-Side Movement
The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by
the size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the stapler
moves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear stapling
position. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.
After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,
determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].
B352D112.WMF
B352D113.WMF
[D]
[B] [E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
STAPLER MECHANISM
SM 14-31 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
4.7.2 STAPLER
The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.
As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When
stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple
hammer motor then stops.
The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple
cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the stapler
cassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If this
condition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print job
will not stop.
The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling
position. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns on
to transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staple
sheet.
If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam message
to appear on the operation panel.
B352D208.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
STAPLER MECHANISM
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-32 SM
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT
When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit
guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate
sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.
After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]
on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].
The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have
started to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stack
feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [H].
When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guide
safety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. This
prevents damage to the users fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the tray
is moving up.
B352D115.WMF
B352D114.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[C]
[I]
[H]
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
SM 14-33 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
w
o
-
T
r
a
y
F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r
B
3
5
2
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM
The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet is
positioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailing
edge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch
motor turns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make
the punch holes.
The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in the
punch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off.
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of the
punch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H]
and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the number
of holes.
B377D101.WMF
B352D116.WMF
[F] [G]
[H]
[I]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
B003/B004/B006/B007 14-34 SM
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.
B352D117.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
NINE-TRAY MAILBOX AND
BRIDGE UNIT G909/G912
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 15-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Trays 9 trays and a proof tray
Tray Capacity: Trays and proof tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 20 lb)
Paper Size for Trays: Trays:
Maximum: A3 or 11 x 17
Minimum: A5 (LEF) or 11 x 81/2
Proof tray:
Maximum: A3 or 11 x 17
Minimum: A6 (LEF) or 11 x 81/2
Paper Weight: Trays: 60 ~ 90 g/m
2
, 16 ~ 24 lb
Proof tray: 52 ~ 157 g/m
2
, 14 ~ 42 lb
Power Consumption: 48 W or less (average)
Power Source: DC24 V, 5 V (supplied by the main machine)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 600 x 545 x 970 mm (23.6 x 21.5 x 38.2)
Weight: 38 kg, 83.6 lb
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Legend:
COMPANY PRODUCT CODE
GESTETNER RICOH SAVIN
G909 CS360 CS360 CS360
G912 BRIDGE UNIT
TYPE 460
BRIDGE UNIT
TYPE 460
BRIDGE UNIT
TYPE 460
NOTE:
The installation of the G909 MailBox requires that the A688 Bridge Unit Type 450
and the A682 Paper Tray Unit (PS360) must also be installed.
COMPONENT LAYOUT
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-2 SM
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Bridge Exit Roller
2. Bridge Exit Sensor
3. Proof Tray
4. Bridge Relay Sensor
5. Relay Junction Gate
6. Proof Tray Paper Sensor
7. Proof Tray Paper Overflow Sensor
8. Proof Tray Exit Roller
9. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
10. Proof Tray Junction Gate
11. Entrance Roller
12. Entrance Sensor
13. Relay Sensor
14. Tray Exit Sensor 1
15. Vertical Transport Guide
16. Tray Exit Sensor 2
17. Tray Exit Sensor 3
18. Tray Gates
19. Paper Overflow Sensor
20. Paper Sensor
21. 9th Tray
22. 1st Tray
23. Bridge Unit
G909V500.WMF
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 20
21
22
23
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
COMPONENT LAYOUT
SM 15-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Proof Tray Exit Roller
2. Proof Tray Transport Motor
3. Bridge Exit Roller
4. Transport Motor
5. Entrance Roller
6. Vertical Transport Motor
7. Tray Feed-out Roller
G909V501.WMF
G909V502.WMF
G909V503.WMF
1
2
6
7
3
4
5
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-4 SM
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Refer to the electrical component layout and the point-to-point diagram, printed on
waterproof paper and located in a protective sleeve for the component locations.
Symbols Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1
Proof Tray
Transport
Drives all the proof tray rollers.
7
M2 Transport
Drives all rollers in the entrance area and
all rollers in the bridge unit.
8
M3 Vertical Transport Drives all tray feed-out rollers. 19
Sensors
S1 Bridge Exit Detects misfeeds. 1
S2 Bridge Relay Detects misfeeds. 2
S3
Proof Tray Paper
Overflow
Detects paper overflow in the proof tray.
3
S4 Proof Exit Detects misfeeds. 4
S5 Proof Cover
Detects whether the proof cover is open
or closed.
6
S6 Entrance
Detects copy paper entering the mail box
and detects misfeeds.
9
S7 Relay Detects misfeeds. 10
S8
Proof Tray Paper 1
(LED)
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the proof tray.
14
S9
Proof Tray Paper 2
(Photo Transistor)
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the proof tray.
13
S10 Tray Exit 1 Detects misfeeds. 21
S11 Tray Exit 2 Detects misfeeds. 25
S12 Tray Exit 3 Detects misfeeds. 29
S13 Tray Exit 4 Detects misfeeds. 32
S14 Paper 0 Contains an LED for paper sensor 1. 47
S15 Paper 1
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 1st tray.
15
S16 Paper 2
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 2nd tray.
43
S17 Paper 3
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 3rd tray.
41
S18 Paper 4
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 4th tray.
39
S19 Paper 5
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 5th tray.
37
S20 Paper 6
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 6th tray.
36
S21 Paper 7
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 7th tray.
35
S22 Paper 8
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 8th tray.
34
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
SM 15-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
Symbols Name Function Index No.
S23 Paper 9
Informs the CPU when there is paper on
the 9th tray.
33
S24 Paper Overflow 1 Detects paper overflow in the 1st tray. 49
S25 Paper Overflow 2 Detects paper overflow in the 2nd tray. 46
S26 Paper Overflow 3 Detects paper overflow in the 3rd tray. 44
S27 Paper Overflow 4 Detects paper overflow in the 4th tray. 42
S28 Paper Overflow 5 Detects paper overflow in the 5th tray. 40
S29 Paper Overflow 6 Detects paper overflow in the 6th tray. 38
S30 Paper Overflow 7 Detects paper overflow in the 7th tray. 28
S31 Paper Overflow 8 Detects paper overflow in the 8th tray. 30
S32 Paper Overflow 9 Detects paper overflow in the 9th tray. 31
Solenoids
SOL1
Proof Tray
Junction Gate
Opens and closes the proof junction gate
to direct paper either into the proof tray or
to the trays.
17
SOL2
Relay Junction
Gate
Opens and closes the relay junction gate to
direct paper either to the bridge unit or to
the trays.
15
SOL3 1st Tray Opens and closes the 1st tray gate. 16
SOL4 2nd Tray Opens and closes the 2nd tray gate. 18
SOL5 3rd Tray Opens and closes the 3rd tray gate. 20
SOL6 4th Tray Opens and closes the 4th tray gate. 22
SOL7 5th Tray Opens and closes the 5th tray gate. 23
SOL8 6th Tray Opens and closes the 6th tray gate. 24
SOL9 7th Tray Opens and closes the 7th tray gate. 26
SOL10 8th Tray Opens and closes the 8th tray gate. 27
PCBs
PCB1 Main Control Controls all sorter functions 48
PCB2 Proof Control
Drives the motors in the proof unit and
informs the sensor status to the main
control board.
5
Switches
SW1 Bridge Cover
Cuts the +24 V power line and detects
when the bridge cover is opened.
12
SW2 Front Cover
Cuts the +24 V power line and detects
when the front cover is opened.
11
BASIC OPERATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-6 SM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
Proof Tray
When the proof tray is selected as the output tray and the exit sensor of the main
machine is actuated by the leading edge of the paper, the transport motor and
proof tray transport motor energize, causing the transport rollers to turn.
Soon after the motors start, the proof tray junction gate solenoid energizes and the
proof tray junction gate [A] is lowered so that the paper goes to the proof tray.
When the last page passes the proof tray exit sensor and feeds out, the proof tray
junction gate solenoid and the proof tray transport motor de-energize.
Bridge Unit
The relay junction gate [B] in the bridge unit delivers the paper either to the finisher
or down to the trays. When the finisher is selected as the output tray, the relay
junction gate stays closed, and the paper goes to the bridge unit. When a tray is
selected as the output tray, the relay junction gate solenoid energizes and the relay
junction gate is open so that the paper goes downwards to the tray area.
Trays
When the proof tray is selected as the output tray, the transport motor and the
vertical transport motor energize. Each tray gate [C] is individually controlled by a
solenoid. When a solenoid is energized, the tray gate opens and the paper goes
into the tray.
G909D505.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
PROOF TRAY SENSORS
SM 15-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
2.2 PROOF TRAY SENSORS
2.2.1 PAPER SENSOR
The paper sensor in the proof tray consists of two sensor boards; one is an LED
board [A] and the other is a phototransistor board [B]. The sensor detects
whether or not there is paper on the proof tray. When there is paper on the
proof tray, the paper interrupts the light from the LED.
2.2.2 PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR
There is also a paper overflow sensor [C] located in the proof tray. The machine
detects paper overflow when the top sheet of the paper stack pushes up the
sensor feeler. When this occurs, a message will be displayed on the operation
panel and the machine stops printing until the paper stack on the proof tray is
removed.
G909D504.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
TRAY SENSORS
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-8 SM
2.3 TRAY SENSORS
2.3.1 PAPER SENSOR
There is a paper sensor [A] for each tray (total 10 pcs). The paper sensors in
tray 1 to tray 8 contain an LED and a phototransistor. The paper sensor in the
tray 0 contains only an LED. The paper sensor in tray 9 contains only a
phototransistor. The paper detection mechanism and their function are the
same as for the proof tray.
2.3.2 PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR
There is a paper overflow sensor [B] above each tray. The machine detects
paper overflow in a tray when the top of the paper stack pushes up the sensor
feeler [C]. When this condition occurs, the printing job is stopped until the
paper stack is removed.
2.3.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR
There is a tray exit sensor board [D] above the 1st tray (the mounting above
tray 1 is called tray 0) and on trays 3, 6, and 9. The tray exit sensor board on
trays 3 and 6 contains an LED and a phototransistor.
The tray exit sensor board above the 1st tray contains only an LED. The tray
sensor board on the 9th tray contains only a phototransistor.
The machine detects paper leaving trays 1 to 3 using the sensor above tray 1
and the one on tray 3. When paper passes between those sensors, the light
from the LED above tray 1 is interrupted.
G909D506.WMF
Tr ay 0
Tr ay 1
Tr ay 2
Tr ay 5
Tr ay 6
Tr ay 7
Tr ay 8
Tr ay 9
Tr ay 4
Tr ay 3
G909D507.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[D]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[D]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
TIMING CHART AND MISFEED DETECTION
SM 15-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
2.4 TIMING CHART AND MISFEED DETECTION
Tr anspor t Mot or
Ent r ance Sensor
Proof Junct i on Gat e Sol .
Rel ay Junct i on Gat e Sol .
Rel ay Sensor
Vert i cal Transport Mot or
A4 Sideways (to 1st Tray)
J2
J6
1st Tray Sol .
Tray Exi t Sensor
J5
J6
J6
J1
100 pul ses
100 pul ses
1 s 2 s
G909D502.WMF
Transport Mot or
Proof Transport Mot or
Ent rance Sensor
Proof Juncti on Gate Sol .
Rel ay Juncti on Gate Sol .
Proof Exi t Sensor
A4 Sideways (to Proof Tray)
J3 J6
G909D500.WMF
TIMING CHART AND MISFEED DETECTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-10 SM
1. On check:
J1: The entrance sensor does not activate within 2460 pulses after the exit sensor
of the main machine has been activated.
J2: The relay sensor does not activate within 1965 pulses after the entrance
sensor has been activated.
J3: The proof tray exit sensor does not activate within 1665 pulses after the
entrance sensor has been activated.
J4: The bridge relay sensor does not activate within 1954 pulses after the entrance
sensor has been activated.
J5: The appropriate tray exit sensor does not activate within the appropriate
number of pulses (see below) after the relay sensor has been activated.
J5 jam timing
Tray
Exit
Sensor
Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Sensor 3
Tray No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pulses 72 139 176 206 242 273 304 343 375
2. Off check
J6: A sensor does de-activate within the specified number of pulses after that
sensor has been activated.
Number of pulses = Paper length (in the paper feed direction) x 1.5
1 pulse = 0.1707 mm
Transport Mot or
Ent rance Sensor
Proof Juncti on
Gate Sol .
Rel ay Junct i on
Gate Sol .
Bri dge Rel ay
Sensor
Bri dge Exi t Sensor
A4 Sideways (to Bridge Unit)
J4 J6
J6
G909D501.WMF
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
MAILBOX (G909)
SM 15-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1 MAILBOX (G909)
3.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Qty Note
1 Front Joint Bracket 1
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1
3 Exit Guide Mylar 1 For A229
4 Proof Tray Attachment 1 For A230, A231, and A232
5 Upper Grounding Plate 1 For A230, A231, and A232
6
Lower Grounding Plate
2
One for A230, A231, and A232
Two for A229
7 Cushion 1
8 Tapping Screw - M4 x 14 4
9 Tray Decals 1
10 Installation Procedure 1
3.1.2 REQUIREMENT OPTIONS FOR MAIN MACHINE
When the mailbox is going to be installed to the A230, A231, or A232 machines,
the following options for the main machine are required.
1. Bridge Unit Type 450 (A688)
2. Paper Tray Unit PS360 (A682)
G909I501.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MAILBOX (G909)
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-12 SM
1.1.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machines power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: 1) When the finisher (A697) is installed on the machine, the bridge unit for
the mailbox (G912) must be installed.
2) The bridge unit for the mailbox must be installed before installing the
Mailbox on the main machine.
1. Unpack the finisher and carefully remove all the shipping tapes.
- A230, A231, A232 B003 and B004 machines -
2. Attach the front joint bracket [A] and rear joint bracket [B] to the main machine
(2 screws each).
3. Attach the upper grounding plate [C] (1 screw).
4. Peel off the backing of the double sided tape that is attached to the lower
grounding plate [D].
5. Attach one lower grounding plate to the center of the bottom edge of the paper
tray unit as shown.
G909I500.WMF
G909I509.WMF
- A230, A231, A232, B003 and B004 machines -
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
MAILBOX (G909)
SM 15-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
Go to step 7.
- A229 machines -
2. Remove the four plastic caps [A] from the copiers left cover.
3. Remove the connector cover [B].
4. Attach the front joint bracket [C] and rear joint bracket [D] to the main machine
(2 screws each).
5. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape that is attached to the lower
grounding plate [E].
6. Attach two lower grounding plates to the bottom edge of the paper tray unit as
shown.
- All machines -
7. The position of the cushion [F] depends on which main machine the mailbox is
installed to. Attach the cushion to the plate as follows:
Position [G] for A230, A231, and A232 machines.
Position [H] for A229 machines.
NOTE: When attaching the cushion to position [H], cut about 40 mm (1.6
inches) off one edge of the cushion.
8. Open the front cover [I] of the mailbox, and remove the screw [J] that secures
the locking lever [K]. Then pull the locking lever.
G909I506.WMF
G909I510.WMF
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[K]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
- A229 machine -
MAILBOX (G909)
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-14 SM
9. Align the mailbox on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever [A].
10. Secure the locking lever (1 screw) and close the front door.
11. Connect the mailbox cable [B] to the main machine.
12. A230/A231/A232/B003/B004 machines only: Peel off the backing of the
double-sided tape that is attached to the proof tray attachment [C].
13. Install the proof tray attachment on the proof tray.
14. A229 machines only: Install the exit guide mylar [D] on the upper cover just
above the anti-static brush.
15. Power on the main switch and check the mailbox operation.
G909I503.WMF
G909I502.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)
SM 15-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories in the box against the following list.
No. Description Qty
1. Guide Plate Bracket 1
2 Cable 1
3 Cover Switch 1
4 Grounding Bracket 1
5 Finisher Shielding Plate 1
6 Screw - M4 x 8 9
7 Screw - M4 x 4 4
8 Screw - M3 x 6 2
G912I500.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-16 SM
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machines power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: 1) The bridge unit for the mailbox must be installed when the 3000 sheet
finisher (A697) will be installed.
2) The 3000 sheet finisher (A697) can be installed only on the
A232/B003/B004 and A229 machines.
1. Unpack the bridge unit and remove the shipping retainers [A].
NOTE: Do not remove the protective sheet [B] at this time.
2. Remove the mailbox if it has been previously installed.
3. Remove the rear cover [C] of the mailbox (8 screws).
4. Remove the proof tray unit [D] (6 screws, 1 connector).
5. Remove the cover [E].
G909I508.WMF
G912I506.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[A]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)
SM 15-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
6. Open the left front cover [A] of the mailbox, and remove the inner plate [B] (3
screws).
7. Install the guide plate bracket [C] (4 screws - M4 x 4).
8. Route the cable [D] and affix it to the clamp as shown.
9. Connect the cover switch [E] to the cable then install the cover switch (2 screws
M4 x 8).
10. Remove the paper guide plate [F] (2 screws).
G912I503.WMF
G912I505.WMF
G912I504.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[D]
BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-18 SM
11. Pull up the tab [A] of the protective sheet.
NOTE: 1) Do not remove the protective sheet at this time.
2) Make sure that all mylars are held between the two folded halves of
the protective sheet.
12. Carefully turn over the bridge unit [B] and insert the protective sheet [C] into the
gap [D] between the paper guides. Next, insert the bridge unit onto the mailbox
[E].
NOTE: When holding the bridge unit, do not touch the timing belt. Otherwise
the timing belt may come off the gear.
13. Remove the tape [F] of the protective sheet.
14. Open the upper paper guide [G] then pull out the protective sheet [H].
NOTE: Check that all mylars are set into the gap between the paper guides.
G912I501.WMF
G912I507.WMF
G912I508.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[H]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)
SM 15-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
15. Secure the bridge unit [A] (4 screws M4 x 8).
16. Route the cables [B] through the openings [C].
17. Route the solenoid harness [D] through the opening [C].
18. Connect the cables to the solenoid and sensors and clamp the cable as shown.
19. Reinstall the rear cover and proof tray unit.
20. Install the mailbox on the main machine (refer to the Mailbox Installation
procedure for more detail).
If the 3000 sheet finisher (A697) is going to be installed, perform steps 21
to 25.
21. Install the front joint bracket [E] and rear joint bracket [F] which are contained in
the finishers accessory box.
G912I509.WMF
G912I510.WMF
G912I513.WMF
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[C]
BRIDGE UNIT FOR MAILBOX (G912)
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-20 SM
22. Remove the seal [A].
23. Attach the grounding bracket [B] (3 screws - M4 x 8).
24. Attach the shielding plate [C] to the finisher (2 screws M3 x 8).
25. Attach the finisher to the mailbox (refer to the Finisher Installation Procedure).
26. Power-on the main switch of the main machine and check the bridge unit
operation. (Select a copy mode that uses the finisher.)
G912I512.WMF
G912I502.WMF
[A]
[B]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
PROOF TRAY UNIT
SM 15-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 PROOF TRAY UNIT
4.1.1 PROOF TRAY SENSOR AND PAPER OVERFLOW SENSORS
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (8 screws).
2. Remove the proof tray unit [B] (6 screws).
3. Remove two screws [C], then turn over the proof tray unit.
4. Remove the sensor bracket [D] (2 screws, 1 clamp).
5. Remove the proof tray paper sensor [E] (1 screw each).
6. Remove the proof tray paper overflow sensor [F].
4.1.2 PROOF TRANSPORT UNIT
1. Remove the proof tray unit [B] and remove two screws [C].
2. Carefully turn over the proof tray unit and remove the proof transport unit [G]
(2 screws).
G909R501.WMF
G909R502.WMF
G909R500.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[E]
TRAY UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-22 SM
4.2 TRAY UNIT
4.2.1 TRAYS
1. Remove the rear cover (8 screws).
2. Disconnect the cable [A] of the tray which will be removed.
3. Remove the grounding wire [B] (1 screw, 1 washer) and remove the tray
stopper [C].
NOTE: When reinstalling the tray stopper, push the stopper to the left against
the tray.
4. Open the front cover [D] and remove the cover bracket [E] (1 screw), then
remove the front cover.
5. Remove the two screws [F] which secure the tray.
6. Remove the tray [G]. (First move the tray to the left and gently flex it, then
remove the tray.)
G909R504.WMF
G909R505.WMF
G909R503.WMF
[F]
[G]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
TRAY UNIT
SM 15-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
4.2.2 PAPER SENSOR, PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR, AND TRAY
EXIT SENSOR
NOTE: When removing the paper sensor or paper overflow sensor for the 1st tray,
or the tray exit sensor above the 1st tray, first remove the 1st tray and
remove the sensor cover, then remove these sensors.
1. Remove the tray (see Trays).
2. Remove the sensor cover [A] (3 screws).
Paper Overflow Sensor
3. Remove the grounding wire [B] (1 screw) and paper overflow sensor bracket
[C] (1 screw).
4. Remove the paper overflow sensor [D] (1 connector).
Paper Sensor
5. Remove the paper sensor [E] (1 screw, 1 connector).
Tray Exit Sensor (above the 1st tray, and in the 3rd, 6th, and 9th trays)
6. Remove the tray exit sensor [F] (1 screw, 1 connector).
7. After replacing the tray exit sensor, perform the tray exit sensor adjustment
(see Tray Exit Sensor Adjustment).
NOTE: After replacing the tray exit sensor, do not put the rear cover back on
the mailbox, because the tray exit sensor adjustment must be
performed first.
G909R506.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
TRAY UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-24 SM
4.2.3 MAIN CONTROL BOARD
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (8 screws).
2. Remove the main control board [B] (all connectors).
3. After replacing the main control board, perform the tray exit sensor adjustment
procedure (see Tray Exit Sensor Adjustment).
G909R508.WMF
G909R509.WMF
[A]
[B]
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
TRAY UNIT
SM 15-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
4.2.4 TRAY EXIT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
This sensor adjustment must be performed after replacing the tray exit sensor or
main control board, using the special paper that comes as a spare part for the tray
exit sensor.
The tray exit sensor board has two devices: An LED and a phototransistor. So,
when replacing the tray exit sensor on the 3rd tray, the sensor adjustment must be
performed between trays 1 and 3 and between trays 4 and 6. When replacing the
main control board, this sensor adjustment must be performed for all sensors. The
sensor adjustment procedure is as follows.
Example: Sensor adjustment between trays 1 and 3
1. Insert the special paper (which comes with the tray exit sensor) into the
entrance guide of the mailbox.
2. Turn the transport motor gear [A] counterclockwise to transport the paper to the
tray unit.
3. When the leading edge of the paper reaches the tray feed-out roller, turn the
vertical transport motor [B] clockwise to transport the paper to the appropriate
tray.
4. Open the tray gate by pushing the plunger of the tray solenoid [C], and
transport the paper until half of it has fed out to the tray.
5. Change switches 1 and 2 of the DIP switch on the main control board to ON.
6. Make sure that the interface cable is connected to the main machine and turn
the main switch on.
7. Fully turn the appropriate variable resistor (VR) [D] clockwise, then check that
the appropriate LED [E] has turned off (the relationship between tray, VR, and
LED are shown in the table below).
G909R507.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
TRAY UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-26 SM
8. Turn back the VR slowly until the LED just turns on.
9. Measure the voltage between TP3 on the main control board and the frame of
the mailbox and confirm the voltage is greater than 3.5 Vdc. If it is not, adjust
the voltage using the VR (the relationship between tray, TP, and VR are shown
in the table below).
10. Remove the special paper from the tray, then measure the voltage on the main
control board in the same way as step 9. The voltage should be less than 1.2
Vdc.
11. After adjusting, change the DIP switch setting to the default (all switches off)
and reassemble the machine.
Adjusted Sensor VR No. LED No. TP No.
Trays 1 to 3 VR1 LED 2 TP3
Trays 4 to 6 VR2 LED 3 TP4
Trays 7 to 9 VR3 LED 4 TP13
NOTE: The DIP switches to change are the same regardless of the adjusted
sensor.
M
a
i
l
B
o
x
&
B
r
i
d
g
e
U
n
i
t
G
9
0
9
/
G
9
1
2
DIP SWITCHES/VRIABLE RESISTORS/LEDS
SM 15-27 B003/B004/B006/B007
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 DIP SWITCHES/VRIABLE RESISTORS/LEDS
5.1.1 DIP SWITCHES
0 = OFF 1 = ON
Switch No.
Item
1 2 3 4
Function
Default 0 0 0 0
Motor Test 1 0 0 0
Solenoid Test 0 1 0 0
When detecting paper between the
1st and 3rd trays, LED2 will light.
When detecting paper between the
4th and 6th trays, LED3 will light.
Tray Exit Sensor Check 1 1 0 0
When detecting paper between the
7th and 9th trays, LED4 will light.
Paper Sensor Check
(1st to 3rd trays)
0 0 1 0 When the 1st tray paper sensor is
activated, LED2 will light.
When the 2nd tray paper sensor is
activated, LED3 will light.
When the 3rd tray paper sensor is
activated, LED4 will light.
Paper Sensor Check
(4th to 6th trays)
1 0 1 0 When the 4th tray paper sensor is
activated, LED2 will light.
When the 5th tray paper sensor is
activated, LED3 will light.
When the 6th tray paper sensor is
activated, LED4 will light.
Paper Sensor Check
(7th to 9th trays)
0 1 1 0 When the 7th tray paper sensor is
activated, LED2 will light.
When the 8th tray paper sensor is
activated, LED3 will light.
When the 9th tray paper sensor is
activated, LED4 will light.
Proof Tray Sensors Check 1 1 1 0 When the proof paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED2 will light.
When the proof paper sensor is
activated, LED3 will light.
Paper Overflow Sensor
Check (1st to 3rd trays)
0 0 0 1 When the 1st paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED2 will light.
When the 2nd paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED3 will light.
When the 3rd paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED4 will light.
Paper Overflow Sensor
Check (4th to 6th trays)
1 0 0 1 When the 4th paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED2 will light.
DIP SWITCHES/VRIABLE RESISTORS/LEDS
B003/B004/B006/B007 15-28 SM
Switch No.
Item
1 2 3 4
Function
Paper Overflow Sensor
Check (4th to 6th trays)
1 0 0 1 When the 5th paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED3 will light.
When the 6th paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED4 will light.
Paper Overflow Sensor
Check (7th to 9th trays)
0 1 0 1 When the 7th paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED2 will light.
When the 8th paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED3 will light.
When the 9th paper overflow
sensor is activated, LED4 will light.
Entrance, Bridge Relay,
and Bridge Exit Sensor
Check
1 1 0 1 When the entrance sensor is
activated, LED4 will light.
When the bridge relay sensor is
activated, LED3 will light.
When the bridge exit sensor is
activated, LED2 will light.
Proof Exit and Relay
Sensor Check
0 0 1 1 When the proof exit sensor is
activated, LED4 will light.
When the relay sensor is activated,
LED3 will light.
Free Run 1 1 1 1
5.1.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS
Number Function
VR1 Adjusts the tray exit sensor sensitivity between trays 1 and 3
VR2 Adjusts the tray exit sensor sensitivity between trays 4 and 6
VR3 Adjusts the tray exit sensor sensitivity between trays 7 and 9
5.1.3 LEDS
Number Monitored Signal
LED1 Monitors the software operation.
Blinking: Normal operation
Others: Abnormal operation
LED2
LED3
LED4
The LED lights when the appropriate sensor is activated. (Refer to the
DIP switch table for more details.)
FIRMWARE HISTORY
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
1. FIRMWARE HISTORY
1.1 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
1.1.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE (BICU) FIRMWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045112 C 2.15.04
Please wait message does not clear when
there is paper in between the duplex unit and
units cover.
Please wait
does not clear
When feeding HLT or A5 lengthwise from the
bypass tray, horizontal black lines appear
about 180mm from the leading edge.
Horizontal black
lines
Fax image is not output when Standard is
selected and the trays main scan registration
adjustment value (SP1002) is set at 9.0mm.
Fax image is not
output
When the value of SP1002 is between
- 8.9mm and 8.0mm, images do not appear
in the area approximately 1mm from the main-
scan leading edge.
Images do not
appear in the
main-scan
leading edge
area
B0045112 D 2.16.05
Image problem occurs only in outputs made
just after the main power is turned on (e.g.
output completely black, blurry images).
Image problem
occurs after
main power is
turned on
B0045112 E 2.16a.05
After the power is turned on, the first output
shows a black stripe at the sub-scan leading
edge.
Black stripe at
the sub-scan
leading edge
When a Finisher SC occurs, it becomes
impossible to start any other job (even those
not using the Finisher).
Finisher SC
After SP5801 (Memory Clear) is performed,
the default value for SP1001-01 is changed to
0.
Memory Clear
problem
The Tray Full display is not cleared even after:
the main power is turned off, the paper is
cleared from the tray and the main power is
turned on again.
Tray Full display
is not cleared
SP6006-05 (DF trailing edge erase
adjustment) has been newly added to ensure
that the trailing edge of the original does not
appear on the copy.
Note that this cannot be used for the Fax and
Scanner applications.
SP6006-05
added
B0045112 F 2.19.05
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-2 SM
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
Following a book scan job at 25-44%
reduction, the first page of a (100%) DF job is
printed out as a blank page.
Blank page of a
DF job
When a finisher jam occurs with the 1000-
sheet Finisher, sometimes the location of the
jammed paper is not displayed.
Jammed paper
location is not
displayed
B0045112 G 2.20
Fusing-related SC errors happen frequently
after SP1104-1 is changed from fusing
temperature control to phase control.
SC error at
Phase control
When the operation switch is turned Off/On,
the value of SP6017 (Sheet Through
Magnification) is reset to default (0).
Value of
SP6017 is reset
to default
B0045112 H 2.21
When fax transmission is stopped by a DF
jam or other error, the display still reads
Scanning
Scanning
message
remains after
Fax Tx
interrupted.
If the paper stops inside the bridge unit where
the sensors cannot detect it (mainframe +
mailbox configuration only), the jam location is
not displayed on the panel.
Jam location not
displayed with
mainframe +
mailbox
B0045112 K 2.26
The pressure roller deforms (temporary
change) after the machine is in Standby mode
for an extended period of time, eg 2 to 3 days.
Pressure Roller
temporarily
deforms
Fusing related SC codes (541, 542) and/or
incomplete fusing occurs when making copies
first thing in the morning (especially in cold
environments).
SC541, SC542
B0045112 L 2.28
When printing document feeder A4 SEF
originals with Create Margin onto A3 paper at
141%, black lines appear along the right edge
(along the subscan direction).
Vertical black
lines along right
edge
B0045112 M 2.29
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
1.1.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045220 A 2.06
Add Traditional Chinese (for Taiwan version).
B0045220 B 2.10
Add Simplified Chinese (for China version)
The Form Feed button is only displayed for English and
Japanese.
Wording mistake in the alert message for when the number of
pages in the printer document server exceeds the maximum (All
languages).
The following occur with the Dutch display language:
In the System Settings screen, both the Finisher and Tray 1
appear twice in the output tray selections.
The selections Yes and No were reversed in the Key
Operator Settings User Code Settings screen.
B0045220 C 2.15
Added character strings for use with the Capture function.
Translation errors (Copier):
(Copy alert): Slip Sheet Tray should be Cover Sheet Tray
(Danish).
Thin Paper should be Thick Paper (Czech).
For all languages except English, the lettering is not displayed in
the Stop button when the PS configuration page is being printed
out.
B0045220 D 2.18
The following display errors in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features have been corrected:
-(Portuguese, Finnish): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to
Bottom" were reversed.
-(German): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to Bottom" were
incorrect.
Dutch translation error for "Program/Change/Delete User Code".
The following display error in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features has been corrected:
(Czech): What should be displayed as "2 Sided: T to T2 Sided:
T to T" was incorrectly displayed as "1 Sided2 Sided: T to B".
B0045220 E 2.19
Spanish translation error for Sub TX mode Key in the Fax Initial
Settings screen:
Incorrect: Mode RX sustituta
Correct: Mode TX sustituta
The Dutch display for Rotate Sort (Copy screen) appeared in
German.
B0045220 F 2.22
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-4 SM
1.1.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045102 D 3.05
Corrects the following:
SC820 occurs at power ON when the Self-
Diagnostic is performed.
SC820
A small square character appears throughout
the SP/UP and SC Error screens in machines
for Taiwan, China and Asia.
Display Text
Error
With the User Stamp function, SC955 occurs
when a copy job is made with 200 or more
originals
SC955
In UP Mode, the operation panel key for paper
sizes for China (8K, 16K) can be turned
On/Off with SP mode.
8K, 16K paper
selection
(display)
SC955 occurs when 1 set has been
programmed for Staple Sort (w/32MB+HDD).
SC955
After the machine has repeatedly stored to
and printed out documents from the HDD, it
freezes during scanning (scanner does not
turn off).
Fax document
storage error
B0045102 E 3.06
Printing not possible when sending a print job
from a PC to the Adonis-C2 via the server
(parallel cable connection). In addition, the
printer status cannot be monitored from a web
browser.
Error when
printing from the
Print Server
B0045102 F 3.07
The Rx File Transmission settings on the Up
Mode Data Printout appear as None.
Up Mode Data
printout error
In the System Settings User ID screen, if
other information is changed in addition to the
user code, the user code assumes a
completely different value.
User code
setting
The display still reads Printing even after a
jam or SMC paper end occurs.
Printing
continually
displayed
An image problem occurs when binding
margin has been set for Magazine
Image problem
with Magazine
Mode
When a FAX is sent with binding (negative
value) and image rotation, marks appear at
the end of a main scan direction line. These
lines are caused during the image processing
stage
Marks near the
trailing edge of
received FAX
images
SC955 occurs when the 32MB and HDD
are both installed.
SC955
B0045102 G
3.08.4
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The SP modes for HDD initialization (SP4911-
***) have been moved to SSP.
SP4911 moved
to SSP Mode
The SC error data (incl. logging data) from
SC-8XX was incorrect.
RSS logging
data incorrect
SC819 occurs when using Magazine Mode
without the optional memory installed.
SC819
When using an A4 2-page spread original to
print out to larger sizes (AMS) with hole-
punching selected, the machine displays
Cannot staple, even though the Staple
function has not been selected.
Cannot staple
is displayed
When printing out with APS enabled and both
Punch and Staple selected, the display reads
Cannot punch.
Cannot punch
is displayed
When entering a pm time using the 24-hour
format in Initial Settings, the machine inputs
the corresponding am time instead (e.g.
mistakenly inputs 8:00 instead of 20:00).
When entering 12:00, the machine inputs 0
instead.
Time setting
error
SP2103 has been moved from SSP to SP
mode.
SP2103 moved
to SP mode.
Marks appear when printing out with 180
degree image rotation. These lines are
caused during the image processing stage.
Marks on the
output with
image rotation
When a jam occurs in Magazine Mode with a
combined-image original, the first image is not
saved and therefore cannot be recovered
(although all successive images are
successfully recovered).
Portion of image
deleted during
jam recovery
Cannot enter SP mode after entering SSP
mode.
Not possible to
enter SP from
SSP
When a number key is pressed while the
machine is in Energy Saver Mode, the
machine comes back on line, however the
value of the number key pressed is input
(used).
Key input when
recovering from
Energy Saver
Mode
Cannot change pm to am in the System
Settings clock setting screen in machines for
North America.
Cannot change
PM to AM
(clock)
Recovery is not possible after the FCU
firmware download is interrupted. A function
has been added to make recovery possible
even after it is interrupted.
FCU download
recovery not
possible
B0045102 G
3.08.4
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-6 SM
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The Cant allocate info error message
sometimes appears when connected to a
network.
Cant allocate
info error
The DMA sometimes fails when receiving
data from the network.
DMA failure
B0045102 H
3.08.5
The printer function stalls when jobs are
frequently sent alternating among different
drivers.
Printer
application stalls
B0045102 J 3.09.1
Modified to allow use of the Capture function. Capture function
Following a Detailed Self-Diagnostic, SC819
occurs when the diagnostic report is being
printed out.
SC819
SC997 occurs when one of the MFP
application keys is pressed just after the
power is turned on.
SC997
A black line appears along the trailing edge of
DF copies under the following conditions: 1
2 job, Create Margin, A4/SEF originals and
paper.
Black line along
trailing edge
with Create
Margin
SC819 occurs under the following conditions:
Sort job, Mixed Original Sizes, optional
memory not installed.
SC819
The last page of a 1 2 odd-numbered copy
job is printed out on the opposite side when
using paper with a set front/back orientation
(e.g. letterhead, punched paper).
Last page
printed out on
opposite side
(copier)
The following display has been changed:
Old: Cannot communicate with external
server.
New: Cannot deliver the data. Check the
server. #### (#= servers IP address).
Display changed
If an error occurs during the self-diagnostic at
power On (e.g. NIB error), the machine
sometimes does not display the time on the
operation panel.
Time not
displayed at
power On.
B0045102 K 5.19.1
The GW-MAC control function has been
added.
Correction for a problem that occurred when
using 5.19.1 with certain production software
at the factory.
GW-MAC
function
B0045102 L 5.19.2
When using the memory dump function of Fax
SP mode, the memory address cannot be
entered.
Cannot enter
memory address
B0045102 M 5.21
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Program added for Korean language display
(with the addition of the Korea model).
NOTE: To display the Korean language on
models other than the Korea model, it is
necessary to install both the LCDC firmware
from service Card V2.03KOR and controller
firmware V5.22.
Add Korean
language
B0045102 N 5.22
The tray selection screen is sometimes not
displayed on the mainframe panel at Power
On with coinlock-connected machines.
Display error
w/coinlock-
connected
machines
The Key Card and Coin Lock setting screens
now appear in the System Settings.
Key Card, Coin
Lock display
B0045102 P 5.23
An SC is cleared with power off/on, however
the RSS error flag is not cleared, causing the
S. Sense remote monitoring system to
incorrectly detect a machine error condition.
RSS flag not
cleared
The message for the Key Counter/Key Card
mis-set or User Code input screen is not
displayed correctly.
Message display
error
The page number is not displayed correctly on
1-to-2 copies made with Designate Chapter
mode.
Page numbering
error
A failure occurs with the cluster recovery
processing for a certain system area after an
SC863 (HDD error), and the SC cannot be
cleared with power off/on.
SC863 (HDD
error)
If an original is scanned for preset job while a
job is in progress, and this job in progress is
stopped due to such conditions as a Paper
End, the preset job is cleared.
Preset job
canceled
B0045102 Q 5.26
Rev. 01/2003
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-8 SM
1.1.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045211 A 2.05
Corrected displays in French that had been
mistranslated or were missing.
Display
translation error
(French)
With proportional fonts, the pixel to the right of
the slash mark was printed blank.
Blank pixel
B0045211 B 2.06
Corrected displays in Spanish that had been
mistranslated or were missing.
Display
translation error
(Spanish)
With proportional fonts, the pixel to the right of
the slash mark was printed blank.
Blank pixel
Strings of simplified or traditional (complex)
Chinese characters contained garbled areas.
Kanji characters
not printed
correctly
B0045211 B 2.07
Modified for Taiwanese language display. Taiwanese
display
B0045211 C 2.11
Displays for the Capture function added. Capture function
displays
Except for the English display language, the
Stop button is not displayed while the PS
Configuration Page is being printed out.
Stop not
displayed during
PS Config. Page
printout
If a European language is set for the display,
the Hole punch receptacle is full (printer)
message is not displayed when the receptacle
becomes full.
Hole punch
receptacle is
full message
not displayed
Except for the Japanese and English display
languages, the Form Feed button is not
displayed.
Form Feed
button not
displayed
B0045211 C 2.19
The character "/" is not displayed in the date
field with simplified or traditional Chinese.
Display error
with simplified
and traditional
Chinese
B0045211 D 2.20
Modified for Korean language display. Korean display
B0045211 D 2.22
Spanish translation error for Sub TX mode
Key in the Fax Initial Settings screen:
Incorrect: Mode RX sustituta
Correct: Mode TX sustituta
Translation error
-FAX Settings
B0045211 E 2.23
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
1.1.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045104 1.04
Rev. 09/2002
B361/ B362
PRINTER/SCANNER CONTROLLERS
Trademarks
Microsoft
, Windows
, and MS-DOS
are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript
is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL
is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet
is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
SM 1-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2 1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Please refer to section 1 of the main unit service manual.
1.2 PRINTER INSTALLATION
Accessory Check
Check the accessories in the box against the following list:
No. Description Qty Note
1 Cable 1
2 Paper Height Sensors 4
3 Edge Clamp 1
4 Cable Clamp 4
5 Paper Height Sensor Feeler 2
6 Paper Sensor 1
7 Key Top - Printer 1
8 Key Top - Scanner 1 Included only in the B362 (printer
and scanner) model
9 Paper Limit Sensor Unit 1
10 Tapping Screw - M3x8 2 To secure the paper limit sensor
unit
11 Pan Head Screw - M3x8 1 To secure the paper sensor
12 Installation Procedure 1
13 FCC Label 1 Included only in the USA models.
PRINTER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-2 SM
Printer Controller Installation
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the left rear cover [A] (2 screws) and slide out the controller board [B]
(2 screws).
2. Install the printer ROM DIMM [C] on the controller board.
3. Remove the parallel interface cover [D].
4. This step is required only in the USA models.
Attach the FCC label [E] on the controller panel board aligned with the slot [F]
so the label is hidden when the left rear cover is replaced.
NOTE: If the NIB (G574), Postscript kit (G577), memory board (G578/G579), or
IEEE1394 Interface (G590) are to be installed, remove the HDD and install
them before proceeding to the next step.
5. Put back the controller board and replace the left rear cover.
B361I107.WMF
B361I101.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
PRINTER INSTALLATION
SM 1-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
Paper Height Sensor Installation
6. Remove the connector cover [A] and lower rear cover [B] (5 screws).
7. Pull out the two paper trays [C].
8. Install edge clamp [D] in the opening.
9. Connect the four paper height sensors [E] to the cable [F].
10. Install the four paper height sensors [E] as shown.
11. Install the four cable clamps [G], then clamp the cable as shown.
12. Lead the cable through the opening [H]. Secure the cable in place with the
edge clamp attached in step 8.
13. Connect the cable to CN234 on the PCB [I].
B361I112.WMF
B361I113.WMF
B361I108.WMF
B361I109.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[G]
PRINTER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-4 SM
14. Install the paper height sensor feeler [A] on the bottom plate shaft [B] of each
paper tray.
15. Reassemble the machine.
Paper Limit Sensor Installation
If the optional bridge unit has been installed, skip steps 16 and 17.
16. Peel off the black tape [C] from the anti-static brush [D], then pull out the cable
[E].
17. Connect the cable to the sensor [F], then install the paper limit sensor unit [G]
(2 screws).
B361I114.WMF
B361I116.WMF
B361I115.WMF
[A]
[B]
[F]
[G]
[C]
[E]
[D]
PRINTER INSTALLATION
SM 1-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
Paper Sensor Installation
Perform steps 18 to 20 only if the optional bridge unit has been installed.
If it has not been installed, go on to step 21.
18. Remove the connector cover [A] and bridge unit [B] (2 screws, 2 connectors).
19. Open the right cover [C] of the bridge unit and peel off the black tape [D], then
pull out the connector [E].
20. Install the paper sensor [F] (1 screw, 1 connector) and reinstall the bridge unit.
Completion
21. Remove the bottom cap [G] of the operation panel. Install the Printer key [H]
on the operation panel as shown.
B358I518.WMF
B361I110.WMF
B358I517.WMF
[A]
[B]
[G]
[H]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PRINTER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-6 SM
22. Do not connect the parallel cable at this point. Turn the machine on and check
the setting of the following copier SP mode:
SP5-907: Plug & Play Name - select the correct one.
23. Print out the configuration page to check if the printer controller is installed
properly.
(Configuration page: User Tools/ Printer Settings/ List Test Print/ Config. Page)
24. If the parallel cable is going to be connected, first turn off the machine. After
connecting the cable, turn the machine back on.
POSTSCRIPT UNIT (G577)
SM 1-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
1.3 POSTSCRIPT UNIT (G577)
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: To install the Postscript option, the printer option (B361) must be installed
first. Please refer to section 1.2 for details of the printer option installation
procedure.
1. Remove the left rear cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the controller board [B] (2 screws).
3. Install the Postscript DIMM [C] onto the
controller board [D].
4. Put back the controller board and replace
the left rear cover.
B361I101.WMF
B361I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
MEMORY (G578/G579)
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-8 SM
1.4 MEMORY (G578/G579)
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: To install the memory option, the printer option (B361) must be installed
first. Please refer to section 1.2 for details of the printer option installation
procedure.
1. Remove the left rear cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the controller board [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the HDD [C] (2 connectors,
3 screws).
4. Install the memory DIMM [D] onto the
controller board [E].
5. Re-install the HDD and put back the
controller board.
6. Replace the left rear cover.
B361I101.WMF
B361I102.WMF
B361I117.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
NIB (G574)
SM 1-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
1.5 NIB (G574)
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: To install the NIB option, the printer option (B361) must be installed first.
Please refer to section 1.2 for details of the printer option installation
procedure.
1. Remove the left rear cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the controller board [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the HDD [C] (2 connectors,
3 screws).
4. Remove the NIB slot cover [D].
5. Attach the NIB [E] to the controller board
[F] (2 screws).
6. Re-install the HDD and put back the
controller board.
7. Replace the left rear cover.
B361I101.WMF
B361I102.WMF
B361I105.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
IEEE1394 INTERFACE (G590)
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-10 SM
1.6 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (G590)
!CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: To install the IEEE1394 option, the printer option (B361) must be installed
first. Please refer to section 1.2 for details of the printer option installation
procedure.
1. Remove the left rear cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the controller board [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the HDD [C] (2 connectors,
3 screws).
4. Remove the IEEE1394 cover [D].
5. Attach the IEEE1394 board [E] to the
controller board [F] (2 screws).
6. Re-install the HDD and put back the
controller board.
7. Remove the wire handle on the
controller panel board and place it on
the back side of the left rear cover.
8. Replace the left rear cover.
B361I101.WMF
B361I102.WMF
B361I106.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
SM 1-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
1.7 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.
2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page.
(User Tools/ Printer Settings/ List Test Print/ Config. Page)
The same data can also be printed using the printer service mode.
(Print Summary: SP1-004)
All installed options are listed in the System Reference column.
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTROLLER ERRORS
SM 2-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 CONTROLLER ERRORS
Refer to section 4.1 of the main unit service manual for descriptions on SC code
information because the GW architecture includes controller SC codes in the main
unit SC code table.
2.2 LEDS AND TEST POINTS
LEDs and test points are not used for this option (except for the NIB section
4.4).
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 3-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
!CAUTION
Before accessing the service menu, do the following:
Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LED
must not be lit or blinking).
If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed.
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main unit is communicating with a facsimile or the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory
for reading or writing data.
3.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Entering the SP mode
" 1. Press the Clear Mode key.
#$% 2. Use the keypad to enter 107.
& 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
4. Enter the Service Mode.
Printer SP
Scanner SP
Press Printer SP to enter printer SP mode.
Press Scanner SP to enter scanner SP mode.
NOTE: If you switch the machine off, any jobs stored on the hard disk using the
sample print and protected print features will be deleted.
Check first if there are any jobs stored with these features
(Printer mode: View Sample Print Jobs/View Locked Print Job).
Exiting the Service Mode
Press Exit on the LCD panel to exit from the service mode.
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-2 SM
3.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
3.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE
SP No. Description Function and Setting
1001 BitSw#1 Set Adjusts bit switch settings.
Note: Currently the bit switches are not being used.
1003 Clear Setting Not used
1004 Print Summary Prints the service summary sheet
(An error log is printed in addition to the configuration
page).
1005 Display Version Displays the version of the controller firmware.
3.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO PRINTER CONTROLLER
The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode. Refer to section 5.1 of
the main unit service manual.
SP No. Description Function and Setting
5104 A3/DLT Double
Count
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT.
0: No, 1: Yes
If # is selected, the total counter and the current user
code counter count up twice when A3 or DLT paper is
used.
5801 Memory All Clear Resets data for process control and all software counters,
and returns all modes and adjustments to their defaults
values.
section 5.1.8 of the main unit manual for details.
5907 Plug & Play Selects the brand name and the production name for
Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in
NVRAM.
7832 Detailed Display of
Self-Diagnostics
Displays the controller self-diagnostic result.
section 3.6 of this manual for details.
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
SM 3-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
3.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE
3.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE
Service Table Key
Notation What it means
[range / default /
step]
Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
adjusted in the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each
key press.
italics Comments added for your reference.
* This value is stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, the default
value (factory setting) is restored.
DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value.
SP1 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
1 Model Name Displays the model name.
2 Scanner Firmware
Version
Displays the scanner firmware version.
3 Scanner Firmware
Number
Displays the firmwares part number.
1001
4 Detail Model Name Displays the detail model name.
1002 Error Log Display Displays the error log data.
1003* FTP Port Number Changes the FTP port number.
After changing this value, do the following:
1. Run the Registry Editor
2. Access
/HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/
Ricoh/NetworkScanner
3. Change the value of PortNo to this SP
modes value
[0 65535 / 3670 / 1 step]
1004* Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary picture
processing.
[1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR]
1005* Erase Margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the
scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the
original, create a margin.
[0 5 / 0mm / 1mm step]
1006* Auto Reset Timer Adjusts the auto reset timer for the scanner
function.
If this is 0, the auto reset function is disabled.
[0, 10 99 / 60s / 1s step]
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-4 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
1* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Text / Binary / Main scan)
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
If this is 0, the MTF filter is not applied.
[0-15 / 7 / 1 step]
2* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Text / Binary / Sub scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-13 / 6 / 1 step]
3* MTF Filter Strength
(Text / Binary / Main scan)
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction for Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
[0-7 / 5 / 1 step]
4* MTF Filter Strength
(Text / Binary / Sub scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-7 / 5 / 1 step]
5* Smoothing Filter
(Text / Binary)
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text mode
when using binary picture processing mode.
A larger value could cause moir to appear in
the image.
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
6* Scanner Gamma
(Text / Binary)
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text mode
when using binary picture processing mode.
[0-6 / 4 / 1 step]
7* Brightness Notch 7
(Text / Binary)
Adjusts the image density for each image
density level for Text mode when using binary
picture processing mode.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
8* Contrast Notch 7
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
9* Threshold Level Notch 7
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 160 / 1 step]
10* Brightness Notch 6
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
11* Contrast Notch 6
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
12* Threshold Level Notch 6
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 145 / 1 step]
13* Brightness Notch 5
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
14* Contrast Notch 5
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
15* Threshold Level Notch 5
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 135 / 1 step]
16* Brightness Notch 4
(Text / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
17* Contrast Notch 4
(Text / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
18* Threshold Level Notch 4
(Text / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
2002
19* Brightness Notch 3
(Text / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
SM 3-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
20* Contrast Notch 3
(Text / Binary)
Adjusts the image density for each image
density level for Text mode when using binary
picture processing mode.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
21* Threshold Level Notch 3
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 100 / 1 step]
22* Brightness Notch 2
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
23* Contrast Notch 2
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
24* Threshold Level Notch 2
(Text / Binary) [0-255 / 85 / 1 step]
25* Brightness Notch 1
(Text / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
26* Contrast Notch 1
(Text / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
27* Threshold Level Notch 1
(Text / Binary)
[0-255 / 70 / 1 step]
28* Independent Dot Erase
(Text mode)
Selects the independent dot erase level.
With a larger SP setting, more dots are detected
as independent dots and erased.
If this is 0, independent dot erase is disabled.
[0-7 / 4 / 1 step]
2002
29* Unevenness correction
(Text mode)
Selects whether the unevenness correction is
done.
This function is like an FCI function. If this is 1,
the edges of characters in scanned images will
be smoothed.
[0: OFF, 1: ON]
1* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Text/Photo / Binary /
Main scan)
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for Text/Photo mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
If this is 0, the MTF filter is not applied.
[0-15 / 4 / 1 step]
28* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Text/Photo / Binary / Sub
scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-13 / 4 / 1 step]
3* MTF Filter Strength
(Text/Photo / Binary /
Main scan)
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction for Text/Photo mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
[0-7 / 5 / 1 step]
4* MTF Filter Strength
(Text/Photo / Binary / Sub
scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-7 / 5 / 1 step]
2003
5* Smoothing Filter
(Text/Photo / Binary)
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text/Photo
mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
A larger value could cause moir to appear in
the image.
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-6 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
6* Scanner Gamma
(Text/Photo / Binary)
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text/Photo
mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
[0-6 / 5 / 1 step]
7* Brightness Notch 7
(Text/Photo / Binary)
Adjusts the image density for each image
density level for Text/Photo mode when using
binary picture processing mode.
[0-255 / 15 / 1 step]
8* Contrast Notch 7
(Text/Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 110 / 1 step]
9* Threshold Level Notch 7
(Text/Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
10* Brightness Notch 6
(Text/Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 25 / 1 step]
11* Contrast Notch 6
(Text/Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 85 / 1 step]
12* Threshold Level Notch 6
(Text/Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
13* Brightness Notch 5
(Text/Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 27 / 1 step]
14* Contrast Notch 5
(Text/Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 51 / 1 step]
15* Threshold Level Notch 5
(Text/Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
16* Brightness Notch 4
(Text/Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 70 / 1 step]
17* Contrast Notch 4
(Text/Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 70 / 1 step]
18* Threshold Level Notch 4
(Text/Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
19* Brightness Notch 3
(Text/Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 69 / 1 step]
20* Contrast Notch 3
(Text/Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 80 / 1 step]
21* Threshold Level Notch 3
(Text/Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
22* Brightness Notch 2
(Text/Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 100 / 1 step]
23* Contrast Notch 2
(Text/Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 100 / 1 step]
24* Threshold Level Notch 2
(Text/Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
25* Brightness Notch 1
(Text/Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
26* Contrast Notch 1
(Text/Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
2003
27* Threshold Level Notch 1
(Text/Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
SM 3-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
1* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Photo / Binary / Main
scan)
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction for Photo mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
If this is 0, the MTF filter is not applied.
[0-15 / 0 / 1 step]
2* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Photo / Binary / Sub
scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-13 / 0 / 1 step]
3* MTF Filter Strength
(Photo / Binary / Main
scan)
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction for Photo mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
4* MTF Filter Strength
(Photo / Binary / Sub
scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
5* Smoothing Filter
(Photo / Binary)
Selects the smoothing pattern for Photo mode
when using binary picture processing mode.
A larger value could cause moir to appear in
the image.
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
6* Scanner Gamma
(Photo / Binary)
Selects the scanner gamma type for Photo
mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
[0-6 / 6 / 1 step]
7* Dither Matrix Filter
(Photo / Binary)
Selects the dither matrix type for Photo mode
when using binary picture processing mode.
[1-26 / 4 / 1 step]
8* Brightness Notch 7
(Photo / Binary)
Adjusts the image density for each image
density level for Photo mode when using binary
picture processing mode.
[0-255 / 60 / 1 step]
9* Contrast Notch 7
(Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
10* Threshold Level Notch 7
(Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
11* Brightness Notch 6
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 100 / 1 step]
12* Contrast Notch 6
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
13* Threshold Level Notch 6
(Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
14* Brightness Notch 5
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 120 / 1 step]
15* Contrast Notch 5
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 120 / 1 step]
16* Threshold Level Notch 5
(Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
2004
17* Brightness Notch 4
(Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-8 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
18* Contrast Notch 4
(Photo / Binary)
Adjusts the image density for each image
density level for Photo mode when using binary
picture processing mode.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
19* Threshold Level Notch 4
(Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
20* Brightness Notch 3
(Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 135 / 1 step]
21* Contrast Notch 3
(Photo / Binary) [0-255 / 135 / 1 step]
22* Threshold Level Notch 3
(Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
23* Brightness Notch 2
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 138 / 1 step]
24* Contrast Notch 2
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 133 / 1 step]
25* Threshold Level Notch 2
(Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
26* Brightness Notch 1
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 140 / 1 step]
27* Contrast Notch 1
(Photo / Binary)
[0-255 / 133 / 1 step]
2004
28* Threshold Level Notch 1
(Photo / Binary)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
1* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Grayscale / Main scan)
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main
scan direction when using grayscale processing
mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
If this is 0, the MTF filter is not applied
[0-15 / 0 / 1 step]
2* MTF Filter Coefficient
(Grayscale / Sub scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-13 / 0 / 1 step]
3* MTF Filter Strength
(Grayscale / Main scan)
Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan
direction when using grayscale processing
mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
4* MTF Filter Strength
(Grayscale / Sub scan)
As above, for sub scan
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
5* Smoothing Filter
(Grayscale)
Selects the smoothing pattern when using
grayscale processing mode.
A larger value could cause moir to appear in
the image.
[0-7 / 0 / 1 step]
2005
6* Scanner Gamma
(Grayscale)
Selects the scanner gamma type when using
grayscale processing mode.
[0-6 / 3 / 1 step]
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
SM 3-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
7* Brightness Notch 7
(Grayscale)
Adjusts the image density for each image
density level when using the grayscale
processing mode.
[0-255 / 98 / 1 step]
8* Contrast Notch 7
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 98 / 1 step]
9* Threshold Level Notch 7
(Grayscale)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 98 / 1 step]
10* Brightness Notch 6
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 108 / 1 step]
11* Contrast Notch 6
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 108 / 1 step]
12* Threshold Level Notch 6
(Grayscale)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 108 / 1 step]
13* Brightness Notch 5
(Grayscale)
[0-255 / 118 / 1 step]
14* Contrast Notch 5
(Grayscale)
[0-255 / 118 / 1 step]
15* Threshold Level Notch 5
(Grayscale)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 118 / 1 step]
16* Brightness Notch 4
(Grayscale)
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
17* Contrast Notch 4
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
18* Threshold Level Notch 4
(Grayscale)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 128 / 1 step]
19* Brightness Notch 3
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 138 / 1 step]
20* Contrast Notch 3
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 138 / 1 step]
21* Threshold Level Notch 3
(Grayscale)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 138 / 1 step]
22* Brightness Notch 2
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 148 / 1 step]
23* Contrast Notch 2
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 148 / 1 step]
24* Threshold Level Notch 2
(Grayscale)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 148 / 1 step]
25* Brightness Notch 1
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 158 / 1 step]
26* Contrast Notch 1
(Grayscale) [0-255 / 158 / 1 step]
2005
27* Threshold Level Notch 1
(Grayscale)
This SP is not available.
[0-255 / 158 / 1 step]
2006 1* Compression Ratio
(Normal image)
Selects the compression ratio for grayscale
processing mode.
For a lower compression rate, input a smaller
value.
[5-95 / 50 / 1 step]
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-10 SM
SP2 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
2* Compression Ratio
(High Quality image) [5-95 / 60 / 1 step]
2006
3* Compression Ratio
(Low Quality image) [5-95 / 40 / 1 step]
SP8 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
8001* Delivery Server IP
Address
Sets the IP address for the delivery server.
[000.000.000.000]
1* Delivery Re-try
(Interval)
Sets the delivery re-try interval.
[60-999 / 300s / 1s step]
8002
2* Delivery Re-try
(Number of re-try)
Sets the number of delivery re-tries.
If this is 0, the machine will not re-try to send
an image to the delivery server.
[0-99 / 3 times / 1 time step]
8003* ECabinet IP Address Sets the IP address for the eCabinet.
[000.000.000.000]
8004* Network Error Display
Time
Selects the length of time that the network error
message for the scanner utilities is displayed.
If this is 0, the error message is displayed until
the error is solved.
[0-999 / 300 s / 1 s step]
SP9 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
1 Sysop
2 Dapp
3 Rapp
4 Ui
5 Nas
6 Miw
7 Djm
8 Hpim
9001
9 mib
Bit switches for debugging. DFU
FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
SM 3-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
3.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
Firmware updating procedure is described in section 5.2 of the main unit service
manual.
3.5 POWER-ON SELF TEST
The controller tests the following devices at power-on. If an error is detected, an
error code is stored in the controller board.
CPU, ASIC and clock
Flash ROM
Resident and optional SDRAM
Parallel interface
NIB
IEEE1394 interface (if installed)
NVRAM
HDD
Refer to section 4.1.2 of the main unit service manual for how to check the error
codes (SP 7-832).
3.6 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST
In addition to the power-on self test, you can set the machine in a more detailed
diagnostic mode to test other components and conditions.
It requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).
1. Turn off the machine and attach the loop-back connector to the parallel
interface.
2. Turn on the machine while pressing the On Line key and # Enter key
together.
3. The machine prints the diagnostic report automatically.
Refer to section 4.1.2 of the main unit service manual for how to check the
error codes (SP 7-832).
USER PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-12 SM
3.7 USER PROGRAM MODE
3.7.1 PRINTER USER PROGRAM MODE
Press the Printer key on the operation panel to enter the printer mode.
Press the User Tools/Counter , then select Printer Settings to change
printer settings.
User Mode Tree
Job Separation (1-bin shift tray required)
Panel Locki ng Mai ntenance
Pri nter Mode
(Printer Key pressed)
Bypass Size
Misfeed Recovery
Print Error Report
Auto Conti nue
Memory Overfl ow
Duplex (optional duplex unit required)
Memory Usage
Unit of Measure
Edge Smoothi ng
Resol uti on
Toner Savi ng
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
Orientation
Form Li nes
Font Source
View Sample Print Jobs
View Locked Print Jobs
Paper Input
List/Test Print
System
Host Interface
PCL Menu
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbot Set
User Tool s/
Printer Settings
Config. Sheet
Menu Li st
PCL Confi g. Page
PS Font List
Hex Dump
B362M501.WMF
USER PROGRAM MODE
SM 3-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
3.7.2 SCANNER USER PROGRAM MODE
Press the User Tools/Counter , then select Scanner Settings to change
scanner settings.
User Mode Tree
User Tool s/
Scanner Features
Basi c Setti ngs
Compressi on (Bl ack & Whi te)
Function Priority
Del i very/ Store Connecti on Ti me out
Compressi on (Grayscal e)
Del i very Opti on
SADF Auto Reset Ti mer
Ori gi nal Setti ng
Original Orientation Priority
Mi xed Ori gi nal s Si zes Pri ori ty
Scanner Setti ngs
Program Change
Program 1 ~ 5
Initial Setup
Del ete
Subj ect Setti ngs Program Change
1 ~ 12
Del ete
B361 M501.WMF
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
OVERVIEW
SM 4-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 OVERVIEW
This machine uses the GW architecture. To enable the printer features, just install
the printer option ROM DIMM on the controller.
Main components:
CPU: QED RM5231
SIMAC: GW architecture ASIC. It controls all the functions of the controller
board.
Flash ROM: 8MB Flash ROM for the system program
SDRAM (resident): 32 MB SDRAM, expandable with 32 MB or 64 MB optional
SDRAM.
NVRAM: Stores the controller settings
HDD: Used to store additional soft fonts. Also used for collation, locked print,
sample print and form overlay
IEEE 1284 interface
Optional components:
PostScript3 DIMM
Memory DIMM
NIB
IEEE1394 interface
I EEE1284 I C Card
Printer
(Scanner)
DI MM
PS3
RAM
(32/ 64 MB)
NI B
I EEE1394
I C Card I / F I DE Sl ot 1 Sl ot 2
SDRAM
DI MM
Syst em
Fl ash ROM
( 8 MB)
Resi dent
SDRAM
( 32 MB)
SI MAC CPU
NVRAM
(32 kB)
PCI I / F
PCI I / F
OPTI ON OPTI ON OPTI ON OPTI ON
Fl ash ROM
( 4 MB)
HDD
Fl ash ROM DI MM ( 4/ 8 MB)
Controller
Mother Board
BI CU
B362D501.WMF
CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-2 SM
4.2 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
4.2.1 SAMPLE PRINT
This feature was formerly known as Proof Print. This function gives users a
chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.
The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 5 GB. This
partition is also used by the collation and locked print features.
The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using locked print.
The maximum number of pages is 2,000, including jobs using locked print and
collation.
4.2.2 LOCKED PRINT
Using this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until
the user inputs an ID at the machines operation panel. This ID must match the ID
that was input with the printer driver.
Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.
Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.
The hard disk can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.
The maximum number of pages is 2,000, including jobs using sample print and
collation.
Locked print uses the same hard disk partition as sample print and collation,
which is 5 GB.
CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
SM 4-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.2.3 PAPER SOURCE SELECTION
Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)
The Tray Priority setting determines the start
of the tray search when the user selects
Auto Tray Select with the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray with
the specified paper size and type.
When no tray contains paper that matches
the paper size and type specified by the
driver, the controller stops printing until the
user loads the correct paper.
The Tray Priority setting can be specified
using the Paper Size Setting in the user
tools.
(User Tools/ System Settings/ Paper Size
Settings)
NOTE: The by-pass tray is not part of the tray search.
Tray Lock
If Tray Lock is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the locked tray in the tray
search process.
The Tray Lock setting can be specified by selecting No for the Apply Auto Paper
Select setting in the Paper Size Setting screen in the user tools.
(User Tools/ System Settings/ Paper Size Settings)
NOTE: The by-pass feeder cannot be locked.
Manual Tray Select
If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,
the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.
Priority Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
LCT (Optional)
Tray 3 (Optional)
Start of Tray Search
Tray 4 (Optional)
B362D502.WMF
CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-4 SM
4.2.4 AUTO CONTINUE
When this function is enabled, the machine stops printing and cancels the print job
if there is no paper tray which matches the paper size and paper type specified by
the driver.
If Auto Continue is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,
15 minutes) for the correct size paper to be set in the tray, then cancels the print
job if the interval expires.
The interval can set with the Printer Settings in the user tools.
(User Tools/ Printer Settings/ System/ Auto Continue)
If Auto Continue is disabled, the machine will not print the job, but will not cancel it,
so the job stays in the print queue.
NOTE: The default setting for Auto Continue is Off.
Auto Conti nue OFF
I mmedi atel y
1 mi nute
5 mi nute
10 mi nute
15 mi nute
Job stays i n the pri nter
Job i s i mmedi at el y cancel ed
Job i s cancel ed af t er 1 mi nut e
If no paper tray matches the paper size and paper type specified by the driver:
and so on
B362D512.WMF
CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
SM 4-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.2.5 PAPER OUTPUT TRAY
The default paper output tray for each application (copy/fax/printer) can be
selected using the System Settings menu in the user tools.
(User Tools/ System Settings/ General Features)
If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies the default tray,
the default paper output tray is used.
Output Tray Selected
If an output tray is specified by the driver, it overrides the default tray setting in
the user tools.
If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the default
paper output tray.
If the mailbox unit is installed, paper larger than B4 cannot be printed to the
standard (internal) tray.
If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller stops
printing until the overflow detector goes off.
Sequential Stacking
When the nine-tray mailbox is selected as the output tray and
Printer Default is specified as the output tray in the driver, the
machine automatically sends the output to the top tray (1st
tray). When that tray fills up, the machine sends the output to
the next tray.
This feature is called Sequential Stacking.
If a tray becomes full and paper is detected in the next tray,
the machine displays an error and stops printing.
When paper in the next tray is removed, the machine
automatically resumes printing to the next tray.
If all trays become full (overflow detected in all trays), the
machine displays an error and stops printing. This time, all
paper in all trays must be removed.
4.2.6 DUPLEX PRINTING
Duplex printing is available with all output bin options but not all paper sizes. If a
job specifies duplex printing but the paper size to be used cannot be used by the
duplex unit, the job will be printed single-sided.
When the by-pass feeder is selected as the paper source, duplex printing is
automatically disabled.
Top tray (1st tray)
2nd tray
3rd tray
8th tray
Lowest tray (9th tray)
4th, 5th, 6th, and so on
B362D509.WMF
CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-6 SM
4.2.7 STAPLING
Stapling is available when the two-tray (2250-sheet) finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
is installed.
The finishers have the following stapling positions.
Depending on the paper orientation, the image may have to be rotated. The
image rotation is done by the controller.
There is a limit for the number of sheets which can be stapled. If a job has more
than this number, it will not be stapled.
4.2.8 PUNCHING
Punching is available only when the punch kit is installed with the two-tray finisher.
The number of holes (2, 3, or 4 holes) depends on the type of punch kit.
There is only one punch position available, so the relationship between the
punching position and the printed image depends on the paper feeding
orientation and image rotation.
Paper Feed Di recti on
(Printed side)
Paper Feed Di recti on
(Printed side)
St apl ed 2 pl aces
1000 Fi ni sher
2 Tray Finisher
B362D510.WMF
Paper Feed Direction
(Printed side)
2 Tray Finisher
Punching Position
B362D511.WMF
SCANNER FUNCTIONS
SM 4-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.3 SCANNER FUNCTIONS
4.3.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE
The image processing for scanner mode is done in the IPU chip on the BICU
board. The IPU chip chooses the most suitable image processing methods
(gamma tables, dither patterns, etc) depending on the settings made in the driver.
The image compression method can be selected with SP mode (MR/MH/MMR for
binary picture processing, JPEG for grayscale processing).
Whether the user selects the image mode using the driver (TWAIN mode) or from
the operation panel (Delivery mode), the IPU chip does the image processing using
the appropriate image processing methods mentioned above.
Image Data Path
1. Image Store/Image Delivery Mode
The user can select the following modes from the LCD.
1) Delivery only
2) Store only
3) Store and delivery
After image processing and image compression, all image data for the job are
stored in the printer controller HDD using TIFF file format (binary picture
processing) or JPEG file format (grayscale processing). The type of TIFF format
used depends on the users scanner settings.
When delivery mode is selected, the controller creates a file which contains the
destination and page information, then the controller sends the file to a server.
2. Twain Mode
After image processing and image compression, the data (TIFF or JPEG) is sent
to the scanner Twain driver directory on the computer.
Cont rol l er SBU
I mage
Scanni ng
Ser ver
HDD
Fi l e
BI CU
I mage
Pr ocessi ng
I mage
Compr essi on
NI B
B361D500.WMF
Cont r ol l er SBU
I mage
Scanni ng
I mage
BI CU
I mage
Pr ocessi ng
I mage
Compr essi on
NI B
PC
B361D501.WMF
NIB
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-8 SM
4.4 NIB
4.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
The Flash ROM contains the NIB firmware. The firmware can be upgraded using
an IC card connected to the controller board.
4.4.2 LED INDICATORS
Description On Off
LED1 (Green): Link status Link success Link failure
LED2 (Yellow): Data rate 100 Mbps 10 Mbps
NI B
Fl ash ROM
4MB
EEPROM
PHY
DP83846
LED
Oscillator
LED
Filter Module
RJ45
Controller
Network
C
N
2
N
I
B
I
/
F
(
C
N
1
2
)
B362D503.WMF
LED1 (Green)
LED2 (Yel l ow)
B362D508.WMF
IEEE1394 INTERFACE
SM 4-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.5 IEEE1394 INTERFACE
4.5.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware Specification
Interface: IEEE1394 (6 pins)
(no power supply, cable power repeated, IEEE1394a-2000 compliant)
Ports: 2 ports
Data rates: 400Mbps/200Mbps/100Mbps
System Requirements
PC: Windows PC with IEEE1394 port
OS: Microsoft Windows 2000 upgraded with service pack 1
Cable length: 4.5m (15ft)
4.5.2 IEEE1394
IEEE1394, also known as FireWire (a name patented by Apple), is an easy-to-use
peer-to-peer networking technology allowing speeds of up to 400 Mbps.
The current standard contains the following features, which are supported in most
devices:
Hot swapping (cables can be connected and disconnected while the
computer and other devices are switched on)
Peer-to-peer networking (no hub required)
No terminator or device ID is required, unlike SCSI
Automatic configuration of devices upon start-up, or plug and play.
Real-time data transfer at 100, 200, and 400 Mbps
Common connectors for different devices
The cable length is limited to 4.5 m (15ft). However, up to 16 cables and 63
devices can be connected to an IEEE1394 network.
IEEE1394 cables can be either 4-pin (data only) or 6-pin (data and power).
IEEE1394 allows either 6-pin or 4-pin connectors. However, this machine only uses
the 6-pin connectors. The machine has two 6-pin ports.
I EEE1394 Board
IEEE1394 I/F
IEEE1394 I/F
B362D506.WMF
B362V503.WMF
IEEE1394 INTERFACE
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-10 SM
4.5.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
PHY: Physical layer control device
Link: Link layer control device
EEPROM: 256-byte ROM
4.5.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT
Pin
No.
Signal Description
1 Cable Power
2 GND
3 Receive strobe
4 Transmit data
5 Receive data
6 Transmit strobe
IEEE1394 Board
1394 I / F
1394 I / F
PHY
TSB41AB2
Cl ock
Osci l l ator
Link
TSB12LV23A
EEPROM
O
p
t
i
o
n
I
/
F
(
C
N
4
)
PC Controller
B362D505.WMF
Pin 1
Pin 6
B362D507.WMF
Pin assignment
Pin 1 Pin 4
Pin 2 Pin 3
Pin 5 Pin 6
IEEE1394 INTERFACE
SM 4-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.5.5 REMARKS ABOUT THIS INTERFACE KIT
Note the following points about this unit.
The machine does not print reports specifically for IEEE1394. Just print the
Configuration Page at installation to check that the machine recognizes the card.
There is no spooler or print queue. If a computer tries to print over the IEEE1394
while the printer is busy, the IEEE1394 interface card inside the printer will return
a busy signal.
After starting a job using IEEE1394, do not switch the printer off until the job has
been completed. Even though the printer may appear to be dead, it may be in
the middle of an IEEE1394 protocol exchange with the computer.
When using IEEE1394, it is not possible to check the printer status from the
computer with a utility such as Printer Manager for Client.
4.5.6 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES
If there are problems printing using the IEEE1394 interface, check the following.
Is the computer using Windows 2000 with service pack 1?
Has the interface card been replaced recently? Each card has an individual
address, similar to the MAC address in an Ethernet card. If the card was
changed, the driver cannot find the old card. The new card is another device and
a new printer appears in Windows Control panel, and this must be configured in
the same way as the printer that was replaced (the old printer icon in Windows
Control Panel should be deleted) has to be reconfigured.
Is there a loop somewhere in the network? An IEEE1394 network must be a
chain or a branched chain. There can be no loops.
Try to find out where in the chain the problem is occurring. Test the machine
one-to-one with the computer to determine if the printer is defective (when the
printers interface cable is plugged in, the computer should see Printer Ready;
when the cable is disconnected, the computer should see Offline).
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-12 SM
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY
4.6.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 PRINTER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615902 A 1.34
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine could not be used with Axis print servers.
2. Part of print data (frame) could not be printed during
Custom size printing in PCL 6.
B3615902 B 1.35
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine sometimes freezes after pressing the
Offline key while the data is being printed out (PCL).
2. The machine sometimes freezes while downloading PCL
fonts.
3. The machine sometimes does not re-start printing after
the paper is removed from the output tray following an
overflow.
4. The machine sometimes freezes when both Stapling and
Punching have been selected from the driver for a paper
size with which neither function is permitted.
B3615902 C 1.36
Change in Specification:
(Module added for China/Taiwan version).
B3615902 D 2.00.1
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Modified for use with the Capture function.
2. Modified so that the printer controller can detect the
individual codes in the data headers of a print job sent
with both PCL and PS codes, thereby allowing the
machine to switch between the 2 PDL emulations
accordingly (PCL/PS). The A-C2 prints each page in its
original format, even if contained in the same file.
3. Some German umlaut characters cannot be printed out
correctly with the following fonts when using the PCL6
driver on Windows NT4.0/95/ 98/Me: Albertus Medium,
Antique Olive, Humanst521 BT, Zurich BlkEx BT.
B3615902 E 3.00
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. A print job received when the machine switches from On
to Off Mode may not be printed out.
2. After deleting a locked print document, it is possible to
press the delete button without selecting any other locked
print documents.
3. The operation panel may flicker slightly after the operator
performs settings in the Printer Features window very
quickly (i.e. window is open for a very short time).
B3615902 F 3.02
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When the undefined command, "<ESC>&k#w" is
received, it appears on the output as a character string
[e.g. as "<ESC>&k6w"].
2. The punch error is logged in the error report whenever
feeding from the Bypass Tray under any print job
conditions (even when not using the punch unit).
3. When Letterhead is selected as the paper type for the
Bypass tray, the tray icon on the operation panel displays
a 2, indicating that Duplex copies can be made (not
permissible by specification).
4. When printing in duplex, the last odd page is printed on
the reverse side of the last sheet (see FPR reply #OTS-
01-2651 of #RE01060006 for details).
Change in Specification:
1. Supports the Status Readback function of the PCL5e.
2. Added symbol sets PC-858, Latin 9 and Roman 9 for
display of the EURO currency symbol.
B3615902 G 3.05
Firmware modified to correct the following:
The XL ERROR occurs when specifying symbol sets
SETvmath (6M), SETvint (13J) and SETvus (14J) -- which
are not supported in PCLXL.
Change in Specification:
PCL6: Added symbol sets PC-858, Latin 9 and Roman 9 for
display of the Euro currency symbol.
B3615902 H 3.08
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-14 SM
4.6.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 SCANNER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615901 C 2.05
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The mainframe stalls if it receives the command to store
a document while in the process of deleting another
document. Application used: Desktop Binder V2.
B3615901 D 2.07
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Software changed so that the original can be placed on
the exposure glass just as with copying, i.e. there is no
need to turn the original upside-down (for both
directions).
Ver.2.07(B3615901D) Ver.2.27(B3615901E)
2. Mixed Original Mode can now be used with the Twain
driver ver.3.12.
When using this driver, please note the following:
Be sure to use Netfile software ver.2.17 or newer.
Be sure to install ADF ROM ver.1.76 or newer, as older
versions will cause image stretching along the sub-scan
direction with 425 dpi and 555-557 dpi scanning.
B3615901 E 2.27
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 NCS (NIB) MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585921 C 1.61
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. After a communication failure breaks the connection
between the NIB and Network Twain driver, the driver is
unable to re-establish connection (unless the A-C2 is
powered Off/On).
2. When 80000000(H) or more is registered in the Manager
IPX Address 2 (Web Status Monitor), the setting is
changed to an unspecified one.
3. If several print jobs are sent one after another to the NIB
via the IPP port of SmartNetMonitor for Client, the NIB
terminates printing. (Also, a print job sent by the standard
IPP port may be canceled).
4. The USTATUS information may be lost, depending on
when the USTATUS is sent during bi-directional
communication over TCP/IP port 9100.
5. With bi-directional communication enabled for TCP port
9100, printing operation is inhibited after data is sent from
an application utility that does not support bi-directional
communication (e.g. Port Navi, MDP).
6. The IP address 0.0.0.0 can be set by the ifconfig
command.
7. The wording of the message for saving data at logoff was
corrected from datas to data.
Change in Specification:
1. Information such as the IP address and printing protocol
(Client PCs) was added to the syslog file for access
restriction.
2. The display width for the ID of the prnlog command with
telnet, rsh, and ftp was expanded from 2 to 10 digits.
G0585921 D 1.66
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When using signature level 2 on the NetWare Server, the
printer does not connect to the NetWare Server.
2. The printer cannot print more than one job sent from a
CICS application on an IBM Main Frame (e.g. OS/390)
when the application uses lpd protocol unique to CICS.
3. The lpd process on the printer is interrupted when
lpq/lprm commands with arguments are executed more
than 50 times after the printer has been turned on.
4. When trying to access the Web Status Monitor for a
printer during printing via the ipp port, the httpd process
is occasionally interrupted.
5. When there are several messages displayed, such as
error messages after a malfunction, Apple Talk protocol
is occasionally interrupted during printing.
6. When the printer is not ready due to an open cover, the
message "Printer is not ready" is not indicated in lpd or
stat command.
7. When executing the prnlog command designate job ID
0, no information is indicated.
G0585921 E 1.77
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-16 SM
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Continued from previous page
8. Even when the parameter settings changed by telnet are
not successfully written into the NVRAM, no error
message is indicated as a command line.
9. The software allows any name to be entered as the
computer name for NetBEUI.
10. When printing data with 0 byte by rcp, the NIB does not
respond to the waiting client PC.
11. No settings are valid with the install shell of RedHat Linux
Ver.7.1.
Change in Specification:
1. 2-byte code characters cannot be entered for a device
name.
G0585921 E 1.77
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. No error message is displayed in Netscape Navigator
even when an incorrect URL is input in the address bar.
2. Up to 32 characters can be input in the NetBEUI
configuration screen Comment box, even though
specification is 31 characters maximum.
3. The PS status cannot be displayed using the stat
command (lpq command for lpr).
4. If Trap is selected for the Access Type in the SNMP
Configuration screen during the snmpd process,
communication may be cut off.
5. The NIB does not respond to the lprm command (root
directory) from a FreeBSD host computer.
6. If an undefined remote printer number is input in the
Netware configuration page, communication between the
NIB and Netware Server will be cut off.
Change in Specification:
1. Two or more print queues can be attached to a single
printer object (for further details, refer to TechMail
RC010430).
2. TCP Ports 11021 and 11023 (Design use) have been
closed.
G0585921 F 1.79
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The following items have been fixed:
1. The controller freezes if disconnected while data
containing the Readback command is being printed out
with ftp/rsh.
2. Display corrected for when the operator tries to execute
Spool Printing Job List with SmartNetMonitor for Admin
on the A-C2/R-C2:
Previous: Spool printing is not available. Active spool
printing from the device or related software
New: Error 404
3. The Fax Management Tool cannot be used while any of
the NIB setting(s) are being changed.
4. The parameters of sysLocation and sysContact cannot
be set correctly using the snmp command with telnet.
5. The controller freezes when a non-existent file is
specified for rcp transmission.
6. Cannot connect to Novel NDS (GFPR #RC02010007):
The nearest NetWare Server informs the NIB of the
alternate NetWare Server address, where the NDS
replica is stored, however the NIB is unable to interpret
the message.
Change in Specification:
1. SNMP vulnerability
SNMP security vulnerabilities reported by CERT on
Feb.12, 2002 has been tested using the PROTOS c06-
snmpv1 test suite and we have verified the fixes.
-CERT: http://www.cert.org/advisories/CA-2002- 03.html
-PROTOS c06-snmpv1 test suite
:
http://www.ee.oulu.fi/research/ouspg/protos/testing/c06/snmp
v1/
2. Some reserved (unused) TCP ports that were open have
been closed, e.g. FTP.
G0585921 G 1.81
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-18 SM
4.6.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 NFA MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
(NETFILE)
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585922 C 1.42.02
When the machine sends 2 or more files to the Document
Server within 1 second (as when sending backed up files just
after the Server recovers), the first 2 documents receive the
same filename and the first is therefore erased. The software
has been modified so that file naming can be controlled at the
ms level, preventing the file from being deleted.
G0585922 D 1.42.04
NOTE: When using scanner firmware B3615901D, NFA
firmware version 2.17 or later should be used.
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The MFP stalls when setting the I/O device from two
ScanRouter V2 Professional servers at the same time.
2. When setting the I/O device from ScanRouter V2
Professional, the fax delivery settings sometimes
disappear.
3. When a print request is issued from the Document server
at the MFP or the DeskTopBinder V2 without the correct
paper size in the tray, the MFP does not send the error to
the operation panel or DeskTopBinder V2, and the MFP
does not print the document.
G0585922 F 2.17
Minor program changes for Japanese model only.
G0585922 G 2.19
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 PS3 MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
(PS3)
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G5775906 B 1.00
1. With print jobs containing mixed duplex/simplex pages,
the job comes out either all simplex or all duplex.
2. When there are different settings set for each page of the
print job (e.g. paper type, size), only one page is printed
out.
3. If an input tray is locked as the priority tray (using Print
Tray Priority) and Auto Continue has been set to 0
minutes, an SC error is displayed when printing out
more than two pages of a PS config. page.
4. The product name for Pointy and Print cannot be
changed.
G5775906 C 1.03
1. While downloading PS fonts to a machine, the correct
PS serial number cannot be output.
2. PS error occurs when the following conditions have
been met:
- Original size is the same as that loaded in the locked
tray(s).
- The paper type is not specified in the driver.
- AutoSelect Tray is selected in the driver.
3. If the machine receives an A5 print job while Error Skip
is activated and there is no A5 loaded in any tray, the
operation panel will display Load A5 Paper (LEF), even
though specification only supports A5 SEF.
4. Printing out the PS Configuration page:
Even though specification requires the machine to prompt
the operator to load A4/LT plain when there are no trays
containing plain or recycled paper, the machine does not
display the message and allows the configuration page to
be printed out onto any paper type.
G5775906 D 1.05
Rev. 09/2002
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 5-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 PRINTER
Printing Speed: Maximum 45 ppm (A4/LT LEF): B004/B007 model
Maximum 35 ppm (A4/LT LEF): B003/B006 model
Printer Languages: PCL6/PCL5e
PostScript 3 (option)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream) - an original
Ricoh PDL)
Resolution: 600 dpi (PCL 6/PCL5e/PS3/RPCS)
300 dpi (PCL5e/PS3)
Resident Fonts: PCL:
35 Intellifonts
10 True Type fonts
PS3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces: Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1 (standard)
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T) (option)
IEEE1394 (option)
Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, Apple Talk
Memory:
Maximum 96 MB
(Standard 32 MB + 32 MB/64MB optional DIMM)
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-2 SM
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper Size (W x L)
Paper Trays
Main Unit/Option
By-pass
Tray
LCT Duplex
US Eur/Asia
A3 297 x 420 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y/Y Y
#
N Y
B4 257 x 364 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y/Y Y/Y Y
#
N Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y/Y Y/Y Y
#
Y Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y/Y Y
#
N Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm N N Y
#
N N
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N Y
C
N N
B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm N N N N N
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N Y
C
N N
Ledger 11 x 17 Y/Y Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Legal 8.5 x 14 Y/Y Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Letter SEF 8.5 x 11 Y/Y Y/Y Y
#
N Y
Letter LEF 11 x 8.5 Y/Y Y/Y Y
#
Y Y
Half Letter SEF 5.5 x 8.5 Y/Y Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Half Letter LEF 8.5 x 5.5 N N N N N
Executive SEF 7.25 x 10.5 Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Executive LEF 10.5 x 7.25 N N Y
#
N Y
F 8 x 13 Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Foolscap 8.5 x 13 Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Folio 8.25 x 13 Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Com10 Env. 4.125 x 9.5 N N N N N
Monarch Env. 3.875 x 7.5 N N N N N
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N N N N N
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N N N N N
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N N N N N
8K 267 x 390 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
/Y
#
Y
#
N Y
Custom Minimum:
100 x 297 mm
Maximum:
148 x 600 mm
N N Y
C
N N
Remarks:
Y Supported. The paper size sensor detects the paper size.
Y
#
Supported. The user has to select the correct paper size for the tray.
Y
C
Supported. The user has to enter the width and length of the paper.
N Not supported.
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 5-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
1.2 SCANNER
Standard Scanner
Resolution:
Main scan/Sub scan
600 dpi
Available scanning
Resolution Range:
Twain Mode:
Book Mode (Main scan/Sub scan)
100 ~ 2400 dpi
ADF Mode (Main scan/Sub scan)
100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
Book and ADF Mode (Main scan/Sub scan)
100 ~ 600 dpi
Grayscales: 8 bits/pixel
Scanning
Throughput:
25 spm for TWAIN
53 spm for Delivery mode
(A4L, ADF mode)
Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP)
Compression
Method:
MH, MR, MMR (Binary Picture Processing)
JPEG (Grayscale Processing)
Video Memory
Capacity:
8.3 MB (Twain)
24.9 MB (Delivery mode)
Image Storage
Capacity:
Number of originals per file: Maximum 160 pages
Maximum of files: 3000 files
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-4 SM
2. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
2.1 PRINTER
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer allows you to select which components to install.
PRINTER DRIVERS
Printer Language
Windows
95/98/ME
Windows NT4.0 Windows 2000 Macintosh
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes No
PCL 5e Yes Yes Yes No
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
RPCS Yes Yes Yes No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is
provided with the driver.
UTILITY SOFTWARE
Software Description
Agfa Font Manager
(Win 95/98/ME, NT4, 2000)
A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
(Win 95/98/ME, NT4, 2000)
A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB
setup utilities are also available.
SmartNetMonitor for Client
(Win 95/98/ME, NT4, 2000)
A printer management utility for client users. Peer-to-peer
printing utility and parallel/recovery printing functions are
included.
1394 Utility (Win 2000) A utility for removal IEEE 1394 printers.
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
(Win 95/98/ME, NT4, 2000)
A utility for document management
LAN-Fax M1
(Win 95/98/ME, NT4, 2000)
PC LAN FAX driver
Address Book
(Win 95/98/ME, NT4, 2000)
A utility for PC LAN FAX.
Printer Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for printing
from Macintosh clients.
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 5-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
2.2 SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.
SCANNER DRIVER
Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT3.51/NT4.0/2000
SCANNER UTILITIES
Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000
Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-6 SM
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
3.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Item Machine Code No. Remarks
Printer Module
(ROM DIMM)
B362 1
Printer/Scanner
Module
(ROM DIMM)
B361 1
Option
Mailbox G909 6
Mailbox Bridge Unit G912 7
Internal Option
NIB G574 3
PostScript3 G577 2
Memory 64 MB G579
IEEE1394 G590 4
B362V502.WMF
Control l er Board
SI MAC
P
a
r
a
l
l
e
l
I
/
F
I
C
C
a
r
d
I
/
F
NVRAM
C
N
1
2
C
N
7
(
S
L
O
T
1
)
C
N
8
(
S
L
O
T
2
)
C
N
2
CPU
C
N
1
NI B
I EEE1394 Board
Pri nter DI MM
or
Printer/
Scanner
DI MM
PS3
DI MM
Memory DI MM
B362V501.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FAX UNIT B360
INSTALLATION
FAX UNIT
SM 1-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
0
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 FAX UNIT
1.1.1 CAUTIONS
NOTE: 1) Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2) Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3) Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4) Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
5) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical
storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
6) If there is a gas leak, do not use the telephone in the vicinity of the leak
to report it.
!CAUTION
1. Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main power and operation
switches, and disconnect the power cord.
2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if
a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same
or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used
batteries in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
FAX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-2 SM
1.1.2 FLOW CHART
Before installing the fax unit and/or fax options, refer to the following flow chart.
Will you be installing the Fax
Function Upgrade Unit and/or
Expansion Memory?
START
Install the Fax Function Upgrade
Unit and/or Expansion Memory
to the FCU board.
Yes
Will you be installing the G3
Interface Unit (CH1)?
No
Will you be installing the ISDN
Option?
Install the CCUIF board and
optin ISDN board to the FCU
board. (Upside connector on the
CCUIF board)
Remove the small plate of the
FCU cover.
Will you be installing the ISDN
Option?
Will you be installing the G3
Interface Unit (CH2)?
Install the CCUIF board and
optin G3 board to the FCU
board. (Downside connector on
the CCUIF board)
Attach the option NCU board
to the NCU unit. (Downside of
the NCU unit).
Install the optin ISDN board to
the FCU board. (Upside
connector on the CCUIF board)
Remove the small plate of the
FCU cover.
Insert the FCU baord to the machine and attach the NCU unit to the machiene.
Reaasemble the operation panel and affix the decals.
Install the handset.
Install the CCUIF board and
optin G3 board to the FCU
board. (Upside connector on the
CCUIF board)
Attach the option NCU board
to the NCU unit. (Upside of the
NCU unit).
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Will you be installing the
handset?
* USA model only
END
Yes
No
No
B360I501.WMF
FAX UNIT
SM 1-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
0
1.1.3 FAX OPTION TYPE 1045 INSTALLATION
!CAUTION
Before installing this option, do the following:
1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
2. Press the operation switch to enter standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit, then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.
1. Remove the small cover [A] (1 screw) and connector [B].
2. Remove the left rear cover [C] (2 screws), the rear upper cover [D] (2 screws)
and the rear lower cover [E] (4 screws).
3. Attach the NCU unit [F] to the machine (2 screws).
NOTE: If any G3 Interface Unit Type 1045 has to been installed, attach the
additional NCU boards to the NCU unit before attaching the NCU unit
to the machine. Refer to the Installation Procedure for the G3 Interface
Unit Type 1045.
B360I103.WMF
B360I102.WMF
B360I101.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
FAX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-4 SM
4. Remove the FCU cover [A] (2 screws) and the controller unit [B] (2 screws).
5. Turn on the battery switch (SW1) [C] on the FCU board [F], connect the
harness [D] to the FCU board. Then slide the FCU board into the right slot of
the expansion box.
NOTE: If any following options will be installed at the same time, connect the
option board to the FCU board before sliding the FCU board into the
expansion box. Refer to the Installation Procedure of each option.
Fax Function Upgrade Type 185
G3 Interface Unit Type 1045
ISDN option Type 1045
6. Attach the edge clamp [E] to the bottom of the expansion box, then clamp the
FCU harness [D].
7. Machine Codes B003 and B004: Attach the Fax Function DIMM to slot 1
(CN7) on the controller board.
Machine Codes B006 and B007: You dont have to attach the Fax Function
DIMM to the controller board.
NOTE: Slot 1 on the Controller PCB is for the Function DIMM (Fax DIMM, Printer
DIMM or Printer/Scanner DIMM). Only 1 Function DIMM can be installed
on the Controller PCB. The Fax Function is built into Printer and
Printer/Scanner DIMM. When installing the Fax Option, there is no need to
install the Fax Function DIMM if the Printer or Printer/Scanner Function
DIMM is already installed.
B360I104.WMF
B360I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
Rev. 04/2002
FAX UNIT
SM 1-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
0
8. Attach the harness clamps [A] and connect the FCU harness [B] to the NCU
board. Then clamp the harness as shown.
9. Reattach the FCU cover and the controller unit.
NOTE: If the ISDN option is installed, cut away the small part from the FCU
cover for the ISDN connector. Refer to the Installation Procedure for
the ISDN Option Type 1045.
10. Remove parts [C] and [D], then install parts [E], [F] and [G]. Attach the super
G3 decal [H] to the front cover as shown.
11. Cut away the telephone connector cover [I]. Attach the FCC decal and the
serial number decal [J] to the rear cover as shown.
12. Reattach the covers.
B360I106.WMF
B366I107.WMF
B360I107.WMF
[A]
[I]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[H]
[B]
[G]
[J]
FAX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-6 SM
13. If the ADF has been installed, insert the stamp cartridge [A] into the ADF as
shown.
14. Connect the telephone line to the LINE jack at the rear of the machine.
15. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch.
16. Be sure to set the clock (date and time).
17. Enter service mode and program the serial number into the fax unit (SP-3-102-
000). The serial number can be found on the serial number label (attached to
the machine in step 11).
B360I108.WMF
[A]
FAX UNIT
SM 1-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
0
1.1.4 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 1045 INSTALLATION
!CAUTION
Before installing this option, do the following:
1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
2. Press the operation switch to enter standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit, then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.
1. Remove the small cover [A] (1 screw) and the connector [B].
2. Remove the rear cover [C] (2 screws), the rear upper cover [D] (2 screws) and
the rear lower cover [E] (4 screws).
3. Remove the FCU cover [F] (2 screws) and controller unit (2 screws).
B360I101.WMF
B360I104.WMF
B360I102.WMF
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
[C]
[E]
FAX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-8 SM
4. Remove the FCU harness [A] and slide out the FCU board [B] from the
machine.
5. Attach the four locking supports [D] to the CCUIF board [C]. Then attach the
CCUIF board to the FCU board [E] as shown.
6. Attach the flat cable [F] to the FCU board and the CCUIF board.
7. Attach the option G3 board [G] to the lower connector of the CCUIF board (2
screws).
B366I101.WMF
B366I109.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
FAX UNIT
SM 1-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
0
8. Remove the NCU unit [A] (2 screws).
9. Attach the option NCU unit [B] to the lower portion of the reverse side of the
NCU unit (2 screws) as shown. Attach the telephone jack [C] to the bracket [D],
run through the harness through the lower hole [E] in the NCU bracket, then
secure the telephone jack bracket to the NCU unit (1 screw).
10. Connect harness [F] to the option NCU board, then clamp the harness as
shown.
11. Attach the NCU unit [G] to the machine (2 screws), and slide the FCU board
into the machine. Then run through the harness [H] as shown.
12. Attach the ferrite core [I] to the harness.
B360I103.WMF
B366I103.WMF
B366I106.WMF
B366I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[H]
[G]
[I]
FAX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-10 SM
13. Cut away the small cover [A] for the first option G3 unit.
NOTE: If there is another G3 option unit, cut away the upper small cover [B].
14. Attach the label [C] to the rear cover.
15. Reattach the covers.
NOTE: Attach the second option NCU board [D] and the second option G3 board
[E] to the upper side as shown.
16. Attach the ferrite core [F] to the cable and connect the cable to the LINE2 jack,
then plug in the machine and turn the main switch on.
17. Enter service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to 1 for the first
option G3 unit. Set bit 3 of communication switch 16 to 1 for the second
option G3 unit. After that turn the main switch off and on.
18. Print the system parameter list and ensure that SG3-V34 is listed as an
option.
19. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.
B366I105.WMF
B367I504.WMF
B366I107-1.WMF
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
FAX UNIT
SM 1-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
3
6
0
1.1.5 ISDN OPTION TYPE 1045 INSTALLATION
!CAUTION
Before installing this option, do the following:
1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the STP
cable.
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the FCU cover [B] (2 screws) and controller unit (2 screws).
3. Remove the FCU harness [C] and slide out the FCU board [D] from the
machine.
B360I102.WMF
B366I108.WMF
B366I101.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FAX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-12 SM
4. Attach the four locking supports [A] to
the CCUIF board [B]. Then attach the
CCUIF board to the FCU board [C] as
shown.
5. Attach the flat cable [D] to the FCU
board and the CCUIF board.
6. Attach the option ISDN board [E] to
the upper connector of the CCUIF
board (2 screws).
7. Slide the FCU board into the machine,
and connect the FCU harness.
8. Remove the small plate [F] from the FCU
cover, then reattach the FCU cover (2
screws) and controller unit.
9. Reattach the covers.
10. Connect the cable to the LINE2 jack,
then plug in the machine and turn the
main switch on.
11. Enter service mode and set bit 2 of
communication switch 16 to 1. After
that turn the main switch off and on.
12. Print the system parameter list and
ensure that SIG4 is listed as an option.
13. Set up and program the items required
for ISDN communications.
14. Affix the FCC/IC approval label on the machine around the ISDN jack (This
step is only for US/Canada.)
B367I101.WMF
B367I102.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES
SM 2-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within
40 s of Start being pressed
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the
other end
The other terminal is incompatible.
0-04 CFR or FTT not received
after modem training
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-05 Unsuccessful after modem
training at 2400 bps
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
ERROR CODES
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-2 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-06 The other terminal did not
reply to DCS
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
0-07 No post-message response
from the other end after a
page was sent
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or
PIN after receiving a page,
because there were too
many errors
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-14 Non-standard post message
response code received
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Cross reference
See error code 0-08.
ERROR CODES
SM 2-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-15 The other terminal is not
capable of specific
functions.
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
following functions, or the other terminals memory
is full.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected
after modem training in
confidential or transfer mode
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a
line problem.
Cross reference
See error code 0-08.
0-17 Communication was
interrupted by pressing the
Stop key.
If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keeps
occurring, replace the operation panel.
0-20 Facsimile data not received
within 6 s of retraining
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for line problems.
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line)
from the other end not
received within 5 s of the
previous EOL signal
Check the connections between the FCU, NCU,
& line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other
end was interrupted for
more than the acceptable
modem carrier drop time
(default: 200 ms)
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Defective remote terminal.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
ERROR CODES
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-4 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-23 Too many errors during
reception
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Defective remote terminal.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits
0 and 1
0-30 The other terminal did not
reply to NSS(A) in AI short
protocol mode
Check the line connection.
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a
DCS, which contained
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
Check the protocol dump list.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
0-52 Polarity changed during
communication
Check the line connection.
Retry communication.
0-70 The communication mode
specified in CM/JM was not
available
(V.8 calling and called
terminal)
The other terminal did not have a compatible
communication mode (e.g., the other terminal
was a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling rx was initiated from the
calling terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back
to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect ANSam
after sending CI.
The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to noise, etc.
ANSam was too short to detect.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back
to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect a CM in
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).
The terminal could not detect ANSam.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-76 The calling terminal fell back
to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect a JM in
response to a CM
(CM timeout).
The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
noise, etc.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
ERROR CODES
SM 2-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-77 The called terminal fell back
to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect a CJ in
response to JM
(JM timeout).
The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
noise, etc.
A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
pass JM to the other end.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected
CI while waiting for a V.21
signal.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 2 line probing.
0-81 The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 3 equalizer training.
0-82 The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in the V.34
phase 4 control channel
start-up.
0-83 The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart
sequence.
The guard timer expired while starting these
phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
signal level can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
Try making a call at a later time.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
dedicated tx parameters.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 phase 4 control
channel start-up.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-85 The line was disconnected
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 control channel restart.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected
because the other terminal
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
The other terminal was incompatible.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
0-87 The control channel started
after an unsuccessful
primary channel.
The receiving terminal restarted the control
channel because data reception in the primary
channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected
because PPR was
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
Try using a lower data rate at the start.
Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
2-10 The modem cannot enter tx
mode
Replace the FCU.
2-11 Only one V.21 connection
flag was received
Replace the FCU.
ERROR CODES
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-6 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU.
2-13 Modem initialization error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
2-20 Abnormal coding/decoding
(cpu not ready)
Replace the FCU.
2-23 JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction
error (BIH error)
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction
error (Float marker error)
2-27 JBIG data reconstruction
error (End marker error)
2-28 JBIG data reconstruction
error (Timeout)
JBIG data error
Check the senders JBIG function.
Update the FCU ROM.
2-50 The machine resets itself for
a fatal FCU system error
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
2-51 The machine resets itself
because of a fatal
communication error
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
3-00 G4 interface board reset Replace the G4 interface board or FCU.
3-10 Disconnection during ISDN
G3 communication
Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.
The other terminal may have dialed a wrong
number.
3-11 Disconnection during ISDN
G4 communication
Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.
3-20 A CSA signal was received
during ISDN G4
communication
The operator at the other terminal may have
interrupted the communication.
3-21 A CSA signal was sent
during ISDN G4
communication, because the
Stop key was pressed
The local operator has interrupted the
communication.
3-30 Mismatched specifications
(rx capability)
Check the receive capabilities requested from the
other terminal.
4-01 Line current was cut Check the line connector.
Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
Check for line problems.
Replace the FCU or the NCU.
4-10 Communication failed
because of an ID Code
mismatch (Closed Network)
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.
ERROR CODES
SM 2-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
5-00 Data construction not
possible
5-01 Data reconstruction not
possible
5-10 DCR timer expired
Replace the FCU.
5-20 Storage impossible because
of a lack of memory
Temporary memory shortage.
Test the SAF memory.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
5-21 Memory overflow
5-22 Mode table overflow after
the second page of a
scanned document
Wait for the messages which are currently in the
memory to be sent or delete some files from
memory.
5-23 Print data error when
printing a substitute rx or
confidential rx message
Test the SAF memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
5-24 Memory overflow after the
second page of a scanned
document
Try using a lower resolution setting.
Wait for the messages which are currently in the
memory to be sent or delete some files from
memory.
5-25 SAF file access error Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out
during reception of facsimile
data
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was
received
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected Check the line connection.
Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data
frame not received within 18
s of CFR, but there was no
line fail
Check the line connection.
Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding
error
Defective FCU.
The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received
in reply to PPS.NULL
The other end pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
See code 6-05.
ERROR CODES
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-8 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still
received at the other end
after all communication
attempts at 2400 bps
Check for line noise.
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
dedicated tx parameter for that address).
Check the line connection.
Defective remote terminal.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during
high speed modem
communication
The other terminal may be defective or
incompatible.
6-22 The machine resets the
sequence because of an
abnormal handshake in the
V.34 control channel
Check for line noise.
If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
FCU.
Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped
within 6 s
Replace the FCU.
22-00 Original length exceeded the
maximum scan length
Divide the original into more than one page.
Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
the scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while
receiving
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an
another fax machine, if the machines printer is
busy or out of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to
line disconnection at the
other end
The job started normally but did not finish
normally; data may or may not have been
received fully.
Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store
received data in the SAF
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
23-00 Data read timeout during
construction
Restart the machine.
Replace the FCU
25-00 The machine software
resets itself after a fatal
transmission error occurred
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.
F6-8x SG3-V34 modem error Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM.
Replace the SG3-V34 board.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION
SM 2-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
2.2 ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION
The tables on the following pages show the error codes for the ISDN option.
The meaning of the numbers in the Action column is as follows.
1. Check Layer 1 signaling with a protocol analyzer to determine the cause of the
problem. This may require assistance from a G4 specialist.
2. Repeat the communication. If the problem does not repeat itself, the problem
was a temporary one caused by the user connecting the machine to another
interface. However, if the problem remains, there is a network problem.
3. There is a network problem.
4. There is a network problem. Do the following:
Check the error bit rate of the network. If it is high, contact the network and
ask them to improve the line.
Check the network speed (is it 56 or 64 kbps), and make sure that the bit
switch setting is correct. You may also use the dedicated transmission
parameters if this problem only occurs when dialing certain numbers.
Check that the user dialed the correct number.
5. There is a network problem, or a problem in the machine at the other end.
6. There is a problem in the machine at the other end; ask a technician to check it.
7. The machine at the other end is not a Group 4 fax terminal.
8. The machine is not compatible with the machine at the other end. A
compatibility test is needed.
Error codes related to the errors detected by the FCU are listed in the service
manual of the main body.
ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-10 SM
2.2.1 D-CHANNEL LAYER MANAGEMENT
Code Probable Cause Action
7-00 Link reset 2
7-01 Link set-up failed because of time-out. 2
7-02 Link release failed because of time-out. 2
7-03 Link set-up parameter error 2
2.2.2 D-CHANNEL, LAYER 1
Code Probable Cause Action
7-10 T3 timeout (layer 1 activation error) 1
7-11 No connection on the S0 interface 1
7-12 Deactivated 1
2.2.3 D-CHANNEL LINK LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
7-20 At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited S (F=1). 2
7-21 At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM
(F=1).
2
7-22 At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=1). 2
7-23 At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM
(F=0).
2
7-24 At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=0). 2
7-25 SABME received at the start of network link set-up No error
7-26 N200 retransmission error for SABME 2
7-27 N200 retransmission error for DISC 2
7-28 N200 retransmission error for situation enquiry (RR) 2
7-29 N(R) sequence number error 3
7-30 N(S) sequence number error 3
7-31 FRMR received 3
7-32 Non-standard frame received 3
7-33 Abnormal frame length 3
7-34 N201 error; information field N in the I frame exceeded N201 3
7-35 T201 timeout; timeout while waiting for checking 3
7-36 T202 timeout; timeout while waiting for ID assignment 3
ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION
SM 2-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
2.2.4 D-CHANNEL NETWORK LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
7-40 Insufficient mandatory information elements 3
7-41 Abnormal LI for a mandatory information element 3
7-42 T301 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN 3
7-43 T303 timeout; timeout while waiting for R: CALL-PROC etc. 3
7-44 T304 timeout; timeout while waiting for R: CALL-PROC etc. 3
7-45 T305 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL 3
7-46 T308 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL-COMP 3
7-47 T310 timeout; timeout while waiting for R: ALERT etc. 3
7-48 T313 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN-ACK 3
7-49 Internal error 3
7-51 Release call reference during communication 3
2.2.5 B-CHANNEL LINK LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
7-60 T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for flag 4
7-61 T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for SABM during an incoming call 4
7-62 T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for UA after sending SABM 5
7-63 T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to a transmitted
S frame (P=1)
5
7-64 T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for SABM or DISC after sending
FRMR
5
7-65 T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to DISC 5
7-66 RNR x N2 (other end busy, RCB counter error) 5
7-67 Invalid (Ad) frame received 5
7-68 Invalid short frame received 5
7-69 Link reset error 5
7-70 FRMR received 5
7-71 Non-standard (Cn) frame received 5
7-72 An S or U frame having an information field was received 5
7-73 A frame longer than the maximum N1 length was received 5
7-74 An S or I frame having an N(R) error was received 5
7-75 CRC error 3
ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-12 SM
2.2.6 B-CHANNEL NETWORK LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
7-80 A packet having an abnormal GFI was received 6
7-81 A packet was received that had a logical channel number different
from the logical channel being used for the communication
6
7-82 A packet containing a format error was received 6
7-83 A packet containing an LI error was received 7
7-84 A CN packet was received that had a PID different from 02 7
7-85 Unsupported packet type received 7
7-86 Abnormal or unsupported facility received 7
7-87 P(s) sequence number error 6
7-88 P(r) sequence number error 6
7-89 A reset using S:RQ or R:RI occurred 6
7-90 A restart using S:RQ or R:SI occurred 6
7-91 Call set-up error; in reply to S:CR, R:CI was received to indicate
rejection of the call
7
7-92 T20 timeout; timeout while waiting for an SF packet 6
7-93 T21 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CC packet 6
7-94 T22 timeout; timeout while waiting for an RF packet 6
7-95 T23 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CF packet 6
7-96 T10 timeout; timeout while waiting for the first frame 6
2.2.7 TRANSPORT LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
8-00 Invalid block received 8
8-01 TCC block received 8
8-02 TBR block received 8
8-05 TCR block; block format error 8
8-06 TCR block; block size parameter LI error 8
8-07 TCR block; extended addressing LI error 8
8-08 TCR block; block size length error 8
8-10 TCA block; block format error 8
8-11 TCA block; Tx origin reference data in TCR disagreed with the address
reference data in TCA
8
8-12 TCA block; octet 7 did not equal 0 8
8-13 TCA block; extended addressing LI error 8
8-14 TCA block; block size exceeded that set by TCR 8
8-15 TCA block; block size parameter LI error 8
8-20 TDT block; block format error 8
8-21 TDT block; octet 3 did not equal either 00 or 80(H) 8
8-22 TDT block; the end indicator was Continue even though there was no
field data
8
8-23 TDT block; an end block with no field data was received after an end
indicator of End
8
8-26 Timeout during state 0.2 8
8-27 Timeout during state 1.1 8
8-28 Timeout during state 0.3 8
ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION
SM 2-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
2.2.8 SESSION LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
8-30 Invalid frame received 8
8-31 RSSN received 8
8-32 CSA received 8
8-34 Calling terminal identification error in CSS 8
8-35 Date and time error in CSS 8
8-36 Window size error in CSS 8
8-37 Service identification error in CSS 8
8-38 Session user data error in CSS 8
8-39 CSS rejected (new session rejected) 8
8-40 Called terminal identification error in RSSP 8
8-41 Date and time error in RSSP 8
8-42 Date and time in RSSP was not the same as that in CSS 8
8-43 Window size error in RSSP 8
8-44 Service identification error in RSSP 8
8-45 Session user data error in RSSP 8
8-47 Message synchronization error inside the CCU 8
8-48 Document task busy 8
8-50 Ti timeout; non-communication surveillance timer (T.62) 8
8-51 T2 timeout; timeout while waiting for a response (T.62) 8
8-52 T3 timeout; CSA timer timeout (T.62) 8
8-53 G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for a new
session
8
8-54 G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for transport
probability
8
8-55 G4 board load timer timeout; called side waited too long for S:RSSP 8
8-56 G4 board load timer timeout; document transmission surveillance timer
timeout
8
8-57 G4 board load timer timeout; timeout while waiting for a user abort
request after a provider fail
8
ERROR CODES FOR THE ISDN OPTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-14 SM
2.2.9 DOCUMENT LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
8-60 T.62 coding format error (LI error) 8
8-61 A mandatory PI was absent, or the LI for a mandatory PI was 0 8
8-62 Calling/called terminal identification LI was different from that specified
by F.184 (LI = 24)
8
8-63 The LI for session user data exceeded the maximum value (512) 8
8-64 The LI for CDUI was not 0 8
8-65 Checkpoint and document reference numbers LI error, or they were
not in T.61 (ASCII) coding
8
8-66 The checkpoint reference number differed from the expected value 8
8-70 RDGR received 8
8-71 A non-standard PDU was received while in calling mode 8
8-72 A non-standard PDU was received while in called mode 8
8-73 Abnormal PDU received while in calling state ds1 8
8-74 15 consecutive CDCL signals received 8
8-75 Session window size control error (size not equal to 0) 8
8-76 Internal error 8
2.2.10 PRESENTATION LAYER
Code Probable Cause Action
8-80 X.209 coding error in session user data (LI error) 8
8-81 PV error in session user data 8
8-82 PI error in session user data 8
8-83 The capabilities in the session user data of CDS/CDC were not the
same as those in RDCLP
8
8-84 X.209 coding error in the DP (LI error) 8
8-85 X.209 coding error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)
(LI error)
8
8-86 SLD object type absent 8
8-87 PI error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor) 8
8-88 The capabilities in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor) are
duplicated or are not the same as those in RDCLP
8
8-89 No document descriptor at the start of the document 8
8-90 No page descriptor at the start of the page 8
8-91 Page descriptor PV error 8
8-92 X.209 coding error in the TU (LI error) 8
8-93 The TU was absent 8
8-94 PV error in the TU 8
8-95 TI error 8
8-96 X.209 coding nest level >> 8, or an LI form error 8
8-97 CDPB/CDE received while TU/TI not yet completed, or an unexpected
PDU was received while analyzing an SLD
8
FAX SC CODES
SM 2-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
2.3 FAX SC CODES
2.3.1 OVERVIEW
When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition other than SC1201 and SC1207,
it resets itself automatically (default setting). This initializes the FCU without
erasing files in the SAF memory or resetting the switches.
NOTE: For details on Fax SC Codes 1201 and 1207, refer to the following
sections.
If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to 1, when the FCU detects a Fax SC
Code condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the fax
unit is initialized using one of the following methods:
Hold down the # and * keys for more than 10 s.
Turn off the main power switch and turn it back on.
2.3.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the FCU is at the OFF position
SRAM on the FCU has a physical defect
Flash memory card or data copy tool connection was loose
2.3.3 SC1207
This is the same as SC1201 except the error location is the SRAM on the Fax
Function Upgrade board.
The possible causes are:
SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the Fax Function Upgrade board is at
the OFF position.
SRAM on the Fax Function Upgrade board has a physical defect.
The Fax Function Upgrade board connection was loose.
FAX SC CODES
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-16 SM
2.3.4 FAX SC CODE TABLE
SC Code Description
Suggested
Action
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 0
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 1
1102 Handshake error with
controller at start-up
1111 Command TX/RX error
to/from the controller
1112 Base copiers engine was
reset
1120 Interface module error
Initialize the fax
unit.
(See section
2.3.1.for the
initialization
procedure)
Automatic
reset
1201 Unrecoverable FCU -
SRAM error
Refer to section
2.3.2.
Service Call
display
1207 Unrecoverable Fax
Function Upgrade -
SRAM error
Refer to section
2.3.3.
Service Call
display
1299
1305
1310
1311
1312
1401
1405
1601
Software error Initialize the fax
unit.
Automatic
reset
SC Code
display
ISDN TEST FUNCTION
SM 2-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
B
3
6
0
2.4 ISDN TEST FUNCTION
2.4.1 LEDS
There are four LEDs on the G4 board. These LEDs describe the status of the
machine.
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
Initial Settings O=ON, --=OFF
Initial check (if the flash ROM is updated) O O O O
Handshaking with the FCU ready O O -- --
Standby Mode
Ready to communicate -- -- -- --
Communication
Layer 1 activated -- -- -- O
Link setup -- -- O O
B channel 1 connected -- O O O
B channel 2 connected O -- O O
ISDN TEST FUNCTION
B003/B004/B006/B007 2-18 SM
2.4.2 BACK-TO-BACK TEST
To make a back-to-back test, you need:
Two machines, with different types of CiG4 option boards.
NOTE: You cannot make a back-to-back test using two machines with
identical type CiGH option boards.
The procedure is as follows.
1. Switch off the machines
2. Connect two machines back-to-back using a cross rosette as follows.
3. Make the following bit switch adjustments:
In the machine acting in NT mode (CiG4 board), set bits 0 and 1 of G4
parameter switch 0D to 1.
In the machine acting in TE mode (SiG4 board) set bit 0 of G4 parameter
switch 0D to 0 and bit 1 to 1.
4. Reset the machines by switching them off, waiting a few seconds, then
switching back on.
5. Place a document in one of the machines, dial a number, then press Start.
6. After you have finished the test, set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter switch 0D
back to 0, then reset the machine.
NOTE: The following cannot be tested using this procedure:
ISDN G3 communication
Point to Multi (Like a broadcasting test, from one point to many places.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cross Roset t e
Machi ne A Machi ne B
H535T601.WMF
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 3-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3. SERVICE TABLES
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Entering and Exiting SP mode
"
1
.
Press the Clear Mode key.
#$%
2
.
Use the keypad to enter 107.
&
3
.
Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Fax SP 4
.
On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.
Exit
5
.
Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-2 SM
SP Mode Button Summary
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
! !! !
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
" "" "
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
# ## #
Not used for the Fax SP mode.
$ $$ $
Enter the SP mode directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press '. (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Mode if it is not highlighted.)
% %% %
Press twice to leave the SP mode return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
& && &
Press any Group number to open a list of SP modes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP mode list for SP1-nnn , press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,
click the appropriate button to expand the list.
' '' '
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
( (( (
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
) )) )
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
* ** *
Press to move to the highlight to the previous or next selection in the list on the left.
B004S500.WMF
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 3-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing
1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start ( to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. ( 3.1.2)
2. Click the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 3.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
Press ! to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previous
setting.
Press ' to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B004S501.WMF
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-4 SM
3.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 3.2 Bit Switches
1
Mode No. Function
System Switch 101
001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
Scanner Switch 102
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for scanner
settings for the fax option
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
Printer Switch 103
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings
for the fax option
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
Communication Switch 104
001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for communication
settings for the fax option
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
G3-1 Switch 105
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the standard G3 board
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
G3-2 Switch 106
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
G3-3 Switch 107
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
G4 Internal Switch 108
001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for the optional
ISDN settings
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
G4 Parameter Switch 109
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for optional ISDN
parameters
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 3-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)
2
Mode No. Function
RAM Read/Write 101
001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses
Memory Dump
001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses
002 G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SG3-1 board.
003 G3-3 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SG3-2 board.
102
004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
G3-1 NCU Parameters 103
001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard
G3 board. Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
G3-2 NCU Parameters 104
001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
G3-3 NCU Parameters 105
001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)
3
Mode No. Function
Service Station
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
101
002 Select Line Select the line type.
Serial Number 102
000 Enter the fax units serial number.
PSTN-1 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
103
004 Transmission
Disabled
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the G3-1 line.
104 PSTN-2 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
2 line.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-6 SM
3
Mode No. Function
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission
Disabled
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
105 PSTN-3 Port settings
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
3 line.
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, change this SP to on
004 Transmission
Disabled
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
106 ISDN Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the ISDN line. If
the machine is installed to the PABX line,
select PABX.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for ISDN
line.
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, change this SP to on
004 Transmission
Disabled
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the ISDN line.
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)
4
Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.
105 001 G3-3 ROM Version Displays the G3-3 modem version.
106 001 G4 ROM Version Displays the G4 (ISDN) ROM version.
107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 3-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5
Mode No. Function
Initialize SRAM 101
000 Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
Erase All Files 102
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Reset Bit Switches 103
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
Factory setting 104
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
Delete All Speed Dials
001 Speed Dials Enabled 200 speed dials and 1000 quick dials are
available when the Fax Function Upgrade
Unit is installed.
105
002 Speed Dials Disabled 1200 quick dials (but no speed dials) are
available when the Fax Function Upgrade
Unit is installed.
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6
Mode No. Function
System Parameter List 101
000 Touch the ON button to print the system
parameter list.
Service Monitor Report 102
000 Touch the ON button to print the service
monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
001 G3 All
Communications
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for all G3 lines.
002 G3-1 (All
Communications)
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the G3-1 line.
003 G3-1 (1
Communication)
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-1 line.
004 G3-2 (All
Communications)
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the G3-2 line.
005 G3-2 (1
Communication)
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-2 line.
006 G3-3 (All
Communications)
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the G3-3 line.
007 G3-3 (1
Communication)
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-3 line.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-8 SM
6
Mode No. Function
104 G4 Protocol Dump List
001 Dch + Bch 1 Prints the protocol dump lists for the G4
line.
002 Dch
003 Bch 1 Link Layer
004 Dch Link Layer
005 Dch +Bch 2
006 Bch 2 Link Layer
105 All Files print out
000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF
memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless
the customer is having trouble
printing confidential messages or
recovering files stored using the
memory lock feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
107 Log List Print out
001 All log files
002 APIP
003 Mail Box
004 Operation
005 Printer APIP
006 SC/TRAP Stored
007 Scanner
008 JOB/SAF
009 Decompression
010 Reconstruction
011 JBIG
012 Fax Driver
013 G3CCU
014 Fax Job
These log print out functions are for
designer use only.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 3-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7
Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
110 G3-2 Modem Tests
111 G3-2 DTMF Tests
112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
117 G3-3 Modem Tests
118 G3-3 DTMF Tests
119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
124 IG3-1 Modem Tests
125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests
126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
127 IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
128 IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
129 IG3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
130 IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
131 IG3-2 Modem Tests
132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests
133 IG3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
134 IG3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
135 IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
136 IG3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
137 IG3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-10 SM
3.2 BIT SWITCHES
!WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES
System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
transmission parameters.
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1 Confidential RX message print
out without the password.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: Confidential RX messages can be printed out
without the password. Use this bit if the customer
forgot the password for the confidential messages.
Reset this bit to 0 after printing confidential RX
messages.
Technical data printout on the
Journal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
are listed on the Journal for each G3
communication.
2
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04
(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-11 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
2 Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -
16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3-4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 G3/G4 communication
parameter display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
6 Protocol dump list output after
each communication
0: Off
1: On
This is only used for communication
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication
mode
ECM: With ECM
NML: With no ECM
Width and
reduction
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-12 SM
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line
Note:
40 is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
G4 Communication Parameters
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
Resolution 21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Width and
reduction
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
Transfer T: Transfer
- : Other
Confidential C: Confidential
- : Other
Other parameters
The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is the first
bit from the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.
Bit 1 - Smoothing 0: Off, 1: On
(Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)
Bit 2 - CIL printing 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 3 - Not used
Bit 4 - mm/inch conversion 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5 - Engine type 0: mm, 1: inches
Bit 6 - Document resolution unit 0: mm, 1: inches
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 02 SP No. 1-101-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 File retention time
0: Depends on User Parameter
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
1: A file that had a communication error will not be
erased unless the communication is successful.
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
System Switch 02 SP No. 1-101-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
6
7
Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6 Setting
0 0 Always disabled
0 1 User selectable
1 0 User selectable
1 1 Always enabled
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
RDS operations to take place. RDS will
automatically be locked out again after a certain
time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
System Switch 03 SP No. 1-101-004
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Length of time that RDS is
temporarily switched on when
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to User selectable
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
Switch 02 are set to User selectable.
The default setting is 24 hours.
System Switch 04 SP No. 1-101-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Printing dedicated tx
parameters on Quick/Speed
Dial Lists
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
each).
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 Memory file transfer operation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
If the machine is unable to print fax messages due
to a mechanical problem, set this bit to 0 to transfer
all messages in memory (including confidential rx
messages) to another terminal for printout.
Transfer procedure for key operators
1. Press User Tools/Counter, then Facsimile
Settings, and finally Key Operator Tools.
2. Select Memory File Transfer and specify a
destination for the machine to transfer all the files.
3. Press Start.
Normally this should be reset to 1 after transfer,
otherwise anyone who knows how to enter key-
operator mode can transfer confidential files.
However, the bit can be left at 0 if the customers
key-operators wish to transfer the files themselves
(this machine does not support confidential rx).
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-14 SM
System Switch 04 SP No. 1-101-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
6 G3 CSI/G4 Terminal ID
programming
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: The CSI and Terminal ID must be set from:
User Tools Key Operator Tools Program ISDN-G3
Line.
Note: The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a
Group 4 option is installed.
7 Telephone line type
programming
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or pulse
dial) must be set from:
User Tools Key Operator Tools Select Dial/Push
Phone.
System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 06 SP No. 1-101-007
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Margin setting for Create Margin
Transmission
71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
reduction ratio when the user uses the Create Margin
Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)
System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 09 SP No. 1-101-010
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Addition of image data from
confidential transmissions on the
transmission result report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first page of
confidential messages will be printed on transmission
result reports.
1 Inclusion of communications on
the Journal when no image data
was exchanged.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0: Communications that reached phase C (message
tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1: Communications that reached phase A (call setup)
of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal. This will
include telephone calls.
2 Automatic error report printout
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed
communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the
error report
0: No 1: Yes
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
4 Not used Do not change the setting.
5 Power failure report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
6 Conditions for printing the
protocol dump list
0: Print for all communications
1: Print only when there is a
communication error
This switch becomes effective only when system
switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
dump list only for communications with errors.
7 Priority given to various types of
remote terminal ID when printing
reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number
1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI
> CSI
This bit determines which set of priorities the machine
uses when listing remote terminal names on reports.
In G4 communication, G4_TID (Terminal ID) is used
instead of RTI or CSI.
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
Quick/Speed Dial number.
Rev. 09/2002
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Continuous polling reception
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad
when the external telephone is
off-hook
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
5 On hook dial
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0: On hook dial is disabled.
6 Line used for G3 transmission
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
If an ISDN unit has been installed, this bit
determines whether G3 transmissions go out over
the PSTN or the ISDN.
7 Line used when the machine
falls back to G3 from G4 if the
other end is not a G4 machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
This bit switch has no effect if Communication
Switch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Action when the external
handset goes off-hook
0: Manual tx and rx operation
1: Memory tx and rx operation
(the display remains the same)
0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
possible.
1: The display stays in standby mode even when
the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-16 SM
System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Country/area code for
functional settings (Hex)
00: France 11: USA
01: Germany 12: Asia
02: UK 13: Japan
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong
04: Austria 15: South Africa
05: Belgium 16: Australia
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand
07: Finland 18: Singapore
08: Ireland 19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz. 1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland
This country/area code determines the factory
settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
settings and communication parameter RAM
addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code: Function 06, parameter C.C.
System Switch 10 SP No. 1-101-017
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Threshold memory level for
parallel memory transmission
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
System Switch 11 SP No. 1-101-018
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 TTI printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
that the customer considers to be important (G3
transmissions).
1 TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4)
printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4)
overprints information that the customer considers
to be important.
CIL: Command Information Line (Group 4)
2 Not used Do not change the factory setting.
3 TTI used for broadcasting
0: The TTIs selected for each
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
destinations during broadcasting.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
System Switch 11 SP No. 1-101-018
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4 Type of TTI used for
transmission using the ten-key
pad
0: TTI_1
1: TTI_2
1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the
destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for
polling transmission and manual transmission using
the handset.
5-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
7 Use of parallel memory
transmission with G4
transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
This determines whether parallel transmission can
be used with a G4 transmission or not.
Note that this bit is only effective if Parallel Memory
transmission is enabled (User Parameter 07 - bit 2).
System Switch 12 SP No. 1-101-019
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
TTI/CIL printing position in the
main scan direction
TTI/CIL: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If
the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite
the file number which is on the top right of the page.
On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved over by more
than 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 14 - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 15 SP No. 1-101-022
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change the setting.
1 Going into the Energy Saver
mode automatically
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
active even in the Energy Saver mode.
2-3 Not used Do not change the setting.
4-5 Interval for preventing the
machine from entering Energy
Saver mode if there is a
pending transmission file.
Bit 5 4 Setting
0 0 1 min
0 1 30 min
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
does not go to Energy Saver mode during the
selected period.
After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
mode.
6 Print user codes on reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: User codes are printed out on the Journal or
other reports.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-18 SM
System Switch 16 SP No. 1-101-023
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Parallel Broadcasting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: When the G4 or/and G3 unit is installed, the
machine sends messages simultaneously using
both available ports (PSTN/ISDN) during
broadcasting.
1 Priority setting for the G3 line.
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 > PSTN-3
1: PSTN-2 > PSTN-3 > PSTN-1
This function allows the user to select the default G3
line type. Optional SG3 units are required to use the
PSTN-2, PSTN-3 setting.
2 Changing the I-G3 modem
default.
0: PSTN-1
1: PSTN-2
This function allows the user to select the default I-
G3 modem. The optional SG3 unit and ISDN unit
are required to use the PSTN-2 setting.
3 Line used for I-G3
transmissions
0: Allowed to change
1: Fixed
0: The machine will place priority on the line
selected by the above bit 2 for I-G3 transmissions.
1: The machine will always use the line selected by
the above bit 2 for I-G3 transmissions.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 19 SP No. 1-101-026
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6 Extended scanner page
memory after memory option
is installed
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: After installing the memory expansion option, the
scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2
MB.
1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory
expansion option, the scanner page memory is
extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases
to 18 MB.
7 Special Original mode
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
or letterhead which has a colored or printed
background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and
Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text,
Text/Photo and Photo modes.
System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 RTI/CSI/CPS display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
LCD panel during communication.
1-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Communication after the
Journal data storage area has
become full
0: Impossible
1: Possible
This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
report (e.g., no paper).
0: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
+ Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
+ Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
1 Action when the SAF memory
has become full during
scanning
0: The current page is erased.
1: The entire file is erased.
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
2 RTI/CSI display priority
0: RTI 1: CSI
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
4 Action when authorized
reception is enabled but
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not
yet programmed
0: All fax reception is disabled
1: Faxes can be received if the
sender has an RTI or CSI
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
machine will not be able to receive any fax
messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
messages from senders that do not include an RTI
or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-20 SM
System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
5 Address display priority in the
AI redial mode
0: RTI/CSI
1: Telephone number
0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
telephone number information, the machine displays
RTI/CSI.
1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
6 Not used Do not change the setting
7 RAM initialization after the
optional Function Upgrade unit
is installed or removed
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
When the machine detects that a Function Upgrade
unit has been installed or removed, the machine
shows the following message on the display for the
customer.
Adding/Removing FAX Feature Expander causes
data loss. Turn Main Power Switch off and
remove/replace it to avoid loss. To continue, press
Yes.
If Yes is pressed, the machine initializes the RAM to
the with or without card configuration. However,
changing this bit to 1 disables this initialization,
even if Yes is pressed.
Change this bit to 1 after installing the Function
Upgrade unit.
0: When the above message is displayed, the
machine initializes the RAM if Yes is pressed. The
amount of data lost depends on whether the board
is in or out. To avoid losing data, the user must
switch off immediately and put the Function
Upgrade unit back in.
1: When the above message is displayed, the
machine does not initialize the RAM even if Yes is
pressed. However, the fax unit cannot be used until
the user switches off, puts the Function Upgrade
unit back in, then switches back on. No data is lost.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-21 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change the setting.
1 Report printout after an original
jam during SAF storage or if
the SAF memory fills up
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want
to have a report in these cases.
Memory tx Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
2 Not used Do not change the setting.
3 Received fax print start timing
(G3 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
4 Received fax print start timing
(G4 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
0: The machine prints each page immediately after
the machine receives it.
1: The machine prints the complete message after
the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
5-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
7 Action when a fax SC has
occurred
0: Automatic reset
1: Fax unit stops
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
resets itself.
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-22 SM
3.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES
Scanner Switch 00 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 01 SP No. 1-102-002
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-7 Scan density step value
(Text mode)
When scan density is adjusted manually away from
the Normal setting, the threshold value for binary
picture processing changes for each step from the
value specified by Scanner Switch 02, by the
amount programmed here.
For example, with the default setting (14), the
threshold value changes as follows.
+3 (Darkest) : 71 (= 85 14)
+2 : 85 (= 99 14)
+1 : 99 (= 113 14)
0 (Normal) : 113 (Scanner Switch 02 setting)
-1 : 127 (= 113 + 14)
-2 : 141 (= 127 + 14)
-3 (Lightest) : 155 (= 141 + 14)
For smaller steps, input a lower value.
Scanner Switch 02 SP No. 1-102-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-7 Binary picture processing:
Threshold for Text mode -
Normal setting (center position)
This setting determines the threshold value for
binary picture processing in Text mode (when the
scan density setting is at the center).
The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 71(H) = 113(D)
Scanner Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 04 SP No. 1-102-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-7 Binary picture processing:
Threshold for monotone
background special original 1
mode - Normal setting (center
position)
This setting determines the threshold value for
binary picture processing in monotone background
special original 1 mode (when the scan density
setting is at the center).
The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: A4(H) = 164(D)
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-23 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Scanner Switch 05 SP No. 1-102-006
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-7 Binary picture processing:
Threshold for colored
background special original 2
mode - Normal setting (center
position)
This setting determines the threshold value for
binary picture processing in colored background
special original 2 mode (when the scan density
setting is at the center).
The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 28(H) = 40(D)
Scanner Switch 06 SP No. 1-102-007
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
MTF filter level (Text mode)
The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 7
This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.
4
to
7
MTF filter level (Text/Photo mode)
The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 7
This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.
Scanner Switch 07 SP No. 1-102-008
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
2
Smoothing filter level (Photo
mode)
The value can be between 0(Off) and 7. For a
weaker threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 2
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Scanner Switch 08 SP No. 1-102-009
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
2
Independent dot erase level
(Text modes)
The value can be between 0 (Off) and 7.
For a higher threshold, input a higher value (larger
dots are erased).
Default setting: 2
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-24 SM
Scanner Switch 09 SP No. 1-102-010
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
2
Independent dot erase level
(monotone background special
original 1 mode)
The value can be between 0 (Off) and 7.
For a higher threshold, input a higher value (larger
dots are erased).
Default setting: 6
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Scanner Switch 0A SP No. 1-102-011
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
2
Independent dot erase level
(colored background special
original 2 mode)
The value can be between 0 (Off) and 7.
For a higher threshold, input a higher value (larger
dots are erased).
Default setting: 1
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Scanner Switch 0B SP No. 1-102-012
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Scan margin setting (right and left margin in book scan ADF mode)
The setting can be between 0 and F (H) (unit 0.5 mm).
Default setting: 2 mm
4-7 Scan margin setting (top and bottom margin in book scan and ADF mode)
The setting can be between 0 and 7 (H) (unit 0.5 mm).
Default setting: 3 mm
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-25 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Scanner Switch 0C SP No. 1-102-013
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Action when an original jam
has occurred while scanning
the original into memory for
memory tx
0: Continues scanning after
recovery
1: Stops scanning and erases
all scanned pages for that job
This bit is only effective when parallel memory tx is
disabled (user parameter 07 - bit 2).
If parallel memory tx is enabled, the machine always
erases the scanned pages when an original jam
occurs. The machine then asks the user to retry
from the first page, even if the parallel memory tx is
not actually used.
0: The machine displays a message asking the user
to put the jammed page back into the original stack,
and continues scanning.
The message is displayed for the time period
specified by scanner switch 0E, bit 2.
1: The machine erases all the scanned pages and
asks the user to retry from the first page.
1
to
2
Setting when an original size
cannot be recognized
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 No original
0 1 A5 )
1 0 A5 *
1 1 No original
3-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Scan width used for a
document set in the ADF when
the width is less than 230 mm.
0: A4 (210 mm)
1: LT (216 mm)
This bit is set at 1 when the country code is set to
the US.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
Scanner Switch 0D SP No. 1-102-014
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Scan width for A5 lengthwise or
B5 lengthwise originals
0: 210 mm (8.5)
1: Original width
0: The machine scans the original as 210 mm (8.5")
width. The transmitted image has a blank area on
the right.
1: The machine scans 148 mm (A5) or 182 mm (B5)
and centers the scanned data on a 216 mm width
transmitted image.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-26 SM
Scanner Switch 0E SP No. 1-102-015
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Wait time for the next page
when scanning a book original
into memory
0: 60 s
1: 30 s
This bit determines how long the machine waits for
the next page when scanning a book original for
memory transmission. If this timer expires, the
machine transmits all the pages scanned so far as
one document.
Note: In immediate tx or parallel memory tx, the wait
time for the next page is 10 s.
1 Scan resolution unit
0: mm
1: inches
This bit determines which resolution unit will be
used for scanning a fax message.
Default setting: mm
2 ADF jam alarm display time
0: 60 s
1: 30 s
The bit is only effective when bit 0 of scanner bit
switch 0C is 0.
This bit determines how long the machine displays
the ADF jam alarm after a jam occurred.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Scanner Switch 0F SP No. 1-102-016
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Image rotation before
transmission (A4/LT sideways)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
This bit determines whether the machine rotates the
scanned image by 90 degrees before transmission.
If this bit is set at 1, A4 (LT) sideways images (297
mm width in the protocol) will be transmitted as A4
(LT) lengthwise images (216 mm width in the
protocol).
1 Not used Do not change the setting.
2 Image rotation before
transmission (A5/HLT
lengthwise)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
This bit determines whether the machine rotates the
scanned image by 90 degrees before transmission.
If this bit is set at 1, A5 (HLT) lengthwise images
will be transmitted as A4 (LT) width images (216
mm width in the protocol).
3-7 Not used Do not change the setting.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-27 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES
Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Page separation mark
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: No marks are printed.
1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a 2 inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
1 Repetition of data when the
received page is longer than
the printer paper
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: The next page continues from where the previous
page left off.
1: The final few mm of the previous page are
repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
2 Prints the date and time on
received fax messages
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
- bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages) is enabled.
1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Printer Switch 01 SP No. 1-103-002
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3-4 Maximum print width used in
the setup protocol
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Not used
0 1 A3
1 0 B4
1 1 A4
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
switch 01 is 1.
5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Received message width
restriction in the protocol signal
to the sender
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the print width depending on the paper size
available from the paper feed stations.
Refer to the table on the next page for how the
machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-28 SM
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width
Printer Switch 02 SP No. 1-103-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 1st paper feed station usage for
fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1 2nd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2 3rd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3 4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
messages and reports.
1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
for printing fax messages and reports.
Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
Selection feature.
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Printer Switch 03 SP No. 1-103-004
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Length reduction of received
data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
1-3 Not used Do not change the settings
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-29 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Printer Switch 03 SP No. 1-103-004
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4
to
7
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)
0 0
1 1
and so on until
F 15
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switch 04 SP No. 1-103-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
4
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper
<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
5
6
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
place.
used Not
1
1
mm, 15
1
0
mm, 10
0
1
mm, 4
0
0
=
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-30 SM
Printer Switch 06 SP No. 1-103-007
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is
enabled.
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
Cross reference
Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.
Printer Switch 07 SP No. 1-103-008
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Reduction for Journal printing
0: Off
1: On
1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
there is enough space in the left margin for punch
holes or staples.
2-3 Not used. Do not change the settings.
4 List of destinations in the
Communication Failure Report
for broadcasting
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred
1: Only destinations where communication failure
occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
Report.
5-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.
Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Paper size selection priority
0: Width
1: Length
0: A paper size that has the same width as the
received data is selected first.
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
1 Paper size selected for
printing A4 width fax data
0: 8.5" x 11" size
1: A4 size
This switch determines which paper size is selected
for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-31 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
2 Page separation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
separation to print a received fax message, the
machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
3
to
4
Printing the sample image on
reports
Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting
0 0 The upper half
only
0 1 50% reduction
in sub-scan only
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
Same size means the sample image is printed at
100%, even if page separation occurs.
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 to enable this switch.
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
this feature.
5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio
among separated pages
(Page Separation)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: When page separation has taken place, all the
pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
paper size when page separation has taken place.
Other pages are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
1
Smoothing feature
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
receives halftone images from other manufacturers
fax machines frequently.
2 Duplex printing
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: The machine always prints received fax
messages in duplex printing mode:
3 Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4 Printing fax messages in user
code mode
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1: The machine holds the received fax messages
until the machine exits the restricted access mode
(user code or key counter).
If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-32 SM
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES
Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
1
Compression modes available
in receive mode
Bit 1 0 Modes
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
These bits determine the compression capabilities
to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
protocol.
2
to
3
Compression modes available
in transmit mode
Bit 3 2 Modes
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
These bits determine the compression capabilities
to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
4 Not used Do not change the setting.
5 JBIG compression method:
Reception
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
Change the setting when communication problems
occur using JBIG compression.
6 JBIG compression method:
Transmission
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
Change the setting when communication problems
occur using JBIG compression.
7 Closed network (reception)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the
other terminal does not match the ID code of this
terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-33 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Communication Switch 01 SP No. 1-104-002
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 ECM
0: Off 1: On
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
1 Not used Do not change the setting.
2
to
3
Wrong connection prevention
method
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 None
0 1 8 digit CSI
1 0 4 digit CSI
1 1 CSI/RTI
(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
dialed telephone number. This does not work when
manually dialed.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is
done from the external telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6
to
7
Maximum printable page length
available
Bit 7 6 Setting
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364 mm)
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
Communication Switch 02 SP No. 1-104-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Burst error threshold
0: Low 1: High
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi200 dpi 400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6 12 24
High settings 12 24 48
1 Acceptable total error line ratio
0: 5% 1: 10%
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
2 Treatment of pages received
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-34 SM
Communication Switch 02 SP No. 1-104-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
3 Hang-up decision when a
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
received during G3 immediate
transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
4-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Method of total error rate
calculation
0: Normal method
1: French PTT requirement
0: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of
total lines by the number of error lines.
1: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of
total plus error lines by the number of error lines.
Communication Switch 03 SP No. 1-104-004
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Maximum number of page
retransmissions in a G3
memory transmission
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-35 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Communication Switch 07 SP No. 1-104-008
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Fallback from G4 to G3 if the
other terminal is not a G4
terminal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Also see system switch 0A bit 7.
Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4
Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the
CPS code set (Cause Value set) that determines G4
to G3 fallback.
1 Not used Do not change the setting.
2 Not used Do not change the setting.
3 Fallback from G4 to G3
reflected in programmed
Quick/Speed dials
0: Fallback enabled
1: Always start with G4
0: If a communication falls back from G4 to G3, the
machine will always start transmission with G3 from
the next communication.
1: The machine will always start to transmit with G4.
4 Fallback from G4 to G3 when
G4 communication fails on the
ISDN B-channel
0: Fallback disabled
1: Fallback enabled
1: Enable this switch only when G4 communication
errors occur because the exchanger connects G4
calls to the PSTN.
This problem occurs with some types of exchanger.
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Not used Do not change the setting.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Point of resumption of memory
transmission upon redialing
0: From the error page
1: From page 1
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
normal memory transmission.
1-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Emergency calls using 999
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-36 SM
Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
end receivers
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
These bits determine whether the machine uses the
Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
1 Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2 Use of Label Insertion for the
End Receivers in a Transfer
operation
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
This bit determines whether the machine uses the
Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
3 Conditions required for
Transfer Result Report
transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there was
an error
0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
Request, even if there were no problems.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
4 Printout of the message when
acting as a Transfer Station
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
this bit determines whether the machine prints the
fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
5 Action when there is no fax
number in the programmed
Quick/Speed dials which meets
the requesting terminals own
fax number
0: Transfer is disabled
1: Transfer is enabled
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the last N digits of the
requesting terminals own fax number with all the
Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
is the number programmed in communication switch
0C.)
0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-37 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
4
Number of digits compared to
find the requesters fax number
from the programmed
Quick/Speed Dials when acting
as a Transfer Station
00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the own telephone number sent
from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
The available memory
threshold, below which ringing
detection (and therefore
reception into memory) is
disabled
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Minimum interval between
automatic dialing attempts
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-38 SM
Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)
Communication Switch 10 SP No. 1-104-017
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Memory transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
attempts to the same
destination
01 - FE (Hex) times
Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)
Communication Switch 12 SP No. 1-104-019
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Memory transmission: Interval
between dialing attempts to the
same destination
01 - FF (Hex) minutes
Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)
Communication Switch 14 SP No. 1-104-021
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Inch-to-mm conversion during
transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
format are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored
data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
6
to
7
Available unit of resolution in
which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit
0 0 mm
0 1 inch
1 0 mm and inch
(default)
1 1 Not used
For the best performance, do not change the factory
settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
Communication Switch 15 - Not used (do not change the settings)
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-39 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Communication Switch 16 SP No. 1-104-023
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Standard G3 unit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only the
ISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3
communications. However, for ISDN on hook
dialing, bit 7 of user parameter 30 must be set to 1.
Note: If the optional G4 unit is not installed, but this
bit is changed to disabled, no document can be
transmitted.
1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2)
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
G3 unit.
2 Optional ISDN unit
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
ISDN unit.
3 Optional G3 unit (G3-3)
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Change this bit to 1 when installing the second
optional G3 unit.
4 Not used Do not change the setting.
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Use of the I-G3 line
0: Tx or rx
1: Tx only
Change this bit to 1 when the customer requires.
7 G4 Dual communication
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1: The machine uses only one B channel for
communication. This enables a customer to occupy
another B channel for other purposes such as
internet communication.
Communication Switch 17 SP No. 1-104-024
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 SEP reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Polling transmission to another makers machine
using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
1 SUB reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Confidential reception to another makers
machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
disabled.
2 PWD reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
signal reception.
3-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Action when there is no box
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
Change this setting when the customer requires.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-40 SM
Communication Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Extension access code (0 to 7)
to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
0: On
1: Off
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8.
Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
1
Extension access code (8 and
9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
0: On
1: Off
Refer to communication switch 1E.
Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-41 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
1
Monitor speaker during
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Up to Phase B
1 0 All the time
1 1 Not used
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during
memory transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30-
standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission
and reception)
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
7 Short preamble
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-42 SM
G3 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 V.8 protocol in manual
reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
when starting a manual reception.
1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
reception.
2 V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
4 CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
NTransmit N send Re
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
5 Modem rate used for the next
page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change 1: Fallback
1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
6 V.8 protocol in manual
transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
during manual transmission.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-43 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G3 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Training error detection
threshold
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
need to change this for specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
4
to
5
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
7.2 kbps.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-44 SM
G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Initial Rx modem rate
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
4
to
7
Modem types available for
reception
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
Other settings - Not used
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
G3 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
1
PSTN cable equalizer
(tx mode: Internal)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 None
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium
1 1 High
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-45 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G3 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
2
to
3
PSTN cable equalizer
(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 None
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium
1 1 High
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Keep this bit at 1.
5 PSTN cable equalizer
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Keep this bit at 1.
6-
7
Not used Do not change the settings.
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 09 SP No. 1-105-010
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
1
ISDN cable equalizer
(tx mode: Internal)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 None
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium
1 1 High
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-46 SM
2
to
3
ISDN cable equalizer
(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 None
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium
1 1 High
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
4 ISDN cable equalizer
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
5 ISDN cable equalizer
(V.34 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
1
Maximum allowable carrier
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.
2-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-47 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G3 Switch 0B SP No. 1-105-012
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Protocol requirements: Europe
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Protocol requirements: Spain
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3 Protocol requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4 PTT requirements: Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5 PTT requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.
6 Not used Do not change the setting.
7 DTS requirements : Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Change this bit manually if required.
G3 Switch 0C SP No. 1-105-013
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
1
Pulse dialing method
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3 Switch 0D SP No. 1-105-014
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2
to
5
Data rate threshold during V.34
reception
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 Normal
0 1 1 1 Lower by
one step
1 1 1 1 Lower by
two steps
The machine changes the modulation parameters in
the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to 0111,
the machine lowers the initial speed one step, for
example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
This switch reduces transmission time if the
machine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34
reception.
6 Not used Do not change the setting.
7 B signal detection time for V.34
polling transmission
0: 75 ms (default setting)
1: 65 ms
Change this switch only when there are
communication errors during V.34 polling
transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
modem.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-48 SM
G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Alarm when an error occurred
in Phase C or later
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
error communication, change this bit to 1.
1 Alarm when the handset is off-
hook at the end of
communication
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
change this bit to 1.
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-49 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES
These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 Monitor speaker during
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Up to Phase B
1 0 All the time
1 1 Not used
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during
memory transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
3-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3-2 Switch 01 SP No. 1-106-002
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3-2 Switch 02 SP No. 1-106-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30-
standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission
and reception)
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
7 Short preamble
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-50 SM
G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 Not used Do not change the setting.
2 V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
4 CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
NTransmit N send Re
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
5 Modem rate used for the next
page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change 1: Fallback
1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
6 Not used Do not change the setting.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3-2 Switch 04 SP No. 1-106-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Training error detection
threshold
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-51 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
need to change this for specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
4
to
5
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
7.2 kbps.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Initial Rx modem rate
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-52 SM
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4
to
7
Modem types available for
reception
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
Other settings - Not used
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
G3-2 Switch 07 SP No. 1-106-008
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
1
PSTN cable equalizer
(tx mode: Internal)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 None
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium
1 1 High
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
2
to
3
PSTN cable equalizer
(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 None
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium
1 1 High
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Keep this bit at 1.
5 PSTN cable equalizer
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Keep this bit at 1.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-53 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
1
Maximum allowable carrier
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.
2-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-54 SM
G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Protocol requirements: Europe
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Protocol requirements: Spain
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3 Protocol requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4 PTT requirements: Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5 PTT requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.
6 Not used Do not change the setting.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3-2 Switch 0C SP No. 1-106-013
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
1
Pulse dialing method
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
3.2.7 G3-3 SWITCHES
These switches require the second optional G3 interface unit.
The contents of the G3-3 switches are similar to the G3-2.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-55 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3.2.8 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES
G4 Internal Switch 00
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-7
Country code
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Country
0 0 0 0 1 Germany (1TR6 mode)
0 0 0 1 0 Universal (Europe Euro ISDN)
1 0 0 0 1 USA
Note: In Germany, use the Universal setting for the Euro ISDN lines.
G4 Internal Switch 01 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 02 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 03
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
Amount of protocol dump data in
one protocol dump list
0: Last communication only
1: Up to the limit of the memory
area for protocol dumping
Change this bit to 0 if you want to have a
protocol dump list of the last communication
only.
This bit is only effective for the dump list D +
Bch1.
1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Internal Switch 04
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change these settings.
3
Auto data rate change for
transmission
(64 kbps to 56 kbps)
0: On 1: Off
0: The machine automatically changes the
transmission data rate from 64 kbps to 56
kbps after 3 s if the other end did not
accept the call. This is to cope with 56 kbps
networks in the USA.
Normally, keep this bit at 0.
4
Auto data rate change for reception
(64 kbps to 56 kbps)
0: Off 1: On
1: The machine automatically changes the
reception data after 6 s.
Change this bit to 1 only when there is a
communication error where the other
terminal informs 64 kbps in the SETUP
signal although it is actually 56 kbps.
5-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-56 SM
G4 Internal Switch 05
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.
2
Protocol ID check
0: Yes 1: No
The Protocol ID is in the CR packet.
3-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Internal Switch 06 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 07 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 08 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 09 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 0A - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 0B - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 0C - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 0D - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 0E - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 0F - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 10 (Dch. Layer 1)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-5 Not used Do not change these settings.
6
INFO1 signal resend
0: Resend 1: No resend
0: Some DSUs may not reply to the INFO1
signal with INFO2, if there is noise in the
INFO1 signal accidentally. Try changing
this bit to 0, to resend INFO1 before the
machine displays CHECK INTERFACE.
7 Not used Do not change these setting.
G4 Internal Switch 11 (Dch. Layer 2)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change these setting.
1
Type of TEI used
0: Dynamic TEI 1: Static TEI
This is normally fixed at 0. However, some
networks may require this bit to be set at 1
(see below). In this case, you may have to
change the values of bits 2 to 7.
2-7
Static TEI value Store the lowest bit of the TEI at bit 7 and the
highest bit of the TEI at bit 2.
Example: If the static TEI is 011000, set bits 3
and 4 to 1 and bits 2, 5, 6, and 7 to
0.
G4 Internal Switch 12 - Not used (do not change these settings)
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-57 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G4 Internal Switch 13: D channel layer 3 (Attachment IE in S: SETUP)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change these setting.
1
Information transfer capability shift
down to retry transmission
0: Shift down procedure disabled
(Default)
1: Shift down and retry the call
1: The machine changes the ISDN G3
information transfer capability informed in
the [SETUP] signal to Speech from 3.1
kHz audio or to 3.1 kHz audio from
Speech automatically and retries the
transmission.
The information transfer capability used in the
first try is determined by the setting of G4
internal bit switch 14 bit 0.
This switch is effective with some types of
exchangers and T/As where they only accept
calls with information transfer capability
Speech.
2
Attachment of calling ID and
subaddress
0: No 1: Yes
Normally, this bit should be at 0, because
most networks add the calling ID and
subaddress to the SETUP signal to the
receiver.
However, some networks may require the
machine to add this ID (and/or subaddress).
Only in this case should this bit be at 1.
3
Attachment of the Lower Layer
Capabilities
0: No 1: Yes
This bit determines whether Lower Layer
Capabilities are informed in the [SETUP]
signal.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
4
Attachment of the Higher Layer
Capabilities
0: Yes 1: No
This bit determines whether Higher Layer
Capabilities are informed in the [SETUP]
signal or not.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
5
Attachment of the channel
information element (CONN)
0: No 1: Yes
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
6
Attachment of the Higher Layer
Capabilities for ISDN G3
transmission
0: Same as the bit 4 setting
1: Not attached
This bit determines whether Higher Layer
Capabilities are informed in the [SETUP]
signal for ISDN G3 transmission. This switch
is effective in coping with communication
problems with some types of T/A and PBX
that do not respond to Higher Layer Capability
G3.
When this bit is set to 0, the setting depends
on the setting of bit 4.
Keep this bit at 1 in most cases.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-58 SM
G4 Internal Switch 13: D channel layer 3 (Attachment IE in S: SETUP)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
7
Condition for fallback from G4 to
G3
0: Refer to the CPS code setting
1: Fallback in response to any CPS
code
0: Fallback occurs when a CPS code is the
same as the CPS code settings specified
by G4 internal switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and
1C.
If you wish to enable fallback when any CPS
code is detected, set this bit to 1.
This switch is effective in coping with fallback
problems where the CPS code does not
match those specified in the ITU-T
recommendation.
G4 Internal Switch 14: D channel layer 3 (Selection IE in S: SETUP)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
ISDN G3 information transfer
capability
0: 3.1 kHz audio
1: Speech
In tx mode, this determines the information
transfer capability informed in the [SETUP]
message.
In rx mode, this determines the information
transfer capability that the machine can use to
receive a call.
Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support
3.1 kHz audio.
1-2 Not used Do not change these settings.
3-4
Channel selection in [SETUP] in tx
mode
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Any channel
0 1 B1 channel
1 0 B2 channel
1 1 Not used
Any channel: When this is informed to the
exchanger, the exchanger will select either B1
or B2.
5
Called ID mapping
0: Called party number
1: Keypad facility
0: Called ID is mapped to the called party
number.
1: Called ID is mapped to the keypad facility.
Note that the subaddress in not mapped.
On the 5ESS network (USA), set it to 1.
6
Numbering plan for the called party
number
0: Unknown
1: E.164
E.164: This may be used in Sweden if an
AXE10 exchanger is fitted with old software,
and in Australia.
Unknown: This is the normal setting.
7
Subaddress coding type
0: IA5 (NSAP)
1: BCD (ISO8348)
This is normally kept at 0. However, some
networks require this bit to be at 1.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-59 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G4 Internal Switch 15: D channel layer 3 (Judgement R: MSG)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
Action when receiving [SETUP]
signal containing no called
subaddress
0: A reply is sent
1: No reply is sent
This bit depends on user requirements. If it is
at 1, communication will be halted if the other
terminal has not input the subaddress.
1-4 Not used Do not change the settings
5
Global call reference
0: Ignored
1: Global call number is used
Global call reference means 'call reference
value = 0'. This bit determines how to deal
with such an incoming call if received from the
network.
Keep this bit at 1 in Germany 1TR6.
6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Internal Switch 16: D channel layer 3 (Approval)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1
Answer delay time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 No delay
0 1 1.0 s delayed (1TR6)
1 0 0.5 s delayed
1 1 Not used
In some countries, a time delay to answer a
call is required.
Otherwise, use this switch as follows:
If the machine is connected to the same bus
from the DSU as a model K200 is connected,
the machine receives most of the calls
because the response time to a call is faster
than the K200.
If the customer wants the K200 to receive
most of the calls, adjust the response time
using these bits.
If the customer does not want one machine to
receive most of the calls, use subaddresses to
identify each terminal.
2
Action when receiving [SETUP]
signal containing user-specific
called party subaddress
0: Ignores the call
1: Receives the call
Normally, the 3rd octet of called party
subaddress information in the [SETUP] signal
is set to NSAP. However, some networks may
add user-specific subaddress to the
[SETUP] signal, and the result of this is that
the machine won't answer the call if a
subaddress is specified.
So, change this bit to 1 to let the machine
receive the call if the machine is connected to
such a network.
3-4 Not used Do not change these settings.
5
Indicated bearer capabilities
0: 56 kbps 1: 64 kbps
1: 64 kbps calling is indicated in the Bearer
Capabilities, but communication is at 56 k.
Use this bit if the machine is connected to
a network which does not accept a 56 kbps
data transfer rate as a bearer capability.
6 Not used Do not change these setting.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-60 SM
G4 Internal Switch 16: D channel layer 3 (Approval)
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
7
Transfer capabilities (SI) informed
in 1TR6 ISDN G3 transmission
0: G3 Fax
1: Analog
This bit determines whether transfer
capabilities informed in the Service Indicator
for 1TR6 ISDN G3 transmission. This switch is
effective in coping with communication
problems with some types of T/A and PBXs.
Normally keep this bit at 1 in Germany 1TR6.
G4 Internal Switch 17: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 1
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-6
Condition for fallback from G4 to G3
Bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17 contain a CPS code, and bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 18
contain another CPS code. If a CPS code is received which is the same as either of
these, communication will fall back from ISDN G4 mode to ISDN G3 mode.
The CPS codes must be the same as those specified in table 4-13 of ITU-T
recommendation Q.931.
Examples: Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 CPS code 65
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 CPS code 88
For the codes in bits 0 to 6 of bit switches 17 and 18 to be recognized, bit 7 of bit
switch 17 must be 1. Also, bit 0 of the Communication Switch 07 must be at 0, or
Fallback from G4 to G3 will be disabled.
7
This bit determines whether fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt of one of the
CPS codes programmed in bit switch 17 or 18, or on receipt of a certain standard
code.
0: Fallback occurs on receipt of any of the following CPS codes:
Universal (Euro ISDN) - #3, #18, #57, #58, # 63, # 65, #79, #88, and #127
Germany 1TR6 mode - #3, #53, #58, and #90
Others - #3, #65, and #88
1: Fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt any of above CPS codes or one of the
CPS codes programmed in bit switch 17, 18, 1A, 1B, or 1C
G4 Internal Switch 18: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 2
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-6
Condition for fallback from G4 to G3
See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17
7
This bit helps to choose the CPS code set for G4 to G3 fallback.
0: Fallback occurs on receipt of the CPS code set, which is specified by the country
code setting.
1: Fallback occurs on receipt of the Universal CPS code set (#3, #18, #57, #58, #
63, # 65, #79, #88, and #127) even if another country code is programmed.
If bit switch 17 bit 7 is 1, fallback occurs on receipt of the Universal CPS code
set or one of the CPS codes programmed in bit switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, or 1C.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-61 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G4 to G3 fallback
Bit 0 of Communication Switch 07 must be at 0, or fallback from G4 to G3 will be
disabled.
The CPS codes for which fallback occurs are decided as follows.
G4 bit switch 17, bit 7 - If set to 0, fallback occurs on receipt of a code from a
set that depends on the country code. If set to 1, fallback occurs for the 5 CPS
codes programmed in bits 0 to 6 of G4 bit switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C, in
addition to the country code set.
Note that if G4 bit switch 18, bit 7 is set to 1, the CPS code set that is used is
always the Universal set, regardless of the country code setting.
G4 Internal Switch 19
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
Permanence of the link
0: Set/released each LAPD call
1: Permanent
Keep this at 1 in the USA. In other areas, this
bit is normally 0, depending on network
requirements.
1
Channel used in ISDN L2 (64k)
mode
0: B1 1: B2
When making an IDSN L2 back-to-back test,
you can select either the B1 or B2 channel
with this bit switch.
2-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
G4 Internal Switch 1A: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 3
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-6
Condition for fallback from G4 to G3
See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17.
7 Not used Do not change this setting.
G4 Internal Switch 1B: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 4
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-6
Condition for fallback from G4 to G3
See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17.
7 Not used Do not change this setting.
G4 Internal Switch 1C: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 5
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-6
Condition for fallback from G4 to G3
See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17.
7 Not used Do not change this setting.
G4 Internal Switch 1D - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 1E - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Internal Switch 1F - Not used (do not change these settings)
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-62 SM
3.2.9 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES
G4 Parameter Switch 00
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2
Network type
Bit 2 1 0 Type
x 0 0 Circuit switched
ISDN
Other settings: Not used
Do not change the default setting.
3-7 Not used Do not change the default settings.
G4 Parameter Switch 01
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
Voice coding
0: law 1: A law
0: This setting is used in USA.
1: This setting is used in Europe and Asia.
1
Action when [SETUP] signal
without HLC is received
0: Respond to the call
1: Not respond to the call
If there are several TEs on the same bus and
the machine responds to calls for another TE,
the call may be without HLC information.
Identify the type of calling terminal and
change this bit to 1 if the caller is not a fax
machine.
2-6 Not used Do not change these settings.
7
Signal attenuation for G3 fax
signals received from ISDN line (-
6dB)
0: Off 1: On
0: If an analog signal comes over digital line,
the signal level after decoding by the TE is
theoretically the same as the level at the
entrance to the digital line. However, this
sometimes causes the received signal level
to be too high at the received end. In this
case, set this bit to 1 to adjust the
attenuation level.
G4 Parameter Switch 02
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1
Data rate (kbps)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 64 kbps
0 1 56 kbps
Other settings: Not used
2-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Parameter Switch 03 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Parameter Switch 04 - Not used (do not change these settings)
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-63 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
G4 Parameter Switch 05
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change these settings.
4
B-channel T3 timer
0: 30s 1: 57s
1: This switch is useful when used in
combination with the Communication Bit
SW 07 bit 4. This is to cope with
communication problems where G4
communication fails on the ISDN B-
channel.
Normally keep this bit at 1.
5-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Parameter Switch 06
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
Layer 3 protocol
0: ISO8208 1: T.70NULL
Set this bit to match the type of layer 3
signaling used by the ISDN.
The dedicated parameters have the same
setting for specific destinations.
Normally keep this bit at 0.
1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Parameter Switch 07
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3
Packet size
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 1 1 1 128
1 0 0 0 256
1 0 0 1 512
1 0 1 0 1024
1 0 1 1 2048
This value is sent in the CR packet. This value
must match the value stored in the other
terminal, or communication will stop (CI will be
returned). If the other end returns CI, check
the value of the packet window size with the
other party.
Note that this value must be the same as the
value programmed for the transport block size
(G4 Parameter Switch 0B, bits 0 to 3).
Normally, do not change the default setting.
4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Parameter Switch 08
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3
Packet window size
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
and so on until
1 1 1 1 15
This is the maximum number of
unacknowledged packets that the machine
can send out before having to pause and wait
for an acknowledgement from the other end.
Normally this should be kept at 7.
4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-64 SM
G4 Parameter Switch 09 - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Parameter Switch 0A - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Parameter Switch 0B
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3
Transport block size
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 1 1 1 128
1 0 0 0 256
1 0 0 1 512
1 0 1 0 1024
1 0 1 1 2048
This value must match the value set in the
other terminal. Note that this value must be
the same as the value programmed for the
packet size (G4 Parameter Switch 7, bits 0 to
3). Also, the transport block size is limited by
the amount of memory in the remote terminal.
Normally, do not change the default setting.
4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Parameter Switch 0C - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Parameter Switch 0D
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1
Back-to-back test mode
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 Off
1 0 ISDN L2 test mode
(TE mode)
Other settings - Not used
When doing a back-to-back test or doing a
demonstration without a line simulator, use
these bits to set up one of the machines in TE
mode, and the other in NT mode
Please note that this machine can only be set
to TE mode.
After the test, return both bits to 0.
See "Back-to-back Testing" in the
Troubleshooting section for full details.
2-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
G4 Parameter Switch 0E - Not used (do not change these settings)
G4 Parameter Switch 0F - Not used (do not change these settings)
NCU PARAMETERS
SM 3-65 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3.3 NCU PARAMETERS
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit.
Change the fourth digit from 5 to 7 (e.g. 680500 to 680700) for the
settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
NCU PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-66 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
680500 Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the
country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to
program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area Decimal Hex
France 00 00
Germany 01 01
UK 02 02
Italy 03 03
Austria 04 04
Belgium 05 05
Denmark 06 06
Finland 07 07
Ireland 08 08
Norway 09 09
Sweden 10 0A
Switzerland 11 0B
Portugal 12 0C
Holland 13 0D
Spain 14 0E
Israel 15 0F
USA 17 11
Asia 18 12
Hong Kong 20 14
South Africa 21 15
Australia 22 16
New Zealand 23 17
Singapore 24 18
Malaysia 25 19
China 26 1A
Taiwan 27 1B
Korea 28 1C
Greece 33 21
Hungary 34 22
Czech 35 23
Poland 36 24
680501 Line current detection time
680502 Line current wait time
680503 Line current drop detect time
20 ms Line current detection is
disabled.
Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
NCU PARAMETERS
SM 3-67 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Address Function Unit Remarks
680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time
68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
If 680508 contains FF(H),
the machine pauses for
the pause time (address
68050D / 68050E).
Italy: See Note 2.
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
20 ms
68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detection
time
20 ms
680511 PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
20 ms
680512 PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
20 ms
680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
NCU PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-68 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
68051B PABX dial tone detection time
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time
68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time
If 68051B contains FF,
the machine pauses for
the pause time (680520 /
680521).
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
20 ms
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms
680523 PABX ringback tone off detection
time
20 ms
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680524 PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(LOW)
20 ms
680525 PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
20 ms
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
680529 PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4
680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
20 ms
680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-
OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
Bit 1 0
0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always
0 1 50% be kept at 0.
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
NCU PARAMETERS
SM 3-69 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Address Function Unit Remarks
680534 International dial tone frequency
upper limit (high byte)
680535 International dial tone frequency
upper limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680536 International dial tone frequency
lower limit (high byte)
680537 International dial tone frequency
lower limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680538 International dial tone detection time
680539 International dial tone reset time
(LOW)
68053A International dial tone reset time
(HIGH)
68053B International dial tone continuous
tone time
68053C International dial tone permissible
drop time
If 680538 contains FF,
the machine pauses for
the pause time (68053D /
68053E).
Belgium: See Note 2.
68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)
68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)
20 ms
68053F Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (HIGH)
680540 Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (LOW)
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
680541 Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
680542 Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (LOW)
Hz (BCD)
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
NCU PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-70 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
680543 Country dial tone detection time
680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW)
680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)
If 680543 contains FF,
the machine pauses for
the pause time (680548 /
680549).
680546 Country dial tone continuous tone
time
680547 Country dial tone permissible drop
time
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
20 ms
68054A Time between opening or closing the
DO relay and opening the OHDI
relay
1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
Function 06-2 (parameter
11).
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
Function 06-2 (parameter
12).
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
Function 06-2 (parameter
13).
68054D Time between final OHDI relay
closure and DO relay opening or
closing
1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
Function 06-2 (parameter
14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
68054E Minimum pause between dialed
digits (pulse dial mode)
See Note 3 and 8.
Function 06-2 (parameter
15).
68054F Time waited when a pause is
entered at the operation panel
20 ms
Function 06-2 (parameter
16). See Note 3.
680550 DTMF tone on time Function 06-2 (parameter
17).
680551 DTMF tone off time
1 ms
Function 06-2 (parameter
18).
680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF
signals while dialing
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
Function 06-2 (parameter
19).
See Note 5.
680553 Tone attenuation value difference
between high frequency tone and
low frequency tone in DTMF signals
-dBm x 0.5 Function 06-2 (parameter
20).
The setting must be less
than 5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level
after dialing
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
Function 06-2 (parameter
21). See Note 5.
680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level
after dialing
-dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
680556 Not used Do not change the
settings.
NCU PARAMETERS
SM 3-71 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Address Function Unit Remarks
680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCU
parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU
parameter 15)
1 ms This parameter takes
effect when the country
code is set to France.
680558 Not used Do not change the
setting.
680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
68055B International dial access code (High)
68055C International dial access code (Low)
BCD For a code of 100:
68055B - F1
68055C - 00
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
68055E Progress tone detection level, and
cadence detection enable flags
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.
68055F
to
680564
Not used Do not change the
settings.
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD
For a code of 0:
680565 - FF
680566 - F0
680567
to
680571
Not used Do not change the
settings.
NCU PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-72 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:
range 1, upper limit
Function 06-2
(parameter 02).
680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:
range 1, lower limit
Function 06-2 (parameter
03).
680574 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:
range 2, upper limit
Function 06-2 (parameter
04).
680575 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:
range 2, lower limit
1000/ N
(Hz).
Function 06-2 (parameter
05).
680576 Number of rings until a call is
detected
1 Function 06-2 (parameter
06).
The setting must not be
zero.
680577 Minimum required length of the first
ring
20 ms See Note 4.
Function 06-2 (parameter
07).
680578 Minimum required length of the
second and subsequent rings
20 ms Function 06-2 (parameter
06-2).
680579 Ringing signal detection reset time
(LOW)
Function 06-2 (parameter
09).
68057A Ringing signal detection reset time
(HIGH)
20 ms
Function 06-2 (parameter
10).
68057B
to
680580
Not used Do not change the
settings.
680581 Interval between dialing the last digit
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time
Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used
680583
to
6805A0
Not used Do not change the
settings.
NCU PARAMETERS
SM 3-73 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Address Function Unit Remarks
6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency
upper limit (high byte)
6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency
upper limit (low byte)
BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency
lower limit (high byte)
6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency
lower limit (low byte)
BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms
20 ms
Factory setting: 200 ms
6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency
upper limit (high byte)
6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequency
upper limit (low byte)
BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection frequency
lower limit (high byte)
6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequency
lower limit (low byte)
BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
6805AA Not used Do not change the
setting.
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for
detection
The data is coded in the
same way as address
680533.
6805AE Not used Do not change the
settings.
6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (high byte)
6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte)
6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Hz(BCD) If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short
protocol tone
20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N 3 dBm Function 06-2 (parameter
01).
6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)
See Note 7.
6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
NCU PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-74 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
6805BA ISDN: Tx level from the modem - dBm The setting must be
between -12dBm and -
15dBm.
6805BB ISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
- N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BB (dB)
6805BC ISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
- N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BC (dB)
6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming
signal detection level)
-37-0.5N
(dBm)
6805BE
to
6805C6
Not used Do not change the
settings.
6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 Not used.
Bit 4 V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 Not used.
6805C8
to
6805D9
Not used Do not change the
settings.
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1 s
6805E0
bit 3
Maximum wait time for post
message
0: 12 s
1: 30 s
1: Maximum wait time for
post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to 1 if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
NCU PARAMETERS
SM 3-75 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N
680552
, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-76 SM
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.
3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".
4. Select the destination key you want to program.
5. When the programmed dial number is
displayed, press "Start".
Make sure that the LED of the Start
button is lit as green.
6. The settings for the switch 01 are now
displayed. Press the bit number that
you wish to change.
7. To scroll through the parameter
switches, either:
8. Select the next switch: press "Next"
or
Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
9. After the setting is changed, press "OK".
10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
B360M104.WMF
B360M105.WMF
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
SM 3-77 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 02
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
4
Tx level
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 -1
0 0 0 1 0 -2
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4
:
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
If communication with a particular remote terminal
often contains errors, the signal level may be
inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the results
are better.
If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01
setting is used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
5
to
7
Cable equalizer
Bit 7 6 5 Setting
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 Low
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High
1 1 1 Disabled
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange when
calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-78 SM
Switch 03
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2,400
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200
0 1 0 0 9,600
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400
0 1 1 1 16,800
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600
1 0 1 0 24,000
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used
If training with a particular remote terminal always
takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
must be changed to 0.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
4-5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6 AI short protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Switch 04
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
1
Inch-mm conversion before tx
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Inch-mm
conversion
available
0 1 Inch only
1 0 Not used
1 1 Disabled
The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy
may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
machine uses mm-based resolutions.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
2
to
3
DIS/NSF detection method
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 First DIS or
NSF
0 1 Second DIS or
NSF
1 0 Not used
1 1 Disabled
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
SM 3-79 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
Switch 04
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4 V.8 protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
If transmissions to a specific destination always end
at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
5 Compression modes available
in transmit mode
0: MH only
1: Disabled
This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
to the other terminal during transmission.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
6
7
ECM during transmission
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0 0 Off
0 1 On
1 0 Not used
1 1 Disabled
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
the (0, 0) setting.
Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 07 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Data rate
Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 64 kbps
0 0 0 1 56 kbps
1 1 1 1 Disabled
If the setting is Disabled, the current setting of G4
parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1) is used.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Switch 08 - Not used
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-80 SM
Switch 09 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
3
Layer 3 protocol
Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 ISO 8208
0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL
1 1 1 1 Disabled
If the setting is Disabled, the current setting of G4
parameter switch 6 (bit 0) is used.
4
to
7
Packet modulus
Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 Disabled
If the setting is Disabled, the current setting of G4
parameter switch 6 (bit 4) is used.
Switch 10 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Attachment of the Higher Layer
Capabilities
This bit determines whether Higher Layer
Capabilities are informed in the [SETUP] signal or
not.
1 Not used Do not change the setting.
2 ISDN G3 information transfer
capability
0: 3.1 kHz audio
1: Speech
In tx mode, this determines the information transfer
capability informed in the [SETUP] messages.
In rx mode, this determines the information transfer
capability that the machine can use to receive a call.
Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3.1 kHz
audio.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
SM 3-81 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
!CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680040 to 68004F(H) - Scanner bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 7: Not used
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-82 SM
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 1 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05)
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06)
Bits 0 to 5: Not used
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 to 7: Not used
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
SM 3-83 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 4 to 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the Tone mark over an ISDN line
0: UUI, 1: Tone
Bits 2 to 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0 to 4: Not used
Bit 5: Action when receiving a SETUP signal containing no called number and the
G4 subscriber number was programmed in this machine.
0: Respond to the call, 1: Do not respond to the call
Bit 6: Action when the received HLC (Higher Level Capabilities) is Tel or BC
(Bearer Capabilities) is Speech.
0: Do not respond to the call, 1: Respond to the call
This switch determines which information transfer capabilities the machine can
accept when receiving a call.
1: When the received HLC is Tel (digital telephone) or BC is Speech (voice), the
machine responds to the call. In short, the machine receives every call.
This switch is useful for communication problems when the other terminal informs
the above transfer capabilities although it is a fax machine.
Bit 7: ISDN SPID programming (used only in the USA)
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-84 SM
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bits 4 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
Bits 3 to 7: Not used
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bits 3 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays Cannot detect original size.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
SM 3-85 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13)
Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, G3-3 and G4 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-
scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC FAX error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC Fax driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC Fax
driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
, ,
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) : Not used
6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16): Not used
6800E7(H) User Parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-86 SM
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18)
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 File retention impossible
0 1 24 hours
1 0 File retention impossible
1 1 72 hours
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19)
Bits 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
Note: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
Bits 5 to 7: Not used
6800EA(H) to 6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 29 (SWUSR_1A to 1D)
: Not used
680EE(H) - User parameter switch 30 (SWUSR_1E)
Bits 0 to 6: Not used
Bit7: On hook dialing
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
Note: If this bit set to 1, the on hook dialing is available on the ISDN line. But, the
machine cannot use the G3 standard analog line for detecting the ringing
and on hook dialing.
6800F0 to 6800FF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches
680100 to 68011F(H) - G4 Internal Switches
680160 to 68016E(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101)
See 68030C(H) for the type of network used for this number.
68016F to 68017D(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
68017E to 68018C(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
68018D to 68019B(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4)
68019C to 6801AA(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801AB to 6801B9(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801BA to 6801C8(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4)
6801C9 to 6801D7(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4)
6801D8 to 6801EB(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
6801EC to 6801FF(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680200 to 680213(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680217 to 680256(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following
note.
680257 to 680296(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680297 to 6802AA(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
SM 3-87 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
6802AB to 6802BE(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
6802BF to 6802D2(H) PSTN-3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
6802D3(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
6802D4(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)
6802D5(H) - Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
6802E0 to 6802E2(H) - PSTN-1 line settings
6802E0
Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX.
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 Loop start
0 1 Ground start
1 0 Flash start
1 1 Not used
Bit 2: Telephone line type.
0: PSTN, 1: PABX
Bits 3 and 4: Dialing type.
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Pulse dialing
0 1 Not used
1 0 Tone dialing
1 1 Not used
Bits 4 to 7: Not used
6802E1: PSTN access number for loop start
Access number Hex value to program (BCD)
0 F0
, ,
9 F9
00 00
, ,
99 99
6802E2
Bit 0: Transmission disabled
0: Tx and Rx, 1: Rx only
Bit 1: Memory Lock reception
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
6802E8 to 6802EA(H) - PSTN-2 line settings
6802F0 to 6802F2(H) - PSTN-3 line settings
6802F8 to 6802EA(H) - ISDN line settings
680300(H) - ID code (low - Hex)
680301(H) - ID code (high - Hex)
680302(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)
680303(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-88 SM
680304(H) - Memory Lock ID (low - BCD)
680305(H) - Memory Lock ID (high - BCD)
68030C(H) - Network type used for the service station number
0 1 (H) - PSTN-1
0 2 (H) - PSTN-2
0 3 (H) - PSTN-3
1 0 (H) - G4
0 7 (H) - G3 auto selection
680310 to 680317(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680310(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680311(H) - Year (BCD)
680312(H) - Month (BCD)
680313(H) - Day (BCD)
680314(H) - Hour
680315(H) - Minute
680316(H) - Second
680317(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680324(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5 to 7: Not used
680325(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6: ISDN unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 7: Not used
680358 to 68036F(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters)
680370 to 680383(H) - ISDN CSI
680384(H) - Number of ISDN CSI characters (Hex)
680389 to 68038C(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address
68038D to 680390(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address
680391 to 680395(H) - SiG4 board ROM information (Read only)
680391(H) - Suffix
680392(H) - Version (BCD)
680393(H) - Year (BCD)
680394(H) - Month (BCD)
680395(H) - Day (BCD)
680396 to 68039A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
680396(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680397(H) - Version (BCD)
680398(H) - Year (BCD)
680399(H) - Month (BCD)
68039A(H) - Day (BCD)
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
SM 3-89 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
68039B to 68039F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68039B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68039C(H) - Version (BCD)
68039D(H) - Year (BCD)
68039E(H) - Month (BCD)
68039F(H) - Day (BCD)
6803A2(H) - Option G3 board (G3-2) modem ROM version (Read only)
6803A4(H) - Option G3 board (G3-3) modem ROM version (Read only)
6803A6 to 6803AB(H) - Modem ROM version (Read only)
6803A6(H) - Part number (low)
6803A7(H) - Part number (high)
6803A8(H) - Control (low)
6803A9(H) - Control (high)
6803AA(H) - DSP (low)
6803AB(H) - DSP (high)
680406(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680407(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680422(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680423(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680424(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680425(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680426(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
OVERVIEW
SM 4-1 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an NCU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The NCU switches the analog line between the fax unit and
the external telephone.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Up to two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
The option G3 unit consists of two PCBs: G3 board and NCU.
2. ISDN unit: This allows the fax unit to communicate over an ISDN line.
3. Fax Function Upgrade Unit: JBIG compression becomes available. In addition,
this expands the systems SRAM capacity to hold programmed telephone
numbers, memory files, etc.
4. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
or
NCU
NCU
FCU
Fax Function
Upgrade
CCUIF
G3
G3
G4
Expansion
Memory
MB
Controller
B360V501.WMF
BOARDS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-2 SM
4.2 BOARDS
4.2.1 FCU
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE (Fax Application Control Engine)
CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Ringing signal/tone detection
FBI (FACE Bridge Interface)
Interface between the PCI bus and the FACE
DMA controll
Modem (R288F-29)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
SG3 SG3 ISDN
SRAM
(512 kB)
Flash ROM
(3 MB)
Analog
Circuit
V.34
MODEM
Monitor
Speaker
NCU
Function
Upgrade Unit
(512 kB)
DIMM
(32 MB)
DRAM
(8 MB)
FBI
CPU BUS
DMA BUS
MB VIF DCR
CPU
(RU30)
FACE
B360D510.WMF
BOARDS
SM 4-3 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
ROM
3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1M) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
DRAM
The 8 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory :2 MB
Working memory : 2MB
Page memory : 4MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
SRAM
The 512 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
SW2 Reset switch, to reboot the FCU board
SW3 Determines which firmware the machine boots from. If the switch is OFF, the
firmware on the FCU inside the machine is used. If the switch is ON, the firmware
on the flash memory card or external FCU is used.
BOARDS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-4 SM
4.2.2 NCU (US)
Jumpers
Item Description
JP7
JP8
These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is connected to a dry
line.
DB1 Also remove DB1 when the machine is connected to a dry line.
Ring
Detection
Circuit
OHDISW
TIP
RING
T1
T2
TRXD
Current
Sensor
Hook1
Hook0
OHDI SW.
NCU
JP7
JP8
ExRing
CML
Relay
Noise
Filter
Surge
Protection
Over-
current
Protection
Surge
Protection
DC Loop
L-
Transformer
CMLSW
Noise
Filter
DB1
A895D520.WMF
BOARDS
SM 4-5 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
4.2.3 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA)
Control Signals and Jumpers
CSEL1 RSEL
Country CN2-5 CN1-13
CTR21 H H
Australia H H
South Africa H H
Malaysia H H
Hong Kong L L
New Zealand L L
Singapore L L
Asia L L
L: Low, H: High
CTR21 (Common Technical Regulation 21):
France, Germany, UK, Italy, Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Ireland, Norway,
Sweden, Switzerland, Portugal, Holland, Spain, Israel, Greece
TIP
RING
SHUNT
GS
T1
R1
TRXD
TIP
R1
SHUNT
GS
T1
OHDISW
Hook0
RSEL
DOSW
DCLSW
Hook1
ExRing
CSEL Ring
Detection
Circuit
Current
Sensor
Filter
(16Hz)
CML Relay
DO Sw.
GSSW
OHDI Sw.
GS Sw.
DC-
Loop
CMLLSW
Noise
Filter
Noise
Filter
A895D521.WMF
BOARDS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-6 SM
4.2.4 SG3 BOARD
The SG3 board allows up to two simultaneous communications when used in
combination with the FCU.
CCP (Communication Control Processor)
Controls the SG3 board.
CPU (RU8)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this
block.
DMA controller
JBIG interface
Flash ROM
512KB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for SG3 software storage.
512KB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for Panasonic modem software storage.
DRAM
512 KB DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working
memory.
QM coder
QM coder for JBIG compression and decompression.
V.34 Modem
Panasonic V.34 modem (MN195003MFL)
DRAM
(4MB)
JBIG
M65761
Flash ROM
(4MB)
Program
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
MN195003MFL
Modem
Flash ROM
(4MB)
Modem
DTMF
Receiver
Hybrid IC
CPU
(RU8)
DMAC JBIGIF TONE DPRAM
CCP
SG3-V.34
FCU
Standard
NCU
B360D513.WMF
BOARDS
SM 4-7 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
4.2.5 SIG4 BOARD
The SiG4 (Standard ISDN G4) board contains ICCP (ISDN Communication Control
Processor), Flash ROM, DRAM, LAPD controller, CODEC, ISDN interface and
analog interface. The ICCP controls the entire board.
ICCP (ISDN Communication Control Processor)
16 bit CPU which controls the entire board
HDLC control
Channel select for B channel interface control
CODEC
A/D, D/A converter for ISDN G3 communication
LAPD Controller
ISDN layer 1 and LAPD control
ROM
512 kB (4 Mbit) Flash ROM for system software storage
DRAM
2MB (16 Mbit) DRAM used
Flash
ROM
DRAM
ICCP
SYSTEM BUS
SiG4
CODEC
LAPD
Controller
ISDN
Interface
Bch
Reset
Circuit
Dch
Analog I/F
Circuit
ISDN
FCU MODEM
H548D500.WMF
VIDEO DATA PATH
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-8 SM
4.3 VIDEO DATA PATH
4.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SCANNER
BICU
FBI
FACE
Page
Memory
DCR
SAF
DCR
QM-
CODER
DCR
QM-
CODER
Modem
SiG4 NCU
Modem
NCU
ISDN G4 ISDN G3 Analog G3 Analog G3
FCU
SG3
(Option)
B360D511.WMF
VIDEO DATA PATH
SM 4-9 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch
format. The BiCU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BiCU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-
compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. Either the NCU
or SiG4 (optional) transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The BiCU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BiCU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. Either the NCU or SiG4 (optional) transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder on the Function Upgrade Unit for JBIG
compression. Then either the NCU or SiG4 (ISDN G3) transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder on the Function Upgrade Unit for JBIG
compression. Then either the NCU or SiG4 (ISDN G3) transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
I-G3 (ISDN G3) Transmission
G3 transmission is available through the ISDN line by using the optional G4 unit
(SiG4). In this case, the G3 modem is used for the I-G3 transmission. When an
optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed, the modem on the SG3 can be also used for the
I-G3 transmission. This means that two I-G3 transmission is available at the same
time.
VIDEO DATA PATH
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-10 SM
Adjustments
Line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN or ISDN): System switch 0A bit 6
Line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2): System switch 16 bit 1
I-G3 modem default: System switch 16 bit 2 and 3
VIDEO DATA PATH
SM 4-11 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
4.3.2 RECEPTION
NCU
Modem
Analog G3 Analog G3 ISDN G3 ISDN G4
NCU
Modem
SiG4
SAF
DCR
Page
Memory
FACE
FBI
QM-
CODER
CCD
(DCR)
DCR
QM-
CODER
BICU
Printer
FCU SG3
(Option)
B360D512.WMF
VIDEO DATA PATH
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-12 SM
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line or an ISDN line
to the SAF memory. (The data goes to the FACE at the same time, and is checked
for error lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the BiCU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the Function Upgrade Unit for decompression. Then the data is
stored in the page memory, and transferred to the BiCU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
SM 4-13 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
4.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
4.4.1 PERSONAL/INFORMATION/TRANSFER BOXES
When an incoming message has a SUB or SEP code attached, the machine will
look for a Personal Box, Transfer Box or Information Box with an identical SUB or
SEP code. If a matching code is found, the message will be stored in the box and
not printed, or it will be forwarded to the receiver if registered.
Personal Box (Confidential Box)
The user can create personal boxes in the machines memory for receiving fax
messages. Each box must have a name and a code.
If a sender knows the code that was used to create a personal box, they can
specify this as the SUB code during transmission. The message will then go to this
personal box. If the sender also sends a SID code, this is ignored; the receiver
must input the SID code stored in the receiving machine to print the message (the
receivers SID code acts as a password).
The receiver can set up the personal box as a forwarding station any messages
entering the box will be forwarded to another station.
Items to program at the receiving machine
Items Note
SUB Code (Box number) Required
Box name Required
Password (SID) Optional
Receiver (1 forwarding destination) Optional (Quick Dial)
Items for the sender to specify when setting up the transmission
Items Note
SUB Code (Box number) Required (must be the same as the code
that was used to set up the personal box)
Password (SID) Optional
NOTE: 1) Group dial is not available for the forwarding destination
2) If the sender uses a SID code, this code is ignored. The communication
can proceed even if the SID code stored in the machine is different. In
addition, the SID code stored in the machine must be used to print the
stored message, and not the SID code from the sender.
3) If a forwarding destination is programmed, the received file is deleted
after delivering the documents to the pre-programmed receiver. If
forwarding did not succeed, the forwarding result report is printed out
but the file stays in the memory until it is printed out on the machine.
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-14 SM
Transfer Box
The user can create transfer boxes in the machines memory for forwarding
incoming fax messages. Each box must have a name and a code. Each box must
also have destinations associated with it; any message arriving in this box will
automatically be sent on to these destinations.
If a sender knows the code that was used to create a transfer box, they can specify
this as the SUB code during transmission. The message will then go to this transfer
box, and will be sent on to the transfer destinations associated with that transfer
box.
If the sender also sends a SID code, the SID code stored in the receiver must be
the same or the communication will be disconnected.
Items to program at the receiving machine
Items Note
SUB Code (Box number) Required
Box name Required
Password (SID) Optional
Receiver (Final destinations) Required (Quick Dial)
Items for the sender to specify when setting up the transmission
Items Note
SUB Code (Box number) Required (must be the same as the code
that was used to set up the transfer box)
Password (SID) Optional
NOTE: 1) 5 destinations can be programmed with Group or Quick Dial as the
delivery destinations.
2) More than 5 destinations are available if a Group is specified as one of
the destinations.
3) If the SID does not match, the communication is disconnected.
4) A result report is not sent back to the transmitter but it is printed on the
receiving machine.
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
SM 4-15 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
Information Box (Polling Tx)
The user can set up documents in memory to be picked up by another machine.
The user makes an information box for each document.
The information box is identified by a code. Anybody who wishes to call the fax
machine and receive the document from the information box has to input this code
as the SEP code when calling the machine.
In addition, the user who sets up the information box can protect it with a
password. This protects the document from other people at the same location (to
print the stored document, this password must be input). The person who wishes to
receive the document does not have to know this PWD code, but only has to know
the SEP code.
Items to program at the machine that has the document on standby for polling
Items Note
SEP Code (Box number) Required
Box name Required
Password (PWD) for printing
the stored document
Optional
Items for the caller to specify when picking up the document
Items Note
SEP Code (Box number) Required (must be the same as the code that
was used to set up the information box)
NOTE: 1) Only one fax message can go in each information box.
2) The SEP code must be different for each box.
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-16 SM
4.4.2 MULTI-PORT
When the optional ISDN Unit or optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed,
communication can take place at the same time through the two or three lines at
once.
Option Available Line Type
Available protocol
Combinations
Standard only PSTN G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3
PSTN + ISDN G3 + G4
ISDN Unit
ISDN I-G3 + G4
Extra G3 Interface Unit
+
Extra G3 Interface Unit
PSTN + PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3 + G3
PSTN + PSTN + ISDN G3 + G3 +G4
PSTN + ISDN
G3 + I-G3
or
G3 + I-G3 + G4
Extra G3 Interface Unit
+
ISDN Unit
ISDN
I-G3 + I-G3
or
I-G3 + G4
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
SM 4-17 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
4.4.3 DOCUMENT SERVER
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The BICU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. Either the NCU or SiG4 (optional) transmits the data to
the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1000 pages with Fax Function
Upgrade and Expansion Memory) from the fax application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as FAX001. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting Print 1st page, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.
Scanner
BICU
HD
Page
Memory
Comoressed
MMR
Controller
FBI
FACE DCR Modem NCU
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
To
PSTN
SiG4 To ISDN
FCU
B360D514.WMF
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-18 SM
4.4.4 LAN FAX DRIVER
HD
CONTROLLER
FBI
FACE DCR Modem NCU
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
To
PSTN
SiG4 To ISDN
FCU
Page
Memory
SAF
NIC
LAN
NIC
Fax Driver
Application
Compressed MMR
Fax Number
PC
Address/Book
BICU PRINTER
B360D515.WMF
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
SM 4-19 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
The fax driver makes print data from an application, then compresses the print data
into MMR data. PJL commands are added to the compressed data and the
destination telephone number and the line selection are included in the PJL
commands. The telephone number can be taken from an address book application.
The fax driver uses TCP/IP protocol to transfer the print (MMR) data to the
machine.
Regular transmission:
The machine stores the print (MMR) data in the SAF memory. Then, the print data
is transferred using the same method as memory transfer.
Print and transmission
The machine stores the print (MMR) data in the page memory on the controller.
Then, the machine decompresses the print data and prints out. The decompressed
print data is transferred to the FCU and is stored to page memory.
Even if the Expansion Memory is not installed, it is possible to transmit and print
the document from the PC with 400 dpi resolution. However, the data is converted
to 200 dpi and printed out if the data stored in the SAF memory for memory
transmission. This is because the page memory on the FCU is not enough to
expand the print data to 400 dpi with only standard memory.
Using Document Server
At first, the machine stores the print (MMR) data in the HDD, when using the
Document Server. Then the print data is transferred to the FCU. But the FCU does
not store this data in the SAF memory. Then the print data is transferred using
same method as Document Server transmission.
FIRMWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-20 SM
4.5 FIRMWARE HISTORY
4.5.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
B3605581 A 1.05
Corrects the following:
A) The file name is not printed when an A4
size document is output to A5 paper.
B) The edge of the documents image area is
not printed out in inch resolution mode.
C) With fine print mode, the first page comes
out enlarged if the expansion option memory
has not been installed.
First Page Print
from document
server
Documents from the Document Server sent
in memory transmission are printed out to the
paper tray appropriated for the G3-1 line.
Output to G3 1
paper tray
The transmission results report is printed out
when the memory reaches capacity.
In cases where the transmission results
report cannot be printed out (e.g. no paper),
files cannot be sent following this.
Transmission
results report
The confidential file report is not printed out
in the following conditions.
The line is disconnected during phase C of
confidential reception.
There are no confidential reception files
stored in the machine.
No confidential
file report
With the First Page print function, the image
shifts to the right of the center mark when an
A5 document from the Document Server is
printed out to A5 paper.
First Page print
from document
server (A5)
The last page of a G4 immediate reception
job is split into 2 pages (top and bottom
halves of the image).
Page split with
G4 immediate
reception.
If a memory transmission destination is
changed and the power is turned Off/On, the
destination is erased. (Only those existing
destinations that have been changed are
deleted).
Destination
erased
If the SAF memory reaches capacity during
scanning, the file is saved but the filename
does not initially appear on the file list (it is
necessary to exit and re-enter the filename
display screen).
Memory full
If the filename for a Document Server
document is 8 characters or longer, it
will not appear on the memory
storage report.
Memory
Storage
Report
B3605581 B 2.00.04
Continued
Rev. 02/2002
FIRMWARE HISTORY
SM 4-21 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Corrects the following:
If the user initiates a printout of a Document
Server document while the memory
transmission results report is being printed
out, the document will come out as a blank
page
Document from
D. Server comes
out blank
Some unnecessary (large) log files had been
carried over, causing it to take a very long
time to print out all the log files with this SP
mode.
SP6-107-001
Large log files
printed out
If a document with cover sheet is sent from a
PC using the LAN FAX driver, the machine
allows the operation of storing a document,
even though the SAF memory is full. (i.e.
document is not actually stored).
Storage when
SAF memory full
The DTMF tone is sent to the ISDN-G3 line
after pressing the tone key, even if user
parameter switch 11(0B) is set to 0 (UUI).
ISDN-G3
transmission
When sending with Batch Transmission, the
dedicated transmission parameters are not
applied to destinations entered in with the
ten-key pad. (those entered w/Quick Dials
are fine).
Batch
transmission
B3605581 C 3.00.00
Corrects the following:
Communication failure (receiver time out)
sometimes occurs with G4 reception.
G4 reception
failure
B3605581 D 4.00.00
The fax option sometimes does not start up
when the main power is turned on.
Power on failure
Documents received in substitute reception
are successfully stored into SAF memory,
however if the main controller goes into
Energy Saver mode during reception, the
files cannot be printed out later.
Substitute.
reception file
cannot be
printed out
Country code 1C for Korea has been
enabled
C. code (Korea)
Fax FCU
Version N.A. Effective Date
01.05.00 B3605581A 1st mass production
02.00.04 B3605581B April 2001 prod.
03.00.00 B3605581C May 2001 prod.
04.00.00 B3605581D July 2001 prod.
Rev. 02/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-22 SM
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY
4.6.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3605590 E 3.2.5
Corrects the following:
Some buttons are disabled after the handset
is picked up and put back several times.
Some buttons are disabled after a job is
interrupted with off-hook (reset) and the
handset is put back.
It is possible to press to the On-hook button
while no paper is displayed.
The fax option malfunctions when several
quick dials are pressed in On-hook mode
(handset down).
The alert continues to be displayed even after
the handset is put back.
When trying to send stored files from the
Document Server, the ten-key pad is disabled
if the On-hook button is pressed twice while
still inside the Enter Password screen.
Handset
The response time of the ten-key pad has
been increased.
Ten-key
response time
improved
When documents are scanned for storage
(only) to the Document Server, the machine
does not prohibit changing the size of the
scanning area.
Document
Server
scanning area
(size)
Manual reception is not possible while inside
the User Code Input screen.
Manual
reception
disabled
The Stamp function is displayed in User Tool
Settings even though there is no Stamp option
installed.
Option Stamp
displayed
B3605590 F 3.8.4
SC990 occurs when printing a message
stored in the Information Box.
Information Box
The fax option malfunctions when printing out
the G4 protocol dump list without the ISDN
option board installed.
SP6-104: G4
Protocol Dump
List
The main power can be turned off even if the
handset is off the hook.
Power off with
handset Off
hook
The TTI does not appear on any page when
sending documents with a cover sheet.
LAN Fax Driver
No TTI
B3605590 G 3.8.9
Rev. 02/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-23 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
Corrects the following:
When a document is printed out from a PC
with the LAN Fax driver, none of the counter
values change.
LAN Fax Driver
No count up.
B3605590 H 3.8.13
Fax Application
Version N.A. Effective Date
3.2.5 B3605590E 1st mass production
3.8.4 B3605590F April 2001 prod.
3.8.9 B3605590G May 2001 prod.
3.8.13 B3605590H July 2001 prod.
Rev 02/2002
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 5-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Desktop type transceiver
Circuit: PSTN (max. 3ch.)
PABX
ISDN
Connection: Direct couple
Original Size: Book (Face down)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(single sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(double sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution: G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
G4
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
NOTE: 1. Optional Expansion Memory required
Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
G4: 3 s at 64 kbps; Measured with an ITU-T #1 test
document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR
JBIG (optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit required)
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
Group 4 (ISDN unit required)
Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-2 SM
V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
G4: 64 kbps/56 kbps
I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Standard: 2 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 26 MB (2 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (4 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 5-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
Item Standard
With Fax Function
Upgrade Unit
Quick Dial 400 1200
Groups 64 64
Destination per Group 500 500
Boxes (Information/Personal/Transfer) 150 400
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad
overall
100 1000
Programs 100 200
Auto Document 6 18
Communication records for Journal
stored in the memory
200 1000
Specific Senders 30 50
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
Without the
Expansion Memory
With the
Expansion
Memory
Memory
Transmission file
400 400
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
400 1000
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
(Note1)
Without the Fax
Function Upgrade
Unit
160 1000
Memory
Transmission file
800 800
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
400 3000
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
(Note1)
With the Fax
Function Upgrade
Unit
160 2080
NOTE: 1) Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the
standard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-4 SM
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Item Machine Code No. Remarks
Fax Option Type 1045 B360 2,10
G3 Interface Unit Type
1045
B366 1,4,7,8,9
ISDN Option Type
1045
B367 1,6
Up to two options can be installed.
You can install either two optional
G3 units or one optional G3 and
one optional G4 unit.
Fax Function Upgrade
Type 185
A892 3 Used in common with Stinger-C
Handset Type 450 A646 - USA only
Marker Type 30 H903 - Refill ink for stamp
Expansion Memory - 5
B360V101.WMF
B360V201.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 001 001 001 001 05/23/2001 05/23/2001 05/23/2001 05/23/2001
APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER N/A GESTETNER N/A GESTETNER N/A GESTETNER N/A
RICOH AFICIO 1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: INCORRECT CD-ROMS SHIPPED WITH MACHINE
SYMPTOM:
Document management software will not install and print drivers contained on the printer driver CD are beta
version drivers.
CAUSE:
Old beta versions of the print drivers and document management software were copied to the CD ROM
packages.
Affected CD ROMs
RICOH Brand Printer Driver CD
SAVIN Brand Printer Driver CD
Document Management CD-
Manual CD-
SOLUTION:
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
The CD ROM packages will be replaced with newer versions.
FIELD COUNTERMEASURES:
1. Download the current software from the manufactures web page.
RICOH: http://support.ricoh.com/html_rc/model/af1035_45/af1035_45en.htm
SAVIN:
http://www.savin.com/savin/savininternetsitetemp.nsf/(All)/SoftwareDrivers.html?OpenDocument&
Start=1&Count=100&Expand=1.8
2. A one-time shipment of replacement CD packs will be mailed to servicing dealers based on equipment
shipment records.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
O
F
T
W
A
R
E
CONTROL NO. 087ABW
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 001
Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B006/B007 printers manufactured with the Serial Numbers listed below will have defective CD-ROMs.
Model Name Serial Number Defective CD Part Number
Ricoh Aficio 1035P H7216300351 ~ 00860 B3615501
B3615521
B3615550
Ricoh Aficio 1045P H7316300221 ~ 00920 B3615501
B3615521
B3615550
Savin 2535P H7216300001 ~ 00350 B3615505
B3615521
B3615550
Savin 2545P H7316300001 ~ 00220 B3615505
B3615521
B3615550
Ricoh Aficio 1035P H7216400671 ~ 01570 B3615550
Ricoh Aficio 1045P H7316400356 ~ 00955 B3615550
Savin 2535P H7216400001 ~ 00670 B3615550
Savin 2545P H7316400001 ~ 00355 B3615550
CD TITLE
B3615550
CD ROM
Part Number
Location
Copyright 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN
BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 002 002 002 002 10/31/2001 10/31/2001 10/31/2001 10/31/2001
4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL: :: :
BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: MYLAR - ADF EXPOSURE GLASS
SYMPTOM:
Thin white lines or black lines on the copies.
CAUSE:
Dust or other foreign particles get caught in the gap between the ADF exposure glass and left scale bracket.
Later these particles fall onto the exposure glass.
SOLUTION:
Add a strip of mylar to seal the gap between the exposure glass and bracket.
Replacement Procedure:
1. Remove the ADF exposure glass.
2. Remove the mylar already attached to the left scale bracket.
3. Attach the new exposure glass mylar as shown in the second illustration (on next page).
4. Reattach the ADF exposure glass as shown on the next page, setting it so that it lies flush against the
left side.
5. Finally, being very careful not to bend the bracket, pinch the exposure glass and bracket firmly together
so that the glass adheres to the mylars double-sided tape.
Continued
CAUTION: Since the left scale bracket is not as strong as other brackets, please take extra caution
so that it does not bend or deform while performing the following procedure.
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
T
C
O
P
Y
Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
T
P
A
R
T
S
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 002
Page 2 of 3
Continued
Left Scale Bracket
ADF Exposure Glass
Mylar - Exposure Glass
Left Scale Blacket
Ruler
Mylar - Exposure Glass
Left Scale Bracket
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 002
Page 3 of 3
GENERAL:
The following part additional is being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B3516523 Mylar - Exposure Glass 0-1 19 29
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UNITS AFFECTED:
Serial Number cut-in not available at time of publication.
Copyright 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN
BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 003 003 003 003 10/23/2001 10/23/2001 10/23/2001 10/23/2001
4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL: :: :
BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SKEWED IMAGE
SYMPTOMS:
Skewed image (most noticeable when using ADF)
Light copy quality on operator side of originals
Background or shadowing on operator side of originals
CAUSES:
The Left Scanner Support Bracket sags down towards the
front side of the machine. Reference letter A in the diagram 1.
When the value of A < B - skewed images and/or copy quality issue may occur.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
T
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
DIAGRAM 1
A
B
The Specification for the
scanner height is:
B = 172mm and A = 172mm
*B = 191mm and A = 191mm
* With 1-Bin Tray installed
NOTE: The measurements
should be taken at the point
indicated in diagram 1 without
the Bridge Unit installed.
Support Bracket
Screws
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 003
Page 2 of 2
SOLUTION:
During installation, confirm that the Left Scanner Bracket height is in specification.
If The Scanner Height Is Incorrect:
1. Remove the Scanner Unit from the machine (2 screws, 1 connector).
2. Remove the Left Cover from the Scanner Support Bracket (2 screws).
3. Loosen the Support Bracket screws (see Diagram 1, 2 screws).
4. Raise the Scanner Support Bracket so that distance A = B.
5. Retighten the Support Arm screws.
6. Confirm the height is correct.
Skewing Occurs After Installation:
1. Follow the procedure above (during installation).
Skewing Only When Using The ADF:
1. Confirm the Scanner Bracket Height is correct, if not follow the procedure outlined above.
2. If the Scanner Bracket height is correct, perform the following:
A. Remove the screw that secures the Right ADF Hinge to the copier.
B. Remove the black seal (tape) from the Right ADF Hinge.
C. Insert the screw removed in step 1 into the slotted hole (do not tighten).
E. Adjust the ADF position (back/forth) to adjust for ADF skew.
F. After skew is eliminated - tighten screw.
Copyright 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 004 004 004 004 11/30/2001 11/30/2001 11/30/2001 11/30/2001
APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: CAPTURE FUNCTION
GENERAL:
The B003/B004/B006/B007 mainframes and options will be modified for use with the Capture function from
October 2001 production.
BULLETIN SECTION OUTLINE:
Section 1: shows the necessary hardware for each configuration.
Section 2: shows the necessary firmware to use the Capture function on mainframes and options
produced before Oct 01.
Section 3: shows the necessary SP/UP Mode settings.
OVERVIEW OF THE CAPTURE FUNCTION:
Once the B003/B004/B006/B007 is connected to the eCabinet, the capture function enables the users to
store copies, faxes, scanned and printer documents. These documents are stored with ID attributes such as
owners, name and date. A web browser is used from the client PC to access documents stored in the
eCabinet.
Even while the B003/B004/B006/B007 is engaged in capture file transfer, it is still possible to use all original
B003/B004/B006/B007 functions such as copy, fax, printer and document server. In addition, the document
server can be used in place of the eCabinet as shown in the setup below.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
G
E
N
E
R
A
L
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
B003/B004/B006/B007
eCabinet
Client
CONTROL NO. 112ABW
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 004
Page 2 of 3
SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATIONS & NECESSARY HARDWARE:
Hardware
Required
Copy
Capture
Printer
Capture
Printer & Scanner
Capture
FAX
Capture
Mainframe ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
64MB Memory Option ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
NIB Option ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
Printer Option ! !! !
Printer/Scanner
Option
! !! !
Fax Option ! !! !
SECTION 2 - NECESSARY FIRMWARE UPGRADES FOR MAINFRAMES/OPTIONS
PRODUCED BEFORE OCT 01:
The table below shows the necessary firmware versions for each configuration.
NOTE: For eCabinet running version 2.1
Service
Packs
Firmware Version Copy
Capture
Printer
Capture
Printer & Scanner
Capture
FAX
Capture
Controller 5.19.1 ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! System
Service
Pack
Ver. 2.00
LCDC 2.19 ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
NCS(NIB) 1.77 ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
NFA(Netfile) 2.17 ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
Printer 3.00 ! !! ! ! !! !
MFP
Service
Pack
Ver. 2.00
Scanner 2.27 ! !! !
Fax
Application
5.20 ! !! !
Fax
Service
Pack
Ver. 2.01
FCU 06.00.01 ! !! !
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 004
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 3 - NECESSARY SP/UP SETTINGS:
3.2 SP MODES:
3.2.1. SP5-836-001 (Capture Function).
Enables/disables the Capture function.
When enabled, the settings screen for the capture function is displayed inside.
System Settings.
0: Disabled (default) 1: Enabled ON (must be set)
3.2.2. SP5-836-061 (Capture File Re-send).
Enables/disables re-sending of previously captured files to eCabinet.
When enabled, if the client PC operator accesses a Captured file stored in eCabinet and sends it to
the B003/B004/B006/B007, the machine will re-send this document to the eCabinet. This is to
provide an extra safeguard for file backup. However if users wish to minimize network traffic and free
up eCabinet memory, this function can be disabled.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled (default)
3.3 Copier UP Mode Explanation
Users need to perform the necessary settings; user tool/system settings/file transfer/Capture server IP
address, eCabinet IP address.
On the copier go to; user tools/system settings/key op tools/next button/capture priority.
On the copier go to; user tools/system settings/timer settings and set to customer's preference.
Explanation:
OFF: Normal mode - eCabinet window does not pop up and there's no capture to eCabinet.
"OFF" Default: - eCabinet window pops up, select ecab user, and choose capture "ON" or OFF".
"ON" Default: - eCabinet window pops up, select ecab user, and choose capture "ON" or OFF".
"ON": - eCabinet window pops up, user must be selected, and capture mode is "ON" and can not be
changed.
"ON" NO DISPLAY: - eCabinet window and capture happens behind the scenes. Default user setup on
eCabinet under settings/advanced settings/capture control will always be the captured documents
owner.
Example:
Capture priority for copier is set for default ON. This way the eCabinet window pops up
every time Copier mode is used and the capture button is selected.
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N
BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 004 Rei ssue B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 004 Rei ssue B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 004 Rei ssue B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 004 Rei ssue ! 06 / 03 / 2002 06 / 03 / 2002 06 / 03 / 2002 06 / 03 / 2002
APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P
RI COH RI COH RI COH RI COH AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P
SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P
SUBJECT: CAPTURE FUNCTION
GENERAL:
B003 series mainframes and options will be modified for use with the Capture function from October 2001
production.
Section 2 below shows the necessary hardware for each configuration, Section 3 shows the necessary
firmware to use the Capture function on mainframes and options produced before Oct 01.
Section 4 shows the SP settings and 5 the UP Mode settings. Section 6 shows how to configure eCabinet
1. Overview of the Capture Function:
Once the B003 series is connected to the eCabinet, the Capture function enables users to store copier, fax,
scanner and printer documents there with such ID attributes as Owner, Name and Date. A web browser is
used from the client PC to access documents stored in the eCabinet.
Even while the B003 series is engaged in Capture file transfer, it is still possible to use all original B003
series functions (copier, printer, fax, Document Server). In addition, note that the Document Server can be
used in place of the eCabinet in the setup shown below.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
"
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
A
L
"
P
A
R
T
S
eCabinet
A-C2
Client
View contents with a
Web Browser
CONTROL NO 137ABW
!
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003 004 Reissue ! !! !
Page 2 of 4
2. Configurations and Necessary Hardware:
Basic Printer Printer/Scanner FAX
Mainframe
! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
64MB Memory Option
! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
NIB Option
! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
Printer Option -
! !! !
- -
Printer/Scanner Option - -
! !! !
-
Fax Option - - -
! !! !
Basic: Copier/Document Server
Printer: Basic + Printer
Printer/Scanner: Basic + Printer/Scanner
Fax: Basic + Fax
3. Necessary Firmware Upgrades for Mainframes/Options produced before Oct 01:
The table below shows the necessary firmware versions for each configuration.
Although part of the Capture function may work with older versions, to make full use of the
function we strongly recommend upgrading to the following:
Firmware Version Basic Printer Printer/Scanner FAX
Controller 5.19.1
! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
LCDC 2.19
! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
NCS(NIB) 1.77
! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
NFA(Netfile) 2.17
! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! ! ! !! !
Printer 3.00 -
! !! ! ! !! !
-
Scanner 2.27 - -
! !! !
-
Fax Application 5.20 - - -
! !! !
FCU 6.00.01 - - -
! !! !
Delivery Module - ! !! ! - ! !! !
Note: When installing the individual Printer or FAX options, it is necessary to update the delivery
module in addition to the firmware. This is because the Printer/Scanner option firmware already
contains the new delivery module, which is automatically updated with the new firmware.
4.0 Necessary SP Settings:
SP Mode
4.1 SP5-836 -1 (Capture Function).
Enables/disables the Capture function.
When enabled, the settings screen for the function is displayed inside
System Settings.
0: Disabled (default) 1: Enabled
4.2 SP5-806 -61 (Capture File Resend).
Enables/disables resending of previously captured files to eCabinet.
When enabled, if the client PC operator accesses a Captured file stored in eCabinet and sends it to
the A-C2, the machine will resend this document to the eCabinet. This is to provide an extra
safeguard for file backup. However if users wish to minimize network traffic and free up eCabinet
memory, this function can be disabled.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003 004 Reissue ! !! !
Page 3 of 4
SECTION 5.0 - NECESSARY UP SETTINGS:
UP Mode:
Users need to perform the necessary settings (Capture server IP address, etc.) from inside: [Use
Tools/Counter]#[System Settings].
Please refer to the Operating Instructions for the procedure.
5.0 Copier UP Mode Explanation:
Users need to perform the necessary settings; user tool/system settings/file transfer/ Capture
server IP address, eCabinet IP address.
On the copier go to; user tools/system settings/key op tools/next button/capture priority.
On the copier go to; user tools/system settings/timer settings and set to customer's preference.
Explanation:
OFF: Normal mode - eCabinet window does not pop up and there's no capture to eCabinet.
"OFF" Default: - eCabinet window pops up, select ecab user, and choose capture "ON" or OFF".
"ON" Default: - eCabinet window pops up, select ecab user, and choose capture "ON" or OFF".
"ON": - eCabinet window pops up, user must be selected, and capture mode is "ON" or OFF".
"ON": - eCabinet window pops up, user must be selected, and capture mode is "ON" and can
not be changed.
"ON" NO DISPLAY: - eCabinet window and capture happens behind the scenes. Default user
setup on.
eCabinet under settings/advanced settings/capture control will always be the captured documents
owner.
Example:
Capture priority for copier is set for default ON. This way the eCabinet window pops up every
time Copier mode is used and the capture button is selected.
5.1 To Configure The Aficio:
1. Install the Aficio on the network and press the User Tools/Counter button.
2. On the User Tools/Counter screen, press System Settings
3. Press the File Transfer tab.
4. Press Capture Server IP Address, and enter the eCabinet IP address.
5. Press the Interface Settings tab, and enter the network information for the copier.
6. Press the Exit button to save the settings.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 004 Reissue !
Page 4 of 4
6.0 To configure the eCabinet:
1. Install the eCabinet, and make sure that it has the same IP address that you used when you
set the Capture Server IP address on the Aficio.
2. From a web browser, log in to the eCabinet as adminNOA.
3. On the toolbar, click Settings.
The Settings page appears.
4. Click Network and Device Configuration.
The Network and Device Configuration page appears.
5. Click Copiers.
The Copiers page appears.
6. Click New.
The Copiers - New Copier Information page appears.
7. Enter the Aficio Copier IP Address.
8. Click Merge eCabinet user list into user list on copier to keep any existing users that are on
the Aficio.
9. Click Save.
NOTE 1: The MFP requires its own device name to be resolved on the DNS server. If it cannot resolve its
own name, the FTP process to the eCabinet may be rejected.
NOTE 2: eCabinet Software version 2.1 or later is required.
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 004 Reissue 09/06/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: CAPTURE FUNCTION
GENERAL:
B003 series mainframes and options will be modified for use with the Capture function from October 2001
production.
Section 2 below shows the necessary hardware for each configuration, Section 3 shows the necessary
firmware to use the Capture function on mainframes and options produced before Oct 01.
Section 4 shows the SP settings and 5 the UP Mode settings. Section 6 shows how to configure eCabinet
1. Overview of the Capture Function:
Once the B003 series is connected to the eCabinet, the Capture function enables users to store copier, fax,
scanner and printer documents there with such ID attributes as Owner, Name and Date. A web browser is
used from the client PC to access documents stored in the eCabinet.
Even while the B003 series is engaged in Capture file transfer, it is still possible to use all original B003
series functions (copier, printer, fax, Document Server). In addition, note that the Document Server can be
used in place of the eCabinet in the setup shown below.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
A
L
P
A
R
T
S
eCabinet
B003/B004/B006/B007
Client
View contents with a
Web Browser
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003 004 Reissue
Page 2 of 4
2. Configurations and Necessary Hardware:
Basic Printer Printer/Scanner FAX
Mainframe
64MB Memory Option
NIB Option
Printer Option -
- -
Printer/Scanner Option - -
-
Fax Option - - -
Basic: Copier/Document Server
Printer: Basic + Printer
Printer/Scanner: Basic + Printer/Scanner
Fax: Basic + Fax
3. Necessary Firmware Upgrades for Mainframes/Options produced before Oct 01:
The table below shows the necessary firmware versions for each configuration.
Although part of the Capture function may work with older versions, to make full use of the
function we strongly recommend upgrading to the following:
Firmware Version Basic Printer Printer/Scanner FAX
Controller 5.19.1
LCDC 2.19
NCS(NIB) 1.77
NFA(Netfile) 2.17
Printer 3.00 -
-
Scanner 2.27 - -
-
Fax Application 5.20 - - -
FCU 6.00.01 - - -
Delivery Module - -
Note: When installing the individual Printer or FAX options, it is necessary to update the delivery
module in addition to the firmware. This is because the Printer/Scanner option firmware already
contains the new delivery module, which is automatically updated with the new firmware.
4.0 Necessary SP Settings:
SP Mode
4.1 SP5-836 -1 (Capture Function).
Enables/disables the Capture function.
When enabled, the settings screen for the function is displayed inside
System Settings.
0: Disabled (default) 1: Enabled
4.2 SP5-836 -61 (Capture File Resend).
Enables/disables resending of previously captured files to eCabinet.
When enabled, if the client PC operator accesses a Captured file stored in eCabinet and sends it to the
A-C2, the machine will resend this document to the eCabinet. This is to provide an extra safeguard for
file backup. However if users wish to minimize network traffic and free up eCabinet memory, this function
can be disabled.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003 004 Reissue
Page 3 of 4
SECTION 5.0 - NECESSARY UP SETTINGS:
UP Mode:
Users need to perform the necessary settings (Capture server IP address, etc.) from inside: [Use
Tools/Counter][System Settings].
Please refer to the Operating Instructions for the procedure.
5.0 Copier UP Mode Explanation:
Users need to perform the necessary settings; user tool/system settings/file transfer/ Capture
server IP address, eCabinet IP address.
On the copier go to; user tools/system settings/key op tools/next button/capture priority.
On the copier go to; user tools/system settings/timer settings and set to customer's preference.
Explanation:
OFF: Normal mode - eCabinet window does not pop up and there's no capture to eCabinet.
"OFF" Default: - eCabinet window pops up, select ecab user, and choose capture "ON" or OFF".
"ON" Default: - eCabinet window pops up, select ecab user, and choose capture "ON" or OFF".
"ON": - eCabinet window pops up, user must be selected, and capture mode is "ON" or OFF".
"ON": - eCabinet window pops up, user must be selected, and capture mode is "ON" and can
not be changed.
"ON" NO DISPLAY: - eCabinet window and capture happens behind the scenes. Default user
setup on.
eCabinet under settings/advanced settings/capture control will always be the captured documents
owner.
Example:
Capture priority for copier is set for default ON. This way the eCabinet window pops up every
time Copier mode is used and the capture button is selected.
5.1 To Configure the Copier:
1. Install the copier on the network and press the User Tools/Counter button.
2. On the User Tools/Counter screen, press System Settings
3. Press the File Transfer tab.
4. Press Capture Server IP Address, and enter the eCabinet IP address.
5. Press the Interface Settings tab, and enter the network information for the copier.
6. Press the Exit button to save the settings.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 004 Reissue
Page 4 of 4
6.0 To configure the eCabinet:
1. Install the eCabinet, and make sure that it has the same IP address that you used when you
set the Capture Server IP address on the copier.
2. From a web browser, log in to the eCabinet as adminNOA.
3. On the toolbar, click Settings.
The Settings page appears.
4. Click Network and Device Configuration.
The Network and Device Configuration page appears.
5. Click Copiers.
The Copiers page appears.
6. Click New.
The Copiers - New Copier Information page appears.
7. Enter the Copier IP Address.
8. Click Merge eCabinet user list into user list on copier to keep any existing users that are on
the copier.
9. Click Save.
NOTE 1: The MFP requires its own device name to be resolved on the DNS server. If it cannot resolve its
own name, the FTP process to the eCabinet may be rejected.
NOTE 2: eCabinet Software version 2.1 or later is required.
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 B003/B004/B006/B007 B003/B004/B006/B007 B003/B004/B006/B007 005 005 005 005 02/28/2002 02/28/2002 02/28/2002 02/28/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH RICOH RICOH RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
PAGES:
ii TOC (Fax Option Firmware History) Updated Information
4-20 Fax Option Firmware History Updated Information
4-21 Fax Option Firmware History Updated Information
4-22 Fax Option Software History Updated Information
4-23 Fax Option Software History Updated Information
ii TOC (361/362 Controller Software history) Updated Information
4-12 Controller Software history Updated Information
4-13 Controller Software history Updated Information
4-14 Controller Software history Updated Information
viii TOC (B004 Engine Software History) Updated Information
6-84 Engine Software History Updated Information
6-85 Engine Software History Updated Information
x TOC (B351 Firmware History) Updated Information
8-24 DF70 Software history Updated Information
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
CONTROL NO 121ABW
B003/B004/B006/B007 ii SM
3.2 BIT SWITCHES.......................................................................................3-10
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES.....................................................................3-10
3.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES..................................................................3-22
3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES....................................................................3-27
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES.....................................................3-32
3.2.5 G3 SWITCHES...............................................................................3-41
3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES............................................................................3-49
3.2.7 G3-3 SWITCHES............................................................................3-54
3.2.8 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES............................................................3-55
3.2.9 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................3-62
3.3 NCU PARAMETERS...............................................................................3-65
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS......................................3-76
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE....................................................3-76
3.4.2 PARAMETERS...............................................................................3-77
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................3-81
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................4-1
4.1 OVERVIEW...............................................................................................4-1
4.2 BOARDS ...................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 FCU..................................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 NCU (US) .........................................................................................4-4
4.2.3 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) ......................................................................4-5
4.2.4 SG3 BOARD.....................................................................................4-6
4.2.5 SIG4 BOARD....................................................................................4-7
4.3 VIDEO DATA PATH..................................................................................4-8
4.3.1 TRANSMISSION..............................................................................4-8
4.3.2 RECEPTION...................................................................................4-11
4.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES .....................................................4-13
4.4.1 PERSONAL/INFORMATION/TRANSFER BOXES ........................4-13
4.4.2 MULTI-PORT..................................................................................4-16
4.4.3 DOCUMENT SERVER...................................................................4-17
4.4.4 LAN FAX DRIVER..........................................................................4-18
4.5 FIRMWARE HISTORY...4- 20
4.5.1 FAX OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY.4- 20
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY..4- 22
4.6.1 FAX OPTION SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY4- 22
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................5-1
1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................5-1
2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS............................................5-3
3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION......................................................................5-4
FIRMWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-20 SM
4.5 FIRMWARE HISTORY
4.5.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
B3605581 A 1.05
Corrects the following:
A) The file name is not printed when an A4
size document is output to A5 paper.
B) The edge of the documents image area is
not printed out in inch resolution mode.
C) With fine print mode, the first page comes
out enlarged if the expansion option memory
has not been installed.
First Page Print
from document
server
Documents from the Document Server sent
in memory transmission are printed out to the
paper tray appropriated for the G3-1 line.
Output to G3 1
paper tray
The transmission results report is printed out
when the memory reaches capacity.
In cases where the transmission results
report cannot be printed out (e.g. no paper),
files cannot be sent following this.
Transmission
results report
The confidential file report is not printed out
in the following conditions.
The line is disconnected during phase C of
confidential reception.
There are no confidential reception files
stored in the machine.
No confidential
file report
With the First Page print function, the image
shifts to the right of the center mark when an
A5 document from the Document Server is
printed out to A5 paper.
First Page print
from document
server (A5)
The last page of a G4 immediate reception
job is split into 2 pages (top and bottom
halves of the image).
Page split with
G4 immediate
reception.
If a memory transmission destination is
changed and the power is turned Off/On, the
destination is erased. (Only those existing
destinations that have been changed are
deleted).
Destination
erased
If the SAF memory reaches capacity during
scanning, the file is saved but the filename
does not initially appear on the file list (it is
necessary to exit and re-enter the filename
display screen).
Memory full
If the filename for a Document Server
document is 8 characters or longer, it
will not appear on the memory
storage report.
Memory
Storage
Report
B3605581 B 2.00.04
Continued
Rev. 01/2002
FIRMWARE HISTORY
SM 4-21 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Corrects the following:
If the user initiates a printout of a Document
Server document while the memory
transmission results report is being printed
out, the document will come out as a blank
page
Document from
D. Server comes
out blank
Some unnecessary (large) log files had been
carried over, causing it to take a very long
time to print out all the log files with this SP
mode.
SP6-107-001
Large log files
printed out
If a document with cover sheet is sent from a
PC using the LAN FAX driver, the machine
allows the operation of storing a document,
even though the SAF memory is full. (i.e.
document is not actually stored).
Storage when
SAF memory full
The DTMF tone is sent to the ISDN-G3 line
after pressing the tone key, even if user
parameter switch 11(0B) is set to 0 (UUI).
ISDN-G3
transmission
When sending with Batch Transmission, the
dedicated transmission parameters are not
applied to destinations entered in with the
ten-key pad. (those entered w/Quick Dials
are fine).
Batch
transmission
B3605581 C 3.00.00
Corrects the following:
Communication failure (receiver time out)
sometimes occurs with G4 reception.
G4 reception
failure
B3605581 D 4.00.00
The fax option sometimes does not start up
when the main power is turned on.
Power on failure
Documents received in substitute reception
are successfully stored into SAF memory,
however if the main controller goes into
Energy Saver mode during reception, the
files cannot be printed out later.
Substitute.
reception file
cannot be
printed out
Country code 1C for Korea has been
enabled
C. code (Korea)
Fax FCU
Version N.A. Effective Date
01.05.00 B3605581A 1st mass production
02.00.04 B3605581B April 2001 prod.
03.00.00 B3605581C May 2001 prod.
04.00.00 B3605581D July 2001 prod.
Rev. 01/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-22 SM
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY
4.6.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3605590 E 3.2.5
Corrects the following:
Some buttons are disabled after the handset
is picked up and put back several times.
Some buttons are disabled after a job is
interrupted with off-hook (reset) and the
handset is put back.
It is possible to press to the On-hook button
while no paper is displayed.
The fax option malfunctions when several
quick dials are pressed in On-hook mode
(handset down).
The alert continues to be displayed even after
the handset is put back.
When trying to send stored files from the
Document Server, the ten-key pad is disabled
if the On-hook button is pressed twice while
still inside the Enter Password screen.
Handset
The response time of the ten-key pad has
been increased.
Ten-key
response time
improved
When documents are scanned for storage
(only) to the Document Server, the machine
does not prohibit changing the size of the
scanning area.
Document
Server
scanning area
(size)
Manual reception is not possible while inside
the User Code Input screen.
Manual
reception
disabled
The Stamp function is displayed in User Tool
Settings even though there is no Stamp option
installed.
Option Stamp
displayed
B3605590 F 3.8.4
SC990 occurs when printing a message
stored in the Information Box.
Information Box
The fax option malfunctions when printing out
the G4 protocol dump list without the ISDN
option board installed.
SP6-104: G4
Protocol Dump
List
The main power can be turned off even if the
handset is off the hook.
Power off with
handset Off
hook
The TTI does not appear on any page when
sending documents with a cover sheet.
LAN Fax Driver
No TTI
B3605590 G 3.8.9
Rev. 01/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-23 B003/B004/B00/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
0
B003/B004/B006/B007 FAX OPTION SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
Corrects the following:
When a document is printed out from a PC
with the LAN Fax driver, none of the counter
values change.
LAN Fax Driver
No count up.
B3605590 H 3.8.13
Fax Application
Version N.A. Effective Date
3.2.5 B3605590E 1st mass production
3.8.4 B3605590F April 2001 prod.
3.8.9 B3605590G May 2001 prod.
3.8.13 B3605590H July 2001 prod.
Rev 01/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 ii SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 4-1
4.1 OVERVIEW...............................................................................................4-1
4.2 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS....................................................................4-2
4.2.1 SAMPLE PRINT ...............................................................................4-2
4.2.2 LOCKED PRINT...............................................................................4-2
4.2.3 PAPER SOURCE SELECTION........................................................4-3
4.2.4 AUTO CONTINUE............................................................................4-4
4.2.5 PAPER OUTPUT TRAY...................................................................4-5
4.2.6 DUPLEX PRINTING.........................................................................4-5
4.2.7 STAPLING........................................................................................4-6
4.2.8 PUNCHING ......................................................................................4-6
4.3 SCANNER FUNCTIONS...........................................................................4-7
4.3.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE ..............................4-7
4.4 NIB ............................................................................................................4-8
4.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................4-8
4.4.2 LED INDICATORS............................................................................4-8
4.5 IEEE1394 INTERFACE.............................................................................4-9
4.5.1 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................4-9
4.5.2 IEEE1394 .........................................................................................4-9
4.5.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................4-10
4.5.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT.........................................................................4-10
4.5.5 REMARKS ABOUT THIS INTERFACE KIT....................................4-11
4.5.6 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES ......................................................4-11
4.6 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE HISTORY..4-12
4.6.1 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY...4-12
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ 5-1
1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................5-1
1.1 PRINTER.............................................................................................5-1
1.2 SCANNER...........................................................................................5-3
2 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ......................................................................5-4
2.1 PRINTER.............................................................................................5-4
2.2 SCANNER...........................................................................................5-5
3 MEACHINE CONFIGURATION....................................................................5-6
3.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS...................................................................5-6
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-12 SM
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY
4.6.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045102 D 3.05
Corrects the following:
SC820 occurs at power ON when the
Self-Diagnostic is performed.
SC820
A small square character appears throughout
the SP/UP and SC Error screens in machines
for Taiwan, China and Asia.
Display Text
Error
With the User Stamp function, SC955 occurs
when a copy job is made with 200 or more
originals
SC955
In UP Mode, the operation panel key for paper
sizes for China (8K, 16K) can be turned
On/Off with SP mode.
8K, 16K paper
selection
(display)
SC955 occurs when 1 set has been
programmed for Staple Sort (w/32MB+HDD).
SC955
After the machine has repeatedly stored to
and printed out documents from the HDD, it
freezes during scanning (scanner does not
turn off).
Fax document
storage error
B0045102 E 3.06
Printing not possible when sending a print job
from a PC to the Adonis-C2 via the server
(parallel cable connection). In addition, the
printer status cannot be monitored from a web
browser.
Error when
printing from the
Print Server
B0045102 F 3.07
The Rx File Transmission settings on the Up
Mode Data Printout appear as None.
Up Mode Data
printout error
In the System Settings! User ID screen, if
other information is changed in addition to the
user code, the user code assumes a
completely different value.
User code
setting
The display still reads Printing even after a
jam or SMC paper end occurs.
Printing
continually
displayed
An image problem occurs when binding
margin has been set for Magazine
Image problem
with Magazine
Mode
When a FAX is sent with binding (negative
value) and image rotation, marks appear at
the end of a main scan direction line. These
lines are caused during the image processing
stage
Marks near the
trailing edge of
received FAX
images
SC955 occurs when the 32MB and HDD are
both installed.
SC955
B0045102 G 3.08.4
Continued
Rev. 01/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The SP modes for HDD initialization (SP4911-
***) have been moved to SSP.
SP4911 moved
to SSP Mode
The SC error data (incl. logging data) from
SC-8XX was incorrect.
RSS logging
data incorrect
SC819 occurs when using Magazine Mode
without the optional memory installed.
SC819
When using an A4 2-page spread original to
print out to larger sizes (AMS) with hole-
punching selected, the machine displays
Cannot staple, even though the Staple
function has not been selected.
Cannot staple
is displayed
When printing out with APS enabled and both
Punch and Staple selected, the display reads
Cannot punch.
Cannot punch
is displayed
When entering a pm time using the 24-hour
format in Initial Settings, the machine inputs
the corresponding am time instead (e.g.
mistakenly inputs 8:00 instead of 20:00).
When entering 12:00, the machine inputs 0
instead.
Time setting
error
SP2103 has been moved from SSP to SP
mode.
SP2103 moved
to SP mode.
B0045102 G 3.08.4
Marks appear when printing out with 180
degree image rotation. These lines are
caused during the image processing stage.
Marks on the
output with
image rotation
When a jam occurs in Magazine Mode with a
combined-image original, the first image is not
saved and therefore cannot be recovered
(although all successive images are
successfully recovered).
Portion of image
deleted during
jam recovery
Cannot enter SP mode after entering SSP
mode.
Not possible to
enter SP from
SSP
When a number key is pressed while the
machine is in Energy Saver Mode, the
machine comes back on line, however the
value of the number key pressed is input
(used).
Key input when
recovering from
Energy Saver
Mode
Cannot change pm to am in the System
Settings clock setting screen in machines for
North America.
Cannot change
PM to AM
(clock)
Recovery is not possible after the FCU
firmware download is interrupted. A function
has been added to make recovery possible
even after it is interrupted.
FCU download
recovery not
possible
Rev. 01/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-14 SM
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The Cant allocate info error message
sometimes appears when connected to a
network.
Cant allocate
info error
The DMA sometimes fails when receiving
data from the network.
DMA failure
B0045102 H 3.08.5
The printer function stalls when jobs are
frequently sent alternating among different
drivers.
Printer
application stalls
B0045102 H 3.09.1
Rev. 01/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 viii SM
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY............................................................................... 6-61
6.12.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................. 6-61
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION.................................................. 6-62
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION....................................... 6-63
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................. 6-64
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT........................................................ 6-65
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION.................................................. 6-66
Larger than A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise ........................................ 6-66
Up to A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise ................................................. 6-66
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM..................... 6-67
Feed-in......................................................................................... 6-67
Inversion and Exit .......................................................................... 6-67
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................... 6-68
6.14.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................. 6-68
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM...................................................... 6-69
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM .................... 6-69
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM. 6-70
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE.................................................... 6-71
Mechanism................................................................................... 6-71
Correction for paper width and thickness......................................... 6-72
Currents applied to leading edge and image areas, and for
by-pass feed.............................................................................. 6-73
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM............................ 6-74
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT.................................................. 6-75
6.15.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................. 6-75
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE....................................................................... 6-76
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM................................. 6-76
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM ................... 6-77
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS................... 6-77
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER.............................................................. 6-78
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM........................................................ 6-78
6.15.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL....................................... 6-79
Temperature Control...................................................................... 6-79
Fusing Idling Temperature ............................................................. 6-80
6.15.9 OVERHEAT PROTECTION...................................................... 6-80
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES ............................................................... 6-81
6.16.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................. 6-81
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE ......................................................... 6-82
Entering the energy saver mode..................................................... 6-82
What happens in energy saver mode.............................................. 6-82
Return to stand-by mode................................................................ 6-82
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE................................................................... 6-83
Entering off stand-by and off modes................................................ 6-83
Off Stand-by mode ........................................................................ 6-83
Off Mode ...................................................................................... 6-83
Returning to stand-by mode ........................................................... 6-83
6.17 SOFTWARE HISTORY..6.84
6.17.1 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY....6.84
Rev. 02/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-84 SM
6.17 SOFTWARE HISTORY
6.17.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045112 C 2.15.04
Please wait message does not clear when
there is paper in between the duplex unit and
units cover.
Please wait
does not clear
When feeding HLT or A5 lengthwise from the
bypass tray, horizontal black lines appear
about 180mm from the leading edge.
Horizontal black
lines
Fax image is not output when Standard is
selected and the trays main scan registration
adjustment value (SP1002) is set at 9.0mm.
Fax image is not
output
When the value of SP1002 is between
- 8.9mm and 8.0mm, images do not appear
in the area approximately 1mm from the main-
scan leading edge.
Images do not
appear in the
main-scan
leading edge
area
B0045112 D 2.16.05
Image problem occurs only in outputs made
just after the main power is turned on (e.g.
output completely black, blurry images).
Image problem
occurs after
main power is
turned on
B0045112 E 2.16a.05
After the power is turned on, the first output
shows a black stripe at the sub-scan leading
edge.
Black stripe at
the sub-scan
leading edge
When a Finisher SC occurs, it becomes
impossible to start any other job (even those
not using the Finisher).
Finisher SC
After SP5801 (Memory Clear) is performed,
the default value for SP1001-01 is changed to
0.
Memory Clear
problem
The Tray Full display is not cleared even after:
the main power is turned off, the paper is
cleared from the tray and the main power is
turned on again.
Tray Full display
is not cleared
SP6006-05 (DF trailing edge erase
adjustment) has been newly added to ensure
that the trailing edge of the original does not
appear on the copy.
Note that this cannot be used for the Fax and
Scanner applications.
SP6006-05
added
B0045112 F 2.19.05
Rev. 02/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 6-85 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
Following a book scan job at 25-44%
reduction, the first page of a (100%) DF job is
printed out as a blank page.
Blank page of a
DF job
When a finisher jam occurs with the 1000-
sheet Finisher, sometimes the location of the
jammed paper is not displayed.
Jammed paper
location is not
displayed
B0045112 G 2.20
Fusing-related SC errors happen frequently
after SP1104-1 is changed from fusing
temperature control to phase control.
SC error at
Phase control
When the operation switch is turned Off/On,
the value of SP6017 (Sheet Through
Magnification) is reset to default (0).
Value of
SP6017 is reset
to default
B0045112 H 2.21
Version Program No. Effective Date
2.15.04 B0045112C 1st mass production
2.06.05 B0045112D February 2001 prod.
2.16a.05 B0045112E March 2001 prod.
2.19.05 B0045112F April 2001 prod.
2.20 B0045112G May 2001 prod.
2.21 B0045112H July 2001 prod.
Rev. 02/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 x SM
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................8-21
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS..........................................................8-21
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................8-22
4.6 STAMP....................................................................................................8-23
4.7 DF70 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY8-24
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION........................................ 9-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................9-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................9-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.....................................................9-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION...........................................9-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................9-5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS....................................................... 9-6
2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM.....................................................................9-6
2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM................9-7
Tray lifting conditions ............................................................................9-7
Tray lowering conditions .......................................................................9-7
2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM .............................................................9-8
3. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 9-9
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.........................................................................................9-9
3.2 TEST POINTS...........................................................................................9-9
3.3 SWITCHES................................................................................................9-9
3.4 FUSES ......................................................................................................9-9
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................... 9-10
4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT........................................................................9-10
Tray Cover ..........................................................................................9-10
Front Cover.........................................................................................9-10
Rear Cover .........................................................................................9-10
Right Lower Cover ..............................................................................9-10
Upper Cover .......................................................................................9-10
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ......................................................................9-11
4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS.............9-11
Pick-up Roller .....................................................................................9-11
Paper Feed Roller...............................................................................9-11
Separation Roller ................................................................................9-11
4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT ....................9-12
Tray Lift Sensor ..................................................................................9-12
Paper End Sensor ..............................................................................9-12
4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.........................................................9-13
4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE.........................................................9-14
Rev. 02/2002
DF70, SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 8-24 SM
4.7 DF70, SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DF70 (ARDF) SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
SOFTWARE
LEVEL
PRODUCTION
DATE
VERSION
First mass production B3515620 F First mass
production
1.74
Corrects the following:
When scanning originals with the DF in Mixed
Original or Double-Sided Original modes, a
noise can sometimes be heard when the
original is output to the reverse table. To ensure
this noise does not occur, bit4 of the ADF
controller DIPSW has been modified so that the
reverse paper exit speed can be adjusted as
follows:
ADF DIPSW bit4 OFF: 4310pps (pulses per
sec.)
ON: 4166pps
This bit is set at the factory, depending on
which setting produces less noise (most
cases: set to ON). However in the field, if a
noise occurs after replacing the motor or
ADF controller, this can be eliminated or at
least minimized by changing the bit to the
opposite setting (e.g. ON OFF).
B3515620 G June 2001
Production
1.75
Sometimes with Mixed Original Size mode, the
motor remains on and/or a DF jam occurs.
B3515620 J July 2001
Production
1.79
Part Number Version
C. SUM
Production
B3515620J 1.79 0E62 July 2001 production
B3515620G 1.75 17E9 June 2001 production
B3515620F 1.74 862A 1st mass production
Rev.02/2002
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN 1LCBNlC4L SLRvlCL BtLLL1lN
BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: BULLL1lW WUVBLR: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 006 006 006 006 02/28/2002 02/28/2002 02/28/2002 02/28/2002
4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL 4PPLlC4BLL V0BLL: :: :
BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P BLS1L1WLR - 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RlC0B - 4FlCl0 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P S4vlW - 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING PAD/BRUSH
GENERAL:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
To increase the efficiency of cleaning the charge roller, a brush roller has replaced the charge roller-cleaning
pad. With the introduction of the charge cleaning brush the following parts have been modified.
Charge Unit Front Arm
Charge Unit Rear Arm
Pressure Spring
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2322356 - Stepped Screw M6 1-0 - 39 9
A2322298 - Bracket Charge Cleaning 1-0 - 39 10
AA062301 - Tension Spring 1-0 - 39 11
A2322300 - Roller - Cleaning 1-0 - 39 12
G0652280 Cleaning Pad 1-0 -
G0652330 Brush Roller Cleaning 0-1 3 39 13
The Cleaning Roller Arm Kit consists of the follow parts.
B0049800 Cleaning Roller Arm Kit 0-1 39 30*
A2322303 G0652321 Front Arm Charge Unit 1-1 1 39 15
A2322305 G0652326 Rear Arm Charge Unit 1-1 1 39 23
AA063561 AA063648 Pressure Spring 2-2 1 39 16
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
For machines produced prior to this modification, one of the following is possible:
1. The cleaning pad can be replaced with the new brush roller, it is also necessary to replace the
parts in the Cleaning Roller Arm Kit.
2. The existing cleaning pad (A2322430) for the A230/A231/A232 series machine can be used to
replace the B003/B004/B006/B007 cleaning pad (G0652280).
NOTE: The cleaning pad (G0652280) has been removed from the PM Kit (PMB008150K). The cleaning
roller or pad will have to be order as a separate service part based on the machine configuration.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
T
P
A
R
T
S
T
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
CONTROL NO. 122ABW
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 006
Page 2 of 3
ITEMS DELETED FROM THE PARTS CATALOG
ITEMS ADDED TO THE PARTS CATALOG
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 006
Page 3 of 4
CLEANING ROLLER BRUSH REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the Drum. (Refer to 3.11.2
on the service manual)
2. Remove the snap rings [A].
3. Remove the springs [B].
4. Remove the charge roller [C].
5. Remove the spring [D].
6. Remove the E-ring [E]
7. Remove the cover [F].
8. Remove the stud [G].
9. Remove the cleaning pad Assy
[H].
10. Remove the bushings [I], front
terminal [J] and rear terminal [K].
11. Install the front terminal [J], rear
terminal [K] and bushing [I] to the
new front [M]and rear arm [L].
12. Install the new front arm [L], the
rear arm [M], the stud [G], the new
brush roller [N] and the charge
roller [C]
13. Install the E-ring [E] and the snap
rings [A].
14. Install the new springs [P].
15. Put back the cover [F] and the
Drum.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 006
Page 4 of 4
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new
charge roller cleaning brush installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502 H7016900219
Gestetner 4502 H7116901248
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7015900869
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7116901748
Savin 2535 H7016900219
Savin 2545 H7116901248
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
SERVICE MANUAL INSERT:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
iii TOC Page Updated Information
3-29 Updated Information
3-30 Cleaning Roller Brush Replacement Procedure
3-31 Updated Information
SM iii B003/B004/B006/B007
3.10.5 LD UNIT........................................................................................3-24
Laser beam pitch adjustment..............................................................3-25
3.11 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ......................................................3-26
3.11.1 PCU..............................................................................................3-26
3.11.2 DRUM...........................................................................................3-27
3.11.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS .......................................................................3-28
3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING PAD & ROLLER BRUSH............3-29
3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE...........................................................3-31
3.11.6 ID SENSOR..................................................................................3-31
3.12 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................3-32
3.12.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................3-32
3.12.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER.............................................................3-33
3.12.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER...........................................................3-33
3.12.4 DEVELOPER................................................................................3-34
3.12.5 TD SENSOR.................................................................................3-36
3.13 TRANSFER UNIT..................................................................................3-37
3.13.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT...............................................................3-37
3.13.2 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-38
3.13.3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE AND TONER OVERFLOW
SENSOR.......................................................................................3-39
3.14 PAPER FEED........................................................................................3-40
3.14.1 PICK-UP, SEPARATION, AND FEED ROLLERS ........................3-40
3.14.2 LOWER RIGHT COVER...............................................................3-41
3.14.3 RELAY/UPPER PAPER FEED AND LOWER PAPER FEED
CLUTCHES...................................................................................3-42
3.14.4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1 ..................................3-43
3.14.5 LOWER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2 .................................3-44
3.14.6 PAPER END/PAPER HEIGHT/RELAY SENSORS......................3-45
3.14.7 REGISTRATION SENSOR...........................................................3-46
3.14.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................3-48
3.14.9 FEED/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR..................................................3-49
3.15 FUSING.................................................................................................3-50
3.15.1 FUSING UNIT...............................................................................3-50
3.15.2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE .........................................................3-51
3.15.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS .........................................................3-51
3.15.4 FUSING LAMPS...........................................................................3-52
3.15.5 THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS.......................................3-54
3.15.6 FUSING ROLLER/PRESSURE ROLLER.....................................3-55
3.16 BY-PASS TRAY ....................................................................................3-57
3.16.1 COVER REPLACEMENT.............................................................3-57
3.16.2 BY-PASS PAPER FEED AND PICK-UP ROLLER
REPLACEMENT...........................................................................3-58
3.16.3 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT...................3-59
3.16.4 PAPER END SENSOR AND PICK-UP SOLENOID
REPLACEMENT...........................................................................3-60
3.16.5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT.......................3-61
3.16.6 BY-PASS TABLE REMOVAL .......................................................3-62
3.16.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT....................................3-63
Rev. 02/2002
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
SM 3-29 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING PAD & ROLLER BRUSH
1. Remove the drum. (3.11.2)
2. Two snap rings [A] ( x2)
3. Slide out front charge roller holder [B]
4. Charge roller [C]
NOTE: Do not touch the charge roller.
5. Remove charge roller cleaning pad [D] (4 hooks)
6. After replacing the charge roller, check the value of SP2-001-1. If it is not at the
standard value (1480V), set SP2-001-1 to 1480V.
NOTE: If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the
charge roller voltage will be too high.
Refer To Page 3-30 For The Charge Roller/Charge Cleaning Roller
Brush Replacement Procedure.
B004R306.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Rev. 02/2002
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-30 SM
CLEANING ROLLER BRUSH REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE.
1. Remove the drum. (3.11.2)
2. Two snap rings [A] ( x2)
3. Slide out front charge roller holder [B]
NOTE: Do not touch the charge roller.
4. Remove charge roller [C] and the charge roller cleaning brush [D].
5. After replacing the charge roller, check the value of SP2-001-1. If it is not at the
standard value (1480V), set SP2-001-1 to 1480V.
NOTE: If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the
charge roller voltage will be too high.
Rev. 02/2002
Cleaning Roller2.wmf
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
SM 3-31 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE
1. Remove the drum. (3.11.2)
2. Remove the charge roller.
(3.11.4)
3. Remove the drum cleaning
blade [A] ( x2)
3.11.6 ID SENSOR
1. PCU (3.11.1)
2. Fusing unit (3.15.1)
3. Development unit (3.12.1)
4. Remove the PCU rail [A] ( x2,
x1)
5. Remove the ID sensor bracket [B] (
x1, x1)
6. Remove the ID sensor [C] ( x1)
7. Perform the ID sensor initial setting
with SP3-001-2 ( Chapter 5,
Service Tables)
B004R931.WMF
[A]
B004R931.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
Rev. 02/2002
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N
BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 - B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 - B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 - B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 - 007 007 007 007 04/ 18/ 2002 04/ 18/ 2002 04/ 18/ 2002 04/ 18/ 2002
APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P
RI COH RI COH RI COH RI COH AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P
SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATE
GENERAL:
The following parts update is being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
UPDATE 1:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
NA B0271485 Short Spacer 2 17
29
*
NA B0271484 Long Spacer 2 17
30
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
P
A
R
T
S
Short Spacer._Long Spacer. Item numbers added to Operation
Panel illustration.
29
30
CONTROL NO 127ABW
2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 008 008 008 008 04/19/2002 04/19/2002 04/19/2002 04/19/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: PROPER INSTALLATION OF PRINTER/SCANNER
AND FAX FUNCTION DIMMS
SYMPTOM:
SC997
SC818
SC819
Fax Option not recognized
Printer or Printer Scanner Option not recognized
SOLUTION:
Follow the chart below to properly configure the B003/B004/B006/B007 machines.
Option
Network
Interface
Board
64MB
Memory
Option
Function
Slot
Function
Slot 1
(CN7)
Function
Slot 2
(CN8)
Notes
Configuration
Copier N/A N/A N/A N/A
Copier/Fax N/A N/A F N/A
Copier/Printer R R P PS3
Copier/Printer/Fax R R P PS3
Copier/Printer/
Scanner
R R P/S PS3
Copier/Printer/
Scanner/Fax
R R P/S PS3
F = Fax Function DIMM, P = Printer Function DIMM, P/S = Printer/Scanner DIMM,
PS3 = PostScript Option DIMM
N/A = Not Applicable, R = Required
Slot 1 on the Controller PCB is for the Function DIMM (Fax DIMM, Printer DIMM or Printer/Scanner
DIMM). Only 1 Function DIMM can be installed on the Controller PCB. The Fax Function is built into
Printer and Printer/Scanner DIMM. When installing the Fax Option, there is no need to install the Fax
DIMM if the Printer or Printer/Scanner DIMM is already installed.
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
G
E
N
E
R
A
L
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
CONTROL NO. 128ABW
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 009 009 009 009 04/30/2002 04/30/2002 04/30/2002 04/30/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
i to ii Updated Information (Table of Contents Pages)
1-3 to 1-4 Installable Option Table Section Added
1-52 Updated Information
1-57 Updated Information
4-12 to 4-15 Additional Service Call Condition No. 818 Added
5-33 Corrected Information
5-61 Updated Information
1-4 (Fax Option Section) Additional Information Added
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
CONTROL NO 129ABW
SM i B003/B004/B006/B007
B003/B004/B006/B007
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE................................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT...............................................................................1-2
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL.............................................................................1-2
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-3
1.1.5 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE....................................................... 1.4
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ................................................................1-5
1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION..............................................................1-6
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-6
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-7
Development Unit and PCU..................................................................1-8
Toner Bottle ........................................................................................1-11
Paper Trays ........................................................................................1-12
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer ....................................................1-14
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays ..........................................................1-15
Electrical Total Counter.......................................................................1-16
HDD Caution Decal (for only NA models) ...........................................1-16
1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION......................................................1-17
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-17
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-18
1.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION.........................................................1-22
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-22
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-23
1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION...............................................................1-29
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-29
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-30
1.7 1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION...............................................1-32
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-32
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-33
1.8 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION.................................................1-36
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-36
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-37
1.9 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION................................................................1-40
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-40
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-41
1.10 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION...................1-44
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-44
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-45
1.11 LCT INSTALLATION.............................................................................1-47
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-47
Rev. 04/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 ii SM
1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-48
1.12 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ........................................................1-50
1.13 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION..........................................................1-51
1.14 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.........................................................1-53
1.15 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................1-55
1.16 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................1-56
1.17 OPTIONAL USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT......................... 1.57
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............................. 2-1
2.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................2-1
REPLACEMENTA AND ADJUSTMENT
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS..............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 USED TONER..................................................................................3-1
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS......................................................3-2
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................................3-2
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS...................................................................................3-2
3.2.3 SYMBOLS USED IN TEXT...............................................................3-2
3.3 FRONT DOOR ..........................................................................................3-3
3.4 DUPLEX UNIT...........................................................................................3-3
3.5 UPPER RIGHT COVER............................................................................3-4
3.6 BY-PASS TRAY ........................................................................................3-5
3.7 REAR COVERS ........................................................................................3-6
3.7.1 REAR UPPER COVER.....................................................................3-6
3.7.2 REAR LOWER COVER....................................................................3-6
3.8 LEFT COVERS..........................................................................................3-7
3.8.1 LEFT UPPER COVER......................................................................3-7
3.9 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................3-8
3.9.1 ARDF................................................................................................3-8
3.9.2 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................3-9
3.9.3 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS/OPERATION PANEL.................3-10
3.9.4 LENS BLOCK/SBU ASSEMBLY ....................................................3-11
3.9.5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS...........................................................3-12
3.9.6 EXPOSURE LAMP.........................................................................3-13
3.9.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR ...................3-14
3.9.8 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-15
3.9.9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD .....3-16
3.9.10 SCANNER WIRE..........................................................................3-17
3.10 LASER UNIT .........................................................................................3-21
3.10.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS...................................................3-21
3.10.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................3-22
3.10.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR......................................................3-23
3.10.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR..................................3-24
Rev. 04/2002
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
SM 1-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily
accessible. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:
North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A
Europe/Asia 220V~240V, 50Hz/60Hz: more than 8A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10 %
3. Never set anything on the power cord.
A: Front: >75 cm (29.,6 )
B: Left: > 10 cm (4)
C: Rear: > 10 cm (4)
D: Right > 10 cm (4)
NOTE: The 75 cm (29.5") recommended for
the space at the front is for pulling out
the paper tray only. If the operator
stands at the front of the main
machine, more space is required.
Rev. 04/2002
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-4 SM
1.1.5 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE
System Options
~ ~~ ~ = Standard, } = Available, = Requires another option, X = Not available
Option B003/B004 B006/B007 Notes
ARDF DF70 } }
Paper Tray Unit - PS360 } }
Console (Cabinet) } } FAC 18
One Bin Tray PT1045 } }
1000 Sheet Finisher SR720
Requires the Bridge Unit,
Paper Tray Unit or Console
Two Tray Finisher SR760
Requires the Bridge Unit,
Paper Tray Unit or Console
Bridge Unit Type 1045 } }
LCT RT36
Requires Paper Tray Unit or
Console
Mailbox CS360
Requires the Bridge Unit,
Mailbox Bridge Unit is also
required if the Two Tray
Finisher is installed, Paper
Tray Unit or Console
Fax Option Type 1045 } }
Printer/Scanner Option Type
1045
}
Requires Memory Unit Type
B - 64MB and Network
Interface Board
PS3 Option } }
2/3 Hole Punch Unit Type 1045 Requires Two Tray Finisher
Memory Unit Type B 32MB
(Copier)
} }
Required for Preset Stamp,
Background Numbering and
User Stamp features
Memory Unit Type B 64MB
(Copier)
} ~ ~~ ~
Required for Printer/ Scanner
Option
Fax Function Upgrade Type
185 (Fax)
Requires Fax Option
Memory Expansion 32MB (Fax) Requires Fax Option
Network Interface Board
Type 1045
} ~ ~~ ~
Required for Printer/ Scanner
Option
Platen Cover Type 540 } }
Mailbox Bridge Unit Type 460
Required if the Two Tray
Finisher is also installed
External Output Tray Type 450 Requires the Bridge Unit
1394 Interface Unit Type 1045 } }
Special Notes:
Slot 1 on the Controller PCB is for the Function DIMM (Fax DIMM, Printer DIMM or
Printer/Scanner DIMM). Only 1 Function DIMM can be installed on the Controller PCB. The
Fax Function is built into Printer and Printer/Scanner DIMM. When installing the Fax Option,
there is no need to install the Fax DIMM if the Printer or Printer/Scanner DIMM is already
installed.
Only one Memory Option Type B (32MB or 64MB) can be installed on the Controller PCB. Both
allow the Preset Stamp, Background Numbering and User Stamp features. The 64MB Memory
Option is required for the Printer/Scanner Option.
Rev. 04/2002
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-52 SM
7. Connect the key counter connector [A] to CN211 on the I/O board.
8. Reinstall the covers [B] and [C].
9. Attach the double-sided tape to the key counter bracket.
10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape and attach the key counter
assembly [D] to the left side of the scanner unit.
NOTE: When attaching the key counter assembly, press the assembly hard
against the scanner cover. Otherwise, the key counter assembly may
come off easily.
11. Set User Tools, System Settings, Key Operator Tools, and Key Counter
Management to restrict access to each available function mode.
A683I003.WMF
A683I002.WMF
A683I965.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
Rev. 04/2002
OPTIONAL USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT
SM 1-57 B003/B004/B006/B007
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.15 OPTIONAL USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT
1. Remove the controller PCB.
2. Install the user account enhancement unit (NVRAM) into IC 10 socket on the
controller PCB.
3. Re-install the controller PCB.
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-12 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Finisher upper tray shift motor error 732 C
The upper tray shift motor does not
stop operation with the specified time.
Upper tray shift motor defective or
overloaded
Upper tray shift sensor defective
Finisher lower tray lift motor error 733 C
The stack height sensor does not
activate within a certain time period
after the lower tray lift motor turned on.
Lower tray lift motor defective or
overloaded
Upper stack height sensor defective
Lower tray lower limit sensor defective
Finisher lower tray shift motor error 734 C
The lower tray shift motor driving the
lower tray does not stop within the
specified time.
Lower tray shift motor defective or
overloaded
Lower tray shift sensor defective
Startup without video output end error
(K)
800 B
Video transfer to the engine is started,
but a video transmission end command
was not issued by the engine within the
specified time.
Control board defective
Startup without video input end (K) 804 B
A video transmission was requested
from the scanner, but a video
transmission end command was not
issued by the scanner within the
specified time.
Control board defective
Watchdog error 818 B
The Bus line is held up by another
device, or a CPU/device infinite loop
has occurred.
Incorrect Function DIMM installed in
Slot #2 on Controller PCB. (Slot #2 is
for PostScript Option only)
Reload System Firmware.
Replace Controller PCB
Kernel mismatch error 819 B
Software bug
Software application error
Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU 820 B
The central processing unit returned an
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Controller board defective
Software defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC 821 B
The ASIC returned an error during the
self-diagnostic test because the ASIC
and CPU timer interrupts were
compared and determined to be out of
range.
Controller board defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD 822 B
The hard disk drive returned an error
during the self-diagnostic test.
HDD defective
HDD connector defective
Controller board defective
Self-diagnostic Error: NIB 823 B
The network interface board returned
an error during the self-diagnostic test.
Network interface board defective
Controller board defective
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM 824 B
The resident non-volatile RAM returned
an error during the self-diagnostic test.
NVRAM damaged or abnormal
Backup battery has discharged
NVRAM socket damaged
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM/Optional
NVRAM
826 B
The NVRAM or optional NVRAM
returned an error during the self-
diagnostic test.
NVRAM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: RAM 827 B
The resident RAM returned a verify
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Memory malfunction
Self-diagnostic Error: ROM 828 B
The resident read-only memory
returned an error during the self-
diagnostic test.
Controller board defective
Firmware defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM 829 B
The optional RAM returned an error
during the self-diagnostic test.
RAM DIMM defective
Controller board defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: Parallel Interface 835 B
Loopback test error.
Loopback connector not detected
IEEE1284 connector defective
Controller board defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Resident Font
ROM
836 B
The resident font ROM returned an
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Font ROM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional Font
ROM
837 B
The optional font ROM returned an
error during the self-diagnostic test.
Font ROM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator 838 B
Verify error occurred when setting data
was read from the clock generator via
the I2C bus.
Clock generator abnormal
I2C bus abnormal
CPU port for the I2C bus abnormal
Network I/F Abnormal 850 B
NIB interface error.
NIB defective
Controller board defective
IEEE 1394 I/F Abnormal 851 B
IEEE1394 interface error.
IEEE1384 interface board defective
Controller board defective
Startup without HD connection at main
power on
860 C
The hard disk connection is not
detected.
Cable between HDC and HD loose or
defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
HDC defective
Startup without HD detection at power
key on
861 C
The hard disk connection is not
detected.
Cable between HDC and HD loose or
defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
HDC defective
Maximum number of bad sectors
detected on HD
862 A
Up to 101 bad sectors have appeared
in the area on the hard disk where
image data is archived, and the hard
disk may require replacement.
SC863 returned while reading data
from the HD and the number of
registered bad sectors reached 101.
Startup without HD data lead
863 B
Data stored on the hard disk is not read
correctly.
A bad sector occurred during operation
of the HD
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-14 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
HD data CRC error 864 B
During operation of the HD, the HD
responded with a CRC error.
Data transfer was abnormal in the data
read from the HD.
HD access error 865 B
The hard disk detected an error.
Error detected other that the bad
sectors error (SC863) or the CRC
error (SC864)
Electronic total counter error 900 B
The value of the total counter has
already exceeded 9,999,999
NVRAM defective
SC901 Mechanical total count error 901 B
The IO board cannot receive the
mechanical total count data.
Mechanical total counter defective
F-gate error at write request 951 C
After the IPU receives an F-gate signal,
it receives another F-gate signal.
Software defective
BICU defective
Scanner setting error 953 C
The IPU does not respond with the
scanner setting signal required to start
scanning processing.
Software defective
Printer setting error 954 B
The IPU does not respond with the
settings that are required to start image
processing by the printer.
Software defective
Memory setting error 955 C
The IPU does not respond with the
settings that are required to start image
processing using the memory.
Software defective
Printer ready error 964 C
The printer ready signal is not
generated within 17 seconds after the
IPU received the print start signal.
Software defective
Print image data transfer error 984 B
The image transfer from the controller
to the engine via the PCI bus does not
end within 15 s after starting.
Controller board defective
BICU defective
Connectors between BICU and
controller loose or defective
Scanner image data transfer error 985 B
The image transfer from the engine to
the controller via the PCI bus does not
end within 3 s after starting.
Controller board defective
BICU defective
Connectors between BICU and
controller loose or defective
SIB defective
Software write parameter setting error 986 C
An unstable area at the storage
destination in the settings table is set
NULL for the parameter received by the
write module.
Software defective
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SM 4-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause
Software performance error 990 B
The software attempted to perform an
unexpected operation.
Software defective
Internal parameter incorrect
Insufficient working memory
When this SC occurs, the file name,
address, and data will be stored in
NVRAM. This information can be
checked by using SP7-403. Note the
above data and the situation in which
this SC occurs. Then report the data
and conditions to your technical
control center.
Software continuity error 991 D
The software attempted to perform and
unexpected operation. However, unlike
SC990, the object of the error is
continuity of the software.
Software bug
Internal parameter incorrect
Insufficient working memory
FCU board error 996 B
FCU board is connected but not ready.
FCU board defective and requires
replacement
Firmware incorrect
Application function selection error 997 B
The application selected by a key press
on operation panel does not start or
ends abnormally.
Software defective
An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
Application start error 998 B
After power on the application does not
start within 60 s. (All applications
neither start nor end normally.)
Software defective
An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
Program download error
The download (program, print data,
language data) from the IC card
does not execute normally.
999 B Board installed incorrectly
BICU defective
IC card defective
NVRAM defective
Loss of power during downloading
Important Notes About SC999
Primarily intended for operating in the
download mode, logging is not
performed with SC999.
If the machine loses power while
downloading, or if for some other
reason the download does not end
normally, this could damage the
controller board or the PCB targeted
for the download and prevent
subsequent downloading. If this
problem occurs, the damaged PCB
must be replaced.
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-33 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5812* 2* SMC Report Transfer Fax.
No.
Use this to input the fax number of the service
representative This number is printed on the
Counter Report (UP: System No. 19)
Press the key to input a pause.
Press the Clear modes key to delete the
telephone number.
1 CSS Function On/Off Japan Only
0: Off, 1: On.
5816*
2 CE Call Japan Only
0: Start, 1: Finish
5821* CSS PI Device Code Selects the PI device code. DFU
[0~4 / 0 / 1 step]
5824 NVRAM Data Upload Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for
counters and the serial number) from NVRAM on
the control board to a flash memory card. (
5.3.1)
5825 NVRAM Data Download Downloads the content of a flash memory card to
the NVRAM on the control board. ( 5.3.2)
After executing this SP, switch the copier off and
on.
5828* 25* Software Switch Sets the reference for the network software.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
26* Network Operation Mode
Setting
Sets the TCP operation mode for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
27* Network Syslog Server
Address Setting
Sets the syslog server address for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 7F000001h / 1 hex unit step]
28* Network Time Server
Address Setting
Sets the time server address for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
29* Network DNS Server
Address Setting
Sets the DNS server address for the network.
[00000000~FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1 hex unit step]
30* Network Directprint Port
Number Setting
Sets the directprint port number for the network.
[1024~65535 / 9100 / 1 step]
31* Network IPP Timeout
Setting
Sets the IPP timeout for the network.
[30~65535 / 900 / 1 step]
32 Network IPX Address
Setting (NetWare)
Sets the IPX Address.
33* Network Remote Printer
Number Setting
(NetWare)
Sets the remote printer number for the network.
[0~254 / 0 / 1 step]
34* Network Software Switch
Setting (NetWare)
Sets the software switch for the network.
[0000~FFFFh / 0003h / 1 hex unit step]
35* Network Transport
Protocol of Print Server
Setting (NetWare)
Sets the transport protocol of print server for the
network.
0001h: TCP & IPX
0100h: TCP& IPX (Priority: IPX)
0102h: TCP Only (Priority: TCP)
0001h: IPX Only
Rev. 04/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-61 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.1.8 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5-801
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP7-003-1: Electrical total counter value
SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP mode 5-801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules or select the appropriate number from the table below.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All modules Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
processing settings.
3 SCS (System Control
Service)/SRM
Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
5 MCS (Memory Control
Service)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP Bit SW, and printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the Scanner SP modes.
10 Network application Deletes the NFA management files and thumbnails,
and initializes the JOB login ID.
11 NCS (Network Control
Service)
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
(IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the Job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, Job History, and local storage file numbers.
4. Press Execute, and then follow the prompts on the display to complete the
procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Do the laser beam pitch adjustment (SP2-109).
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.21 Replacement and Adjustment, Copy Adjustments).
Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.21.4 Replacement and Adjustment,
touch screen calibration).
Rev. 04/2002
FAX UNIT
B003/B004/B006/B007 1-4 SM
4. Remove the FCU cover [A] (2 screws) and the controller unit [B] (2 screws).
5. Turn on the battery switch (SW1) [C] on the FCU board [F], connect the
harness [D] to the FCU board. Then slide the FCU board into the right slot of
the expansion box.
NOTE: If any following options will be installed at the same time, connect the
option board to the FCU board before sliding the FCU board into the
expansion box. Refer to the Installation Procedure of each option.
Fax Function Upgrade Type 185
G3 Interface Unit Type 1045
ISDN option Type 1045
6. Attach the edge clamp [E] to the bottom of the expansion box, then clamp the
FCU harness [D].
7. Machine Codes B003 and B004: Attach the Fax Function DIMM to slot 1
(CN7) on the controller board.
Machine Codes B006 and B007: You dont have to attach the Fax Function
DIMM to the controller board.
NOTE: Slot 1 on the Controller PCB is for the Function DIMM (Fax DIMM, Printer
DIMM or Printer/Scanner DIMM). Only 1 Function DIMM can be installed
on the Controller PCB. The Fax Function is built into Printer and
Printer/Scanner DIMM. When installing the Fax Option, there is no need to
install the Fax Function DIMM if the Printer or Printer/Scanner Function
DIMM is already installed.
B360I104.WMF
B360I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
Rev. 04/2002
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 010 05/23/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be added to the service manual with the pages supplied. Each
bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The new areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
4-15 through 20 Updated Information (Firmware Modifications)
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO. 133ABW
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 PRINTER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615902 A 1.34
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine could not be used with Axis print servers.
2. Part of print data (frame) could not be printed during
Custom size printing in PCL 6.
B3615902 B 1.35
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine sometimes freezes after pressing the
Offline key while the data is being printed out (PCL).
2. The machine sometimes freezes while downloading PCL
fonts.
3. The machine sometimes does not re-start printing after
the paper is removed from the output tray following an
overflow.
4. The machine sometimes freezes when both Stapling and
Punching have been selected from the driver for a paper
size with which neither function is permitted.
B3615902 C 1.36
Change in Specification:
(Module added for China/Taiwan version).
B3615902 D 2.00.1
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Modified for use with the Capture function.
2. Modified so that the printer controller can detect the
individual codes in the data headers of a print job sent
with both PCL and PS codes, thereby allowing the
machine to switch between the 2 PDL emulations
accordingly (PCL/PS). The A-C2 prints each page in its
original format, even if contained in the same file.
3. Some German umlaut characters cannot be printed out
correctly with the following fonts when using the PCL6
driver on Windows NT4.0/95/ 98/Me: Albertus Medium,
Antique Olive, Humanst521 BT, Zurich BlkEx BT.
B3615902 E 3.00
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. A print job received when the machine switches from On
to Off Mode may not be printed out.
2. After deleting a locked print document, it is possible to
press the delete button without selecting any other locked
print documents.
3. The operation panel may flicker slightly after the operator
performs settings in the Printer Features window very
quickly (i.e. window is open for a very short time).
B3615902 F 3.02
Continued
Rev. 05/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-16 SM
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When the undefined command, "<ESC>&k#w" is
received, it appears on the output as a character string
[e.g. as "<ESC>&k6w"].
2. The punch error is logged in the error report whenever
feeding from the Bypass Tray under any print job
conditions (even when not using the punch unit).
3. When Letterhead is selected as the paper type for the
Bypass tray, the tray icon on the operation panel displays
a 2, indicating that Duplex copies can be made (not
permissible by specification).
4. When printing in duplex, the last odd page is printed on
the reverse side of the last sheet (see FPR reply #OTS-
01-2651 of #RE01060006 for details).
Change in Specification:
1. Supports the Status Readback function of the PCL5e.
2. Added symbol sets PC-858, Latin 9 and Roman 9 for
display of the EURO currency symbol.
B3615902 G 3.05
Rev. 05/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 SCANNER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615901 C 2.05
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The mainframe stalls if it receives the command to store
a document while in the process of deleting another
document. Application used: Desktop Binder V2.
B3615901 D 2.07
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Software changed so that the original can be placed on
the exposure glass just as with copying, i.e. there is no
need to turn the original upside-down (for both
directions).
Ver.2.07(B3615901D) Ver.2.27(B3615901E)
2. Mixed Original Mode can now be used with the Twain
driver ver.3.12.
When using this driver, please note the following:
Be sure to use Netfile software ver.2.17 or newer.
Be sure to install ADF ROM ver.1.76 or newer, as older
versions will cause image stretching along the sub-scan
direction with 425 dpi and 555-557 dpi scanning.
B3615901 E 2.27
Rev. 05/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-18 SM
4.6.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 NCS (NIB) MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585921 C 1.61
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. After a communication failure breaks the connection
between the NIB and Network Twain driver, the driver is
unable to re-establish connection (unless the A-C2 is
powered Off/On).
2. When 80000000(H) or more is registered in the Manager
IPX Address 2 (Web Status Monitor), the setting is
changed to an unspecified one.
3. If several print jobs are sent one after another to the NIB
via the IPP port of SmartNetMonitor for Client, the NIB
terminates printing. (Also, a print job sent by the standard
IPP port may be canceled).
4. The USTATUS information may be lost, depending on
when the USTATUS is sent during bi-directional
communication over TCP/IP port 9100.
5. With bi-directional communication enabled for TCP port
9100, printing operation is inhibited after data is sent from
an application utility that does not support bi-directional
communication (e.g. Port Navi, MDP).
6. The IP address 0.0.0.0 can be set by the ifconfig
command.
7. The wording of the message for saving data at logoff was
corrected from datas to data.
Change in Specification:
1. Information such as the IP address and printing protocol
(Client PCs) was added to the syslog file for access
restriction.
2. The display width for the ID of the prnlog command with
telnet, rsh, and ftp was expanded from 2 to 10 digits.
G0585921 D 1.66
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When using signature level 2 on the NetWare Server, the
printer does not connect to the NetWare Server.
2. The printer cannot print more than one job sent from a
CICS application on an IBM Main Frame (e.g. OS/390)
when the application uses lpd protocol unique to CICS.
3. The lpd process on the printer is interrupted when
lpq/lprm commands with arguments are executed more
than 50 times after the printer has been turned on.
4. When trying to access the Web Status Monitor for a
printer during printing via the ipp port, the httpd process
is occasionally interrupted.
5. When there are several messages displayed, such as
error messages after a malfunction, Apple Talk protocol
is occasionally interrupted during printing.
6. When the printer is not ready due to an open cover, the
message "Printer is not ready" is not indicated in lpd or
stat command.
7. When executing the prnlog command designate job ID
0, no information is indicated.
G0585921 E 1.77
Continued
Rev. 05/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Continued
8. Even when the parameter settings changed by telnet are
not successfully written into the NVRAM, no error
message is indicated as a command line.
9. The software allows any name to be entered as the
computer name for NetBEUI.
10. When printing data with 0 byte by rcp, the NIB does not
respond to the waiting client PC.
11. No settings are valid with the install shell of RedHat Linux
Ver.7.1.
Change in Specification:
1. 2-byte code characters cannot be entered for a device
name.
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. No error message is displayed in Netscape Navigator
even when an incorrect URL is input in the address bar.
2. Up to 32 characters can be input in the NetBEUI
configuration screen Comment box, even though
specification is 31 characters maximum.
3. The PS status cannot be displayed using the stat
command (lpq command for lpr).
4. If Trap is selected for the Access Type in the SNMP
Configuration screen during the snmpd process,
communication may be cut off.
5. The NIB does not respond to the lprm command (root
directory) from a FreeBSD host computer.
6. If an undefined remote printer number is input in the
Netware configuration page, communication between the
NIB and Netware Server will be cut off.
Change in Specification:
1. Two or more print queues can be attached to a single
printer object (for further details, refer to TechMail
RC010430).
2. TCP Ports 11021 and 11023 (Design use) have been
closed.
G0585921 F 1.79
Rev. 05/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-20 SM
4.6.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 NFA MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
(NETFILE)
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585922 C 1.42.02
When the machine sends 2 or more files to the Document
Server within 1 second (as when sending backed up files just
after the Server recovers), the first 2 documents receive the
same filename and the first is therefore erased. The software
has been modified so that file naming can be controlled at the
ms level, preventing the file from being deleted.
G0585922 D 1.42.04
NOTE: When using scanner firmware B3615901D, NFA
firmware version 2.17 or later should be used.
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The MFP stalls when setting the I/O device from two
ScanRouter V2 Professional servers at the same time.
2. When setting the I/O device from ScanRouter V2
Professional, the fax delivery settings sometimes
disappear.
3. When a print request is issued from the Document server
at the MFP or the DeskTopBinder V2 without the correct
paper size in the tray, the MFP does not send the error to
the operation panel or DeskTopBinder V2, and the MFP
does not print the document.
G0585922 F 2.17
Minor program changes for Japanese model only.
G0585922 G 2.19
Rev. 05/2002
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N
BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 B003 / B004/ B006 / B007 011 011 011 011 05 / 3 1/ 2002 05 / 3 1/ 2002 05 / 3 1/ 2002 05 / 3 1/ 2002
APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P GESTETNER 3502/ 4502/ 3502P/ 4502P
RI COH RI COH RI COH RI COH AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P
SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P SAVI N 2535/ 2545/ 2535P/ 2545P
SUBJECT: CLEANING PAD
GENERAL:
As shown below, the Cleaning Pad has been changed over to a Brush Roller, in order to increase the
efficiency of Charge Roller Cleaning. In accordance with this change, the other parts listed below have also
been changed.
For machines produced before this modification, either of the following is possible:
1. The Cleaning Pad can be replaced with the new Brush Roller, in which case it is also necessary to
replace the parts in the Cleaning Roller Arm Kit (see below), or:
2. The existing Cleaning Pad for the A2320 can be used (P/N A2322430).
A separate Technical Service Bulletin will be issued for the replacement procedure of the new Cleaning Pad
and Cleaning Roller Arm Kit.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2322356 - Stepped Screw M6 1-0 - 39 9
A2322298 - Bracket Charge Cleaning 1-0 - 39 10
AA062301 - Tension Spring 1-0 - 39 11
A2322300 - Roller - Cleaning 1-0 - 39 12
G0652280
G0652330
Cleaning Pad
Brush Roller Cleaning
1-1 3 39 13
A2322303 G0652321 Front Arm Charge Unit 1-1 1 39 15
A2322305 G0652326 Rear Arm Charge Unit 1-1 1 39 23
AA063561 AA063648 Pressure Spring 2-2 1 39 16
B0049800 Cleaning Roller Arm Kit 0-1
NOTE: When installing the new Brush Roller, be sure to also install the Cleaning Roller Arm Kit.
The Cleaning Roller Arm Kit consists of the following parts:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
G0652321 Front Arm Charge Unit 1
G0652326 Rear Arm Charge Unit 1
AA063648 Pressure Spring 2
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
P
A
R
T
S
CONTROL NO 136ABW
Tech Service Bulletin No B003/B004/B006/B007 011
Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new
style Cleaning Pad installed during production
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502 H7016900219
Gestetner 4502 H7116901248
Ricoh AFICIO 1035 H7015900869
Ricoh AFICIO 1045 H7116901748
Savin 2535 H7016900219
Savin 2545 H7116901248
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 012 06/24/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
!
C
O
P
Y
Q
U
A
L
I
T
Y
SUBJECT: DIRTY BACKGROUND / BLACK SPOTS
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
SYMPTOMS:
1. Dirty background Paper dust adheres to the Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade and causes the Transfer
Belt to not be cleaned properly.
2. Black spots Paper dust gets into the Development Unit.
SOLUTION:
!
P
A
R
T
S
A new Mylar Kit is available to minimize the 2 symptoms, which can occur with paper containing a large
amount of paper dust. The Mylars will clean the dust off the Registration Roller and reduce the amount that
enters into the Development Unit.
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
1. Attach the Paper Dust Mylars (37) to the Upper Entrance Guide as shown in the illustration below.
2. When making service visits for units with the Mylar Kit installed, clean any paper dust that has
accumulated on the Upper Entrance Guide or paper transport area.
37
37
Upper Entrance Guide
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO. 140ABW
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 012
Page 2 of 2
GENERAL:
The following part update is being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
- A2829004 Mylar Kit Paper Dust Cleaning 1 33 37 *
* Denotes new item number.
UNITS AFFECTED:
B003/B004/B006/B007 Serial Number cut-in was not available at time of publication.
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - B003/B004/B006/B007 - 013 013 013 013 06/27/2002 06/27/2002 06/27/2002 06/27/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL APPLICABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
4-44 Updated Information
4-45 Updated Information
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
CONTROL NO. 141ABW
DRUM CHARGE
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-44 SM
6.8.2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION
Correction for Environmental Conditions
The voltage transferred from roller to drum could vary with the temperature and
humidity around the drum charge roller. The lower the temperature or humidity, the
higher the applied voltage required.
The ID sensor measures the effects of ambient conditions, and any small change
in drum potential caused by changes in temperature/humidity is reflected in the
amount of toner transferred to the drum.
This measurement is done immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner density
control. After creating ID sensor pattern [A], another pattern [B] is made. To do this,
the LD switches off, the charge roller voltage drops, and the drum potential is
reduced to -600V. At the same time, development bias returns to -550V. The drum
potential is now slightly higher than the development bias, so only a very small
amount of toner transfers to the drum. The ID sensor measures the density of
pattern [B], and Vsdp, the output voltage, is compared with Vsg which was read
from the bare drum at the same time.
ID Sensor Pattern
t
Drum Potential
Development Bias
ID Sensor Output
-950 V
-600 V
-550 V
-380 V
-150 V
V sg (4.00 V)
V sdp (3.50 V)
V sp (0.31 V)
Charge Voltage
Laser Diode
3 cm
3 cm 3 cm
On
Off
-1480 V
Sub Scan Direction
B004D506.WMF
[A] [B]
Rev. 05/2002
DRUM CHARGE
SM 6-45 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only)
The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrower than sizes
accepted by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in
the by-pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed
below in order to avoid jams and copy quality problems.
SP Mode SP Name
SP2-001-1 Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Width 216 - 297 mm
SP2-309-1 Paper Lower Width [a] Width limit: 150 mm
SP2-309-2 Paper Upper Width [b] Width limit: 216 mm
SP2-914-1 C Adjust 10V/step
SP2-914-2 C Adjust 10V/step
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray
is 200 mm, the charge roller voltage will be 1630 + 50 V.
0 mm
SP 2-309-1
Default: 150 mm
SP 2-309-2
Default: 216 mm
297 mm
Voltage:
SP2-001-1 + SP2-914-1
Default: -1480+250 V
Voltage:
SP2-001-1 + SP2-914-2
Default: -1480+50 V
Voltage:
SP2-001-1
Default: -1480 V
B004D507.WMF
Rev. 05/2002
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 014 07/25/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
viii Table of Contents
6-86 New Information (Language Modification History)
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
B003/B004/B006/B007 viii SM
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY................................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION................................................................. 6-62
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION...................................................... 6-63
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT................................................................................................... 6-64
6.13.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................... 6-65
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION................................................................. 6-66
LARGER THAN A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................. 6-66
UP TO A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................................ 6-66
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM.................................. 6-67
FEED-IN......................................................................................................... 6-67
INVERSION AND EXIT.................................................................................. 6-67
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................................. 6-68
6.14.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-68
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM..................................................................... 6-69
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM................................. 6-69
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM............ 6-70
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ................................................................... 6-71
MECHANISM................................................................................................. 6-71
CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS.............................. 6-72
CURRENTS APPLIED TO LEADING EDGE AND IMAGE AREAS, AND FOR
BY-PASS FEED......................................................................................... 6-73
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM ......................................... 6-74
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT.................................................................. 6-75
6.15.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-75
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE........................................................................................ 6-76
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM............................................... 6-76
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM................................ 6-77
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS................................ 6-77
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER.............................................................................. 6-78
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM........................................................................ 6-78
6.15.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..................................................... 6-79
TEMPERATURE CONTROL ......................................................................... 6-79
FUSING IDLING TEMPERATURE................................................................ 6-80
6.15.9 OVERHEAT PROTECTION..................................................................... 6-80
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES................................................................................ 6-81
6.16.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-81
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE......................................................................... 6-82
ENTERING THE ENERGY SAVER MODE................................................... 6-82
WHAT HAPPENS IN ENERGY SAVER MODE ............................................ 6-82
RETURN TO STAND-BY MODE................................................................... 6-82
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE ................................................................................... 6-83
ENTERING OFF STAND-BY AND OFF MODES.......................................... 6-83
OFF STAND-BY MODE................................................................................. 6-83
OFF MODE.................................................................................................... 6-83
RETURNING TO STAND-BY MODE............................................................. 6-83
6.17 SOFTWARE HISTORY ..................................................................................... 6-84
6.17.1 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY.................................. 6-84
6.17.2 LANGUAGE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY............................ 6-86
Rev. 07/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-86 SM
6.17.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045220 A 2.06
Add Traditional Chinese (for Taiwan version).
B0045220 B 2.10
Add Simplified Chinese (for China version)
The Form Feed button is only displayed for English and
Japanese.
Wording mistake in the alert message for when the number of
pages in the printer document server exceeds the maximum (All
languages).
The following occur with the Dutch display language:
In the System Settings screen, both the Finisher and Tray 1
appear twice in the output tray selections.
The selections Yes and No were reversed in the Key
Operator Settings User Code Settings screen.
B0045220 C 2.15
Added character strings for use with the Capture function.
Translation errors (Copier):
(Copy alert): Slip Sheet Tray should be Cover Sheet Tray
(Danish).
Thin Paper should be Thick Paper (Czech).
For all languages except English, the lettering is not displayed in
the Stop button when the PS configuration page is being printed
out.
B0045220 D 2.18
The following display errors in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features have been corrected:
-(Portuguese, Finnish): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to
Bottom" were reversed.
-(German): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to Bottom" were
incorrect.
Dutch translation error for "Program/Change/Delete User Code".
The following display error in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features has been corrected:
(Czech): What should be displayed as "2 Sided: T to T2 Sided:
T to T" was incorrectly displayed as "1 Sided2 Sided: T to B".
B0045220 E 2.19
Spanish translation error for Sub TX mode Key in the Fax Initial
Settings screen:
Incorrect: Mode RX sustituta
Correct: Mode TX sustituta
The Dutch display for Rotate Sort (Copy screen) appeared in
German.
B0045220 F 2.22
Rev. 07/2002
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 015 09/17/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
UPDATE 1:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2323552 G0601147 Ball Bearing 8x22x7 1-1 0 57 24
UPDATE 2:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2322403 G0652270 Receptacle Charge Roller 1-1 3 37 17
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
P
A
R
T
S
Ball Bearing The Ball Bearing has been changed due to
parts standardization.
Charge Roller Receptacle The Charge Cleaning Pad has been
changed over to a Brush Roller (ref TSB 006). As a result, the Charge
Cleaning Bracket has been deleted. The Charge Roller Receptacle has
been modified to reflect this change.
New
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015
Page 2 of 6
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new
style Receptacle Charge Roller installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502 H7016900219
Gestetner 4502 H7116901248
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7015900869
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7116901748
Savin 2535 H7016900219
Savin 2545 H7116901248
UPDATE 3:
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0045845 B0045848 Controller Board 1-1 1 69 15
UPDATE 4:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041097 Shipping Support - Scanner 1 13 36
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Controller Board The Controller Board part number has been changed due
to Firmware upgrades.
Shipping Support - Scanner Add Item #36 to the illustration and the information
below to the list.
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015
Page 3 of 6
UPDATE 5:
Operation Panel Assy (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 17
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041517 Earth Sheet Touch Panel 1 17
28*
B0041516 Sheet Prevent fence - Left 1 17 29
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 6:
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015
Page 4 of 6
Operation Panel Assy Add item #28 to the illustration.
Add item #29 to the illustration and the information below to the list.
Scanner Frame Assy Add item #44 to the illustration and the following
information to the list (newly registered part).
UPDATE 7:
Page 25
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A2326002 By-pass Feed Unit 1 25 26
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 8:
Page 51
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015
Page 5 of 6
By-pass Feed Unit Add item #26 to the illustration and the following
information to the list (newly registered part).
26
Duplex Unit 1 Add item #25 to the illustration and the following information to
the list (newly registered part).
25
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0044502 Duplex Unit 1 51 26
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 9:
Duplex Unit 2 (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 53
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW010049 Photosensor GP2A28A1 1 53 25
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 10:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW010048 Photosensor GP2A28N1 1 55 15
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 11:
Drive Section 1 (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 57
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AA043551 Timing BeltB50S3M213UG (B003/B006) 1 57 36
AA043569 Timing Belt B50S3M228 (B004/B007) 1 57 36
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015
Page 6 of 6
Duplex Unit 2 Correct the following P/N and description.
Duplex Unit 3 Correct the following P/N and description.
4 ADD i d #28 t th ill t ti
Drive Section 1 Correct the following P/N and description.
5 ADD i d #28 t th ill t ti
UPDATE 12:
Page 83
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041383 Decal Power Off - Exp 1 83 25
*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 13:
As Visual distinction:
The old roller (left) contains grooves on the fusing knob end.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY Int. PAGE ITEM
AE011064 AE011071 Hot Roller 39.8 mm T0.4 1 0 47 17
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
Decal and Document Add the following information to the list (newly
registered part).
Hot Roller The following hot roller parts have been changed due to parts
standardization.
AE011064 AE011071
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue + 10/11/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
UPDATE 1:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2323552 G0601147 Ball Bearing 8x22x7 1-1 0 57 24
UPDATE 2:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2322403 G0652270 Receptacle Charge Roller 1-1 3 37 17
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
P
A
R
T
S
Ball Bearing The Ball Bearing has been changed due to parts
standardization
Charge Roller Receptacle The Charge Cleaning Pad has been
changed over to a Brush Roller (ref TSB 006). As a result, the Charge
Cleaning Bracket has been deleted. The Charge Roller Receptacle has
been modified to reflect this change.
New
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 2 of 6
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new
style Receptacle Charge Roller installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502 H7016900219
Gestetner 4502 H7116901248
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7015900869
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7116901748
Savin 2535 H7016900219
Savin 2545 H7116901248
UPDATE 3:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0045845 B0045848 Controller Board 1-1 1 69 15
UPDATE 4:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0041097 Shipping Support - Scanner 1 13 36*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Controller Board , we had previously announced a modification of the Controller
Board software. A new part number has been assigned as follows.
1. Shipping Support - Scanner , Add index #36 to the illustration and the
information below to the list.
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 3 of 6
UPDATE 5:
1. Operation Panel Assy (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 17
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041517 Earth Sheet Touch Panel 1 17 28*
B0041516 Sheet Prevent fence - Left 1 17 29*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 4 of 6
2. Operation Panel Assy , ADD Item #28 to the illustration.
ADD Item #29 to the illustration and the information below to the list.
PDATE 6:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041691 Scanner Frame Assy 1 21 44*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
PDATE 7:
Page 25
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A2326002 By-pass Feed Unit 1 25 26*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 5 of 6
Scanner Frame Assy , ADD Item #44 to the illustration and the following
information to the list (newly registered part).
By-pass Feed Unit , ADD index #26 to the illustration and the following
information to the list (newly registered part).
26
UPDATE 8:
Page 51
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0044502 Duplex Unit 1 51 25*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 9:
Duplex Unit 2 (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 53
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW010048 AW010049 Photosensor GP2A28A1 1 53 3
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 10:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW020056 AW010048 Photosensor GP2A28N1 1 55 15
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 6 of 6
UPDATE 11:
Duplex Unit 1, Add item #25 to the illustration and the following information
to the list (newly registered part).
Duplex Unit 2, Correct the following P/N and description
Duplex Unit 3, Correct the following P/N and description
25
Drive Section 1 , Correct the following P/N and description
5 ADD i d #28 t th ill t ti
Drive Section 1 (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 57
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AA043551 Timing BeltB50S3M213UG (B003/B006) 1 57 36
AA043569 Timing Belt B50S3M228 (B004/B007) 1 57 36
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 12:
Page 83
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041383 Decal Power Off - Exp 1 83 25*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 13:
As Visual distinction:
The old roller (left) contains grooves on the fusing knob end.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY Int. PAGE ITEM
AE011064 AE011071 Hot Roller 39.8 mm T0.4 1 0 47 17
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
Decal and Document , Add the following information to the list (newly
registered part).
Hot Roller , The following hot roller parts have been changed due to parts
standardization.
AE011064 AE011071
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue + 10/11/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
UPDATE 1:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2323552 G0601147 Ball Bearing 8x22x7 1-1 0 57 24
UPDATE 2:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A2322403 G0652270 Receptacle Charge Roller 1-1 3 37 17
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
P
A
R
T
S
Ball Bearing The Ball Bearing has been changed due to parts
standardization
Charge Roller Receptacle The Charge Cleaning Pad has been
changed over to a Brush Roller (ref TSB 006). As a result, the Charge
Cleaning Bracket has been deleted. The Charge Roller Receptacle has
been modified to reflect this change.
New
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 2 of 6
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new
style Receptacle Charge Roller installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502 H7016900219
Gestetner 4502 H7116901248
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7015900869
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7116901748
Savin 2535 H7016900219
Savin 2545 H7116901248
UPDATE 3:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0045845 B0045848 Controller Board 1-1 1 69 15
UPDATE 4:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0041097 Shipping Support - Scanner 1 13 36*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Controller Board , we had previously announced a modification of the Controller
Board software. A new part number has been assigned as follows.
1. Shipping Support - Scanner , Add index #36 to the illustration and the
information below to the list.
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 3 of 6
UPDATE 5:
1. Operation Panel Assy (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 17
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041517 Earth Sheet Touch Panel 1 17 28*
B0041516 Sheet Prevent fence - Left 1 17 29*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 4 of 6
2. Operation Panel Assy , ADD Item #28 to the illustration.
ADD Item #29 to the illustration and the information below to the list.
PDATE 6:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041691 Scanner Frame Assy 1 21 44*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
PDATE 7:
Page 25
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A2326002 By-pass Feed Unit 1 25 26*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 5 of 6
Scanner Frame Assy , ADD Item #44 to the illustration and the following
information to the list (newly registered part).
By-pass Feed Unit , ADD index #26 to the illustration and the following
information to the list (newly registered part).
26
UPDATE 8:
Page 51
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0044502 Duplex Unit 1 51 25*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 9:
Duplex Unit 2 (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 53
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW010048 AW010049 Photosensor GP2A28A1 1 53 3
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 10:
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AW020056 AW010048 Photosensor GP2A28N1 1 55 15
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 015 Reissue +
Page 6 of 6
UPDATE 11:
Duplex Unit 1, Add item #25 to the illustration and the following information
to the list (newly registered part).
Duplex Unit 2, Correct the following P/N and description
Duplex Unit 3, Correct the following P/N and description
25
Drive Section 1 , Correct the following P/N and description
5 ADD i d #28 t th ill t ti
Drive Section 1 (B003/B004/B006/B007): Page 57
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AA043551 Timing BeltB50S3M213UG (B003/B006) 1 57 36
AA043569 Timing Belt B50S3M228 (B004/B007) 1 57 36
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 12:
Page 83
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0041383 Decal Power Off - Exp 1 83 25*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UPDATE 13:
As Visual distinction:
The old roller (left) contains grooves on the fusing knob end.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY Int. PAGE ITEM
AE011064 AE011071 Hot Roller 39.8 mm T0.4 1 0 47 17
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
Decal and Document , Add the following information to the list (newly
registered part).
Hot Roller , The following hot roller parts have been changed due to parts
standardization.
AE011064 AE011071
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 016 09/17/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: NOISE GENERATED FROM BY-PASS FEED SECTION
SYMPTOM:
Noise from by-pass Feed Section
CAUSE:
A. Noise generated by vibration of the Electrical Clutch Feed Shaft and Drive Gear:
See replacement procedure on next page.
B. Noise from the Bushing of the Driven Roller Shaft:
SOLUTION:
The following changes have been made to reduce noise.
A: To support the free end of the shaft a bushing has been added:
1. The Length of the Feed Shaft has been changed from 229mm to 249mm.
2. A Bushing and e-ring has been added.
3. The shape of the Tightening Bracket has been modified to accommodate
the new bushing (hole added).
B: To hold the clutch firmly in place:
1. A roller has been added to apply pressure against the clutch.
2. A Pressure Plate was also added.
C: The material of the Bushing has been changed.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
P
A
R
T
S
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 016
Page 2 of 4
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AA140660 AA140753 Feed Shaft 1-1 3/S 26 21
A2326061 G0656801 Tightener Bracket 1-1 3/S 26 38
A2326057 G0656800 Bracket-by-pass Feed Drive 1-1 1 26 40
A2326065 G0656802 Rail By-pass Feed 1-1 3/S 26 39
- GA080002 Bushing 6mm 0-1 3/S 26 35
*
- 07200040E Retaining Ring M4 0-1 - 26 104
*
- B0046062 Pressure Plate 0-1 - 26 41
*
AF040575 Driven Roller 0-1 - 26 42
*
08053480 GA080002 Bushing 6mm 1-1 3/S 26 102
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Note: Whenever replacing the old Feed Shaft with the new one, the following parts from the above list must
all be replaced together as a set:
AA140753 Feed Shaft
G0656801 Tightener
G0656802 Rail By-Pass Feed
GA080002 Bushing 6MM
07200040E Retaining Ring M4
Replacement Procedure for parts modified in section A above
PREPARATION:
Remove the Tightened Bracket, Retaining Ring, Bushing and Electrical Clutch as shown below. (Ref. FSM
page 3-63)
1. Replace the Feed Shaft with AA140753.
Continued
[H]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[B]
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 016
Page 3 of 4
2. Attach the Driven Roller [A] to the Pressure Plate [B], then peel off the outer layers of the double-sided
tape (2 places) on the Pressure Plate.
3. Set the Bushing [C] in the hole in the Pressure Plate, then mount the two together onto the Feed Shaft.
Note: Be careful not to let the exposed double-sided tape contact the Side Plate.
4. Set Bushing [D] in the cutout on the side of the Pressure Plate, then push in the Pressure Plate along
with the two bushings. After it is set in position, attach e-rings [E] and [F].
5. Press the Pressure Plate firmly against the Side Plate so that the double-sided tape catches and
secures the two together.
6. Attach the Gear [G].
7. Attach the Electrical Clutch [H].
8. Remove the Arm Tightener [N], Gear and Spring (not shown) attached to the original Tightener Bracket
removed in the Prep stage, and attach them to the new Tightener Bracket [I].
9. Attach the new Tightener Bracket [I] and Bushing [J] and new bushing [K]. Then, the tighten screws in
the order shown. (1,2 then 3)
10. Attach e-rings [L] and [M].
Continued
[N]
[J]
[L]
[K]
[M]
[I]
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 016
Page 4 of 4
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Feed Shaft and
Tightener Bracket installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502 H7026301294
Gestetner 4502 H7126400419
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7026301381
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7126301040
Savin 2535 H7026301294
Savin 2545 H7126400419
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 017 09/19/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
GENERAL:
The service manual pages listed below must be removed from the B003/B004/B006/B007 Service
Manual.
REMOVE PAGES:
6-84 through 6-86 Information relocated to Firmware History section
B361/B362 4-20 Information relocated to Firmware History section
The service manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
NEW PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
Tab Position Updated Information (Tab Positions)
viii through x Updated Information (Table of Contents)
B361/B362 4-12 through 4-19 Updated Information (B361/B362 Firmware History)
The service manual pages listed below are a new section (Firmware History) and must be added to the
B003/B004/B006/B007 Service Manual with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of
replacement pages.
8-1 through 8-9 New Information (Firmware History)
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
INSTALLATION B003/B004/B006/B007
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
INSTALLATION B361/B362
INSTALLATION B360
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B003/B004/B006/B007
PAPER TRAY UNIT A862
TROUBLESHOOTING B361/B362
TROUBLESHOOTING B360
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B003/B004/B006/B007
BRIDGE UNIT A688/B397
SERVICE TABLES B361/B362
SERVICE TABLES B360
TROUBLESHOOTING B003/B004/B006/B007
1 BIN TRAY B376
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B361/B360
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B360
SERVICE TABLES B003/B004/B006/B007
1,000 SHEET FINISHER A681
SPECIFICATIONS B361/B362
SPECIFICATIONS B360
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B003/B004/B006/B007
TWO TRAY FINISHER B352
SPECIFICATIONS B003/B004/B006/B007
NINE TRAY MAILBOX & BRIDGE UNIT G909/G912
FIRMWARE HISTORY
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B351
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
2
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
1
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
3
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
4
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
6
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
5
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
8
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
7
Rev. 09/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 viii SM
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY................................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION................................................................. 6-62
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION...................................................... 6-63
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT................................................................................................... 6-64
6.13.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................... 6-65
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION................................................................. 6-66
LARGER THAN A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................. 6-66
UP TO A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................................ 6-66
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM.................................. 6-67
FEED-IN......................................................................................................... 6-67
INVERSION AND EXIT.................................................................................. 6-67
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................................. 6-68
6.14.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-68
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM..................................................................... 6-69
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM................................. 6-69
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM............ 6-70
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ................................................................... 6-71
MECHANISM................................................................................................. 6-71
CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS.............................. 6-72
CURRENTS APPLIED TO LEADING EDGE AND IMAGE AREAS, AND FOR
BY-PASS FEED......................................................................................... 6-73
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM ......................................... 6-74
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT.................................................................. 6-75
6.15.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-75
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE........................................................................................ 6-76
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM............................................... 6-76
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM................................ 6-77
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS................................ 6-77
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER.............................................................................. 6-78
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM........................................................................ 6-78
6.15.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..................................................... 6-79
TEMPERATURE CONTROL ......................................................................... 6-79
FUSING IDLING TEMPERATURE................................................................ 6-80
6.15.9 OVERHEAT PROTECTION..................................................................... 6-80
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES................................................................................ 6-81
6.16.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-81
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE......................................................................... 6-82
ENTERING THE ENERGY SAVER MODE................................................... 6-82
WHAT HAPPENS IN ENERGY SAVER MODE ............................................ 6-82
RETURN TO STAND-BY MODE................................................................... 6-82
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE ................................................................................... 6-83
ENTERING OFF STAND-BY AND OFF MODES.......................................... 6-83
OFF STAND-BY MODE................................................................................. 6-83
OFF MODE.................................................................................................... 6-83
RETURNING TO STAND-BY MODE............................................................. 6-83
SPECIFICATONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................ 7-1
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................7-1
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION...................................................................7-3
Rev. 09/2002
SM ix B003/B004/B006/B007
7.3 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT..........................................................................7-5
FIRMWARE HISTORY
8. FIRMWARE HISTORY................................................................. 8-1
8.1 FIRMWARE HISTORY..............................................................................8-1
8.1.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE (BICU) FIRMWARE HISTORY ................ 8-1
8.1.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY................ 8-3
8.1.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MOD HISTORY ....... 8-4
8.1.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY .... 8-8
8.1.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY.. 8-9
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B351
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 8-1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................8-1
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT .............................................................................8-2
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER...................................................................8-2
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT.............................................................................8-3
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH
SENSORS........................................................................................................8-4
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ...............................................................8-5
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER............................................................................8-5
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS...................................................8-6
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HP
SENSOR...................................................................................................8-6
1.10 SCANNER MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR.......................................8-7
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH ...................8-8
1.12 EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................................8-9
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID.................................................................................8-9
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD ..........................................................................8-9
2 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 8-10
2.1 TIMING CHARTS....................................................................................8-10
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDE ORIGINAL MODE...............................8-10
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE...........................8-11
2.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................8-12
3 SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 8-13
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................8-13
3.2 TEST POINTS.........................................................................................8-13
3.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................8-13
4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION ......................................................... 8-14
4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS.............................................................................8-14
DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................8-15
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................8-16
4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM......................................................................8-16
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE .....................................................8-18
Rev. 09/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 x SM
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM.........................................................8-19
4.4.1 PICK AND SEPARATION...............................................................8-19
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION..................................................8-20
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES..........................8-20
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................8-21
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS..........................................................8-21
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................8-22
4.6 STAMP....................................................................................................8-23
4.7 DF70 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY8-24
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION......................................... 9-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................9-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................9-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.....................................................9-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION...........................................9-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................9-5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS........................................................ 9-6
2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM.....................................................................9-6
2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM................9-7
Tray lifting conditions ............................................................................9-7
Tray lowering conditions .......................................................................9-7
2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM .............................................................9-8
3. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 9-9
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.........................................................................................9-9
3.2 TEST POINTS...........................................................................................9-9
3.3 SWITCHES................................................................................................9-9
3.4 FUSES ......................................................................................................9-9
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...................................... 9-10
4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT........................................................................9-10
Tray Cover ..........................................................................................9-10
Front Cover.........................................................................................9-10
Rear Cover .........................................................................................9-10
Right Lower Cover ..............................................................................9-10
Upper Cover .......................................................................................9-10
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ......................................................................9-11
4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS.............9-11
Pick-up Roller .....................................................................................9-11
Paper Feed Roller...............................................................................9-11
Separation Roller ................................................................................9-11
4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT.....................9-12
Tray Lift Sensor ..................................................................................9-12
Paper End Sensor ..............................................................................9-12
4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.........................................................9-13
4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE.........................................................9-14
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-12 SM
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY
4.6.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 PRINTER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615902 A 1.34
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine could not be used with Axis print servers.
2. Part of print data (frame) could not be printed during
Custom size printing in PCL 6.
B3615902 B 1.35
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine sometimes freezes after pressing the
Offline key while the data is being printed out (PCL).
2. The machine sometimes freezes while downloading PCL
fonts.
3. The machine sometimes does not re-start printing after
the paper is removed from the output tray following an
overflow.
4. The machine sometimes freezes when both Stapling and
Punching have been selected from the driver for a paper
size with which neither function is permitted.
B3615902 C 1.36
Change in Specification:
(Module added for China/Taiwan version).
B3615902 D 2.00.1
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Modified for use with the Capture function.
2. Modified so that the printer controller can detect the
individual codes in the data headers of a print job sent
with both PCL and PS codes, thereby allowing the
machine to switch between the 2 PDL emulations
accordingly (PCL/PS). The A-C2 prints each page in its
original format, even if contained in the same file.
3. Some German umlaut characters cannot be printed out
correctly with the following fonts when using the PCL6
driver on Windows NT4.0/95/ 98/Me: Albertus Medium,
Antique Olive, Humanst521 BT, Zurich BlkEx BT.
B3615902 E 3.00
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. A print job received when the machine switches from On
to Off Mode may not be printed out.
2. After deleting a locked print document, it is possible to
press the delete button without selecting any other locked
print documents.
3. The operation panel may flicker slightly after the operator
performs settings in the Printer Features window very
quickly (i.e. window is open for a very short time).
B3615902 F 3.02
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When the undefined command, "<ESC>&k#w" is
received, it appears on the output as a character string
[e.g. as "<ESC>&k6w"].
2. The punch error is logged in the error report whenever
feeding from the Bypass Tray under any print job
conditions (even when not using the punch unit).
3. When Letterhead is selected as the paper type for the
Bypass tray, the tray icon on the operation panel displays
a 2, indicating that Duplex copies can be made (not
permissible by specification).
4. When printing in duplex, the last odd page is printed on
the reverse side of the last sheet (see FPR reply #OTS-
01-2651 of #RE01060006 for details).
Change in Specification:
1. Supports the Status Readback function of the PCL5e.
2. Added symbol sets PC-858, Latin 9 and Roman 9 for
display of the EURO currency symbol.
B3615902 G 3.05
Firmware modified to correct the following:
The XL ERROR occurs when specifying symbol sets
SETvmath (6M), SETvint (13J) and SETvus (14J) -- which
are not supported in PCLXL.
Change in Specification:
PCL6: Added symbol sets PC-858, Latin 9 and Roman 9 for
display of the Euro currency symbol.
B3615902 H 3.08
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-14 SM
4.6.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 SCANNER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615901 C 2.05
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The mainframe stalls if it receives the command to store
a document while in the process of deleting another
document. Application used: Desktop Binder V2.
B3615901 D 2.07
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Software changed so that the original can be placed on
the exposure glass just as with copying, i.e. there is no
need to turn the original upside-down (for both
directions).
Ver.2.07(B3615901D) Ver.2.27(B3615901E)
2. Mixed Original Mode can now be used with the Twain
driver ver.3.12.
When using this driver, please note the following:
Be sure to use Netfile software ver.2.17 or newer.
Be sure to install ADF ROM ver.1.76 or newer, as older
versions will cause image stretching along the sub-scan
direction with 425 dpi and 555-557 dpi scanning.
B3615901 E 2.27
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 NCS (NIB) MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585921 C 1.61
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. After a communication failure breaks the connection
between the NIB and Network Twain driver, the driver is
unable to re-establish connection (unless the A-C2 is
powered Off/On).
2. When 80000000(H) or more is registered in the Manager
IPX Address 2 (Web Status Monitor), the setting is
changed to an unspecified one.
3. If several print jobs are sent one after another to the NIB
via the IPP port of SmartNetMonitor for Client, the NIB
terminates printing. (Also, a print job sent by the standard
IPP port may be canceled).
4. The USTATUS information may be lost, depending on
when the USTATUS is sent during bi-directional
communication over TCP/IP port 9100.
5. With bi-directional communication enabled for TCP port
9100, printing operation is inhibited after data is sent from
an application utility that does not support bi-directional
communication (e.g. Port Navi, MDP).
6. The IP address 0.0.0.0 can be set by the ifconfig
command.
7. The wording of the message for saving data at logoff was
corrected from datas to data.
Change in Specification:
1. Information such as the IP address and printing protocol
(Client PCs) was added to the syslog file for access
restriction.
2. The display width for the ID of the prnlog command with
telnet, rsh, and ftp was expanded from 2 to 10 digits.
G0585921 D 1.66
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When using signature level 2 on the NetWare Server, the
printer does not connect to the NetWare Server.
2. The printer cannot print more than one job sent from a
CICS application on an IBM Main Frame (e.g. OS/390)
when the application uses lpd protocol unique to CICS.
3. The lpd process on the printer is interrupted when
lpq/lprm commands with arguments are executed more
than 50 times after the printer has been turned on.
4. When trying to access the Web Status Monitor for a
printer during printing via the ipp port, the httpd process
is occasionally interrupted.
5. When there are several messages displayed, such as
error messages after a malfunction, Apple Talk protocol
is occasionally interrupted during printing.
6. When the printer is not ready due to an open cover, the
message "Printer is not ready" is not indicated in lpd or
stat command.
7. When executing the prnlog command designate job ID
0, no information is indicated.
G0585921 E 1.77
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-16 SM
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Continued from previous page
8. Even when the parameter settings changed by telnet are
not successfully written into the NVRAM, no error
message is indicated as a command line.
9. The software allows any name to be entered as the
computer name for NetBEUI.
10. When printing data with 0 byte by rcp, the NIB does not
respond to the waiting client PC.
11. No settings are valid with the install shell of RedHat Linux
Ver.7.1.
Change in Specification:
1. 2-byte code characters cannot be entered for a device
name.
G0585921 E 1.77
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. No error message is displayed in Netscape Navigator
even when an incorrect URL is input in the address bar.
2. Up to 32 characters can be input in the NetBEUI
configuration screen Comment box, even though
specification is 31 characters maximum.
3. The PS status cannot be displayed using the stat
command (lpq command for lpr).
4. If Trap is selected for the Access Type in the SNMP
Configuration screen during the snmpd process,
communication may be cut off.
5. The NIB does not respond to the lprm command (root
directory) from a FreeBSD host computer.
6. If an undefined remote printer number is input in the
Netware configuration page, communication between the
NIB and Netware Server will be cut off.
Change in Specification:
1. Two or more print queues can be attached to a single
printer object (for further details, refer to TechMail
RC010430).
2. TCP Ports 11021 and 11023 (Design use) have been
closed.
G0585921 F 1.79
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The following items have been fixed:
1. The controller freezes if disconnected while data
containing the Readback command is being printed out
with ftp/rsh.
2. Display corrected for when the operator tries to execute
Spool Printing Job List with SmartNetMonitor for Admin
on the A-C2/R-C2:
Previous: Spool printing is not available. Active spool
printing from the device or related software
New: Error 404
3. The Fax Management Tool cannot be used while any of
the NIB setting(s) are being changed.
4. The parameters of sysLocation and sysContact cannot
be set correctly using the snmp command with telnet.
5. The controller freezes when a non-existent file is
specified for rcp transmission.
6. Cannot connect to Novel NDS (GFPR #RC02010007):
The nearest NetWare Server informs the NIB of the
alternate NetWare Server address, where the NDS
replica is stored, however the NIB is unable to interpret
the message.
Change in Specification:
1. SNMP vulnerability
SNMP security vulnerabilities reported by CERT on
Feb.12, 2002 has been tested using the PROTOS c06-
snmpv1 test suite and we have verified the fixes.
-CERT: http://www.cert.org/advisories/CA-2002- 03.html
-PROTOS c06-snmpv1 test suite
:
http://www.ee.oulu.fi/research/ouspg/protos/testing/c06/snmp
v1/
2. Some reserved (unused) TCP ports that were open have
been closed, e.g. FTP.
G0585921 G 1.81
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-18 SM
4.6.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 NFA MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
(NETFILE)
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585922 C 1.42.02
When the machine sends 2 or more files to the Document
Server within 1 second (as when sending backed up files just
after the Server recovers), the first 2 documents receive the
same filename and the first is therefore erased. The software
has been modified so that file naming can be controlled at the
ms level, preventing the file from being deleted.
G0585922 D 1.42.04
NOTE: When using scanner firmware B3615901D, NFA
firmware version 2.17 or later should be used.
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The MFP stalls when setting the I/O device from two
ScanRouter V2 Professional servers at the same time.
2. When setting the I/O device from ScanRouter V2
Professional, the fax delivery settings sometimes
disappear.
3. When a print request is issued from the Document server
at the MFP or the DeskTopBinder V2 without the correct
paper size in the tray, the MFP does not send the error to
the operation panel or DeskTopBinder V2, and the MFP
does not print the document.
G0585922 F 2.17
Minor program changes for Japanese model only.
G0585922 G 2.19
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 PS3 MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
(PS3)
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G5775906 B 1.00
1. With print jobs containing mixed duplex/simplex pages,
the job comes out either all simplex or all duplex.
2. When there are different settings set for each page of the
print job (e.g. paper type, size), only one page is printed
out.
3. If an input tray is locked as the priority tray (using Print
Tray Priority) and Auto Continue has been set to 0
minutes, an SC error is displayed when printing out
more than two pages of a PS config. page.
4. The product name for Pointy and Print cannot be
changed.
G5775906 C 1.03
1. While downloading PS fonts to a machine, the correct
PS serial number cannot be output.
2. PS error occurs when the following conditions have
been met:
- Original size is the same as that loaded in the locked
tray(s).
- The paper type is not specified in the driver.
- AutoSelect Tray is selected in the driver.
3. If the machine receives an A5 print job while Error Skip
is activated and there is no A5 loaded in any tray, the
operation panel will display Load A5 Paper (LEF), even
though specification only supports A5 SEF.
4. Printing out the PS Configuration page:
Even though specification requires the machine to prompt
the operator to load A4/LT plain when there are no trays
containing plain or recycled paper, the machine does not
display the message and allows the configuration page to
be printed out onto any paper type.
G5775906 D 1.05
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE HISTORY
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 8-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
8. FIRMWARE HISTORY
8.1 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
8.1.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE (BICU) FIRMWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045112 C 2.15.04
Please wait message does not clear when
there is paper in between the duplex unit and
units cover.
Please wait
does not clear
When feeding HLT or A5 lengthwise from the
bypass tray, horizontal black lines appear
about 180mm from the leading edge.
Horizontal black
lines
Fax image is not output when Standard is
selected and the trays main scan registration
adjustment value (SP1002) is set at 9.0mm.
Fax image is not
output
When the value of SP1002 is between
- 8.9mm and 8.0mm, images do not appear
in the area approximately 1mm from the main-
scan leading edge.
Images do not
appear in the
main-scan
leading edge
area
B0045112 D 2.16.05
Image problem occurs only in outputs made
just after the main power is turned on (e.g.
output completely black, blurry images).
Image problem
occurs after
main power is
turned on
B0045112 E 2.16a.05
After the power is turned on, the first output
shows a black stripe at the sub-scan leading
edge.
Black stripe at
the sub-scan
leading edge
When a Finisher SC occurs, it becomes
impossible to start any other job (even those
not using the Finisher).
Finisher SC
After SP5801 (Memory Clear) is performed,
the default value for SP1001-01 is changed to
0.
Memory Clear
problem
The Tray Full display is not cleared even after:
the main power is turned off, the paper is
cleared from the tray and the main power is
turned on again.
Tray Full display
is not cleared
SP6006-05 (DF trailing edge erase
adjustment) has been newly added to ensure
that the trailing edge of the original does not
appear on the copy.
Note that this cannot be used for the Fax and
Scanner applications.
SP6006-05
added
B0045112 F 2.19.05
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 8-2 SM
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
Following a book scan job at 25-44%
reduction, the first page of a (100%) DF job is
printed out as a blank page.
Blank page of a
DF job
When a finisher jam occurs with the 1000-
sheet Finisher, sometimes the location of the
jammed paper is not displayed.
Jammed paper
location is not
displayed
B0045112 G 2.20
Fusing-related SC errors happen frequently
after SP1104-1 is changed from fusing
temperature control to phase control.
SC error at
Phase control
When the operation switch is turned Off/On,
the value of SP6017 (Sheet Through
Magnification) is reset to default (0).
Value of
SP6017 is reset
to default
B0045112 H 2.21
When fax transmission is stopped by a DF
jam or other error, the display still reads
Scanning
Scanning
message
remains after
Fax Tx
interrupted.
If the paper stops inside the bridge unit where
the sensors cannot detect it (mainframe +
mailbox configuration only), the jam location is
not displayed on the panel.
Jam location not
displayed with
mainframe +
mailbox
B0045112 K 2.26
The pressure roller deforms (temporary
change) after the machine is in Standby mode
for an extended period of time, eg 2 to 3 days.
Pressure Roller
temporarily
deforms
Fusing related SC codes (541, 542) and/or
incomplete fusing occurs when making copies
first thing in the morning (especially in cold
environments).
SC541, SC542
B0045112 L 2.28
When printing document feeder A4 SEF
originals with Create Margin onto A3 paper at
141%, black lines appear along the right edge
(along the subscan direction).
Vertical black
lines along right
edge
B0045112 M 2.29
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 8-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
8.1.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045220 A 2.06
Add Traditional Chinese (for Taiwan version).
B0045220 B 2.10
Add Simplified Chinese (for China version)
The Form Feed button is only displayed for English and
Japanese.
Wording mistake in the alert message for when the number of
pages in the printer document server exceeds the maximum (All
languages).
The following occur with the Dutch display language:
In the System Settings screen, both the Finisher and Tray 1
appear twice in the output tray selections.
The selections Yes and No were reversed in the Key
Operator Settings User Code Settings screen.
B0045220 C 2.15
Added character strings for use with the Capture function.
Translation errors (Copier):
(Copy alert): Slip Sheet Tray should be Cover Sheet Tray
(Danish).
Thin Paper should be Thick Paper (Czech).
For all languages except English, the lettering is not displayed in
the Stop button when the PS configuration page is being printed
out.
B0045220 D 2.18
The following display errors in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features have been corrected:
-(Portuguese, Finnish): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to
Bottom" were reversed.
-(German): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to Bottom" were
incorrect.
Dutch translation error for "Program/Change/Delete User Code".
The following display error in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features has been corrected:
(Czech): What should be displayed as "2 Sided: T to T2 Sided:
T to T" was incorrectly displayed as "1 Sided2 Sided: T to B".
B0045220 E 2.19
Spanish translation error for Sub TX mode Key in the Fax Initial
Settings screen:
Incorrect: Mode RX sustituta
Correct: Mode TX sustituta
The Dutch display for Rotate Sort (Copy screen) appeared in
German.
B0045220 F 2.22
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 8-4 SM
8.1.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045102 D 3.05
Corrects the following:
SC820 occurs at power ON when the Self-
Diagnostic is performed.
SC820
A small square character appears throughout
the SP/UP and SC Error screens in machines
for Taiwan, China and Asia.
Display Text
Error
With the User Stamp function, SC955 occurs
when a copy job is made with 200 or more
originals
SC955
In UP Mode, the operation panel key for paper
sizes for China (8K, 16K) can be turned
On/Off with SP mode.
8K, 16K paper
selection
(display)
SC955 occurs when 1 set has been
programmed for Staple Sort (w/32MB+HDD).
SC955
After the machine has repeatedly stored to
and printed out documents from the HDD, it
freezes during scanning (scanner does not
turn off).
Fax document
storage error
B0045102 E 3.06
Printing not possible when sending a print job
from a PC to the Adonis-C2 via the server
(parallel cable connection). In addition, the
printer status cannot be monitored from a web
browser.
Error when
printing from the
Print Server
B0045102 F 3.07
The Rx File Transmission settings on the Up
Mode Data Printout appear as None.
Up Mode Data
printout error
In the System Settings User ID screen, if
other information is changed in addition to the
user code, the user code assumes a
completely different value.
User code
setting
The display still reads Printing even after a
jam or SMC paper end occurs.
Printing
continually
displayed
An image problem occurs when binding
margin has been set for Magazine
Image problem
with Magazine
Mode
When a FAX is sent with binding (negative
value) and image rotation, marks appear at
the end of a main scan direction line. These
lines are caused during the image processing
stage
Marks near the
trailing edge of
received FAX
images
SC955 occurs when the 32MB and HDD
are both installed.
SC955
B0045102 G
3.08.4
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 8-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The SP modes for HDD initialization (SP4911-
***) have been moved to SSP.
SP4911 moved
to SSP Mode
The SC error data (incl. logging data) from
SC-8XX was incorrect.
RSS logging
data incorrect
SC819 occurs when using Magazine Mode
without the optional memory installed.
SC819
When using an A4 2-page spread original to
print out to larger sizes (AMS) with hole-
punching selected, the machine displays
Cannot staple, even though the Staple
function has not been selected.
Cannot staple
is displayed
When printing out with APS enabled and both
Punch and Staple selected, the display reads
Cannot punch.
Cannot punch
is displayed
When entering a pm time using the 24-hour
format in Initial Settings, the machine inputs
the corresponding am time instead (e.g.
mistakenly inputs 8:00 instead of 20:00).
When entering 12:00, the machine inputs 0
instead.
Time setting
error
SP2103 has been moved from SSP to SP
mode.
SP2103 moved
to SP mode.
Marks appear when printing out with 180
degree image rotation. These lines are
caused during the image processing stage.
Marks on the
output with
image rotation
When a jam occurs in Magazine Mode with a
combined-image original, the first image is not
saved and therefore cannot be recovered
(although all successive images are
successfully recovered).
Portion of image
deleted during
jam recovery
Cannot enter SP mode after entering SSP
mode.
Not possible to
enter SP from
SSP
When a number key is pressed while the
machine is in Energy Saver Mode, the
machine comes back on line, however the
value of the number key pressed is input
(used).
Key input when
recovering from
Energy Saver
Mode
Cannot change pm to am in the System
Settings clock setting screen in machines for
North America.
Cannot change
PM to AM
(clock)
Recovery is not possible after the FCU
firmware download is interrupted. A function
has been added to make recovery possible
even after it is interrupted.
FCU download
recovery not
possible
B0045102 G
3.08.4
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 8-6 SM
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The Cant allocate info error message
sometimes appears when connected to a
network.
Cant allocate
info error
The DMA sometimes fails when receiving
data from the network.
DMA failure
B0045102 H
3.08.5
The printer function stalls when jobs are
frequently sent alternating among different
drivers.
Printer
application stalls
B0045102 J 3.09.1
Modified to allow use of the Capture function. Capture function
Following a Detailed Self-Diagnostic, SC819
occurs when the diagnostic report is being
printed out.
SC819
SC997 occurs when one of the MFP
application keys is pressed just after the
power is turned on.
SC997
A black line appears along the trailing edge of
DF copies under the following conditions: 1
2 job, Create Margin, A4/SEF originals and
paper.
Black line along
trailing edge
with Create
Margin
SC819 occurs under the following conditions:
Sort job, Mixed Original Sizes, optional
memory not installed.
SC819
The last page of a 1 2 odd-numbered copy
job is printed out on the opposite side when
using paper with a set front/back orientation
(e.g. letterhead, punched paper).
Last page
printed out on
opposite side
(copier)
The following display has been changed:
Old: Cannot communicate with external
server.
New: Cannot deliver the data. Check the
server. #### (#= servers IP address).
Display changed
If an error occurs during the self-diagnostic at
power On (e.g. NIB error), the machine
sometimes does not display the time on the
operation panel.
Time not
displayed at
power On.
B0045102 K 5.19.1
The GW-MAC control function has been
added.
Correction for a problem that occurred when
using 5.19.1 with certain production software
at the factory.
GW-MAC
function
B0045102 L 5.19.2
When using the memory dump function of Fax
SP mode, the memory address cannot be
entered.
Cannot enter
memory address
B0045102 M 5.21
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 8-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Program added for Korean language display
(with the addition of the Korea model).
NOTE: To display the Korean language on
models other than the Korea model, it is
necessary to install both the LCDC firmware
from service Card V2.03KOR and controller
firmware V5.22.
Add Korean
language
B0045102 N 5.22
The tray selection screen is sometimes not
displayed on the mainframe panel at Power
On with coinlock-connected machines.
Display error
w/coinlock-
connected
machines
The Key Card and Coin Lock setting screens
now appear in the System Settings.
Key Card, Coin
Lock display
B0045102 P 5.23
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 8-8 SM
8.1.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045211 A 2.05
Corrected displays in French that had been
mistranslated or were missing.
Display
translation error
(French)
With proportional fonts, the pixel to the right of
the slash mark was printed blank.
Blank pixel
B0045211 B 2.06
Corrected displays in Spanish that had been
mistranslated or were missing.
Display
translation error
(Spanish)
With proportional fonts, the pixel to the right of
the slash mark was printed blank.
Blank pixel
Strings of simplified or traditional (complex)
Chinese characters contained garbled areas.
Kanji characters
not printed
correctly
B0045211 B 2.07
Modified for Taiwanese language display. Taiwanese
display
B0045211 C 2.11
Displays for the Capture function added. Capture function
displays
Except for the English display language, the
Stop button is not displayed while the PS
Configuration Page is being printed out.
Stop not
displayed during
PS Config. Page
printout
If a European language is set for the display,
the Hole punch receptacle is full (printer)
message is not displayed when the receptacle
becomes full.
Hole punch
receptacle is
full message
not displayed
Except for the Japanese and English display
languages, the Form Feed button is not
displayed.
Form Feed
button not
displayed
B0045211 C 2.19
The character "/" is not displayed in the date
field with simplified or traditional Chinese.
Display error
with simplified
and traditional
Chinese
B0045211 D 2.20
Modified for Korean language display. Korean display
B0045211 D 2.22
Spanish translation error for Sub TX mode
Key in the Fax Initial Settings screen:
Incorrect: Mode RX sustituta
Correct: Mode TX sustituta
Translation error
-FAX Settings
B0045211 E 2.23
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 8-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
8.1.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045104 1.04
Rev. 09/2002
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 017 REISSUE ! 09/30/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
GENERAL:
The service manual pages listed below must be removed from the B003/B004/B006/B007 Service
Manual.
REMOVE PAGES:
6-84 through 6-86 Information relocated to Firmware History section
B361/B362 4-20 Information relocated to Firmware History section
The service manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
NEW PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
!
!
!
Tab Position Updated Information (Tab Positions)
viii through x Updated Information (Table of Contents)
xvi Updated Information (Table of Contents)
B361/B362 4-12 through 4-19 Updated Information (B361/B362 Firmware History)
The service manual pages listed below are a new section (Firmware History) and must be added to the
B003/B004/B006/B007 Service Manual with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 set of
replacement pages.
16-1 through 16-9 New Information (Firmware History)
!
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
INSTALLATION B003/B004/B006/B007
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
INSTALLATION B361/B362
INSTALLATION B360
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B003/B004/B006/B007
PAPER TRAY UNIT A862
TROUBLESHOOTING B361/B362
TROUBLESHOOTING B360
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B003/B004/B006/B007
BRIDGE UNIT A688/B397
SERVICE TABLES B361/B362
SERVICE TABLES B360
TROUBLESHOOTING B003/B004/B006/B007
1 BIN TRAY B376
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B361/B360
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B360
SERVICE TABLES B003/B004/B006/B007
1,000 SHEET FINISHER A681
SPECIFICATIONS B361/B362
SPECIFICATIONS B360
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B003/B004/B006/B007
TWO TRAY FINISHER B352
SPECIFICATIONS B003/B004/B006/B007
NINE TRAY MAILBOX & BRIDGE UNIT G909/G912
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B351
FIRMWARE HISTORY
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
2
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
1
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
3
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
4
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
6
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
5
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
8
T
A
B
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
7
Rev. 09/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 viii SM
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY................................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-61
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION................................................................. 6-62
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION...................................................... 6-63
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT................................................................................................... 6-64
6.13.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................... 6-65
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION................................................................. 6-66
LARGER THAN A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................. 6-66
UP TO A4 LENGTHWISE/LT LENGTHWISE................................................ 6-66
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM.................................. 6-67
FEED-IN......................................................................................................... 6-67
INVERSION AND EXIT.................................................................................. 6-67
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................................. 6-68
6.14.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-68
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM..................................................................... 6-69
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM................................. 6-69
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM............ 6-70
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ................................................................... 6-71
MECHANISM................................................................................................. 6-71
CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS.............................. 6-72
CURRENTS APPLIED TO LEADING EDGE AND IMAGE AREAS, AND FOR
BY-PASS FEED......................................................................................... 6-73
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM ......................................... 6-74
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT.................................................................. 6-75
6.15.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-75
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE........................................................................................ 6-76
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM............................................... 6-76
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM................................ 6-77
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS................................ 6-77
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER.............................................................................. 6-78
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM........................................................................ 6-78
6.15.8 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..................................................... 6-79
TEMPERATURE CONTROL ......................................................................... 6-79
FUSING IDLING TEMPERATURE................................................................ 6-80
6.15.9 OVERHEAT PROTECTION..................................................................... 6-80
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES................................................................................ 6-81
6.16.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 6-81
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE......................................................................... 6-82
ENTERING THE ENERGY SAVER MODE................................................... 6-82
WHAT HAPPENS IN ENERGY SAVER MODE ............................................ 6-82
RETURN TO STAND-BY MODE................................................................... 6-82
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE ................................................................................... 6-83
ENTERING OFF STAND-BY AND OFF MODES.......................................... 6-83
OFF STAND-BY MODE................................................................................. 6-83
OFF MODE.................................................................................................... 6-83
RETURNING TO STAND-BY MODE............................................................. 6-83
SPECIFICATONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................ 7-1
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................7-1
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION...................................................................7-3
Rev. 09/2002
SM ix B003/B004/B006/B007
7.3 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT..........................................................................7-5
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B351
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 8-1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................8-1
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT .............................................................................8-2
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER...................................................................8-2
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT.............................................................................8-3
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH
SENSORS........................................................................................................8-4
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ...............................................................8-5
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER............................................................................8-5
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS...................................................8-6
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HP
SENSOR...................................................................................................8-6
1.10 SCANNER MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR.......................................8-7
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH ...................8-8
1.12 EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................................8-9
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID.................................................................................8-9
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD ..........................................................................8-9
2 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 8-10
2.1 TIMING CHARTS....................................................................................8-10
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDE ORIGINAL MODE...............................8-10
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE...........................8-11
2.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................8-12
3 SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 8-13
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................8-13
3.2 TEST POINTS.........................................................................................8-13
3.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................8-13
4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION ......................................................... 8-14
4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS.............................................................................8-14
DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................8-15
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................8-16
4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM......................................................................8-16
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE .....................................................8-18
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM.........................................................8-19
4.4.1 PICK AND SEPARATION...............................................................8-19
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION..................................................8-20
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES..........................8-20
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................8-21
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS..........................................................8-21
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................8-22
4.6 STAMP....................................................................................................8-23
4.7 DF70 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY8-24
Rev. 09/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 x SM
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A683
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION......................................... 9-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................9-1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................9-2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.....................................................9-3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION...........................................9-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................9-5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS........................................................ 9-6
2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM.....................................................................9-6
2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM................9-7
Tray lifting conditions ............................................................................9-7
Tray lowering conditions .......................................................................9-7
2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM .............................................................9-8
3. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 9-9
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.........................................................................................9-9
3.2 TEST POINTS...........................................................................................9-9
3.3 SWITCHES................................................................................................9-9
3.4 FUSES ......................................................................................................9-9
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...................................... 9-10
4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT........................................................................9-10
Tray Cover ..........................................................................................9-10
Front Cover.........................................................................................9-10
Rear Cover .........................................................................................9-10
Right Lower Cover ..............................................................................9-10
Upper Cover .......................................................................................9-10
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ......................................................................9-11
4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS.............9-11
Pick-up Roller .....................................................................................9-11
Paper Feed Roller...............................................................................9-11
Separation Roller ................................................................................9-11
4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT.....................9-12
Tray Lift Sensor ..................................................................................9-12
Paper End Sensor ..............................................................................9-12
4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.........................................................9-13
4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE.........................................................9-14
Rev. 09/2002
B003/B004/B006/B007 xvi SM
5. SERVICE TABLES................................................................... 15-27
5.1 DIP SWITCHES/VRIABLE RESISTORS/LEDS.....................................15-27
5.1.1 DIP SWITCHES............................................................................15-27
5.1.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS ..............................................................15-28
5.1.3 LEDS.....................................................................................................
FIRMWARE HISTORY
1. FIRMWARE HISTORY............................................................... 16-1
1.1 FIRMWARE HISTORY............................................................................16-1
1.1.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE (BICU) FIRMWARE HISTORY .............. 16-1
1.1.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY.............. 16-3
1.1.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MOD HISTORY ..... 16-4
1.1.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY .. 16-8
1.1.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY16-9
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-12 SM
4.6 SOFTWARE HISTORY
4.6.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 PRINTER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615902 A 1.34
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine could not be used with Axis print servers.
2. Part of print data (frame) could not be printed during
Custom size printing in PCL 6.
B3615902 B 1.35
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The machine sometimes freezes after pressing the
Offline key while the data is being printed out (PCL).
2. The machine sometimes freezes while downloading PCL
fonts.
3. The machine sometimes does not re-start printing after
the paper is removed from the output tray following an
overflow.
4. The machine sometimes freezes when both Stapling and
Punching have been selected from the driver for a paper
size with which neither function is permitted.
B3615902 C 1.36
Change in Specification:
(Module added for China/Taiwan version).
B3615902 D 2.00.1
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Modified for use with the Capture function.
2. Modified so that the printer controller can detect the
individual codes in the data headers of a print job sent
with both PCL and PS codes, thereby allowing the
machine to switch between the 2 PDL emulations
accordingly (PCL/PS). The A-C2 prints each page in its
original format, even if contained in the same file.
3. Some German umlaut characters cannot be printed out
correctly with the following fonts when using the PCL6
driver on Windows NT4.0/95/ 98/Me: Albertus Medium,
Antique Olive, Humanst521 BT, Zurich BlkEx BT.
B3615902 E 3.00
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. A print job received when the machine switches from On
to Off Mode may not be printed out.
2. After deleting a locked print document, it is possible to
press the delete button without selecting any other locked
print documents.
3. The operation panel may flicker slightly after the operator
performs settings in the Printer Features window very
quickly (i.e. window is open for a very short time).
B3615902 F 3.02
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When the undefined command, "<ESC>&k#w" is
received, it appears on the output as a character string
[e.g. as "<ESC>&k6w"].
2. The punch error is logged in the error report whenever
feeding from the Bypass Tray under any print job
conditions (even when not using the punch unit).
3. When Letterhead is selected as the paper type for the
Bypass tray, the tray icon on the operation panel displays
a 2, indicating that Duplex copies can be made (not
permissible by specification).
4. When printing in duplex, the last odd page is printed on
the reverse side of the last sheet (see FPR reply #OTS-
01-2651 of #RE01060006 for details).
Change in Specification:
1. Supports the Status Readback function of the PCL5e.
2. Added symbol sets PC-858, Latin 9 and Roman 9 for
display of the EURO currency symbol.
B3615902 G 3.05
Firmware modified to correct the following:
The XL ERROR occurs when specifying symbol sets
SETvmath (6M), SETvint (13J) and SETvus (14J) -- which
are not supported in PCLXL.
Change in Specification:
PCL6: Added symbol sets PC-858, Latin 9 and Roman 9 for
display of the Euro currency symbol.
B3615902 H 3.08
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-14 SM
4.6.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 SCANNER MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B3615901 C 2.05
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The mainframe stalls if it receives the command to store
a document while in the process of deleting another
document. Application used: Desktop Binder V2.
B3615901 D 2.07
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Software changed so that the original can be placed on
the exposure glass just as with copying, i.e. there is no
need to turn the original upside-down (for both
directions).
Ver.2.07(B3615901D) Ver.2.27(B3615901E)
2. Mixed Original Mode can now be used with the Twain
driver ver.3.12.
When using this driver, please note the following:
Be sure to use Netfile software ver.2.17 or newer.
Be sure to install ADF ROM ver.1.76 or newer, as older
versions will cause image stretching along the sub-scan
direction with 425 dpi and 555-557 dpi scanning.
B3615901 E 2.27
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-15 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 NCS (NIB) MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585921 C 1.61
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. After a communication failure breaks the connection
between the NIB and Network Twain driver, the driver is
unable to re-establish connection (unless the A-C2 is
powered Off/On).
2. When 80000000(H) or more is registered in the Manager
IPX Address 2 (Web Status Monitor), the setting is
changed to an unspecified one.
3. If several print jobs are sent one after another to the NIB
via the IPP port of SmartNetMonitor for Client, the NIB
terminates printing. (Also, a print job sent by the standard
IPP port may be canceled).
4. The USTATUS information may be lost, depending on
when the USTATUS is sent during bi-directional
communication over TCP/IP port 9100.
5. With bi-directional communication enabled for TCP port
9100, printing operation is inhibited after data is sent from
an application utility that does not support bi-directional
communication (e.g. Port Navi, MDP).
6. The IP address 0.0.0.0 can be set by the ifconfig
command.
7. The wording of the message for saving data at logoff was
corrected from datas to data.
Change in Specification:
1. Information such as the IP address and printing protocol
(Client PCs) was added to the syslog file for access
restriction.
2. The display width for the ID of the prnlog command with
telnet, rsh, and ftp was expanded from 2 to 10 digits.
G0585921 D 1.66
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. When using signature level 2 on the NetWare Server, the
printer does not connect to the NetWare Server.
2. The printer cannot print more than one job sent from a
CICS application on an IBM Main Frame (e.g. OS/390)
when the application uses lpd protocol unique to CICS.
3. The lpd process on the printer is interrupted when
lpq/lprm commands with arguments are executed more
than 50 times after the printer has been turned on.
4. When trying to access the Web Status Monitor for a
printer during printing via the ipp port, the httpd process
is occasionally interrupted.
5. When there are several messages displayed, such as
error messages after a malfunction, Apple Talk protocol
is occasionally interrupted during printing.
6. When the printer is not ready due to an open cover, the
message "Printer is not ready" is not indicated in lpd or
stat command.
7. When executing the prnlog command designate job ID
0, no information is indicated.
G0585921 E 1.77
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-16 SM
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Continued from previous page
8. Even when the parameter settings changed by telnet are
not successfully written into the NVRAM, no error
message is indicated as a command line.
9. The software allows any name to be entered as the
computer name for NetBEUI.
10. When printing data with 0 byte by rcp, the NIB does not
respond to the waiting client PC.
11. No settings are valid with the install shell of RedHat Linux
Ver.7.1.
Change in Specification:
1. 2-byte code characters cannot be entered for a device
name.
G0585921 E 1.77
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. No error message is displayed in Netscape Navigator
even when an incorrect URL is input in the address bar.
2. Up to 32 characters can be input in the NetBEUI
configuration screen Comment box, even though
specification is 31 characters maximum.
3. The PS status cannot be displayed using the stat
command (lpq command for lpr).
4. If Trap is selected for the Access Type in the SNMP
Configuration screen during the snmpd process,
communication may be cut off.
5. The NIB does not respond to the lprm command (root
directory) from a FreeBSD host computer.
6. If an undefined remote printer number is input in the
Netware configuration page, communication between the
NIB and Netware Server will be cut off.
Change in Specification:
1. Two or more print queues can be attached to a single
printer object (for further details, refer to TechMail
RC010430).
2. TCP Ports 11021 and 11023 (Design use) have been
closed.
G0585921 F 1.79
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-17 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The following items have been fixed:
1. The controller freezes if disconnected while data
containing the Readback command is being printed out
with ftp/rsh.
2. Display corrected for when the operator tries to execute
Spool Printing Job List with SmartNetMonitor for Admin
on the A-C2/R-C2:
Previous: Spool printing is not available. Active spool
printing from the device or related software
New: Error 404
3. The Fax Management Tool cannot be used while any of
the NIB setting(s) are being changed.
4. The parameters of sysLocation and sysContact cannot
be set correctly using the snmp command with telnet.
5. The controller freezes when a non-existent file is
specified for rcp transmission.
6. Cannot connect to Novel NDS (GFPR #RC02010007):
The nearest NetWare Server informs the NIB of the
alternate NetWare Server address, where the NDS
replica is stored, however the NIB is unable to interpret
the message.
Change in Specification:
1. SNMP vulnerability
SNMP security vulnerabilities reported by CERT on
Feb.12, 2002 has been tested using the PROTOS c06-
snmpv1 test suite and we have verified the fixes.
-CERT: http://www.cert.org/advisories/CA-2002- 03.html
-PROTOS c06-snmpv1 test suite
:
http://www.ee.oulu.fi/research/ouspg/protos/testing/c06/snmp
v1/
2. Some reserved (unused) TCP ports that were open have
been closed, e.g. FTP.
G0585921 G 1.81
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 4-18 SM
4.6.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 NFA MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
(NETFILE)
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G0585922 C 1.42.02
When the machine sends 2 or more files to the Document
Server within 1 second (as when sending backed up files just
after the Server recovers), the first 2 documents receive the
same filename and the first is therefore erased. The software
has been modified so that file naming can be controlled at the
ms level, preventing the file from being deleted.
G0585922 D 1.42.04
NOTE: When using scanner firmware B3615901D, NFA
firmware version 2.17 or later should be used.
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. The MFP stalls when setting the I/O device from two
ScanRouter V2 Professional servers at the same time.
2. When setting the I/O device from ScanRouter V2
Professional, the fax delivery settings sometimes
disappear.
3. When a print request is issued from the Document server
at the MFP or the DeskTopBinder V2 without the correct
paper size in the tray, the MFP does not send the error to
the operation panel or DeskTopBinder V2, and the MFP
does not print the document.
G0585922 F 2.17
Minor program changes for Japanese model only.
G0585922 G 2.19
Rev. 09/2002
SOFTWARE HISTORY
SM 4-19 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
B
3
6
1
/
B
3
6
2
4.6.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 PS3 MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
(PS3)
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
G5775906 B 1.00
1. With print jobs containing mixed duplex/simplex pages,
the job comes out either all simplex or all duplex.
2. When there are different settings set for each page of the
print job (e.g. paper type, size), only one page is printed
out.
3. If an input tray is locked as the priority tray (using Print
Tray Priority) and Auto Continue has been set to 0
minutes, an SC error is displayed when printing out
more than two pages of a PS config. page.
4. The product name for Pointy and Print cannot be
changed.
G5775906 C 1.03
1. While downloading PS fonts to a machine, the correct
PS serial number cannot be output.
2. PS error occurs when the following conditions have
been met:
- Original size is the same as that loaded in the locked
tray(s).
- The paper type is not specified in the driver.
- AutoSelect Tray is selected in the driver.
3. If the machine receives an A5 print job while Error Skip
is activated and there is no A5 loaded in any tray, the
operation panel will display Load A5 Paper (LEF), even
though specification only supports A5 SEF.
4. Printing out the PS Configuration page:
Even though specification requires the machine to prompt
the operator to load A4/LT plain when there are no trays
containing plain or recycled paper, the machine does not
display the message and allows the configuration page to
be printed out onto any paper type.
G5775906 D 1.05
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE HISTORY
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-1 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
1. FIRMWARE HISTORY
1.1 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
1.1.1 B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE (BICU) FIRMWARE HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045112 C 2.15.04
Please wait message does not clear when
there is paper in between the duplex unit and
units cover.
Please wait
does not clear
When feeding HLT or A5 lengthwise from the
bypass tray, horizontal black lines appear
about 180mm from the leading edge.
Horizontal black
lines
Fax image is not output when Standard is
selected and the trays main scan registration
adjustment value (SP1002) is set at 9.0mm.
Fax image is not
output
When the value of SP1002 is between
- 8.9mm and 8.0mm, images do not appear
in the area approximately 1mm from the main-
scan leading edge.
Images do not
appear in the
main-scan
leading edge
area
B0045112 D 2.16.05
Image problem occurs only in outputs made
just after the main power is turned on (e.g.
output completely black, blurry images).
Image problem
occurs after
main power is
turned on
B0045112 E 2.16a.05
After the power is turned on, the first output
shows a black stripe at the sub-scan leading
edge.
Black stripe at
the sub-scan
leading edge
When a Finisher SC occurs, it becomes
impossible to start any other job (even those
not using the Finisher).
Finisher SC
After SP5801 (Memory Clear) is performed,
the default value for SP1001-01 is changed to
0.
Memory Clear
problem
The Tray Full display is not cleared even after:
the main power is turned off, the paper is
cleared from the tray and the main power is
turned on again.
Tray Full display
is not cleared
SP6006-05 (DF trailing edge erase
adjustment) has been newly added to ensure
that the trailing edge of the original does not
appear on the copy.
Note that this cannot be used for the Fax and
Scanner applications.
SP6006-05
added
B0045112 F 2.19.05
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-2 SM
B003/B004/B006/B007 ENGINE SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
Following a book scan job at 25-44%
reduction, the first page of a (100%) DF job is
printed out as a blank page.
Blank page of a
DF job
When a finisher jam occurs with the 1000-
sheet Finisher, sometimes the location of the
jammed paper is not displayed.
Jammed paper
location is not
displayed
B0045112 G 2.20
Fusing-related SC errors happen frequently
after SP1104-1 is changed from fusing
temperature control to phase control.
SC error at
Phase control
When the operation switch is turned Off/On,
the value of SP6017 (Sheet Through
Magnification) is reset to default (0).
Value of
SP6017 is reset
to default
B0045112 H 2.21
When fax transmission is stopped by a DF
jam or other error, the display still reads
Scanning
Scanning
message
remains after
Fax Tx
interrupted.
If the paper stops inside the bridge unit where
the sensors cannot detect it (mainframe +
mailbox configuration only), the jam location is
not displayed on the panel.
Jam location not
displayed with
mainframe +
mailbox
B0045112 K 2.26
The pressure roller deforms (temporary
change) after the machine is in Standby mode
for an extended period of time, eg 2 to 3 days.
Pressure Roller
temporarily
deforms
Fusing related SC codes (541, 542) and/or
incomplete fusing occurs when making copies
first thing in the morning (especially in cold
environments).
SC541, SC542
B0045112 L 2.28
When printing document feeder A4 SEF
originals with Create Margin onto A3 paper at
141%, black lines appear along the right edge
(along the subscan direction).
Vertical black
lines along right
edge
B0045112 M 2.29
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-3 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
1.1.2 B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 LANGUAGE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045220 A 2.06
Add Traditional Chinese (for Taiwan version).
B0045220 B 2.10
Add Simplified Chinese (for China version)
The Form Feed button is only displayed for English and
Japanese.
Wording mistake in the alert message for when the number of
pages in the printer document server exceeds the maximum (All
languages).
The following occur with the Dutch display language:
In the System Settings screen, both the Finisher and Tray 1
appear twice in the output tray selections.
The selections Yes and No were reversed in the Key
Operator Settings User Code Settings screen.
B0045220 C 2.15
Added character strings for use with the Capture function.
Translation errors (Copier):
(Copy alert): Slip Sheet Tray should be Cover Sheet Tray
(Danish).
Thin Paper should be Thick Paper (Czech).
For all languages except English, the lettering is not displayed in
the Stop button when the PS configuration page is being printed
out.
B0045220 D 2.18
The following display errors in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features have been corrected:
-(Portuguese, Finnish): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to
Bottom" were reversed.
-(German): Displays for "Top to Top" and "Top to Bottom" were
incorrect.
Dutch translation error for "Program/Change/Delete User Code".
The following display error in User Tools-Copier/Document
Server Features has been corrected:
(Czech): What should be displayed as "2 Sided: T to T2 Sided:
T to T" was incorrectly displayed as "1 Sided2 Sided: T to B".
B0045220 E 2.19
Spanish translation error for Sub TX mode Key in the Fax Initial
Settings screen:
Incorrect: Mode RX sustituta
Correct: Mode TX sustituta
The Dutch display for Rotate Sort (Copy screen) appeared in
German.
B0045220 F 2.22
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-4 SM
1.1.3 B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045102 D 3.05
Corrects the following:
SC820 occurs at power ON when the Self-
Diagnostic is performed.
SC820
A small square character appears throughout
the SP/UP and SC Error screens in machines
for Taiwan, China and Asia.
Display Text
Error
With the User Stamp function, SC955 occurs
when a copy job is made with 200 or more
originals
SC955
In UP Mode, the operation panel key for paper
sizes for China (8K, 16K) can be turned
On/Off with SP mode.
8K, 16K paper
selection
(display)
SC955 occurs when 1 set has been
programmed for Staple Sort (w/32MB+HDD).
SC955
After the machine has repeatedly stored to
and printed out documents from the HDD, it
freezes during scanning (scanner does not
turn off).
Fax document
storage error
B0045102 E 3.06
Printing not possible when sending a print job
from a PC to the Adonis-C2 via the server
(parallel cable connection). In addition, the
printer status cannot be monitored from a web
browser.
Error when
printing from the
Print Server
B0045102 F 3.07
The Rx File Transmission settings on the Up
Mode Data Printout appear as None.
Up Mode Data
printout error
In the System Settings User ID screen, if
other information is changed in addition to the
user code, the user code assumes a
completely different value.
User code
setting
The display still reads Printing even after a
jam or SMC paper end occurs.
Printing
continually
displayed
An image problem occurs when binding
margin has been set for Magazine
Image problem
with Magazine
Mode
When a FAX is sent with binding (negative
value) and image rotation, marks appear at
the end of a main scan direction line. These
lines are caused during the image processing
stage
Marks near the
trailing edge of
received FAX
images
SC955 occurs when the 32MB and HDD
are both installed.
SC955
B0045102 G
3.08.4
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-5 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The SP modes for HDD initialization (SP4911-
***) have been moved to SSP.
SP4911 moved
to SSP Mode
The SC error data (incl. logging data) from
SC-8XX was incorrect.
RSS logging
data incorrect
SC819 occurs when using Magazine Mode
without the optional memory installed.
SC819
When using an A4 2-page spread original to
print out to larger sizes (AMS) with hole-
punching selected, the machine displays
Cannot staple, even though the Staple
function has not been selected.
Cannot staple
is displayed
When printing out with APS enabled and both
Punch and Staple selected, the display reads
Cannot punch.
Cannot punch
is displayed
When entering a pm time using the 24-hour
format in Initial Settings, the machine inputs
the corresponding am time instead (e.g.
mistakenly inputs 8:00 instead of 20:00).
When entering 12:00, the machine inputs 0
instead.
Time setting
error
SP2103 has been moved from SSP to SP
mode.
SP2103 moved
to SP mode.
Marks appear when printing out with 180
degree image rotation. These lines are
caused during the image processing stage.
Marks on the
output with
image rotation
When a jam occurs in Magazine Mode with a
combined-image original, the first image is not
saved and therefore cannot be recovered
(although all successive images are
successfully recovered).
Portion of image
deleted during
jam recovery
Cannot enter SP mode after entering SSP
mode.
Not possible to
enter SP from
SSP
When a number key is pressed while the
machine is in Energy Saver Mode, the
machine comes back on line, however the
value of the number key pressed is input
(used).
Key input when
recovering from
Energy Saver
Mode
Cannot change pm to am in the System
Settings clock setting screen in machines for
North America.
Cannot change
PM to AM
(clock)
Recovery is not possible after the FCU
firmware download is interrupted. A function
has been added to make recovery possible
even after it is interrupted.
FCU download
recovery not
possible
B0045102 G
3.08.4
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-6 SM
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The Cant allocate info error message
sometimes appears when connected to a
network.
Cant allocate
info error
The DMA sometimes fails when receiving
data from the network.
DMA failure
B0045102 H
3.08.5
The printer function stalls when jobs are
frequently sent alternating among different
drivers.
Printer
application stalls
B0045102 J 3.09.1
Modified to allow use of the Capture function. Capture function
Following a Detailed Self-Diagnostic, SC819
occurs when the diagnostic report is being
printed out.
SC819
SC997 occurs when one of the MFP
application keys is pressed just after the
power is turned on.
SC997
A black line appears along the trailing edge of
DF copies under the following conditions: 1
2 job, Create Margin, A4/SEF originals and
paper.
Black line along
trailing edge
with Create
Margin
SC819 occurs under the following conditions:
Sort job, Mixed Original Sizes, optional
memory not installed.
SC819
The last page of a 1 2 odd-numbered copy
job is printed out on the opposite side when
using paper with a set front/back orientation
(e.g. letterhead, punched paper).
Last page
printed out on
opposite side
(copier)
The following display has been changed:
Old: Cannot communicate with external
server.
New: Cannot deliver the data. Check the
server. #### (#= servers IP address).
Display changed
If an error occurs during the self-diagnostic at
power On (e.g. NIB error), the machine
sometimes does not display the time on the
operation panel.
Time not
displayed at
power On.
B0045102 K 5.19.1
The GW-MAC control function has been
added.
Correction for a problem that occurred when
using 5.19.1 with certain production software
at the factory.
GW-MAC
function
B0045102 L 5.19.2
When using the memory dump function of Fax
SP mode, the memory address cannot be
entered.
Cannot enter
memory address
B0045102 M 5.21
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Program added for Korean language display
(with the addition of the Korea model).
NOTE: To display the Korean language on
models other than the Korea model, it is
necessary to install both the LCDC firmware
from service Card V2.03KOR and controller
firmware V5.22.
Add Korean
language
B0045102 N 5.22
The tray selection screen is sometimes not
displayed on the mainframe panel at Power
On with coinlock-connected machines.
Display error
w/coinlock-
connected
machines
The Key Card and Coin Lock setting screens
now appear in the System Settings.
Key Card, Coin
Lock display
B0045102 P 5.23
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B06/B007 16-8 SM
1.1.4 B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 LCDC SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045211 A 2.05
Corrected displays in French that had been
mistranslated or were missing.
Display
translation error
(French)
With proportional fonts, the pixel to the right of
the slash mark was printed blank.
Blank pixel
B0045211 B 2.06
Corrected displays in Spanish that had been
mistranslated or were missing.
Display
translation error
(Spanish)
With proportional fonts, the pixel to the right of
the slash mark was printed blank.
Blank pixel
Strings of simplified or traditional (complex)
Chinese characters contained garbled areas.
Kanji characters
not printed
correctly
B0045211 B 2.07
Modified for Taiwanese language display. Taiwanese
display
B0045211 C 2.11
Displays for the Capture function added. Capture function
displays
Except for the English display language, the
Stop button is not displayed while the PS
Configuration Page is being printed out.
Stop not
displayed during
PS Config. Page
printout
If a European language is set for the display,
the Hole punch receptacle is full (printer)
message is not displayed when the receptacle
becomes full.
Hole punch
receptacle is
full message
not displayed
Except for the Japanese and English display
languages, the Form Feed button is not
displayed.
Form Feed
button not
displayed
B0045211 C 2.19
The character "/" is not displayed in the date
field with simplified or traditional Chinese.
Display error
with simplified
and traditional
Chinese
B0045211 D 2.20
Modified for Korean language display. Korean display
B0045211 D 2.22
Spanish translation error for Sub TX mode
Key in the Fax Initial Settings screen:
Incorrect: Mode RX sustituta
Correct: Mode TX sustituta
Translation error
-FAX Settings
B0045211 E 2.23
Rev. 09/2002
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-9 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
1.1.5 B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B003/B004/B006/B007 STAMP SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
First mass production
B0045104 1.04
Rev. 09/2002
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 018 09/20/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
5-34 and 35 Updated Information (SP Mode Table)
5-61 Updated Information (Memory All Clear: SP5-801)
6-45 Updated Information (Correction for paper width)
6-75 Updated Information (Fusing Unit- Overview)
6-80 Updated Information (Overheat Protection)
7-2 Updated Information (Power Consumption)
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-34 SM
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5828* 36 Network AppleTalk
Module Setting
Sets the AppleTalk module for the network.
2: EtherTalk Phase2
37 Network NetNo Setting
(AppleTalk)
Sets the NetNo of AppleTalk network.
38 Network Object Name
Setting (AppleTalk)
Sets the object name of AppleTalk network.
39* Network AppleTalk Type
Setting
Sets the AppleTalk type for the network.
40 Network Working Zone
Setting (AppleTalk)
Sets the AppleTalk working zone for the network.
47* Network Job Analysis
Timeout Setting
(Centronics)
Sets the Centronics job analysis timeout for the
network.
[0~4200 s / 3 s / 1 sec. step]
48* Network Job Timeout
Setting (Centronics)
Sets the Centronics job timeout for the network.
[0~4200 s / 0 s / 1 sec. step]
49* Network Noise Cancel
Setting (Centronics)
Sets the noise cancel level for the network.
[4~7 / 4 / 1 clock per step]
50* Network 1284
Compatibility Setting
(Centronics)
Switches Centronics IEEE1284 compatibility
on/off for the network.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Selecting 0 disables bi-directional data
transmission.
51* Network Data Transfer
Speed Setting
(Centronics)
Sets the Centronics transfer speed for the
network.
0: SLOW, 1: FAST
If you select 0 there will be a 120 s delay from
the STP signal to the data transfer. (With 1: FAST
there is no delay.)
52* Network ECP Setting
(Centronics)
Switches the ECP setting for Centronics off/on.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
With 1 selected, SP5-828-050 must be enabled
for 1284 mode compatibility.
Network Transmission
Speed Setting
Selects the Ethernet transmission speed.
[0x00~0x03 / 0x00 / 0x01 step]
Bit1 Bit2 Speed
0 0 Auto Sense
0 1 10Base-T
1 0 100Base-Tx
53*
1 1 Auto
65,
66,
69
For Japanese models only Please do not adjust these modes, they will not
function correctly even if the settings are
changed.
5833 Job Log Transfer On/Off
Setting
Switches the job log transfer on/off for Poplar
server.
0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable)
5834 Enable Operation Panel
Image Settings
Enables and disables the operation panel read
(dump) feature. After powering on the machine,
set this option to 1 to enable this feature.
0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable)
To reset the machine to 0, the machine must be
turned off and on again. Selecting 0 for this option
without cycling the power off and on does not
restore the default setting (0).
Rev. 09/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-35 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5907* Plug & Play Sets the brand name and the production name for
Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored
in NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective or has
been replaced, these names should be registered
again.
To set the plug and play model name, enter the
model number, and then press .
5914* Application Counter
Display
Selects whether or not the total printer counter is
displayed in the UP mode.
0: Off, 1: On
5915 Mechanical Counter
Detection
Checks whether the mechanical counter inside
the inner cover is connected or not.
Display:
0: Not detected
1: Detected
2: Unknown
5918* A3/DLT Counter Display Sets the key press display for the counter key.
[0, 1 / 1 / --]
This setting has no relation to (SSP) SP5-104
A3/DLT Double Count.
5923* Flame Elimination Area
Change
Toggles between two settings that affect the
appearance of the pages for border removal and
printed facing pages: (1) Using the original area
as the allotted area, or (2) Using only the copy
paper as the allotted area.
[0, 1/ 0 / --]
0: Original area used as base
1: Copy used as the base
5958 Feed Clutch Start Timing
Adjustment
Adjusts the clutch timing to optimize the intervals
between fed sheets to reduce jams in the feed
unit.
[35 ~ 57.5 / 42.5 / 2.5mm]
5961* Large Capacity Exit Mode Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent
to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Tray finisher is
installed.
[0, 1 / 1 / ---]
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5970* Debug Serial Output DFU
5974* Cherry Server lite/ Switch
to Full
Switches writing between the Cherry lite
application provided and the optional full version.
0: Lite, 1: Full
5990 SMC Printout
1 All (Data List)
2 SP (Mode Data List)
3 User Program
4 Logging Data
5 Diagnosis Report
7 NIB Summary
21 Copier User Program
22 Scanner SP
23 Scanner User Program
Prints all of the system parameter lists for the
item selected. ( 5.1.6) Input the number for the
item that you want to print, and then press :
Execute on the touch panel.
Rev. 09/2002
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-61 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
5.1.8 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5-801
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP7-003-1: Electrical total counter value
SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP mode 5-801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules or select the appropriate number from the table below.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All modules Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
processing settings.
3 SCS (System Control
Service)/SRM
Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
5 MCS (Memory Control
Service)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP Bit SW, and printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the Scanner SP modes.
10 Network application Deletes the NFA management files and thumbnails,
and initializes the JOB login ID.
11 NCS (Network Control
Service)
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
(IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the Job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, Job History, and local storage file numbers.
4. Press Execute, and then follow the prompts on the display to complete the
procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Do the laser beam pitch adjustment (SP2-109).
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.21 Replacement and Adjustment, Copy Adjustments).
Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.21.4 Replacement and Adjustment,
touch screen calibration).
Rev. 09/2002
DRUM CHARGE
SM 6-45 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only)
The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrower than sizes
accepted by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in
the by-pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed
below in order to avoid jams and copy quality problems.
SP Mode SP Name
SP2-001-1 Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Width 216 - 297 mm
SP2-309-1 Paper Lower Width [a] Width limit: 150 mm
SP2-309-2 Paper Upper Width [b] Width limit: 216 mm
SP2-914-1 C Adjust 10V/step
SP2-914-2 C Adjust 10V/step
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray
is 200 mm, the charge roller voltage will be 1480 V + 50 V.
0 mm
SP 2-309-1
Default: 150 mm
SP 2-309-2
Default: 216 mm
297 mm
Voltage:
SP2-001-1 + SP2-914-1
Default: -1480+250 V
Voltage:
SP2-001-1 + SP2-914-2
Default: -1480+50 V
Voltage:
SP2-001-1
Default: -1480 V
B004D507.WMF
Rev. 09/2002
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
SM 6-75 B003/B004/B006/B007
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.15.1 OVERVIEW
1 Paper exit sensor 10 Cleaning roller
2 De-curler rollers 1, 2 11 Entrance guide
3 Junction gate 12 Fusing lamp (center)
4 Idle roller (duplex unit) 13 Fusing lamp (ends)
5 Fusing unit exit sensor 14 Thermistors (central/end)
6 Spring 15 Thermostat (central/end)
7 Fusing exit guide plate 16 Hot roller
8 Pressure roller 17 Hot roller strippers
9 Pressure arm 18 Exit roller
B004D601.WMF
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Rev. 09/2002
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
B003/B004/B06/B007 6-80 SM
Fusing Idling Temperature
If copies are not sufficiently fused soon after the main power switch is turned on,
fusing idling should be enabled with SP1-103-1. When fusing idling is enabled, it is
done when the temperature reaches the value of the re-load temperature. The re-
load temperature can be adjusted with SP1-105-5, 6.
In the opposite case, even if fusing idling is disabled, it is done when the
temperature at power-up 15C
The fusing idling time is as follows.
Fusing Idling Mode Temperature at
power-on
0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP1-103-1
15C or less 30 s 30 s
Higher than 15C Not done 30 s
SP1-103-2
6.15.9 OVERHEAT PROTECTION
If the hot roller temperature becomes greater than 250C, the CPU cuts off the
power to the fusing lamp, and SC543 Fusing Overheat Error will be displayed.
Even if the thermistor overheat protection fails, there is a thermostat in series with
the common ground line of the fusing lamp. If the temperature of the thermostat
reaches 180C, the thermostat opens, removing power from the fusing lamp. At the
same time, the copier stops operating. At this time, SC542 Fusing Temperature
Warm-up Error will be displayed.
Rev. 09/2002
SPECIFICATIONS
B003/B004/B006/B007 7-2 SM
NOTE: The following notations are used to describe the paper feed direction
Power Consumption
Mainframe only
Model -B003 & B006 Model -B004 & B007
Copying Less than 1.2 kW Less than 1.2 kW
Warm-up Less than 1.25 kW Less than 1.25 kW
Stand-by Less than 150 W/h Less than 170 W/h
Energy Saver Mode Ave. 115 W/h Ave. 150 W/h
Auto Off Mode Ave. 6 W/h Ave. 6 W/h
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW Less than 1.44 kW
System
Model -B003 & B006 Model -B004 & B007
Copying Less than 1.4 kW Less than 1.4 kW
Warm-up Less than 1.3 kW Less than 1.3 kW
Stand-by Less than 170 W/h Less than 195 W/h
Energy Saver Mode Ave. 118 W/h Ave. 153 W/h
Auto Off Mode Ave. 8 W/h Ave. 8 W/h
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW Less than 1.44kW
Noise Emission:
Mode Model Mainframe Only System
B003 &
B006
69 dB(A) or less
73 dB(A) or less
Copying
B004 &
B007
70 dB(A) or less 74 dB(A) or less
B003 &
B006
42 dB(A) or less
Stand-by
B004 &
B007
42 dB(A) or less
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.
Full system measurements include the ARDF, Finisher and LCT unit.
In the above stand-by condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not rotating.
Lengthwise (L) Sideways (S)
B004V501.WMF
Rev. 09/2002
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 019 09/20/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: TONER BOTTLE STORAGE AND OPENING
SYMPTOM:
When a new toner bottle is shaken and the cap is unscrewed, the inner cap pops off.
This might occur under the following conditions:
1. The toner bottle has been stored for a long time in a low temperature environment (such as an
unheated warehouse during winter).
2. The temperature around the toner bottle suddenly increases by more than 77F/25C.
3. The toner bottle is installed within 9 hours after the above condition has occurred.
CAUSE:
1. When the toner bottle is stored at a very low temperature. The air in the bottle cools and the bottle's
internal air pressure decreases.
2. Air slowly leaks into the bottle until the bottle's internal pressure equalizes with the atmospheric
pressure.
3. Later, when the bottle is moved into a warm place. (The temperature variation is over 77F/25C.) The
air in the bottle warms and the internal pressure of the bottle increases.
4. When the bottle cap is removed, internal air pressure pops off the inner cap.
Note: There is no problem for toner bottles that have been stored at normal room temperatures.
ACTION:
1. When moving toner bottles from a very low temperature environment, store the bottles at normal office
temperature for more than 1 day prior to use. This will allow the bottle's internal pressure to equalize
with the atmospheric pressure.
2. If it is not possible to take the above action, please perform the following steps prior to installing the
toner bottle.
Step 1) Hold the toner bottle upright. (Do not shake it.)
Step 2) Loosen the bottle cap (do not remove the cap completely at this time) and hold the cap over 20
seconds (to prevent the cap from coming off).
Step 3) Remove the cap and inner cap slowly. (to reduce the air pressure in the toner bottle)
Step 4) Reinsert the inner cap in the bottle and then install the bottle in the machine.
Please insure your customers are aware of this condition and follow the above guidelines.
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
G
E
N
E
R
A
L
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 020 09/20/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
B360 3-13 and 14 Updated Information (B360 - System Switch 4)
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
BIT SWITCHES
SM 3-13 B003/B004/B006/B007
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
T
a
b
l
e
s
B
3
6
0
System Switch 02 SP No. 1-101-003
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
6
7
Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6 Setting
0 0 Always disabled
0 1 User selectable
1 0 User selectable
1 1 Always enabled
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
RDS operations to take place. RDS will
automatically be locked out again after a certain
time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
System Switch 03 SP No. 1-101-004
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Length of time that RDS is
temporarily switched on when
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to User selectable
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
Switch 02 are set to User selectable.
The default setting is 24 hours.
System Switch 04 SP No. 1-101-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Printing dedicated tx
parameters on Quick/Speed
Dial Lists
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
each).
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 Memory file transfer operation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
If the machine is unable to print fax messages due
to a mechanical problem, set this bit to 0 to transfer
all messages in memory (including confidential rx
messages) to another terminal for printout.
Transfer procedure for key operators
1. Press User Tools/Counter, then Facsimile
Settings, and finally Key Operator Tools.
2. Select Memory File Transfer and specify a
destination for the machine to transfer all the files.
3. Press Start.
Normally this should be reset to 1 after transfer,
otherwise anyone who knows how to enter key-
operator mode can transfer confidential files.
However, the bit can be left at 0 if the customers
key-operators wish to transfer the files themselves
(this machine does not support confidential rx).
Continued
Rev. 09/2002
BIT SWITCHES
B003/B004/B006/B007 3-14 SM
System Switch 04 SP No. 1-101-005
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
6 G3 CSI/G4 Terminal ID
programming
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: The CSI and Terminal ID must be set from:
User Tools Key Operator Tools Program ISDN-G3
Line.
Note: The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a
Group 4 option is installed.
7 Telephone line type
programming
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or pulse
dial) must be set from:
User Tools Key Operator Tools Select Dial/Push
Phone.
System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 06 SP No. 1-101-007
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0
to
7
Margin setting for Create Margin
Transmission
71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
reduction ratio when the user uses the Create Margin
Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)
System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 09 SP No. 1-101-010
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Addition of image data from
confidential transmissions on the
transmission result report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first page of
confidential messages will be printed on transmission
result reports.
1 Inclusion of communications on
the Journal when no image data
was exchanged.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0: Communications that reached phase C (message
tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1: Communications that reached phase A (call setup)
of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal. This will
include telephone calls.
2 Automatic error report printout
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed
communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the
error report
0: No 1: Yes
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
4 Not used Do not change the setting.
5 Power failure report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
6 Conditions for printing the
protocol dump list
0: Print for all communications
1: Print only when there is a
communication error
This switch becomes effective only when system
switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
dump list only for communications with errors.
7 Priority given to various types of
remote terminal ID when printing
reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number
1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI
> CSI
This bit determines which set of priorities the machine
uses when listing remote terminal names on reports.
In G4 communication, G4_TID (Terminal ID) is used
instead of RTI or CSI.
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
Quick/Speed Dial number.
Rev. 09/2002
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 021 09/20/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
3-73 Updated Information (Hard Disk/Controller Board)
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
HARD DISK/CONTROLLER BOARD
SM 3-73 B003/B004/B006/B007
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
&
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
3.20 HARD DISK/CONTROLLER
BOARD
1. Left rear corner cover ( 3.8.1)
2. Expansion spacer [A] ( x2)
3. Controller board [B] ( x2)
NOTE: Use the wire handle to slide the
HDD out of the expansion box.
4. Remove the NVRAM from the old
Controller Board and install it on the new
board.
5. HDD unit bracket [C] ( x3, x2)
6. HDD unit [D] ( x4)
NOTE: Work carefully to avoid
dropping or hitting the HDD.
B004R104.WMF
B004R971.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Rev. 09/2002
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - 022 10/09/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: BACKGROUND ON OPERATOR SIDE OF COPIES
SYMPTOM:
Toner adheres to the operator side of the development roller.
CAUSE:
The gap between the developer roller and the drum is too narrow on the operator side of the machine.
SOLUTION:
The specification of the doctor gap has been changed from 0. 40 0.05mm to 0.38 0.03mm.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0043100 B0043101 Development Roller Assembly 1 1 45 9
NOTE: The new development roller assembly (B0043101) is only necessary for machines exhibiting the
above symptoms. All machines not exhibiting this symptom can use the original development
roller assembly (B0043100).
UNITS AFFECTED:
The Serial Number cut-in information is not available at time of this publication.
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
P
A
R
T
S
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 022 REISSUE + 01/27/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4502/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: BACKGROUND ON OPERATOR SIDE OF COPIES
SYMPTOM:
Toner adheres to the operator side of the development roller.
CAUSE:
The gap between the developer roller and the drum is too narrow on the operator side of the machine.
SOLUTION:
The specification of the doctor gap has been changed from 0. 40 0.05 mm to 0.38 0.03 mm.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0043100 B0043101 Development Roller Assembly 1 1 45 9
NOTE: The new development roller assembly (B0043101) is only necessary for machines exhibiting the
above symptoms. All machines not exhibiting this symptom can use the original development
roller assembly (B0043100).
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style
Development Roller Assembly installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502 H7026900639
Gestetner 4502 H7126900507
Ricoh AFICIO 1035 H7026802059
Ricoh AFICIO 1045 H7126900837
Savin 2535 H7026900639
Savin 2545 H7126900507
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
P
A
R
T
S
+
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - 023 11/06/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: PAPER FEED UNIT
GENERAL:
The following parts have been modified to ensure that the separation roller and feed roller separate from one
another when the tray is pulled out, preventing any damage to the paper.
The following part corrections are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
Changes:
Tension Spring: Tension changed.
Pressure Lever: Pawl added.
One-Way Clutch (Feed Lever): Lever arm added to help rotate shaft when released.
Release Lever: Shape changed to support Feed Lever.
Link Lever: Position of spring hook changed.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
P
A
R
T
S
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 023
Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0042750 G0652750 Paper Feed Unit 1 1 31 38
AA060864 AA060908 Tension Spring 1 3 31 23
A2322774 G0652774 Pressure Lever 1 3 31 21
A2322776 G0652776 Release Lever 1 3 31 15
AA083014 - One-way Clutch 1-0 3 31 29
- G0652767 Lever - Feed 0-1 - 31 29*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the updated
parts installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502
Savin 2535
H7026200472
Gestetner 4502
Savin 2545
H7126200336
Savin 2235 H7020100001
Savin 2245 H7120100001
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7026201397
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7126200616
Ricoh Aficio 1035G H7020100032
Ricoh Aficio 1045G H7120100016
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 023 REISSUE + 01/27/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: PAPER FEED UNIT
GENERAL:
The following parts have been modified to ensure that the separation roller and feed roller separate from one
another when the tray is pulled out, preventing any damage to the paper.
The following part corrections are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
Changes:
Tension Spring: Tension changed.
Pressure Lever: Pawl added.
One-Way Clutch (Feed Lever): Lever arm added to help rotate shaft when released.
Release Lever: Shape changed to support Feed Lever.
Link Lever: Position of spring hook changed.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
P
A
R
T
S
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 023 REISSUE + ++ +
Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0042750 G0652750 Paper Feed Unit 1 1 31 38
AA060864 AA060908 Tension Spring 1 3 31 23
A2322774 G0652774 Pressure Lever 1 3 31 21
A2322775 G0652775 Link Lever 1 3 31 22
A2322776 G0652776 Release Lever 1 3 31 15
AA083014 - One-way Clutch 1-0 3 31 29
- G0652767 Lever - Feed 0-1 - 31 29*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the updated
parts installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502
Savin 2535
H7026200472
Gestetner 4502
Savin 2545
H7126200336
Savin 2235 H7020100001
Savin 2245 H7120100001
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7026201397
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7126200616
Ricoh Aficio 1035G H7020100032
Ricoh Aficio 1045G H7120100016
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
+
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - 024 11/11/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
PAGES:
5-32 Updated Information
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B003/B004/B006/B007 5-32 SM
SP5 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
5508* 2* Continuous Jam
Occurrence
Switches the control call on/off for the occurrence
of consecutive jams. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select 1, the alarm will sound if 5
consecutive jams occur in the copier.
3* Continuous Door Open Switches the control call on/off for the cover open
alarm. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select 1, the alarm will sound if the door
remains open for 15 minutes.
5801* Memory Clear Resets all correction data for process control and
all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values. (! 5.18)
To execute, hold down $ for over 3 seconds,
and then turn the copier off and on again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or
after the copier has malfunctioned due to a
damaged NVRAM.
5802* Printer Free Run Performs a free run. The scanner scans once and
the printer prints for the number of copies
requested.
To perform the free run, after selecting 1, press
the Copy Window to enter copy mode, input the
number of copies, and then press the Start key.
To stop the free run, press *.
0: Off, 1: On
5803 Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches. (! 5.1.4)
5804 Output Check Turns on the electrical components individually
for test purposes. (! 5.1.5)
5807 Option Connection Check
1 ARDF
2 Bank (Paper Tray Unit)
3 LCT
4 Finisher (1000-sheet,
Two-Tray finisher)
Checks the connectors to the optional peripheral
devices. Execution will return either a 1 or 0:
1: Device connected correctly.
2: Device not connected correctly.
5811* 1* Machine Serial Number Use to input the machine serial number. This is
normally done at the factory.
If you want to know the serial number, print the
system parameter list. Press ! and then input
A.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
1* Service Tel. Number Use this to input the telephone number of the
service representative. This number is displayed
when a service call condition occurs.
Press the ! key to input a pause. Press the
Clear modes key to delete the telephone
number.
Rev. 11/2002
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - 025 01/16/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SKEWED IMAGE - SCANNER SUPPORT ARM
SYMPTOMS:
The edges of the copies are in the shape of a
parallelogram from the ADF or Platen Mode.
Light copy quality on the operator side of the
copies.
Background or shadowing on operator side of the
copies.
CAUSES:
The ADF was not aligned properly when attached to the copier.
An excessive load has been placed on the Scanner Stand, causing it to bend.
SOLUTIONS:
Adjustments:
ADF Position Adjustment
Scanner Height Adjustment
New Parts Available:
The scanner arm assembly (B0821380) is now available as a service part and has been reinforce by
changing the guide plate, supporting plate, and the scanner arm unit.
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
P
A
R
T
S
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 025
Page 2 of 4
ADF Position Adjustment:
1. Remove the screw [A] that
secures the Right ADF hinge to
the scanner.
2. Remove the black seal [B] from
the right ADF hinge.
3. Insert the screw [A] into the
slotted hole, but do not tighten it
yet.
4. Adjust the ADF position [C] until
the skew disappears.
5. Tighten the screws to fix the
ADF in place.
Scanner Height Adjustment:
NOTE: The scanner height adjustment
can only be performed on
machines that have the new style
scanner support arm installed.
Examining the front securing
screw slot [B] can identify the new
style scanner arm. The screw slot
will be elongated.
1. Remove the two screws that secure the
scanner unit.
2. Place the washer(s) [A] on the scanner
stand (underneath the scanner leg) as
shown in the illustration
NOTE: Washer Part Number 08075056, with a thickness of 0.5mm.
3. Replace the two screws and tighten.
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 025
Page 3 of 4
Scanner Stand Arm Assembly Replacement:
To reinforce the scanner arm, the thickness of the guide plate has been increased and the shapes of the
supporting plate and scanner arm unit have been changed. The scanner arm assembly (B0821380) is now
available as a service part.
1. Remove the scanner unit (Refer to B003/B004/B006/B007 Service Manual page 1-23).
2. Remove the scanner stand arm assembly (Refer to B003/B004/B006/B007 Service Manual page 1-27).
3. Replace the scanner stand arm assembly with the modified scanner arm assembly (B0821380).
4. Secure the stand scanner arm assembly and install the covers.
5. Reinstall the scanner unit.
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
--- B0821380 Scanner Arm Assy 1 1 13 37*
B0041038 B0046202 Guide Plate Scanner Unit 1 3/S 13 27
B0041048 B0046204 Supporting Plate Scanner Unit 1 3/S 13 26
B0041049 B0046205 Scanner Arm Unit 1 3/S 13 25
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued
37
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 025
Page 4 of 4
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new
scanner arm assembly installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502
Savin 2535
H7026600580
Gestetner 4502
Savin 2545
H7126600512
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H7026501390
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H7126500883
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and
NEW machines.
2
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 026 01/22/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL INSERT
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
M
A
N
U
A
L
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
16-7 Updated Information (Controller Software Modification History)
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SM 16-7 B003/B004/B006/B007
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
H
i
s
t
o
r
y
B003/B004/B006/B007 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MODIFICATION
HISTORY
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION Title FIRMWARE
LEVEL
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Program added for Korean language display
(with the addition of the Korea model).
NOTE: To display the Korean language on
models other than the Korea model, it is
necessary to install both the LCDC firmware
from service Card V2.03KOR and controller
firmware V5.22.
Add Korean
language
B0045102 N 5.22
The tray selection screen is sometimes not
displayed on the mainframe panel at Power
On with coinlock-connected machines.
Display error
w/coinlock-
connected
machines
The Key Card and Coin Lock setting screens
now appear in the System Settings.
Key Card, Coin
Lock display
B0045102 P 5.23
An SC is cleared with power off/on, however
the RSS error flag is not cleared, causing the
S. Sense remote monitoring system to
incorrectly detect a machine error condition.
RSS flag not
cleared
The message for the Key Counter/Key Card
mis-set or User Code input screen is not
displayed correctly.
Message display
error
The page number is not displayed correctly on
1-to-2 copies made with Designate Chapter
mode.
Page numbering
error
A failure occurs with the cluster recovery
processing for a certain system area after an
SC863 (HDD error), and the SC cannot be
cleared with power off/on.
SC863 (HDD
error)
If an original is scanned for preset job while a
job is in progress, and this job in progress is
stopped due to such conditions as a Paper
End, the preset job is cleared.
Preset job
canceled
B0045102 Q 5.26
Rev. 01/2003
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 - 027 01/31/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: ADD TONER CONDITION
SYMPTOMS:
Add toner condition will not clear
Intermittent add toner condition
CAUSE:
The mylars located on the toner bottle
assembly cover (A2323240) detaches, this
is caused by insufficient glue applied during
assembly and the unsmooth surfaces were
the mylars are attached.
SOLUTION:
A check will be added during assembly to confirm the mylars are attached properly. The mylars (A2323243)
will also be made available as a service part.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B003/B004/B006/B007 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the mylars
checked during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 3502
Savin 2535
H70272XXXXX
Gestetner 4502
Savin 2545
H71272XXXXX
Ricoh Aficio 1035 H70272XXXXX
Ricoh Aficio 1045 H71272XXXXX
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
P
A
R
T
S
Mylars
Mylars
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 027
Page 2 of 2
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all B003/B004/B006/B007 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A2323243 Mylar 0-4 35 14*
*
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 028 02/12/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: FIRMWARE MODIFICATION - PRINTER
GENERAL:
The latest firmware version can be downloaded at the Technology Solution Center FTP Site
http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations.
NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about the
FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM/Flash Card Exchange program.
B003/B004/B006/B007 PRINTER FIRMWARE MODIFICATION
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
SERIAL
NUMBER
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Line spacing command lochEsc&l#Dloch
causes incorrect output.
2. Euro currency symbol is not printed when
using the PS driver.
3. Slow Printing from AutoCAD
4. Bold may not work on some TrueType fonts.
5. With some bolded fonts, text characters appear
too thick, removing the fine detail.
6. When using bold fonts, short lines may appear
around text characters.
7. PJL Echo does not respond correctly.
8. PS print file is printed as text.
9. CAD print files:
- Increased the number of available pen
selections from 8 to 256 when BitSw #3-3 is
ON.
- Modified so that the "null" character is ignored
when it is included in HP/GL2 data to increase
speed.
- The status flag for the bold selection
command is refreshed when it is selected for
HP/GL2 data.
B3615902 J Oct. 02
production
Ver. 3.09
...continued
Continued
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
F
I
R
M
W
A
R
E
Tech Service Bulletin No. B003/B004/B006/B007 028
Page 2 of 2
B003/B004/B006/B007 PRINTER FIRMWARE MODIFICATION
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
SERIAL
NUMBER
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Firmware modified to correct the following:
1. Response to PJL INFO CONFIG command
does not include serial number.
2. Incorrect output when printing document
through Port 9100.
3. The Form Lines setting (PCL menu) is
changed when the machine is rebooted.
4. If a PCL print job is executed after a User Tool
function is used, the operation panel may
continue displaying Printing...".
5. Supports mixed binding orientations with
duplex jobs using cover sheets.
6. When using INIFICO, printing may halt during
file processing.
B3615902 K Dec. 02
production
Ver. 3.10
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 029 02/12/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: FIRMWARE MODIFICATION NCS (NIB)
GENERAL:
The latest firmware version can be downloaded at the Technology Solution Center FTP Site
http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations.
NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about the
FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM/Flash Card Exchange program.
B003/B004/B006/B007 NCS (NIB) FIRMWARE MODIFICATION
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
SERIAL
NUMBER
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Change in Specification:
1. Changed the default setting of DHCP to ON.
NOTE: When upgrading to this version, the DHCP
setting will only change to ON if it is manually
set or a factory default clear is performed after
update.
2. TCP ports can be opened/closed.
NOTE: After performing the setting to disable
HTTP, it is not possible to access the target
device through the web browser. To change
this setting, use telnet to open HTTP. When the
telnet port is disabled, it is necessary to clear
the network settings (Memory Clear for NCS)
to open the telnet port.
G0585921H Nov. 02
production
Ver. 1.82
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
F
I
R
M
W
A
R
E
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B003/B004/B006/B007 030 02/12/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 3502/4002/3502P/4502P
RICOH AFICIO 1035/1045/1035P/1045P
SAVIN 2535/2545/2535P/2545P
SUBJECT: FIRMWARE MODIFICATION PS3
GENERAL:
The latest firmware version can be downloaded at the Technology Solution Center FTP Site
http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations.
NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about the
FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM/Flash Card Exchange program.
B003/B004/B006/B007 PS3 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
SERIAL
NUMBER
FIRMWARE
VERSION
The following items have been corrected:
1. Euro currency symbol is not printed
2. The printer controller freezes when printing
from Unix Acrobat.
3. The printing speed of a PS job slows down
after a PS3 job is reset.
4. When data is sent selected for 3-hole punching
to the EU model, which only supports 2 & 4-
hole punching, two holes are punched in the
paper. Software modified so that no holes are
punched when this data is sent.
5. Many "Punch Cancelled" messages may be
displayed in the Summary Error Log after
sending data to which punching could not be
applied.
6. Lines sometimes appear in (what should be)
blank areas.
7. PS print file is printed as text.
G5775906 E Oct. 02
production
1.06
The following items have been corrected:
1. Slow Printing from AutoCAD.
G5775906 F Nov. 02
production
1.07
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
F
I
R
M
W
A
R
E
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N TECHNI CAL SERVI CE BULLETI N
BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: BULLETI N NUMBER: B376 - 001 B376 - 001 B376 - 001 B376 - 001 05/ 20/ 2002 05 / 20/ 2002 05 / 20/ 2002 05 / 20/ 2002
APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL APPLI CABLE MODEL: :: :
GESTETNER GESTETNER GESTETNER GESTETNER One-Bin Finisher for 3 502/ 45 02/ 3 5 02P/ 45 02P 3 502/ 45 02/ 3 5 02P/ 45 02P 3 502/ 45 02/ 3 5 02P/ 45 02P 3 502/ 45 02/ 3 5 02P/ 45 02P
RI COH RI COH RI COH RI COH One-Bin Finisher for AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P AFI CI O 103 5 / 1045 / 103 5 P/ 1045 P
SAVI N SAVI N SAVI N SAVI N One-Bin Finisher for 2535/ 254 5/ 2535P/ 2545P 2535/ 254 5/ 2535P/ 2545P 2535/ 254 5/ 2535P/ 2545P 2535/ 254 5/ 2535P/ 2545P
SUBJECT: MIDDLE LEFT GUIDE PLATE
GENERAL:
To further ensure that the middle Left Guide Plate stays securely attached, the width of the boss has been
increased from 6mm to 9mm.
The following part correction is being issued for all B376 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A6842211 B3762211 Left Guide Plate - Middle 1-1 1 5 20
UNITS AFFECTED:
All one-bin finishers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Left Guide
Plate - Middle installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner One-Bin Finisher H7810500001
Ricoh One-Bin Finisher H7810500001
Savin One-Bin Finisher H7810500001
N
o
t
e
:
T
h
i
s
c
o
p
y
i
s
i
n
t
e
n
d
e
d
a
s
a
m
a
s
t
e
r
o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
f
o
r
r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
b
u
l
l
e
t
i
n
s
.
!
P
A
R
T
S
CONTROL NO 073ALL
You might also like
- Ford AOD Transmissions: Rebuilding and Modifying the AOD, AODE and 4R70WFrom EverandFord AOD Transmissions: Rebuilding and Modifying the AOD, AODE and 4R70W4.5/5 (7)
- Made to Serve: How Manufacturers can Compete Through Servitization and Product Service SystemsFrom EverandMade to Serve: How Manufacturers can Compete Through Servitization and Product Service SystemsNo ratings yet
- B125 Service Manual: Ricoh Group CompaniesNo ratings yetB125 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies431 pages
- Guidelines for Auditing Process Safety Management SystemsFrom EverandGuidelines for Auditing Process Safety Management SystemsNo ratings yet
- Aficio 3025 3025sp 3025spf 3030 303sp 3030spf b205 SMNo ratings yetAficio 3025 3025sp 3025spf 3030 303sp 3030spf b205 SM812 pages
- B135/B138 Service Manual: Ricoh Group CompaniesNo ratings yetB135/B138 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies869 pages
- B205 - B209 - D007 - D009 SM Ricoh 3025 SM100% (1)B205 - B209 - D007 - D009 SM Ricoh 3025 SM881 pages
- Manual de Servicio Aficio 1515 (Ingles) 1No ratings yetManual de Servicio Aficio 1515 (Ingles) 1705 pages
- B022/B027 Service Manual: Ricoh Group CompaniesNo ratings yetB022/B027 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies733 pages
- B010 Service Manual: Ricoh Group CompaniesNo ratings yetB010 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies323 pages
- Service Manual B039/B040/B043/B120: Ricoh Group CompaniesNo ratings yetService Manual B039/B040/B043/B120: Ricoh Group Companies513 pages
- Torqueflite A-727 Transmission Handbook HP1399: How to Rebuild or Modify Chrysler's A-727 Torqueflite for All ApplicationsFrom EverandTorqueflite A-727 Transmission Handbook HP1399: How to Rebuild or Modify Chrysler's A-727 Torqueflite for All ApplicationsNo ratings yet
- Arduino Playground: Geeky Projects for the Experienced MakerFrom EverandArduino Playground: Geeky Projects for the Experienced MakerNo ratings yet
- Handbook of Troubleshooting Plastics Processes: A Practical GuideFrom EverandHandbook of Troubleshooting Plastics Processes: A Practical Guide4/5 (1)
- FAR/AIM Study Guide Complete Review for the ASA Federal Aviation Regulations and Aeronautical Information for PilotsFrom EverandFAR/AIM Study Guide Complete Review for the ASA Federal Aviation Regulations and Aeronautical Information for PilotsNo ratings yet
- FE Mechanical Exam Prep Complete Study Guide for the Fundamentals of Engineering with Practice Questions and Proven Strategies to Conquer the ExamFrom EverandFE Mechanical Exam Prep Complete Study Guide for the Fundamentals of Engineering with Practice Questions and Proven Strategies to Conquer the ExamNo ratings yet
- ASE A1-A9 Exam Prep Comprehensive Study Guide with Proven Practice Questions to Ace the Automotive Service Excellence ExamsFrom EverandASE A1-A9 Exam Prep Comprehensive Study Guide with Proven Practice Questions to Ace the Automotive Service Excellence ExamsNo ratings yet